- Industrial & lab equipment
- Electrical equipment & supplies
- Power conditioning
- Power adapters & inverters
- WEG
- CFW-09
- User's manual
advertisement
Motors | Automation | Energy | Transmission & Distribution | Coatings
Frequency Inverter
Convertidor de Frecuencia
Inversor de Frequência
Frequenzumrichter
Variateur de Vitesse
Преодразователь частоты
Frequentie regelaar
Frekvensomvandlare
CFW-09
User's Manual
Manual del Usuario
Manual do Usuário
Bedienungsanleitung
Manuel d'utilisation
Руководство пользователя
Gebruikers handleiding
Användarinstruktioner
FREQUENCY
INVERTER
MANUAL
Series:
CFW-09
Software:
version 4.4X
Language:
English (USA)
Document:
0899.5694 / 04
ATTENTION!
It is very important to check if the inverter software version is the same as indicated above.
01/2011
Summary of Revisions
The table below describes all revisions made to this manual.
Revision
1
2
2
3
4
Description
First Edition.
General revision and update of the software version (2.6X to 3.7X):
Change on the maximum value of P156 and P401 for some models; Change on the maximum value of P331; Change on the factory default value of P404.
New functions;
Incorporation of the Mechanical Brake Logic for cranes, Load Detection Logic and addition of option “Indication of Torque Current Polarity” at the DOx and RLx outputs; VVW Control; DC
Braking for VVW and Sensorless; Flying Start function for the Sensorless Control; support for
EtherNet/IP communication board; read/write function for the PLC board parameters through
Modbus; Indication of the Analog Outputs values in read only parameters P027 to P030;
Simultaneous indication of the speed and current in parameter P070; P313 = 4 (Changes to
LOCAL mode keeping the commands);Regulation of the maximum torque current through options AI1+AI2 and AI2+AI3; function F > Fx; function ready 2.
Updating of the software version to V4.0X.
Updating of the parameters P309 and P313.
Addition of new parameters: P335, P336, P337, P338, P340, P341, P342, P343, P344 and P346.
New options for fault Reset.
General revision.
Update of software version to V4.4x;
New incompatibilities for E24;
Fieldbus operation with mechanical brake logic;
Special function for mechanical brake logic in parameter P203.
Section
-
-
Refer to items I, 6, 7 and 8
-
-
Summary
Quick Parameter Reference, Fault and Status Messages
I. Parameters ....................................................................................... 09
II.Fault Messages .................................................................................... 33
III. Other Messages ................................................................................. 34
CHAPTER
1
Safety Notices
1.1 Safety Notices in the Manual ............................................................. 35
1.2 Safety Notices on the Product ........................................................... 35
1.3 Preliminary Recommendations .......................................................... 35
CHAPTER
2
General Information
2.1 About this Manual .............................................................................. 37
2.2 Software Version ................................................................................ 37
2.3 About the CFW-09 ............................................................................. 37
2.4 CFW-09 Identification Label and Code Number .................................. 39
2.5 Receiving and Storage ....................................................................... 41
CHAPTER
3
Installation and Connection
3.1 Mechanical Installation ...................................................................... 42
3.1.1 Environment Conditions ............................................................... 42
3.1.2 Dimensional of CFW-09 ............................................................... 42
3.1.3 Mounting Specifications ............................................................... 43
3.1.3.1 Mounting Inside a Panel..................................................... 44
3.1.3.2 Mounting on Surface .......................................................... 45
3.1.3.3 Mounting with the Heatsink Through a Surface .................. 46
3.1.4 Keypad (HMI) and Cover Removal................................................ 48
3.2 Electrical Installation.......................................................................... 49
3.2.1 Power/Grounding Terminals ......................................................... 49
3.2.2 Location of the Power/Grounding/Control Connections ................ 51
3.2.3 Rated Voltage Selection .............................................................. 53
3.2.4 Power/Grounding Wiring and Fuses ............................................ 54
3.2.5 Power Connections ..................................................................... 57
3.2.5.1AC Input Connection ........................................................... 57
3.2.5.2 Output Connections ............................................................ 58
3.2.5.3 Grounding Connections ....................................................... 58
3.2.5.4 IT Networks ......................................................................... 59
3.2.6 Control Wiring.............................................................................. 61
3.2.7 Typical Terminal Connections ...................................................... 64
3.3 European EMC Directive - Requirements for Conforming Installations 67
3.3.1 Installation ................................................................................... 67
3.3.2 Epcos Filters ............................................................................... 68
3.3.3 Schaffner Filters........................................................................... 71
3.3.4 EMC Filter Characteristics........................................................... 74
Summary
CHAPTER
4
Keypad (HMI) Operation
4.1 Description of the Keypad .................................................................. 86
4.2 Use of the Keypad (HMI).................................................................... 88
4.2.1 Keypad Operation........................................................................ 88
4.2.2 "Read-Only" Variables and Status ............................................... 89
4.2.3 Parameter Viewing and Programming ......................................... 90
CHAPTER
5
Start-up
5.1 Pre-Power Checks ............................................................................ 93
5.2 Initial Power-up ................................................................................. 93
5.3 Start-up ............................................................................................. 98
5.3.1 Type of Control: V/F 60 Hz - Operation via Keypad (HMI) ............ 99
5.3.2 Type of Control: Sensorless or Vector with Encoder
(Operation Via Keypad (HMI)) .....................................................102
5.3.3 Type of Control: VVW - Keypad Operation .................................109
CHAPTER
6
Detailed Parameter Description
6.1 Access and Read Only Parameters - P000 to P099 ......................... 118
6.2 Regulation Parameters - P100 to P199.............................................124
6.3 Configuration Parameters - P200 to P399 .........................................147
6.3.1 Parameters for CraneApplications and for Torque Master/Slave
Function - P351 to P368 .......................................................... 208
6.4 Motor Parameters - P400 to P499 ....................................................214
6.5 Special Functions Parameters - P500 to P699 .................................220
6.5.1 PID Regulator .............................................................................220
6.5.2 Description .................................................................................220
CHAPTER
7
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
7.1 Faults and Possible Causes .............................................................228
7.2 Troubleshooting ................................................................................233
7.3 Contacting WEG...............................................................................235
7.4 Preventive Maintenance ....................................................................235
7.4.1 Cleaning Instructions ..................................................................236
7.5 Spare Part List ..................................................................................237
CHAPTER
8
CFW-09 Options and Accessories
8.1 I/O Expansion Boards .......................................................................248
8.1.1 EBA (I/O Expansion Board A) .....................................................248
Summary
8.1.2 EBB (I/O Expansion Board B) ....................................................251
8.1.3 EBE ............................................................................................254
8.2 Incremental Encoder .........................................................................254
8.2.1 EBA/EBB Boards .......................................................................254
8.2.2 EBC1 Board................................................................................256
8.3 Keypad with LEDs Only....................................................................258
8.4 Remote Keypad and Cables .............................................................258
8.5 Blank Covers ....................................................................................262
8.6 RS-232 PC Communication Kit ........................................................262
8.7 Line Reactor/DC Bus Choke .............................................................263
8.7.1 Application Criteria ......................................................................264
8.7.2 DC Link Inductor Built in .............................................................266
8.8 Load Reactor ....................................................................................267
8.9 RFI Filter ...........................................................................................267
8.10 Dynamic Braking ............................................................................268
8.10.1 DB Resistor Sizing ..................................................................268
8.10.2 Installation ...............................................................................270
8.10.3 Dynamic Braking Module-DBW-01 and DBW-02.....................271
8.10.3.1 DBW-01 and DBW-02 Identification Label ...................272
8.10.3.2 Mechanical Installation ................................................272
8.10.3.3 Installation/Connection ................................................275
8.11 Through Surface Mounting Kit .........................................................277
8.12Fieldbus ...........................................................................................277
8.12.1 Installation of the Fieldbus Kit .................................................278
8.12.2 Profibus DP .............................................................................281
8.12.3 Profibus DP-V1 .......................................................................283
8.12.4 DeviceNet ................................................................................284
8.12.5 DeviceNet Drive Profile ............................................................286
8.12.6 EtherNet/IP .............................................................................287
8.12.7 Use to the Fieldbus/Related Parameters of the CFW-09 .........294
8.12.7.1 Variables Read from the Inverter ..................................294
8.12.7.2 Variables Written in the Inverter ...................................296
8.12.7.3 Fault Indications ..........................................................298
8.12.7.4 Addressing of the CFW-09 Variables in the
Fieldbus Devices .........................................................299
8.13 Serial Communication .....................................................................300
8.13.1 Introduction .............................................................................300
8.13.2 Interfaces Description ..............................................................301
8.13.2.1 RS-485 .........................................................................301
8.13.2.2 RS-232 .........................................................................302
8.13.3 Protocol Definitions .................................................................302
8.13.3.1 Used Terms ..................................................................302
8.13.3.2 Parameters/Variables Resolution..................................303
8.13.3.3 Characters Format........................................................303
8.13.3.4 Protocol ........................................................................303
8.13.3.5 Execution and Telegram Test .......................................305
8.13.3.6 Telegram Sequence ......................................................306
8.13.3.7 Variable Code ...............................................................306
8.13.4 Telegram Examples .................................................................306
8.13.5 Variables and Errors of the Serial Communication ..................307
8.13.5.1 Basic Variables ............................................................307
8.13.5.2 Examples of Telegrams with Basic Variables ...............310
8.13.5.3 Parameters Related to the Serial Communication ........ 311
8.13.5.4 Errors Related to the Serial Communication .................312
Summary
8.13.6 Times for Read/Write of Telegrams..........................................312
8.13.7 Physical Connection of the RS-232 and RS-485 Interface ........313
8.14Modbus-RTU....................................................................................314
8.14.1 Introduction in the Modbus-RTU Protocol ................................314
8.14.1.1 Transmission Modes ....................................................314
8.14.1.2 Message Structure in RTU Mode ..................................314
8.14.2 Operation of the CFW-09 in the Modbus-RTU Network ...........316
8.14.2.1 Interface RS-232 and RS-485 Description.....................316
8.14.2.2 Inverter Configuration in the Modbus-RTU Network ......317
8.14.2.3 Access to the Inverter Data...........................................317
8.14.3 Detailed Function Description ...................................................320
8.14.3.1 Function 01 - Read Coils ..............................................321
8.14.3.2 Function 03 - Read Holding Register ............................321
8.14.3.3 Function 05 - Write Single Coil .....................................322
8.14.3.4 Function 06 - Write Single Register ..............................323
8.14.3.5 Function 15 - Write Multiple Coils.................................324
8.14.3.6 Function 16 - Write Multiple Registers .........................325
8.14.3.7 Function 43 - Read Device Identification .......................326
8.14.4 Communication Errors .............................................................327
8.14.4.1 Error Messages ............................................................327
8.15 KIT KME (for Extractable Mounting)................................................329
8.16 CFW-09 SHARK NEMA 4X .............................................................330
8.16.1 Enclosure Specifications .........................................................330
8.16.2 Mechanical Installation ............................................................330
8.16.3 Electrical Installation ...............................................................332
8.16.4 Closing the Inverter ..................................................................332
8.16.5 How to Specify ........................................................................333
8.17 CFW-09 Supplied by the DC Link - Line HD ...................................333
8.18 CFW-09 RB Regenerative Converter ...............................................333
8.19 PLC Board ......................................................................................335
CHAPTER 9
Technical Specification
9.1 Power Data ......................................................................................336
9.1.1 Power Supply Specifications ......................................................336
9.1.2 220-230 V Power Supply ............................................................337
9.1.3 380-480 V Power Supply ............................................................337
9.1.4 500-600 V Power Supply ............................................................338
9.1.5 660-690 V Power Supply ............................................................340
9.2 Electronics/General Data ..................................................................343
9.2.1 Applicable Standards ..................................................................344
9.3 Optional Devices ...............................................................................345
9.3.1 I/O Expansion Board EBA ..........................................................345
9.3.2 I/O Expansion Board EBB ..........................................................345
9.4 Mechanical Data ...............................................................................346
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
P022
P023
P024
P025
P026
P027
P028
P029
P014
P015
P016
P017
P018
P019
P020
P021
P030
P040
P042
P043
P044
QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE, FAULT AND STATUS MESSAGES
Software: V4.4X
Application:
CFW-09 Model:
Serial Number:
Responsible:
Date: /
I. Parameters
/ .
Parameters
P000
P001
P002
P003
P004
P005
P006
P007
P009
P010
P012
P013
Function Adjustable Range
Parameter Access
READ ONLY PARAMETERS
Speed Reference
Motor Speed
Motor Current
DC Link Voltage
Motor Frequency
Inverter Status
0 to 999
P001 to P099
0.0 to P134
0.0 to P134
0.0 to 2600
0.0 to 1235
0.0 to 1020 rdy run
Motor Voltage
Motor Torque
Output Power
Sub
Exy
0 to 800
0.0 to 150.0
0.0 to 3276
Digital Inputs DI1 ... DI8 Status 0 = Inactive (Open)
1 = Active (Closed)
Digital and Relay Outputs DO1, DO2, 0 = Inactive (Dropped-out)
RL1, RL2, and RL3 Status
Last Fault
Second Previous Fault
Third Previous Fault
Fourth Previous Fault
Analog Input AI1’ Value
1 = Active (Picked-up)
0 to 71
0 to 71
0 to 71
0 to 71
-100 to +100
Analog Input AI2’ Value
Analog Input AI3’ Value
Analog Input AI4’ Value
WEG Use
Software Version
A/D Conversion Value of AI4
A/D Conversion Value of Iv
A/D Conversion Value of Iw
AO1 Value
AO2 Value
AO3 Value
AO4 Value
PID Process Variable
Powered Time
Enabled Time kWh Counter
-100 to +100
-100 to +100
-100 to +100
-
V4.4X
-32768 to +32767
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0.0 to 100
0.0 to 100
-100 to +100
-100 to +100
0 to 100
0 to 65535
0 to 6553.5
0 to 65535
0
Factory
Setting
Unit
-
%
%
%
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
%
%
%
%
% h
-
-
% h kWh rpm rpm
A (rms)
V
Hz
-
V
% kW
-
-
User's
Setting
Page
118
119
119
119
119
120
118
118
118
119
119
119
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
122
122
122
122
122
122
122
123
9
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
P060
P061
P062
P063
P064
P065
P070
Parameters Function
Fifth Error
Sixth Error
Seventh Error
Eighth Error
Ninth Error
Tenth Error
Motor Current and Motor Speed
Adjustable Range
0 to 71
0 to 71
0 to 71
0 to 71
0 to 71
0 to 71
0 to 2600
0 to P134
0 a 65535
0 a 65535
P100 to P199
P071
P072
P100
P101
P102
P103
P104
Command Word
Fieldbus Speed Reference
REGULATION PARAMETERS
Ramps
Acceleration Time
Deceleration Time
Acceleration Time 2
Deceleration Time 2
S Ramp
0.0 to 999
0.0 to 999
0.0 to 999
0.0 to 999
0 = Inactive (Linear)
1 = 50 %
2 = 100 %
P120
P121
P122 (2) (11)
P123 (2) (11)
P124 (2) (11)
P125 (2) (11)
P126 (2) (11)
P127 (2) (11)
P128 (2) (11)
P129 (2) (11)
P130 (2) (11)
P131 (2) (11)
P133 (2) (11)
P134 (2) (11)
P135 (2)
P136 (*)
Speed References
Speed Reference Backup
Keypad Speed Reference
JOG or JOG+ Speed Reference
JOG- Speed Reference
Multispeed Reference 1
Multispeed Reference 2
Multispeed Reference 3
Multispeed Reference 4
Multispeed Reference 5
Multispeed Reference 6
Multispeed Reference 7
Multispeed Reference 8
Speed Limits
Maximum Overspeed Level
0 = Inactive
1 = Active
P133 to P134
00 to P134
00 to P134
P133 to P134
P133 to P134
P133 to P134
P133 to P134
P133 to P134
P133 to P134
P133 to P134
P133 to P134
P132 (1)
Minimum Speed Reference
Maximum Speed Reference
I/F Control
Speed transition to I/F Control
Current Reference (I*) for I/F Control
(*)
P136 has different functions for V/F and Vector Control.
10
(0 to 99) x P134
100 = Disabled
0 to (P134-1)
(P133+1) to (3.4 x P402)
0 to 90
0 = I mr
1 = 1.11 x I mr
2 = 1.22 x I mr
3 = 1.33 x I mr
4 = 1.44 x I mr
5 = 1.55 x I mr
6 = 1.66 x I mr
7 = 1.77 x I mr
8 = 1.88 x I mr
9 = 2.00 x I mr
Factory
Setting
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
0 = Inactive
1 = Active
90
150 (125)
150 (125)
90 (75)
300 (250)
600 (500)
900 (750)
1200 (1000)
1500 (1250)
1800 (1500)
1650 (1375)
10
90 (75)
1800 (1500)
18
1 = 1.11 x I mr
% rpm rpm rpm
-
rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm rpm s s s s
-
Unit
-
-
A (rms) rpm
-
-
-
-
-
-
User's
Setting
Page
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
124
124
124
124
124
127
127
127
128
128
124
126
126
126
126
125
125
125
126
126
126
126
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters Function Adjustable Range
P136
P137
P138
P139
P140
P141
(*)
V/F Control
Manual Boost Torque
Autommatic Torque Boost
Slip Compensation
Output Current Filter
Dwell Time at Start
Dwell Speed at Start
0 to 9
0.00 to 1.00
-10.0 to +10.0
0.00 to 16.00
0.0 to 10.0
0 to 300
P142
P143
P144
P145
P146
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
Adjustable V/F
Maximum Output Voltage
Intermediate Output Voltage
Output Voltage at 3 Hz
Field Weakening Speed
Intermediate Speed
DC Link Voltage Regulation
DC Link Voltage Regulation Mode
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 100.0
P133 (> 90) to P134
90 to P145
P150
P151
P152
P153
(1)
(6) (*)
(6)
DC Link Voltage Regulation Level
(V/F Control / Vector Control with optimal braking)
Proportional Gain
Dynamic Braking Level
0 = With Losses
1 = Without Losses
2 = Enable/Disable via DI3...DI8
339 to 400 (P296 = 0)
585 to 800 (P296 = 1)
616 to 800 (P296 = 2)
678 to 800 (P296 = 3)
739 to 800 (P296 = 4)
809 to 1000 (P296 = 5)
885 to 1000 (P296 = 6)
924 to 1000 (P296 = 7)
1063 to 1200 (P296 = 8)
0.00 to 9.99
339 to 400 (P296 = 0)
585 to 800 (P296 = 1)
616 to 800 (P296 = 2)
678 to 800 (P296 = 3)
739 to 800 (P296 = 4)
809 to 1000 (P296 = 5)
885 to 1000 (P296 = 6)
924 to 1000 (P296 = 7)
1063 to 1200 (P296 = 8)
0.0 to 500
0.00 to 650
P154
P155
P156
P157
P158
(2) (7) (12)
(2) (7)
(2) (7)
Dynamic Braking Resistor
DB Resistor Power Rating
Overload Currents
Overload Current 100 % Speed
Overload Current 50 % Speed
Overload Current 5 % Speed
P157 to 1.3 x P295
P156 to P158
(0.2 x P295) to P157
Speed Regulator
P160
P161
P162
(1)
(3)
(3)
Optimization of the
Speed Regulator
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
0 = Normal
1 = Saturated
0.0 to 63.9
0.000 to 9.999
P163
P164
Local Speed Reference Offset -999 to +999
Remote Speed Reference Offset -999 to +999
(*)
P151 has different function for V/F or Vector Control.
Factory
Setting
1
0.00
0.0
1.00
0.0
90
100.0
50.0
8.0
1800
900
1 = Without Losses
675
748
780
893
1200
0.00
375
618
972
972
1174
0.0
2.60
400
800
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1.1 x P401
0.9 x P401
0.55 x P401
0 = Normal
0
0
7.4
0.023
A
A
A
-
-
-
-
-
kW
Unit
%
%
% rpm rpm
s s rpm
-
-
%
User's
Setting
Page
129
130
130
131
131
131
132
132
132
132
132
133
V
-
V
133 and
136
137
137
138
138
139
139
139
140
142
142
143
143
11
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters
P165
P166
Function Adjustable Range
Speed Filter 0.012 to 1.000
Speed Regulator Differential Gain 0.00 to 7.99
Factory
Setting
0.012
0.00 (without differential action)
P167
P170
P171
P172
P173
(4)
P168 (4)
P169 (*) (7)
P169 (*) (7)
Current Regulator
Proportional Gain 0.00 to 1.99
Integral Gain 0.000 to 1.999
Maximum Output Current (V/F Control) (0.2 x P295) to (1.8 x P295)
Maximum Forward Torque Current 0 to 180
(Vector Control)
Maximum Reverse Torque Current 0 to 180
(Vector Control)
Maximum Forward Torque Current at 0 to 180
Maximum Speed (P134)
Maximum Reverse Torque Current at 0 to 180
Maximum Speed (P134)
Curve Type of the Max. Torque 0 = Ramp
1 = Step
Flux Regulator
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Minimum Flux
0.0 to 31.9
0.000 to 9.999
0 to 120
0.50
0.010
1.5 x P295
125
125
125
125
0 = Ramp
P175 (5)
P176 (5)
P177
P178
P179
P180
P181 (1)
P200
P201
P202
P203
P204
(11)
(1) (2) (11)
(1)
(1) (10)
Nominal Flux
Maximum Flux
Field Weakenig Start Point
Magnetization Mode
0 to 120
0 to 120
0 to 120
0 = General Enable
1 = Start/Stop
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS P200 to P399
Generic Parameters
Password 0 = Off
Language Selection
Type of Control
Special Function Selection
Load/Save Parameters
1 = On
0 = Português
1 = English
2 = Español
3 = Deutsch
0 = V/F 60 Hz
1 = V/F 50 Hz
2 = V/F Adjustable
2.0
0.020
0
100
120
95
0 = General Enable
1 = On
0, 1, 2, 3
0 (1)
(11)
3 = Sensorless Vector
4 = Vector with Encoder
5 = VVW (Voltage Vector WEG)
0 = None 0 = None
1 = PID Regulator
2 = Mechanical Brake Logic
0 = Not Used
1 = Not Used
2 = Not Used
3 = Reset P043
4 = Reset P044
5 = Loads Factory Default-60 Hz
6 = Loads Factory Default-50 Hz
0 = Not Used
(*) P169 has different function for V/F or Vector Control.
12
Unit s
-
-
-
-
%
%
%
-
-
-
%
-
-
%
%
-
-
A
%
%
-
User's
Setting
Page
143
143
147
147
148
146
146
146
146
146
146
146
143
143
144
144
144
145
145
145
147
147
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters
P205
P206
P207
P208 (2) (11)
P209 (1)
P210
P211 (1)
P212
P213
P214 (1) (9)
P215 (1)
P216
P217
P218
P220 (1) (8)
Function
Display Default Selection
Factory
Adjustable Range
Setting
7 = Loads User Default 1
8 = Loads User Default 2
9 = Not Used
10 = Save User Default 1
11 = Save User Default 2
0 = P005 (Motor Frequency) 2 = P002
1 = P003 (Motor Current)
2 = P002 (Motor Speed)
3 = P007 (Motor Voltage)
4 = P006 (Inverter Status)
5 = P009 (Motor Torque)
6 = P070 (Motor Speed and
Motor Current)
7 = P040 (PID Process
Variable)
Auto-Reset Time
Reference Engineering Unit 1
0 to 255
32 to 127 (ASCII)
A, B, ... , Y, Z
Reference Scale Factor
Motor Phase Loss Detection
1 = On
Decimal Point of the Speed Indication 0 to 3
Zero Speed Disable
Condition to Leave Zero
Speed Disable
0, 1, ... , 9
#, $, %, (, ), *, +, ...
1 to 18000
0 = Off
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = N* or N>P291
1 = N*>P291
Time Delay for Zero Speed Disable 0 to 999
Line Phase Loss Detection 0 = Off
Keypad Copy Function
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = Inverter Keypad
2 = Keypad Inverter
Reference Engineering Unit 2
Reference Engineering Unit 3
LCD Display Contrast
Adjustment
32 to 127 (ASCII)
A, B, ... , Y, Z
0, 1, ... , 9
#, $, %, (, ), *, +, ...
32 to 127 (ACSII)
A, B, ... , Y, Z
0, 1, ... , 9
#, $, %, (, ), *, +, ...
0 to 150
0
114 = r
1800 (1500)
0 = Off
0
0 = Off
0 = N* or N>P291
0
1 = On
0 = Off
112 = p
109 = m
127
Local/Remote Definition
Local/Remote Selection Source 0 = Always Local
1 = Always Remote
2 = Keypad (Default Local)
3 = Keypad (Default Remote)
2 = Keypad
(Default Local)
Unit
User's
Setting
Page
-
-
-
-
s
-
-
-
-
-
s
-
-
149
150
150
154
154
154
150
151
151
151
152
152
152
152
154
13
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters
P221 (1)
P222 (1)
P223 (1) (8)
P224 (1) (8)
P225 (1) (8)
Function Adjustable Range
4 = DI2 to DI8
5 = Serial (L)
6 = Serial (R)
7 = Fieldbus (L)
8 = Fieldbus (R)
9 = PLC (L)
10 = PLC (R)
Local Speed Reference Selection 0 = keypad
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = AI3
4 = AI4
5 = Add AI > 0
6 = Add AI
7 = E.P.
Remote Speed Reference
Selection
8 = Multispeed
9 = Serial
10 = Fieldbus
11 = PLC
0 = keypad
1 = AI1
2 = AI2
3 = AI3
4 = AI4
5 = Add AI > 0
6 = Add AI
7 = E.P.
8 = Multispeed
9 = Serial
10 = Fieldbus
11 = PLC
Local FWD/REV Selection
Local Start/Stop Selection
Local JOG Selection
0 = Always Forward
1 = Always Reverse
2 = Keypad (Default FWD)
3 = Keypad (Default REV)
4 = DI2
5 = Serial (Default FWD)
6 = Serial (Default REV)
7 = Fieldbus (Default FWD)
8 = Fieldbus (Default REV)
9 = Polarity AI4
10 = PLC (FWD)
11 = PLC (REV)
0 = [I] and [O] Keys
1 = DIx
2 = Serial
3 = Fieldbus
4 = PLC
0 = Disable
1 = Keypad
Factory
Setting
0 = Keypad
1 = AI1
2 = Keypad
(Default FWD)
0 = [I] and [O] Keys
1 = Keypad
14
Unit
User's
Setting
Page
-
-
-
-
155
155
156
156
156
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters
P226 (1) (8)
Remote FWD/REV Selection
P227 (1) (8)
Remote Start/Stop Selection
P228 (1) (8)
Remote JOG Selection
P232 (1)
Stop Model Definition
Stop Mode Selection
P233
P234
P235 (1)
Analog Inputs
Analog Inputs Dead Zone
Analog Input AI1 Gain
Analog Input AI1 Signal
P236
P237 (1) (8)
Analog Input AI1 Offset
Analog Input AI2 Function
P238
Function
Analog Input AI2 Gain
Adjustable Range
Factory
Setting
2 = DI3 to DI8
3 = Serial
4 = Fieldbus
5 = PLC
0 = Always Forward
1 = Always Reverse
2 = Keypad (Default FWD)
3 = Keypad (Default REV)
4 = DI2
5 = Serial (Default FWD)
6 = Serial (Default REV)
7 = Fieldbus (Default FWD)
8 = Fieldbus (Default REV)
9 = Polarity AI4
10 = PLC (FWD)
11 = PLC (REV)
0 = [I] and [O] Keys
1 = DIx
2 = Serial
3 = Fieldbus
4 = PLC
0 = Disable
1 = Keypad
2 = DI3 to DI8
3 = Serial
4 = Fieldbus
5 = PLC
4 = DI2
1 = DIx
2 = DI3 to DI8
0 = Ramp to Stop
1 = Coast to Stop
2 = Fast Stop
0 = Ramp to Stop
0 = Off
1 = On
0.000 to 9.999
0 = Off
1.000
0 = (0 to 10) V / (0 to 20) mA 0 = (0 to 10) V /
1 = (4 to 20) mA (0 to 20) mA
2 = (10 to 0) V / (20 to 0) mA
3 = (20 to 4) mA
-100.0 to +100.0
0 = P221/P222
0.0
0 = P221/P222
1 = N* without ramp
2 = Maximum Torque Current
3 = PID Process Variable
4 = Maximum Torque Current
(AI2 + AI1)
0.000 to 9.999
1.000
Unit
User's
Setting
Page
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
%
-
-
157
157
157
163
163
164
165
165
165
166
15
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters
P239 (1)
P240
P241 (1) (8)
P242
P243 (1)
P244
P245
P246 (1)
P247
P248
P251
P252
P253
Function
Analog Input AI2 Signal
Adjustable Range
Analog Input AI2 Offset
Analog Input AI3 Function
1 = (4 to 20) mA
2 = (10 to 0) V / (20 to 0) mA
3 = (20 to 4) mA
-100.0 to +100.0
0 = P221/P222
(Requires Optional I/O Expansion 1 = Without ramp
Board EBB) 2 = Maximum Torque Current
3 = PID Process Variable
4 = Maximum Torque Current
Factory
Setting
0 = (0 to 10) V / (0 to 20) mA 0 = (0 to 10) V /
(0 to 20) mA
0.0
0 = P221/P222
Analog Input AI3 Gain
Analog Input AI3 Signal
Analog Input AI3 Offset
Analog Input AI4 Gain
(AI3 + AI2)
0.000 to 9.999
1.000
0 = (0 to 10) V / (0 to 20) mA 0 = (0 to 10) V /
(0 to 20) mA 1 = (4 to 20) mA
2 = (10 to 0) V / (20 to 0) mA
3 = (20 to 4) mA
-100.0 to +100.0
0.000 to 9.999
0.0
1.000
Analog Input AI4 Signal
(Requires Optional I/O Expansion
Board EBA)
0 = (0 to 10) V / (0 to 20) mA 0 = (0 to 10) V /
1 = (4 to 20) mA
2 = (10 to 0) V / (20 to 0) mA
3 = (20 to 4) mA
(0 to 20) mA
Analog Input AI4 Offset
Input Filter AI2
4 = (-10 to +10) V
-100.0 to +100.0
0.0 to 16.0
0.0
0.0
Analog Outputs
Analog Output AO1 Function
(CC9 or EBB board)
Analog Output AO1 Gain
Analog Output AO2 Function
(CC9 or EBB board)
0 = Speed Reference
1 = Total Reference
2 = Real Speed
3 = Torque Current
Reference (Vector)
4 = Torque Current (Vector)
5 = Output Current
6 = PID Process Variable
7 = Active Current (V/F)
8 = Power (kW)
9 = PID Setpoint
10 = Positive Torque Current
11 = Motor Torque
12 = PLC
13 = Dead Zone for
Speed Indication
14 = Motor Voltage
0.000 to 9.999
0 = Speed Reference
1 = Total Reference
2 = Real Speed
3 = Torque Current
Reference (Vector)
2 = Real Speed
1.000
5 = Output Current
16
Unit
-
User's
Setting
Page
166
%
-
% s
-
%
-
-
-
-
-
-
167
167
168
168
168
168
168
169
169
169
169
169
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters
P254
P255
P256
P257
P258
P259
Factory
Function Adjustable Range
Setting
4 = Torque Current (Vector)
5 = Output Current
6 = PID Process Variable
7 = Active Current (V/F)
8 = Power (kW)
9 = PID Setpoint
10 = Positive Torque Current
11 = Motor Torque
12 = PLC
13 = Dead Zone for
Speed Indication
14 = Motor Voltage
Analog Output AO2 Gain
Analog Output AO3 Function
0.000 to 9.999
0 = Speed Reference
(Requires Optional I/O Expansion 1 = Total Reference
Board EBA) 2 = Real Speed
Analog Output AO3 Gain
Analog Output AO4 Function
(Requires optional I/O Expansion
Board EBA)
1.000
2 = Real Speed
3 = Torque Current
Reference (Vector)
4 = Torque Current (Vector)
5 = Output Current
6 = PID Process Variable
7 = Active Current (V/F)
8 = Power (kW)
9 = PID Setpoint
10 = Positive Torque Current
11 = Motor Torque
12 = PLC
13 = Not Used
14 = Motor Voltage
15 to 63 = Exclusive WEG use
0.000 to 9.999
0 = Speed Reference
1.000
5 = Output Current
Analog Output AO4 Gain
Dead Zone for Speed Indication
1 = Total Reference
2 = Real Speed
3 = Torque Current
Reference (Vector)
4 = Torque Current (Vector)
5 = Output Current
6 = PID Process Variable
7 = Active Current (V/F)
8 = Power (kW)
9 = PID Setpoint
10 = Positive Torque Current
11 = Motor Torque
12 = PLC
13 = Not Used
14 = Motor Voltage
15 to 63 = Exclusive WEG use
0.000 to 9.999
0 to P134
1.000
1000
Unit
User's
Setting
Page
-
-
-
-
rpm
169
169
170
170
170
171
17
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters
P263 (1) (8)
Function
Digital Inputs
Digital Input DI1 Function
P264 (1) (8)
Digital Input DI2 Function
P265 (1) (8)
Digital Input DI3 Function
P266 (1)
Digital Input DI4 Function
Adjustable Range
Factory
Setting
0 = Not Used
1 = Start/Stop
2 = General Enable
3 = Fast Stop
0 = FWD/REV
1 = Local/Remote
2 = Not Used
3 = Not Used
4 = Not Used
5 = Not Used
6 = Not Used
7 = Not Used
8 = Reverse Run
0 = Not Used
1 = Local/ Remote
2 = General Enable
3 = JOG
4 = No External Fault
5 = Increase E.P.
6 = Ramp 2
7 = Not Used
8 = Forward Run
9 = Speed/Torque
10 = JOG+
11 = JOG-
12 = Reset
13 = Fieldbus
14 = Start (3 wire)
15 = Man/Auto
16 = Not used
17 = Disables Flying Start
18 = DC Voltage Regulator
19 = Parameter Setting
Disable
20 = Load user
21 = Timer (RL2)
22 = Timer (RL3)
0 = Not used
1 = Local/ Remote
2 = General Enable
3 = JOG
4 = No external Fault
5 = Decrease E.P.
6 = Ramp 2
7 = Multispeed (MS0)
8 = Reverse Run
9 = Speed/Torque
10 = JOG+
1 = Start/Stop
0 = FWD/REV
0 = Not Used
0 = Not Used
18
Unit
-
User's
Setting
Page
172
172
-
172
172
Parameters Function
P267 (1)
Digital Input DI5 Function
P268 (1)
Digital Input DI6 Function
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Adjustable Range
11 = JOG-
12 = Reset
13 = Fieldbus
14 = Stop (3 wire)
15 = Man/Auto
16 = Not used
17 = Disables Flying Start
18 = DC voltage regulator
19 = Parameter Setting
Disable
20 = Load User
21 = Timer (RL2)
22 = Timer (RL3)
0 = Not Used
1 = Local/ Remote
2 = General Enable
3 = JOG
4 = No External Fault
5 = Increase E.P.
6 = Ramp 2
7 = Multispeed (MS1)
8 = Fast Stop
9 = Speed/Torque
10 = JOG+
11 = JOG-
12 = Reset
13 = Fieldbus
14 = Start (3 wire)
15 = Man/Auto
16 = Not Used
17 = Disables Flying Start
18 = DC Voltage Regulator
19 = Parameter Setting
Disable
20 = Load User
21 = Timer (RL2)
22 = Timer (RL3)
0 = Not Used
1 = Local/ Remote
2 = General Enable
3 = JOG
4 = No External Fault
5 = Decrease E.P.
6 = Ramp 2
7 = Multispeed (MS2)
8 = Fast Stop
9 = Speed/Torque
10 = JOG+
11 = JOG-
Factory
Setting
3 = JOG
6 = Ramp 2
Unit
User's
Setting
Page
-
172
173
19
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters
P269 (1)
P270 (1)
Function
Digital Input DI7 Function
(Requires optional I/O expansion board EBA or EBB)
Digital Input DI8 Function
(Requires optional I/O expansion board EBA or EBB)
Adjustable Range
12 = Reset
13 = Fieldbus
14 = Stop (3 wire)
15 = Man/Auto
16 = Not Used
17 = Disables Flying Start
18 = DC voltage regulator
19 = Parameter setting disable
20 = Load user
21 = Timer (RL2)
22 = Timer (RL3)
0 = Not Used
1 = Local/ Remote
2 = General Enable
3 = JOG
4 = No External Fault
5 = Not Used
6 = Ramp 2
7 = Not Used
8 = Fast Stop
9 = Speed/Torque
10 = JOG+
11 = JOG-
12 = Reset
13 = Fieldbus
14 = Start (3 wire)
15 = Man/Auto
16 = Not Used
17 = Disables Flying Start
18 = DC Voltage Regulator
19 = Parameter Setting
Disable
20 = Load User
21 = Timer (RL2)
22 = Timer (RL3)
0 = Not used
1 = Local/Remote
2 = General Enable
3 = JOG
4 = No External Fault
5 = Not Used
6 = Ramp 2
7 = Not Used
8 = Fast Stop
9 = Speed/Torque
10 = JOG+
11 = JOG-
12 = Reset
Factory
Setting
0 = Not used
0 = Not used
20
Unit
User's
Setting
Page
-
173
173
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters
P275 (1)
Function
Digital Outputs
Digital Ouput DO1 Function
(requires optional I/O expansion board EBA or EBB)
Adjustable Range
13 = Fieldbus
14 = Stop (3 wire)
15 = Man/Auto
16 = Motor Thermistor
17 = Disables Flying Start
18 = DC Voltage Regulator
19 = Parameter Setting
Disable
20 = Not Used
21 = Timer (RL2)
22 = Timer (RL3)
Factory
Setting
0 = Not used
1 = N* > Nx
2 = N > Nx
3 = N < Ny
4 = N = N*
5 = Zero Speed
6 = Is > Ix
7 = Is < Ix
8 = Torque > Tx
9 = Torque < Tx
10 = Remote
11 = Run
12 = Ready
13 = No Fault
14 = No E00
15 = No E01+E02+E03
16 = No E04
17 = No E05
18 = (4 to 20) mA OK
19 = Fieldbus
20 = FWD
21 = Proc.Var. > VPx
22 = Proc. Var. < VPy
23 = Ride-Through
24 = Pre-charge OK
25 = Fault
26 = Enabled Hours > Hx
27 = Not Used
28 = Not Used
29 = N > Nx and Nt > Nx
30 = Brake (Actual Speed)
31 = Brake (Total Reference)
32 = Overweight
33 = Slack Cable
34 = Torque Polarity +/-
0 = Not Used
Unit
User's
Setting
Page
180
21
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters
P276 (1)
Function
Digital Output DO2 Function
(Requires optional I/O expansion board EBA or EBB)
Factory
Adjustable Range
Setting
35 = Torque Polarity -/+
36 = F > Fx _ 1
37 = F > Fx _ 2
38 = Set Point = Process
Variable
39 = No E32
40 = Ready 2
0 = Not Used
1 = N* > Nx
2 = N > Nx
3 = N < Ny
4 = N = N*
5 = Zero Speed
6 = Is > Ix
7 = Is < Ix
8 = Torque > Tx
9 = Torque < Tx
10 = Remote
11 = Run
12 = Ready
13 = No Fault
14 = No E00
15 = No E01+E02+E03
16 = No E04
17 = No E05
18 = (4 to 20) mA OK
19 = Fieldbus
20 = FWD
21 = Proc.Var. > VPx
22 = Proc. Var. < VPy
23 = Ride-Through
24 = Pre-charge OK
25 = Fault
26 = Enabled Hours > Hx
27 = Not Used
28 = Not Used
29 = N > Nx and Nt > Nx
30 = Brake (Actual Speed)
31 = Brake (Total Reference)
32 = Overweight
33 = Slack Cable
34 = Torque Polarity +/-
35 = Torque Polarity -/+
36 = F > Fx _ 1
37 = F > Fx _ 2
38 = Set Point = Process
Variable
39 = No E32
40 = Ready 2
0 = Not used
22
Unit
User's
Setting
Page
180
Parameters
P277 (1)
Function
Relay Output RL1 Function
P279 (1) (8)
Relay Output RL2 Function
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Factory
Adjustable Range
Setting
0 = Not Used
1 = N* > Nx
2 = N > Nx
3 = N < Ny
4 = N = N*
5 = Zero Speed
6 = Is > Ix
7 = Is < Ix
8 = Torque > Tx
9 = Torque < Tx
10 = Remote
11 = Run
12 = Ready
13 = No Fault
14 = No E00
15 = No E01+E02+E03
16 = No E04
17 = No E05
18 = (4 to 20) mA OK
19 = Fieldbus
20 = FWD
21 = Proc.Var. > VPx
22 = Proc. Var. < VPy
23 = Ride-Through
24 = Pre-charge OK
25 = Fault
26 = Enabled Hours > Hx
27 = PLC
28 = Not Used
29 = N > Nx and Nt > Nx
30 = Brake (Actual Speed)
31 = Brake (Total Reference)
32 = Overweight
33 = Slack Cable
34 = Torque Polarity +/-
35 = Torque Polarity -/+
36 = F > Fx _ 1
37 = F > Fx _ 2
38 = Set Point = Process
Variable
39 = No E32
40 = Ready 2
0 = Not used
1 = N* > Nx
2 = N > Nx
3 = N < Ny
4 = N = N*
5 = Zero Speed
13 = No Fault
2 = N > Nx
Unit
-
User's
Setting
Page
180
180
23
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters Function
P280 (1)
Relay Output RL3 Function
Factory
Adjustable Range
Setting
6 = Is > Ix
7 = Is < Ix
8 = Torque > Tx
9 = Torque < Tx
10 = Remote
11 = Run
12 = Ready
13 = No Fault
14 = No E00
15 = No E01+E02+E03
16 = No E04
17 = No E05
18 = (4 to 20) mA OK
19 = Fieldbus
20 = FWD
21 = Proc.Var. > VPx
22 = Proc. Var. < VPy
23 = Ride-Through
24 = Pre-charge OK
25 = Fault
26 = Enabled Hours > Hx
27 = PLC
28 = Timer
29 = N > Nx and Nt > Nx
30 = Brake (Actual Speed)
31 = Brake (Total Reference)
32 = Overweight
33 = Slack Cable
34 = Torque Polarity +/-
35 = Torque Polarity -/+
36 = F > Fx _ 1
37 = F > Fx _ 2
38 = Set Point = Process
Variable
39 = No E32
40 = Ready 2
0 = Not used
1 = N* > Nx
2 = N > Nx
3 = N < Ny
4 = N = N*
5 = Zero Speed
6 = Is > Ix
7 = Is < Ix
8 = Torque > Tx
9 = Torque < Tx
10 = Remote
11 = Run
12 = Ready
13 = No Fault
1 = N* > Nx
24
Unit
User's
Setting
Page
180
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters
P283
P284
P285
P286
P287
P288 (2) (11)
P289 (2) (11)
P290 (7)
P291
P292
P293
P294
P295 (1)
Factory
Function Adjustable Range
Setting
14 = No E00
15 = No E01+E02+E03
16 = No E04
17 = No E05
18 = (4 to 20) mA OK
19 = Fieldbus
20 = FWD
21 = Proc.Var. > VPx
22 = Proc. Var. < VPy
23 = Ride-Through
24 = Pre-charge OK
25 = Fault
26 = Enabled Hours > Hx
27 = PLC
28 = Timer
29 = N > Nx and Nt > Nx
30 = Brake (Actual Speed)
31 = Brake (Total Reference)
32 = Overweight
33 = Slack Cable
34 = Torque Polarity +/-
35 = Torque Polarity -/+
36 = F > Fx _ 1
37 = F > Fx _ 2
38 = Set Point = Process
Variable
39 = No E32
40 = Ready 2
0.0 to 300
0.0 to 300
0.0 to 300
0.0 to 300
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Time for RL2 ON
Time for RL2 OFF
Time for RL3 ON
Time for RL3 OFF
Nx, Ny, Ix, Zero Speed Zone, N = N* and Tx
Hysteresis for Nx/Ny
Nx Speed
Ny Speed
Ix Current
Zero Speed Zone
N = N* Band
Tx Torque
Hours Hx
0.0 to 5.0
0 to P134
0 to P134
(0 to 2.0) x P295
1 to 100
1 to 100
0 to 200
0 to 6553
Inverter Data
Inverter Rated Current
220-230 V Models
3 = 6 A
4 = 7 A
6 = 10 A
7 = 13 A
8 = 16 A
9 = 24 A
10 = 28 A
13 = 45 A
14 = 54 A
16 = 70 A
17 = 86 A
18 = 105 A
19 = 130 A
1.0
120 (100)
1800 (1500)
1.0 x P295
1
1
100
4320
According to
Inverter Model
Unit
User's
Setting
Page
%
%
% h
% rpm rpm
A s s s s
-
193
193
193
193
193
193
193
193
186
186
186
186
194
25
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters Function Adjustable Range
380-480 V Models
0 = 3.6 A
20 = 142 A
1 = 4 A
21 = 180 A
2 = 5.5 A
55 = 211 A
5 = 9 A
22 = 240 A
7 = 13 A 67 = 312 A
8 = 16 A
23 = 361 A
9 = 24 A
24 = 450 A
11 = 30 A
69 = 515 A
12 = 38 A
25 = 600 A
13 = 45 A
33 = 686 A
15 = 60 A 34 = 855 A
16 = 70 A
35 = 1140 A
17 = 86 A
36 = 1283 A
18 = 105 A
37 = 1710 A
82 = 1468 A
500-600 V Models
39 = 2.9 A
47 = 53 A
40 = 4.2 A 48 = 63 A
4 = 7 A
49 = 79 A
6 = 10 A 25 = 600 A
41 = 12 A 72 = 652 A
42 = 14 A 73 = 794 A
43 = 22 A 76 = 897 A
44 = 27 A 78 = 978 A
45 = 32 A
79 = 1191A
46 = 44 A 81 = 1345 A
500-690 V Models
51 = 107 A 60 = 315 A
53 = 147 A 62 = 343 A
55 = 211 A
57 = 247 A
63 = 418 A
65 = 472 A
660-690 V Models
50 = 107 A
52 = 127 A
54 = 179 A
56 = 225 A
58 = 259 A
59 = 305 A
61 = 340 A
64 = 428 A
68 = 492 A
70 = 580 A
71 = 646 A
74 = 813 A
75 = 869 A
77 = 969 A
80 = 1220 A
Special Models
38 = 2 A
66 = 33 A
26 = 200 A
27 = 230 A
29 = 400 A
30 = 570 A
31 = 700 A
32 = 900 A
28 = 320 A
Factory
Setting
26
Unit
User's
Setting
Page
Parameters
P296 (1) (11)
Function
Inverter Rated Voltage
(Rated Input Voltage)
P297 (1) (2)
Switching Frequency
P300
P301
P302
P303
P304
P305
P306
P308 (1)
P309 (1)
DC Braking
DC Braking Time
DC Braking Start Speed
DC Braking Voltage
Skip Speed
Skip Speed 1
Skip Speed 2
Skip Speed 3
Skip Band
Serial Communication
Inverter Address
Fieldbus
P310 (1)
P312 (1)
STOP Detection in a Profibus
Network
Type of Serial Protocol
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Adjustable Range
0 = 220-230 V
1 = 380 V
2 = 400-415 V
3 = 440-460 V
4 = 480 V
5 = 500-525 V
6 = 550-575 V
7 = 600 V
8 = 660-690 V
0 = 1.25
1 = 2.5
2 = 5.0
3 = 10.0
220-230 V
3 = for models
380-480 V
6 = for models
500-600 V and
500-690 V
8 = for models
660-690 V
2 = 5.0
Factory
Setting
0 = for models
0.0 to 15.0
0 to 450
0.0 to 10.0
0.0
30
2.0
P133 to P134
P133 to P134
P133 to P134
0 to 750
600
900
1200
0
1 to 30
0 = Disable
1 = Profibus DP/DP-V1 2 I/O
2 = Profibus DP/DP-V1 4 I/O
3 = Profibus DP/DP-V1 6 I/O
4 = DeviceNet 2 I/O
5 = DeviceNet 4 I/O
6 = DeviceNet 6 I/O
7 = EtherNet/IP 2 I/O
8 = EtherNet/IP 4 I/O
9 = EtherNet/IP 6 I/O
10 = DeviceNet Drive Profile
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = WBUS Protocol
1 = Modbus-RTU, 9600 bps, no parity
2 = Modbus-RTU, 9600 bps, odd parity
3 = Modbus-RTU, 9600 bps, even parity
4 = Modbus-RTU, 19200 bps, no parity
5 = Modbus-RTU, 19200 bps, odd parity
1
0 = Disable
0 = Off
0 = WEG Protocol
Unit
kHz s rpm
% rpm rpm rpm rpm
-
-
-
Attention!
Refer to item
3.2.3 to do the voltage selection
195
195
196
197
197
197
197
197
197
198
198
198
199
27
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters
P313 (1) (8)
P314 (1)
P318
P320 (1)
P321 (6)
P322 (6)
P323 (6)
Factory
Function Adjustable Range
Setting
6 = Modbus-RTU, 19200 bps, even parity
7 = Modbus-RTU, 38400 bps, no parity
8 = Modbus-RTU, 38400 bps, odd parity
9 = Modbus-RTU, 38400 bps, even parity
Type of disabling by E28/E29/E30 0 = Disable via Start/Stop
1 = Disable via General
Enable
2 = Not Used
3 = Changes to LOCAL 1
4 = Changes to LOCAL 2
5 = Causes Fatal Error
Time for Serial Watchdog
Action
Watchdog detection for the
PLC board
0.0 = Disable
0.1 to 999.0 = Enable
0 = Off
1 = On
Flying Start/Ride-Through
Flying Start/Ride-Through
Ud Line Loss Level
Ud Ride-Through
Ud Line Recover Level
0 = Disable via Start/Stop
0.0 = Disabled
0 = Off
0 = Inactive
1 = Flying Start
2 = Flying Start/Ride-Through
3 = Ride-Through
178 to 282 (P296 = 0)
307 to 487 (P296 = 1)
324 to 513 (P296 = 2)
356 to 564 (P296 = 3)
388 to 615 (P296 = 4)
425 to 674 (P296 = 5)
466 to 737 (P296 = 6)
486 to 770 (P296 = 7)
559 to 885 (P296 = 8)
178 to 282 (P296 = 0)
307 to 487 (P296 = 1)
324 to 513 (P296 = 2)
356 to 564 (P296 = 3)
388 to 615 (P296 = 4)
425 to 674 (P296 = 5)
466 to 737 (P296 = 6)
486 to 770 (P296 = 7)
559 to 885 (P296 = 8)
178 to 282 (P296 = 0)
307 to 487 (P296 = 1)
324 to 513 (P296 = 2)
356 to 564 (P296 = 3)
388 to 615 (P296 = 4)
425 to 674 (P296 = 5)
466 to 737 (P296 = 6)
486 to 770 (P296 = 7)
0 = Inactive
461
486
534
583
644
672
773
267
638
699
729
446
490
535
588
689
792
245
423
252
436
459
505
550
602
660
28
Unit
s
-
V
V
V
User's
Setting
Page
199
200
200
200
200
201
202
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
P336
P337
P338
P339
P340
P341
P342
P343
P344
P345
P346
Parameters
P325
P326
P331
P332
P335
P351 (1)
P352 (1)
P353 (1)
P354 (1)
P355 (1)
P356 (1)
P357 (1)
P358 (1)
P361 (1)
P362 (1)
P363 (1)
P364 (1)
P365 (1)
P366 (1)
P367 (1)
P368 (1)
P369 (2) (11)
P370
P371
P372
Factory
Function Adjustable Range Unit
Setting
Ride-Through Proportional Gain
Ride-Through Integral Gain
Voltage Ramp
Dead Time
559 to 885 (P296 = 8)
0.0 to 63.9
0.000 to 9.999
0.2 to 60.0
0.1 to 10.0
838
22.8
0.128
2.0
1.0
s s
-
-
DeviceNet Drive Profile
DeviceNet I/O Instances
Input Word #3
Input Word #4
Input Word #5
Input Word #6
Input Word #7
Output Word #3
Output Word #4
Output Word #5
Output Word #6
Output Word #7
I/O Words Quantity
0 = Instances 20/70
1 = Instances 21/71
2 = Instances 100/101
3 = Instances 102/103
0 to 749
0 to 749
0 to 749
0 to 749
0 to 749
0 to 749
0 to 749
0 to 749
0 to 749
0 to 749
2 to 7
0 = Instances 20/70
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PARAMETERS FOR CRANE APPLICATIONS AND FOR MASTER/SLAVE FUNCTION - P351 to P399
Logic for the Mechanical Braking Operation
Delay for E33
Delay for E34
0.0 to 99.9
0 to 999
Delay for N < Nx - Brake Activation 0.0 to 20.0
Delay for Resetting the Integrator 0.0 to 10.0
of the Speed Regulator
Delay for Accepting New
“Start/Stop” Commands
Delay for Ramp Enable
0.0 to 10.0
0.0 to 10.0
Indication of the Torque Current Polarity
Torque Current (Iq) Filter
Torque Current (Iq) Hysteresis
0.00 to 9.99
0.00 to 9.99
Parameters for Load Detection
Load Detection
Stabilization Speed
Stabilization Time
Slack Cable Time
Slack Cable Level
Lightweight Level
Overweight Level
Speed Reference Gain
Fx
Frequency Fx
Hysteresis for Fx
0 = Off
1 = On
0 to P134
0.1 to 10.0
0.0 to 60.0
0.0 to 1.3 x P295
0.0 to 1.3 x P295
0.0 to 1.8 x P295
1.000 to 2.000
0.0 to 300.0
0.0 to 15.0
DC Braking
DC Braking Time at Start
DC Braking Current Level
0.0 to 15.0
0.0 to 90.0
99.9
999
0.0
2.0
1.0
0.0
0.00
2.00
0 = Off
90
0.1
0.0
0.1 x P295
0.3 x P295
1.1 x P295
1.000
4.0
2.0
0.0
40.0
s s s s s s s
%
-
Hz
Hz s
%
A
A
rpm s s
A
User's
Setting
Page
206
208
209
209
209
209
209
210
210
210
210
210
210
206
206
206
206
206
207
207
207
207
207
207
208
208
208
208
203
203
204
204
210
213
213
213
29
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters
P398 (1)
P399 (1) (2)
Function
VVW Control
Slip Compensation During
Regeneration
Motor Rated Efficiency
P400 (1) (6)
P401 (1) (12)
P402 (1) (2) (11)
MOTOR PARAMETERS
Motor Nameplate Data
Motor Rated Voltage
Motor Rated Current
Motor Rated RPM
P403 (1) (11)
P404 (1)
Motor Rated Frequency
Motor Rated hp
Adjustable Range
0 = Off
1 = On
50.0 to 99.9
Factory
Setting
1 = On
According to the motor rated power factor
(P404)
P400 to P499
0 to 690
(0.0 to 1.30) x P295
(12)
0 to 18000
(P202 = 0, 1, 2 and 5)
P296
1.0 x P295
1750 (1458)
0 to 7200 (P202 = 3 and 4)
0 to 300 (P202 = 0,1,2 and 5) 60 (50)
30 to 120 (P202 = 3 and 4)
0 = 0.33 hp/0.25 kW 4 = 1.5 hp/1.1 kW
1 = 0.50 hp/0.37 kW
2 = 0.75 hp/0.55 kW
3 = 1.0 hp/0.75 kW
4 = 1.5 hp/1.1 kW
5 = 2.0 hp/1.5 kW
6 = 3.0 hp/2.2 kW
7 = 4.0 hp/3.0 kW
8 = 5.0 hp/3.7 kW
9 = 5.5 hp/4.0 kW
10 = 6.0 hp/4.5 kW
11 = 7.5 hp/5.5 kW
12 = 10.0 hp/7.5 kW
13 = 12.5 hp/9.0 kW
14 = 15.0 hp/11.0 kW
15 = 20.0 hp/15.0 kW
16 = 25.0 hp/18.5 kW
17 = 30.0 hp/22.0 kW
18 = 40.0 hp/30.0 kW
19 = 50.0 hp/37.0 kW
20 = 60.0 hp/45.0 kW
21 = 75.0 hp/55.0 kW
22 = 100.0 hp/75.0 kW
23 = 125.0 hp/90.0 kW
24 = 150.0 hp/110.0 kW
25 = 175.0 hp/130.0 kW
26 = 180.0 hp/132.0 kW
27 = 200.0 hp/150.0 kW
28 = 220.0 hp/160.0 kW
29 = 250.0 hp/185.0 kW
30 = 270.0 hp/200.0 kW
31 = 300.0 hp/220.0 kW
32 = 350.0 hp/260.0 kW
30
V
A rpm
Hz
-
Unit
-
%
User's
Setting
Page
213
213
214
214
214
214
214
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters
P405 (1)
P406 (1)
P407 (1) (2)
P408 (1)
P409 (1)
P410
P411 (1)
P412
P413 (1)
P520
P521
P522
P523
P524 (1)
P525
P526
Function
Encoder PPR
Motor Ventilation Type
Motor Rated Power Factor
Measured Parameters
Self-Tuning 0 = No
1 = No Rotation
2 = Run for I mr
3 = Run for Tm
4 = Estimate Tm
Motor Stator Resistance (Rs) 0.000 to 77.95
Motor Magnetizing Current (I mr
) (0.0 to 1.25) x P295
Motor Flux Leakage Inductance ( LS) 0.00 to 99.99
L
R
/R
R
Constant (Rotor Time 0.000 to 9.999
Constant (Tr))
Tm Constant (Mechanical Time
Constant)
0.00 to 99.99
SPECIAL FUNCTION PARAMETERS P520 to P538
PID Regulator
PID Proportional Gain
PID Integral Gain
PID Differential Gain
PIDRamp Time
Selection of PID Feedback
PID Setpoint
Process Variable Filter
0.000 to 7.999
0.000 to 7.999
0.000 to 3.499
0.0 to 999
0 = AI2 (P237 to P240)
1 = AI3 (P241 to P244)
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 16.0
Adjustable Range
33 = 380.0 hp/280.0 kW
34 = 400.0 hp/300.0 kW
35 = 430.0 hp/315.0 kW
36 = 440.0 hp/330.0 kW
37 = 450.0 hp/335.0 kW
38 = 475.0 hp/355.0 kW
39 = 500.0 hp/375.0 kW
40 = 540.0 hp/400.0 kW
41 = 600.0 hp/450.0 kW
42 = 620.0 hp/460.0 kW
43 = 670.0 hp/500.0 kW
44 = 700.0 hp/525.0 kW
45 = 760.0 hp/570.0 kW
46 = 800.0 hp/600.0 kW
47 = 850.0 hp/630.0 kW
48 = 900.0 hp/670.0 kW
49 = 1100.0 hp/820.0 kW
50 = 1600.0 hp/1190.0 kW
100 to 9999
0 = Self Ventilated
1 = Separate Ventilation
2 = Optimal Flux
3 = Increased Protection
0.50 to 0.99
Factory
Setting
1024
0 = Self Ventilated
According to the motor rated power
(P404)
0 = No
0.000
0.0
0.00
0.000
0.00
1.000
0.043
0.000
3.0
0 = AI2 (P237 to P240)
0.0
0.1
Unit ppr
-
-
-
A mH s s
-
-
s
-
% s
User's
Setting
Page
215
215
216
216
217
218
218
218
219
223
223
223
223
223
224
224
31
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters
P527
PIDAction
Function
P528
P529
P530
Process Variable Scale Factor
Decimal Point of Proc. Var.
Engineering Unit of Proc. Var. 1
P531
P532
P533
P534
P535
P536 (1)
P537
P538
Engineering Unit of Proc. Var. 2
Engineering Unit of Proc. Var. 3
Value of Proc. Var. X
Value of Proc. Var. Y
Wake Up Band
Automatic Setting of P525
Hysteresis for Set point =
Process Variable
Hysteresis for VPx/VPy
Adjustable Range
0 = Direct
1 = Reverse
0 to 9999
0 to 3
32 to 127 (ASCII)
A, B, ... , Y, Z
0, 1, ... , 9
#, $, %, (, ), *, +, ...
32 to 127 (ASCII)
A, B, ... , Y, Z
0, 1, ... , 9
#, $, %, (, ), *, +, ...
32 to 127 (ASCII)
A, B, ... , Y, Z
0, 1, ... , 9
#, $, %, (, ), *, +, ...
0.0 to 100
0.0 to 100
0 to 100
0 = Active
1 = Inactive
1 to 100
0.0 to 50.0
Setting
0 = Direct
1000
1
37 = %
Factory
32 = blank
32 = blank
-
-
Unit
-
-
-
User's
Setting
Page
224
225
225
226
226
226
90.0
10.0
0
0 = Active
1
1.0
%
%
%
%
%
-
Notes presented on Quick Parameter Description:
(1)
Parameter can be changed only with the inverter disabled (motor stopped).
(2)
Values may change as a function of the “Motor Parameters”.
(3)
Values may change as a function of P413 (Tm Constant - obtained during
Self-tuning).
(4)
Values may change as a function of P409 and P411 (obtained during Selftuning).
(5)
Values may change as a function of P412 (Tr Constant - obtained during
Self-tuning).
(6)
Values may change as a function of P296.
(7)
Values may change as a function of P295.
(8)
Values may change as a function of P203.
(9)
Values may change as a function of P320.
(10)
User’s Standard (for new inverters) = without parameter.
(11)
The inverter will be delivered with settings according to the market, considering the HMI language, V/F 50 Hz or 60 Hz and the required voltage.
The reset of the standard factory setting may change the parameters related to the frequency (50 Hz/60 Hz). Values within parenthesis mean the factory setting for 50 Hz.
(12)
The maximum value of P156 and P401 is 1.8 x P295 for model 4.2 A/500-
600 V and 1.6 x P295 for models 7 A and 54 A/220-230 V; 2.9 A and 7 A/500-
600 V; 107 A, 147 A and 247 A/500-690 V; 100 A, 127 A and 340 A/660-690 V.
226
226
227
227
227
227
32
II. Fault Messages
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
Parameters that affect others when set
P203
P295
P296
P320
P401
P402
P403
P404
P406
Parameters that are affected and modified automatically
P220, P222, P223, P224, P225,
P226, P227, P228, P237, P263,
P264, P265, P279, P313
P156, P157, P158, P169 (V/F),
P290, P365, P366, P367
P151, P153, P321, P322, P323
P400
P214
P156, P157, P158
P297
P122, P123, P124, P125, P126,
P127, P128, P129, P130, P131,
P133, P134, P135, P208, P288,
P289
P369, P402
P399, P407
P156, P157, P158
Condition where it occurs
During the oriented start-up
NO
During normal operation
YES
NO
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
Table 1 - Interdependence among parameters: parameters that change the settings of others when modified versus parameters that are automatically modified as a function of a parameter setting (during start-up and/or normal operation)
Display
E00
E01
E02
E03
E04 (*)
E05
E06
E07
E08
E09
E10
E11
E12
E13
E15
E17
E24
E28 to E30
E31
E32
E33
E34
E41
E70
E71
Description
Output Overcurrent/Short-Circuit
DC Link Overvoltage
DC Link Undervoltage
Power Supply Undervoltage/Phase Loss
Inverter Overtemperature/Pre-charge Circuit
Failure
Output Overload (I x t Function)
External Fault
Encoder Fault
Valid for P202 = 4 (Vector with Encoder)
CPU Error (watchdog)
Program Memory Error
Error in the Copy Function
Output Ground Fault
Dynamic Braking Resistor Overload
Motor or Encoder with Inverted Wires
(Self-Tuning) (Valid for P202 = 4)
Motor Phase Loss
Overspeed Fault
Programming Error
Serial communication error
Keypad Connection Fault
Motor Overtemperature
Speed without control
Long period at torque limitation
Self-Diagnosis Fault
Internal DC Supply Undervoltage
PLC Watchdog Error
Page
228
228
228
229
229
229
229
229
229
229
229
229
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
231
231
(*)
E04 can be "Pre-charge Circuit Failure" only in the following models:
86 A/380-480 V, 70 A/220-230 V, 44 A/500-600 V and for all 500-690 V and
660-690 V models. E04 can also occur when signal with inverted polarity is applied at analog inputs AI1/AI2. The E04 fault message can also occur in the models up to
130 A/ 200-230 V, 142 A/380-480 V and 63 A/500-600 V when the temperature at the heatsink is lower than -10 ºC.
33
CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE
III. Other Messages
Display rdy run
Sub dCbr
Description
Inverter is Ready to be Enabled
Inverter is Enabled
Power Supply Voltage is Too Low for the Inverter Operation
(Undervoltage)
Inverter in DC Braking Mode. (Refer to P300)
34
1.1 SAFETY NOTICES IN
THE MANUAL
1.2 SAFETY NOTICES
ON THE PRODUCT
CHAPTER 1
SAFETY NOTICES
This Manual contains all necessary information for the correct installation and operation of the CFW-09 Variable Frequency Inverter.
The CFW-09 Instruction Manual has been written for qualified personnel with suitable training or technical qualifications to operate this type of equipment.
The following Safety Notices will be used in this Manual:
DANGER!
If the recommended Safety Instructions are not strictly observed, it can lead to serious or fatal injuries of personnel and/or equipment damage.
ATTENTION!
Failure to observe the recommended Safety Procedures can lead to material damage.
NOTE!
The content of this Manual supplies important information for the correct understanding of operation and proper performance of the equipment.
The following symbols may be attached to the product, serving as Safety
Notice:
High Voltages.
Components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Do not touch them without following proper grounding procedures.
Mandatory connection to ground protection (PE).
Shield connection to ground.
1.3 PRELIMINARY
RECOMMENDATIONS
DANGER!
Only qualified personnel should plan or implement the installation, startup, operation and maintenance of this equipment. Personnel must review this entire Manual before attempting to install, operate or troubleshoot the
CFW-09.
These personnel must follow all safety instructions included in this Manual and/or defined by local regulations.
Failure to comply with these instructions may result in personnel injury and/ or equipment damage.
35
CHAPTER 1 - SAFETY NOTICES
NOTE!
In this Manual, qualified personnel are defined as people that are trained to:
1. Install, ground, power up and operate the CFW-09 according to this Manual and the local required safety procedures;
2. Use of safety equipment according to the local regulations;
3. Administer Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) and First Aid.
DANGER!
Always disconnect the supply voltage before touching any electrical component inside the inverter.
Many components are charged with high voltages, even after the incomingAC power supply has been disconnected or switched OFF. Wait at least 10 minutes for the total discharge of the power capacitors.
Always connect the frame of the equipment to the ground (PE) at the suitable connection point.
ATTENTION!
All electronic boards have components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges. Never touch any of the electrical components or connectors without following proper grounding procedures. If necessary to do so, touch the properly grounded metallic frame or use a suitable ground strap.
Do not apply High Voltage (High Pot) Test on the Inverter!
If this test is necessary, contact WEG.
NOTE!
Inverters can interfere with other electronic equipment. In order to reduce this interference, adopt the measures recommended in chapter 3 “Installation and
Connection”.
NOTE!
Read this entire Manual carefully and completely before installing or operating the CFW-09.
36
2.1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL
2.2 SOFTWARE VERSION
2.3 ABOUT THE CFW-09
CHAPTER 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter defines the contents and purpose of this manual and describes the main characteristics of the CFW-09 frequency inverter. Identification of the CFW-09, receiving and storage requirements are also provided.
This Manual is divided into 9 Chapters, providing information to the user on how to receive, install, start-up and operate the CFW-09:
Chapter 1: Safety Notices;
Chapter 2: General Information and Receiving the CFW-09;
Chapter 3: Information about the CFW-09 physical installation, electrical connection (power and control circuit) and installation of optional devices;
Chapter 4: Keypad (HMI) Operation (Human-Machine Interface - keyboarddisplay);
Chapter 5: Start-up (Step-by-step);
Chapter 6: Detailed Programming Parameters Description;
Chapter 7: Diagnostics, troubleshooting, cleaning instructions and preventive maintenance;
Chapter 8: Technical description of CFW-09 optional devices and accessories;
Chapter 9: Technical specifications (electrical and mechanical).
This Manual provides information for the correct use of the CFW-09. The
CFW-09 is very flexible and allows for the operation in many different modes as described in this manual.
As the CFW-09 can be applied in several ways, it is impossible to describe here all of the application possibilities. WEG does not accept any responsibility when the CFW-09 is not used according to this Manual.
No part of this Manual may be reproduced in any form, without the written permission of WEG.
It is important to note the Software Version installed in the Version CFW-09, since it defines the functions and the programming parameters of the inverter.
This Manual refers to the Software version indicated on the inside cover. For example, the Version 1.0X applies to versions 1.00 to 1.09, where “X” is a variable that will change due to minor software revisions. The operation of the CFW-09 with these software revisions are still covered by this version of the Manual.
The Software Version can be read in the Parameter P023.
The CFW-09 is a high performance Variable Frequency Inverter that permits the control of speed and torque of a three-phase AC induction motor. The technological advantage of the CFW-09 is due to the “Vectrue” technology that provides the following benefits:
Programmable scalar (volts/Hz) or Vector Control with the same product;
Vector Control can be programmed for “Sensorless” (that means that standard motors can be controlled without encoder feedback), or “Closed
Loop” (with an encoder attached to the motor shaft);
37
CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION
The Sensorless Vector Control permits high torques and quick response, even at very low speeds and during the starting of the motor;
The “Optimal Braking” function allows controlled motor braking without using a Dynamic Braking (DB) resistor;
“Self-tuning” auto-tune function with Vector Control, permitting automatic setting of the control regulators and control parameters by means of the automatic identification of the motor and the load parameters.
Technical specifications for each model of CFW-09 are described in chapter 9.
The block diagram below gives a general view of the CFW-09:
= DC Link choke connection (optional) only fromsize 2 and up.
= DC Link connection.
= DB resistor connection. Up to size 7 only. Option for sizes 4 to 7.
Power
Supply
Modbus-RTU
PC
SuperDrive Software
Three-phase rectifier
PE
Sensors:
- Ground fault
- Phase-fault
= Phase-fault only from size 3 and up.
RS-232
(optional)
Precharge
Capacitor
Bank
RFI filter
DC Link
POWER
CONTROL
Internal electronics power supplies and control/power interfaces
IGBT
Inverter
Feedbacks:
- voltage
-current
PE
Motor
Keypad
(remote)
Digital
Inputs
(DI1 ... DI6)
Analog
Inputs
(AI1 ... AI2)
PC
PLC
DCS
Keypad
FIELDBUS (Optional):
- Profibus DP
- DeviceNet
- EtherNet/IP
"CC9"
Control
Board w/
32 bits
"RISC"
CPU
EBA/EBB EXPANSION:
(optional)
- isolated RS-485
- 1 digital input
{
{
- 2 digital outputs
- 1 encoder In/Out.
- 1 PTC input
Human - Machine Interface
Figure 2.1 - CFW-09 block diagram
External
Control
Analog
Outputs
(AO1 ... AO2)
Relay
Outputs
(RL1 ... RL3)
38
2.4 CFW-09 IDENTIFICATION LABEL AND CODE NUMBER
CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION
Serial Number
WEG Part
Number
Software
Revision
CFW-09 Model
Nominal Output Data
(Voltage, Frequency)
Nominal Input Data
(Phase, Current and Frequency)
Nominal Output Current and
Switching Frequency for VT and
CT Loads
Location of the CFW-09 Nameplate:
FRONTVIEW VIEW-A
Figure 2.2 - CFW-09 identification
39
40
2.5 RECEIVINGAND
STORAGE
CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION
The standard product is defined as described here:
Degree of protection:
NEMA 1/ IP20: 3.6 A to 240 A/380-480 V models and all 220-230 V and
500-600 V models.
Protected chassis / IP20: 361 A to 600 A/380-480 V models and all 500-
690 V and 660-690 V models.
Human Machine Interface:
HMI-CFW09-LCD (with LED and LCD displays)
Braking:
DB Transistor for DB Resistor braking incorporated in the following models:
6 A to 45 A/220-230 V
3.6 A to 30 A/380-480 V
2.9 A to 14 A/500-600 V
DC Link:
The DC Link choke is included in the standard product for 44A, 53A, 63A and 79 A/500-600 V, all models 500-690 V and 660-690 V models.
DB Transistor can be incorporated as an option in the following models:
54 A to 130 A/220-230 V
38 A to 142 A/380-480 V
22 A to 79 A/500-600 V
Models 180 A to 600 A/380-480 V, 107 A to 472 A/500-690 V and 100 A to
428 A/660-690 V, do not have the capability to use an internal DB Transistor.
In this case, use the external DB Transistor option (refer to item 8.10.3 -
Dynamic Braking Module - DBW-01 and DBW-02).
NOTE!
It is necessary to connect an external braking resistor regardless if the DB
Transistor is built in, optional built in or an external module (DBW).
The CFW-09 is supplied in cardboard boxes up to size 3 (refer to item 9) and for models above, the packing will be with wood pallet and wood box.
The outside of the packing container has a nameplate that is identical to that on the CFW-09. Please check if the nameplate data matches the ordered ones.
The boxes up to size 7 must be placed and opened on a table (sizes above 3 with the help of two persons).
Open the box, remove the cardboard or expanded polystyrene protection.
The boxes of sizes above 7 must be opened on the floor. Open the wood box, remove the expanded polystyrene protection. The CFW-09 must be handled with hoist.
Check if:
CFW-09 nameplate data matches the purchase order;
The equipment has not been damaged during transport.
If any problem is detected, contact the carrier immediately.
If the CFW-09 is not to be installed immediately, store it in a clean and dry room (Storage temperatures between -25°C and 60°C). Cover it to prevent dust, dirt or other contamination of the inverter.
ATTENTION!
If the inverter is stored for long periods, we recommend to power it up once a year during 1 hour. For 220-230 V and 380-480 V models apply supply voltage of approximately 220 Vac, three-phase or single-phase input, 50 or 60 Hz, without connecting motor at output. After this energization, wait 24 hours before installing it. For 500-600 V, 500-690 V and 660-690 V models use the same procedure applying a voltage between 300 and 330 Vac to the inverter input.
41
3.1 MECHANICAL
INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Environment Conditions
3.1.2 Dimensional of CFW-09
CHAPTER 3
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
This chapter describes the procedures for the electrical and mechanical installation of the CFW-09.
These guidelines must be followed for proper CFW-09 operation.
The location of the CFW-09 installation is an important factor to assure good performance and high product reliability.
For proper installation of the inverter, we make the following recommendations:
Avoid direct exposure to sunlight, rain, high moisture and sea air..
Avoid exposure to gases or explosive or corrosive liquids.
Avoid exposure to excessive vibration, dust, oil or any (conductive particles or materials).
Allowed environmental conditions:
Temperature: 0 ºC to 40 ºC (32 ºF to 104 ºF) - nominal conditions.
From 40 ºC to 55 ºC (104 ºF to 131 ºF) - with 2 % current derating for each 1 ºC (33.8 ºF) degree above 40 ºC (104 ºF).
Relative Air Humidity: 5 % to 90 %, non-condensing.
Maximum Altitude: 1000 m (3.300 ft) – nominal conditions.
From 1000 m to 4000 m (3.300 ft to 13.200 ft) – with 1 % current reduction for each 100 m (330 ft) above 1000 m (3.300 ft).
Pollution Degree: 2 (according to EN50178 and UL508C) (It is not allowed the presence of water, condensation or conductive dust/ particles in the air).
External dimensions and mounting holes are according to figure 3.1 and table 3.1.
A
Sizes 1 and 2
L P
Sizes 3 to 8, 8E
A
C
Sizes 9, 10 and 10E
A A
Sizes 3 to 10, 8E and 10E
L P
42
C C
Figure 3.1 - Mounting dimensional drawings of CFW-09
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
Model
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6
Size 7
Size 8
Size 8E
Size 9
Size 10
Size 10E
Height
H mm
(in)
550
(21.65)
675
(26.57)
835
(32.87)
975
(38.38)
210
(8.27)
290
(11.42)
390
(15.35)
475
(18.70)
1145
(45.08)
1020
(39.37)
1185
(46.65)
1185
(46.65)
Width
L mm
(in)
335
(13.19)
335
(13.19)
335
(13.19)
410
(16.14)
143
(5.63)
182
(7.16)
223
(8.78)
250
(9.84)
410
(16.14 )
688
(27.56)
700
(27.56)
700
(27.56)
Depth
P mm
(in)
A mm
(in)
B mm
(in)
C mm
(in)
D mm
(in)
196
(7.72)
196
(7.72)
121 180 11 9.5
(4.76) (7.09) (0.43) (0.37)
161 260 10.5
9.5
(6.34) (10.24) (0.41) (0.37)
274 150 375 36.5
5
(10.79) (5.90) (14.76) (1.44) (0.20)
274 150 450 50 10
(10.79) (5.90) (17.72) (1.97) (0.39)
274 200 525 67.5
10
(10.79) (7.87) (20.67) (2.66) (0.39)
300
(11.77)
200
(7.87)
650 67.5
10
(25.59) (2.66) (0.39)
300 200 810 67.5
10
(12.20) (7.87) (31.89) (2.66) (0.39)
370 175 950 67.5
10
(14.57) (10.83) (37.40) (2.66) (0.39)
370 275 1120 67.5
10
(14.57) (10.83) (44.09) (2.66) (0.39)
492 275 985 69 15
(19.33) (10.83) (37.99) (2.95) (0.59)
492 275 1150 69 15
(19.33) (10.83) (45.27) (2.95) (0.59)
582 275 1150 69 15
(22.91) (10.83) (45.27) (2.95) (0.59)
Table 3.1 - Installation data – Refer to item 9.1
Mounting
Screw mm
(in)
M8
(5/16)
M8
(5/16)
M8
(5/16)
M8
(5/16)
M5
(3/16)
M5
(3/16)
M6
(1/4)
M6
(1/4)
M8
(5/16)
M10
(3/8)
M10
(3/8)
M10
(3/8)
3.1.3 Mounting Specifications
Weight
Kg
(lb)
41
(90.4)
55
(121.3)
70
(154.3)
100
(220.5)
3.5
(7.7)
6.0
(13.2)
19.0
(41.9)
22.5
(49.6)
115
(253)
216
(476.2)
259
(571)
310
(682)
Degree of
Protection
NEMA1/
IP20
IP20
For installing the CFW-09, leave at least the minimum free spaces around the inverter according to figure 3.2. The dimensions of these free spaces are described on table 3.2.
Install the inverter in the vertical position according to the following recommendations:
1) Install the inverter on a flat surface.
2) Do not install heat sensitive components immediately above the inverter.
3) For the inverters 45 A to 130 A/220-230 V, 30 A to 600 A/380-480 V, 22 A to 32 A/ 500-600 V, 44 A to 79 A/500-600 V, 107 A to 472 A/500-690 V and
100 A to 428 A/660-690 V:
-First partially tighten the bolts on the surface, then install the inverter and screw-down the bolts.
4) For inverters 6 A to 28 A/220-230 V, 3.6 A to 24 A/380-480 V and 2.9 A to
14 A/500-600 V:
-Install the 2 bottom mounting bolts first, rest the inverter on the base and then mount the 2 top bolts.
43
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
ATTENTION!
When inverters are installed side by side, maintain the minimum recommended distance B. When inverters are installed top and bottom, maintain the minimum recommended distanceA+ C and deflect the hot air coming from inverter below.
ATTENTION!
Provide independent conduits for signal, control and power conductors (Refer to item 3.2: Electrical Installation).
A
B B
3.1.3.1 Mounting Inside a Panel
C
Figure 3.2 - Free space for cooling
Model
CFW-09
6 A to 28 A/220-230 V
3.6 A to 24 A/380-480 V
2.9 A to 14 A/500-600 V
45 A to 130 A/220-230 V
30 A to 142 A/380-480 V
22 A to 79 A/500-600 V
180 A to 361 A/380-480 V
450 A to 600 A/380-480 V
107 A to 472 A/500-690 V
100 A to 428 A/660-690 V
A mm (in)
40
(1.57)
100
(4)
150
(6)
B mm (in)
30
(1.18)
40
(1.57)
55 (2.17)
80
(3.15)
Table 3.2 - Recommended free spaces
C mm (in)
50
(2)
130
(5.12)
250
(10)
When inverters are installed in panels or closed metallic boxes, adequate cooling is required to ensure that the temperature around the inverter will not exceed the maximum allowed temperature. Refer to Dissipated Power in item 9.1.
For reference, table 3.3 shows the minimum panel dimension and required airflow.
44
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
3.1.3.2 Mounting on Surface a) Sizes 1 and 2
Table 3.3 - Required panel air flow (minimum)
Figure 3.3 shows the installation of the CFW-09 on a mounting plate.
b) Sizes 3 to 8
Figure 3.3 a) and b) - Mounting procedure for the CFW-09 on a surface
45
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION c) Sizes 9 and 10 d) Positioning (for all Sizes)
Air Flow
Figure 3.3 c) and d) - Mounting procedure for the CFW-09 on a surface
3.1.3.3
Mounting with the
Heatsink Through a Surface
The CFW-09 can also be installed with the heatsink through the mounting plate, as shown in figure 3.4.
In this case, refer to installation drawings shown in figure 3.4 c) and maintain the distances indicated in table 3.4.
NOTE!
When installing the heatsink through the mounting surface, according to figure 3.4, the degree of protection behind this surface is NEMA 1 / IP20.
NEMA1 rating does not protect against dust and water.
46
a) Sizes 1 and 2
Step 1
4 mm(1/6 in) max.
b) Sizes 3 to 8E
Air
Flow
Step 1
Kit-KMF
Top Support
Step 2
Step 2
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
Step3
Step 3
Air
Flow
4 mm(1/6 in) max.
Kit-KMF
Botton Support c) Cutout Dimensions (Refer to table 3.4)
Sizes 1 and 2
Sizes 3 to 8
Figure 3.4 a) to c) - Mounting procedure for the CFW-09 with the heatsink through the mounting surface
47
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
CFW-09
Size
L1 mm
(in)
H1 mm
(in)
A1 mm
(in)
B1 mm
(in)
C1 mm
(in)
D1 mm
(in)
Emim.
mm
Kit KMF
(*)
Through
(in) Surface Mounting item nº
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6
Size 7
Size 8
Size 8E
337
(13.27)
13.27
(13.27)
337
(13.27)
412
(16.22)
412
(16.22)
139
(5.47)
178
(7.00)
225
(7.00)
252
(9.92)
196
(7.72)
276
(10.87)
372
(14.64)
452
(17.79)
527
(20.75)
652
(25.67)
812
(31.97)
952
(37.48)
1122
(44.17)
127
(5.00)
167
6
6
(6.57) (10.67) (0.24)
150 37.5
(6.57) (15.75) (1.44)
150 51
(5.91) (18.90) (1.97)
200 68.5
(7.87) (21.85) (2.70)
200 68.5
(7.87) (26.77) (2.70)
200 68.5
(7.87) (33.07) (2.70)
275 68.5
(10.38) (38.58) (2.70)
275
191
(7.52) (0.24)
271
400
480
555
680
840
980
1150 68.5
(10.83) (45.27) (2.70)
2.5
(0.10)
2.5
(0.10)
14
(0.59)
14
(0.59)
14
(0.59)
14
(0.59)
14
(0.59)
14
(0.59)
14
(0.59)
6
(0.24)
6
(0.24)
8
(0.31)
8
(0.31)
10
(0.35)
10
(0.39)
10
(0.39)
10
(0.39)
10
(0.39)
------------
------------
417102514
417102515
417102516
417102517
417102518
417102519
(*)
The Through Surface Mounting kit (kit-KMF) is a set of supports for the CFW-09 as shown on figure 3.4 b).
Table 3.4 - Cutout dimensions and kits for CFW-09 through surface mounting
3.1.4 Keypad (HMI) and
Cover Removal a) Sizes 1 and 2 b) Sizes 3 to 8 and 8E
Screw
Figure 3.5 a) and b) – Keypad (HMI) and cover removal procedure
48
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION c) Sizes 9 and 10, 10E
Screw
Figure 3.5 c) – Keypad (HMI) and cover removal procedure
3.2 ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Power/Grounding
Terminals
DANGER!
The information below will be a guide to achieve a proper installation. Follow also all applicable local standards for electrical installations.
DANGER!
Be sure that the AC input power is disconnected before making any terminal connection.
DANGER!
The CFW-09 frequency inverter cannot be used as an emergency stop device.
Provide another devices for this function.
The power connection terminals can be of different sizes and configurations, depending on the inverter model as shown in figure 3.6.
Terminals:
R, S, T: AC supply line. Models up to 10 A at 220-230 V can be operated with two phases (single-phase operation) without current derating. In this case the AC supply can be connected to any 2 of the 3 input terminals.
U, V, W: Motor connection.
-UD: Negative pole of the DC Link circuit.
BR: Dynamic Braking resistor connection.
+UD: Positive pole of the DC Link circuit.
DCR: Connection to the external DC Link choke (optional).
PE: Ground Safety.
49
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION a) Size 1 models b) Size 2 models c) Size 3, 4 and 5 models d) Size 6 and 7 (220-230 V and 380-480 V models) e) Size 7 (500-600 V models) f) Size 8 (380-480 V models) g) Size 9 and 10 (380-480 V models) h) Size 8E (500-690 V and 660-690 V models)
Figure 3.6 a) to h) - Power terminals
50
i) Size10E (500-690 V and 660-690 V models)
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
3.2.2 Location of the Power/
Grounding/Control
Connections a) Size 1 and 2 models
Figure 3.6 i) - Power terminals b) Size 3, 4 and 5 models
CONTROL
POWER
GROUNDING
Note:
No voltage selection needed for these models
Figure 3.7 a) and b) - Location of the power/grounding/control connections and rated voltage
51
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION c) Size 6 and 7 models
RATED VOLTAGE
SELECTION d) Size 8 models
RATED VOLTAGE
SELECTION e) Size 9 and 10 models
RATED VOLTAGE
SELECTION
CONTROL
CONTROL
POWER
POWER
POWER
CONTROL
GROUNDING
GROUNDING GROUNDING
52 f) Size 8E g) Size 10E
RATED VOLTAGE
SELECTION
AUXILIARY
CIRCUITFUSES
POWER
CONTROL
CONTROL
AUXILIARY
CIRCUITFUSES
POWER
GROUNDING GROUNDING
Figure 3.7 c) to g) - Location of the power/grounding/control connections and rated voltage
RATED VOLTAGE
SELECTION
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
3.2.3 Rated Voltage Selection The following models of CFW-09 inverter series have a jumper for rated voltage selection:
- 86 A/380-480 V.
- 44 A/500-600 V.
- 500-690 V models.
ATTENTION!
It is necessary to adjust the jumper in models 380-480 V when the power supply voltage is different from 440 V and 460 V.Also in models 500-600 V and 500-690 V when the power supply voltage is different from 550 V, 575 V and 600 V.
PROCEDURE:
380-480 V models:
Remove jumper on the LVS1 board (or from the CIP2 for models 180A) from position XC60 (440-460 V) and insert it on the proper position according to the application line voltage.
500-600 V models:
Remove jumper on the LVS2 board from position XC62 (550 V, 575 V,600 V) and insert it on the proper position according to the line voltage.
500-690 V models:
Remove jumper on the CIP3 board from position XC62 (550 V, 575 V,600 V) and insert it on the proper position according to the line voltage.
a) LVS1(size 6 and 7, 380-480 V) b) CIP2 (size 8, 9 and 10, 380-480 V)
RATED VOLTAGE
SELECTION
AUXILIARY
CIRCUITFUSES
AUXILIARY
CIRCUITFUSES
RATEDVOLTAGE SELECTION
Figure 3.8 a) and b) - Rated voltage selection on boards LVS1, CIP2, LVS2 and CIP3
53
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION c) LVS2 (size 7, 500-600 V) d) CIP3 (size 8E and 10E, 500-690 V)
RATEDVOLTAGE SELECTION
AUXILIARY
CIRCUITFUSES
RATEDVOLTAGE SELECTION
Figure 3.8 c) and d) – Rated voltage selection on boards LVS1, CIP2, LVS2 and CIP3
3.2.4 Power/Grounding Wiring and Fuses
ATTENTION!
Sensitive equipment (PLCs, temperature controllers, thermocouples, etc.) and its wiring must stay at a minimum distance of 10 in (0.25 m) from the frequency inverters, the reactors and from the input and motor power cables.
ATTENTION!
When flexible wires are used for power and grounding connections it is necessary to provide appropriate crimp terminals.
Use wire sizing and fuses as recommended in table 3.5.
54
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
CFW-09 Rating
A/volts
CT VT
2.9/500-600 4.2/500-600
3.6/380-480
4.0/380-480 -
-
4.2/500-600 7.0/500-600
5.5/380-480
6.0/220-230
7.0/220-230
9.0/380-480 -
-
-
-
7.0/500-600 10/500-600
10/220-230 -
10/500-600 12/500-600
12/500-600 14/500-600
13/220-230
13/380-480
-
14/500-600
16/220-230
16/380-480
-
22/500-600 27/500-600
24/220-230
24/380-480 -
-
27/500-600 32/500-600
28/220-230 -
30/380-480 36/380-480
32/500-600 -
38/380-480 45/380-480
44/500-600 53/500-600
45/220-230 -
45/380-480 54/380-480
53/500-600 63/500-600
54/220-230 68/220-230
60/380-480 70/380-480
63/500-600 79/500-600
70/220-230 86/220-230
70/380-480 86/380-480
79/500-600 99/500-600
86/220-230 105/220-230
86/380-480 105/380-480
100/660-690 127/660-690
105/220-230 130/220-230
105/380-480 130/380-480
107/500-690 147/500-690
127/660-690 179/660-690
130/220-230 150/220-230
142/380-480 174/380-480
147/500-690 196/500-690
179/660-690 179/660-690
180/380-480
211/380-480 -
-
211/500-690 -
225/660-690 259/660-690
240/380-480 -
247/500-690 315/500-690
259/660-690 305/660-690
305/660-690 340/660-690
312/380-480 -
315/500-690 343/500-690
340/660-690 428/660-690
343/500-690 418/500-690
361/380-480 -
418/500-690 472/500-690
428/660-690 428/660-690
472/500-690 555/500-690
450/380-480
515/380-480
600/380-480
-
-
-
1.5 (14)
1.5 (14)
1.5 (14)
1.5 (14)
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
*1
4.0 (12)
*2
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
Power Cables mm 2
CT
1.5 (14)
(AWG/MCM)
VT
1.5 (14)
-
-
2.5 (12)
-
2.5 (12)
-
-
-
-
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
Grounding Cables mm 2
CT
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
(AWG/MCM)
VT
2.5 (12)
-
-
2.5 (12)
-
2.5 (12)
-
-
-
-
2.5 (12)
4.0 (10)
Max. Power
Terminal Cable Size mm 2 (AWG/MCM)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
2.5 (12)
2.5 (12)
-
-
2.5 (12)
4.0 (10)
-
-
2.5 (12)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
6.0 (8)
6.0 (8)
6.0 (8)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
25 (4)
16 (6)
25 (4)
25 (4)
-
6.0 (8)
-
-
16 (6)
-
16 (6)
-
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
25 (4)
25 (4)
25 (4)
25 (3)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
6.0 (8)
6.0 (8)
6.0 (8)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
-
6.0 (8)
-
-
16 (6)
-
16 (6)
-
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
25 (4)
25 (3)
35 (2)
35 (2)
50 (1)
35 (2)
50 (1)
50 (1)
50 (1)
70 (1/0)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
16 (6)
25 (4)
16 (6)
25 (4)
25 (4)
25 (4)
35 (2)
35 (2)
35 (2)
50 (1)
50 (1)
120 (250)
50 (1)
120 (250)
150 (300)
120 (250)
50 (1)
50 (1)
70 (1/0)
70 (1/0)
70 (1/0)
95 (3/0)
25 (4)
25 (4)
35 (2)
150 (300)
150 (300)
70 (1/0) 95 (3/0) 35 (2) 50 (1) 120 (250)
70 (2/0)
95 (3/0)
95 (3/0)
150 (300)
150 (300)
150 (300)
150 (300)
2x70 (2x2/0)
2x120 (2x4/0)
95 (3/0)
95 (3/0)
-
-
185 (300)
185 (300)
-
150 (300) 2x70 (2x2/0)
150 (300) 2x70 (2x2/0)
2x70 (2x2/0) 2x120 (2x4/0)
-
2x70 (2x2/0) 2x150 (2x250)
2x120 (2x4/0) 2x150 (2x250)
2x120 (2x4/0) 2x150 (2x250)
-
35 (2)
50 (1)
70 (1/0)
70 (1/0)
70 (1/0)
70 (1/0)
70 (1/0)
2x70 (2x2/0)
70 (2/0)
50 (1)
50 (1)
-
70 (1/0)
70 (1/0)
-
70 (2/0)
70 (2/0)
120 (4/0)
2x120 (2x4/0) 2x150 (2x250)
2x150 (2x250)2x150 (2x250)
2x150 (2x250) 3x120 (3x4/0)
2x150 (2x250)
70 (2/0)
70 (2/0)
-
120 (4/0)
120 (4/0) 1x150 (1x250)
120 (4/0) 1x150 (1x250)
120 (4/0) -
120 (4/0) 1x150 (1x250)
1x150 (1x250) 1x150 (1x250)
1x150 (1x250) 2x95 (2x3/0)
3x120 (3x4/0)
3x150 (3x250)
-
150 (250)
2x70 (2x2/0)
-
-
2x95 (2x3/0) -
CT
- Constant Torque / VT - Variable Torque
*1
- Three phase connection / *2 - Single phase connection
150 (300)
150 (300)
150 (300)
150 (300)
2x240 (2x500)
150 (300)
2x240 (2x500)
2x240 (2x500)
2x240 (2x500)
240 (500)
2x240 (2x500)
2x240 (2x500)
2x240 (2x500)
240 (500)
2x240 (2x500)
2x240 (2x500)
2x240 (2x500)
2x240 (2x500)
2x240 (2x500)
2x240 (2x500)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
2.5 (12)
4.0 (10)
25 (4)
4.0 (10)
4.0 (10)
25 (4)
6.0 (8)
16 (6)
25 (4)
25 (4)
120 (250)
25 (4)
25 (4)
120 (250)
50 (1)
50 (1)
120 (250)
Table 3.5 – Recommended wiring/fuses - Use 75 ºC copper wires only
I 2
Fuse t @25°C
A 2 s
450
450
450
450
450
450
450
450
450
450
450
500
500
500
500
7200
500
1250
7200
1250
2100
7200
7200
14400
2450
7200
14400
7200
14400
14400
14400
21600
14400
21600
320000
21600
320000
320000
21600
320000
320000
320000
320000
320000
320000
320000
320000
414000
414000
414000
414000
1051000
414000
414000
1051000
1445000
1445000
1051000
1445000
1445000
35
35
63
63
63
80
80
80
80
50
50
50
50
50
35
35
50
100
125
125
125
250
High Speed
Semiconductor
Fuse - A
15
15
15
15
25
25
25
25
25
25
35
25
35
*1
*2
35
250
250
250
250
500
500
500
500
700
700
500
700
700
900
700
900
900
250
250
250
315
250
315
315
500
55
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
NOTE!
The wire sizing indicated in table 3.5 are reference values only. The exact wire sizing depends on the installation conditions and the maximum acceptable line voltage drop.
The tightening torque is as indicated in table 3.6. Use 75ºC copper wire only.
CFW-09 Rating
A/Volts
6 A to 13 A/220-230 V
3.6 A to 13 A/380-480 V
16 A to 28 A/220-230 V
16 A to 24 A/380-480 V
2.9 A to 14 A/500-600 V
30 A/380-480 V
45 A/220-230 V
38 A to 45 A/380-480 V
22 A to 32 A/500-600 V
54 A to 86 A/220-230 V
60 A to 86 A/380-480 V
105 A to 130 A/220-230 V
105 A to 142 A/380-480 V
44 A to 79 A/500-600 V
180 A to 240 A/380-480 V
312 A to 600 A/380-480 V
107 A to 472 A/500-690 V
100 A to 428 A/660-690 V
Grounding
Wiring
N.m (Ibf.in)
1.00 (8.85)
2.00 (17.70)
4.50 (39.83)
4.50 (39.83)
4.50 (39.83)
15.50 (132.75)
15.50 (132.75)
30.00 (265.50)
Power Cables
N.m (Ibf.in)
1.76 (15.58)
2.00 (17.70)
1.40 (12.30)
1.40 (12.30)
3.00 (26.10)
15.50 (132.75)
30.00 (265.50)
60.00 (531.00)
Table 3.6 - Recommended tightening torque for power and grounding connections
Line Fuses
For protecting the input rectifier diodes and the wiring, use UR Type
(Ultra-Rapid) fuses with i 2 t equal or lower than indicated in table 3.5.
Standard fuses may be used optionally at the input with currents as indicated in table 3.5, or circuit breakers dimensioned for 1.2 x rated inverter input current for the CT or the VT operation (refer to items 9.1.2
to 9.1.5).
However in this case, only the installation will be protected against shortcircuit, but not the diodes of the rectifier bridge at the inverter input. This option may damage the inverter in case of short-circuit of some internal component.
56
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
3.2.5 Power Connections
3.2.5.1
AC Input
Connection
PE R S T U V W PE
PE
Shielding
R
S
T
Supply
Disconnect
Fuses
Figure 3.9 - Power/grounding connections
PE W V U
DANGER!
Provide an AC input disconnecting switch to switch OFF input power to the inverter.
This device shall disconnect the inverter from theAC input supply when required
(e.g. during maintenance services). However it cannot be used as an emergency stop device.
ATTENTION!
The neutral conductor of theAC input for the inverter must be physically grounded, but do not use it for grounding purpose of the inverter(s).
ATTENTION!
A contactor or another device that frequently disconnects and reapplies the AC supply to the inverter in order to start and stop the motor may cause damage to the inverter power section. The drive is designed to use control signals for starting and stopping the motor. If used, the input device must not exceed one operation every 6 minutes otherwise the inverter may be damaged.
ATTENTION!
Set jumper to select the rated line voltage 380-480 V, for inverters 86A or higher.
Refer to item 3.2.3.
NOTE!
The AC input voltage must be compatible with the inverter rated voltage.
Supply line capacity
:
The CFW-09 is suitable for use in circuits capable of supplying not more than
30.000 A (rms) symmetrical (230 V/480 V/600 V/690 V).
The CFW-09 can be installed on power supplies with a higher fault level provided that adequate protection is provided by the fuses or circuit breaker.
DC Link Inductor/Line Reactor
Refer to item 8.7 relating to the requirement for using the Line Reactor / DC Link
Inductor.
NOTE!
Capacitors for power factor correction are not required at the input (R, S,T) and they MUST not be connected at the output (U, V, W).
57
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
3.2.5.2
Output Connections The inverter is provided with electronic protection against motor overload.
This protection must be set according the specific motor. When the same inverter drives several motors, use individual overload relays for each motor. Maintain the electrical continuity of the motor cable shield.
ATTENTION!
If a disconnect switch or a contactor is inserted in the motor supply line,
DO NOT operate the disconnect switch with the motor running or when inverter is enabled. Maintain the electrical continuity of the motor cable shield.
Dynamic Braking (DB)
With the Dynamic Braking (DB) option, the DB resistor shall be mounted externally. Figure 8.22 shows how to connect the DB resistor. Size it according to the application, not exceeding the maximum current of the braking circuit.
Use twisted cable for the connection between inverter and DB resistor.
Provide physical separation between this cable and the signal and control cables. When the DB resistor is mounted inside the panel, consider the watt loss generated when the enclosure size and ventilation required are calculated.
3.2.5.3
Grounding Connections
DANGER!
Inverters must be grounded for safety purposes (PE). The earth or ground connection must comply with the local regulations. For grounding use cables with cross section as indicated in table 3.5. Make the ground connection to a grounding bar or to the general grounding point (resistance 10 ohms).
DANGER!
Do not share the ground wiring with other equipment that operates with high current (for instance, high voltage motors, welding machines, etc.). If several inverters are used together, refer to figure 3.10.
CFW-09 1 CFW-09 2 CFW-09 N CFW-09 1 CFW-09 2
Figure 3.10 - Grounding connections for more than one inverter
58
3.2.5.4
IT Networks
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
ATTENTION!
Do not use the neutral from the main power supply to ground the inverter.
EMI
When electromagnetic interference (EMI), generated by the inverter, causes problems with other equipment, use shielded wires or install the motor wires in metallic conduits. Connect one end of the shielding to the inverter grounding point and the other end to the motor frame.
Motor frame
Always ground the motor frame. Ground the motor in the panel where the inverter is installed or ground it to the inverter. The inverter output wiring must be laid separately from the input wiring, as well as from the control and signal cables.
ATTENTION!
For IT networks (also known as ungrounded or high earthing impedance networks) it is necessary to consider the following:
Models 180 A to 600 A/380-480 V, 2.9 A to 79 A/500-600 V, 107 A to 472 A/
500-690 V and 100 A to 428 A/660-690 V have a varistor and capacitor connected between input phase and ground that must be disconnected if an
IT network is used for that, remove the jumper as shown in figure 3.11.
In 500-600 V/500-690 V/660-690 V models, the jumper is accessible taking out (models 2.9 A to 14 A/500-600 V) or opening (models 22 A to 79 A/500-
600 V, 107 A to 211 A/500-690 V and 100 A to 179 A/660-690 V) the front cover or taking out the connections cover (247Ato 472A/500-600 V and 225A to 428 A/660-690 V).
In models 180 A to 600 A/380-480 V, besides opening or taking out the front cover(s), it is required to remove the control board mounting plate (shield).
The external RFI filters that are necessary in order to fulfill the requirements of European EMC Directive as stated in item 3.3, cannot be used with IT networks.
The user must check and assume the responsibility of personnel electrical shock risk when using inverters in IT networks.
About the use of a differential relay at the inverter input:
- The indication of phase-to-ground short-circuit must be processed by the user, in order to indicate only a fault message or to turn off the inverter.
- Check with the relay manufacturer its proper operation with frequency inverters, because of the existing high-frequency leakage currents flowing through the inverter, cable and motor parasitic capacitances to the earth.
59
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION a) Models 180 A to 240 A/380-480 V
For IT networks remove the jumper b) Models 312 A to 600 A/380-480 V
For IT networks remove the jumper c) Models 2.9 A to 14 A/500-600 V
J8 jumper position:
X11 - Grounded network
X9 - IT network d) Models 22 A to 32 A/500-600 V
For IT networks remove the jumper e) Models 44 A to 79 A/500-600 V
For IT networks remove the jumper f) Models 107 A to 211 A/500-600 V and 100 A to 179 A/660-690 V
For IT networks remove the jumper g) Models 247 A to 472 A/500-600 V and 225 A to 428 A/660-690 V
For IT networks remove the jumper
60
Figure 3.11 a) to g) - Location of jumper to disconnect the varistor and capacitor between input phase and ground necessary only in models when IT network is used
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
3.2.6 Control Wiring
5 k
CW
CCW rpm
A
The control wiring (analog inputs/outputs, digital inputs/outputs and relay outputs) is made on the following terminal blocks of the Electronic Control Board CC9
(refer to location in figures 3.7, item 3.2.2).
XC1: Digital and Analog Signals
XC1A: Relay Outputs
The following diagram shows the control wiring with the digital inputs as active high as set on factory (jumper between XC1:8 and XC1:10).
(*)
Terminal XC1
1 DI1
2 DI2
3 DI3
4 DI4
5 DI5
6 DI6
7 COM
8 COM
9 24 Vdc
10 GND
11 +REF
12 AI1+
Factory Default Function
Start / Stop
FWD / REV Section (Remote Mode)
No function
No function
JOG (Remote Mode)
Ramp 2 Selection
Digital Inputs Common
Digital Inputs Common
Digital inputs 24 Vdc source
0 V Reference of the 24 Vdc Source
Positive Reference for Potentiometer
Analog Input 1:
Speed Reference (Remote Mode)
Specifications
6 Isolated Digital Inputs
Minimum High Level: 18 Vdc
Maximum Low Level: 3 Vdc
Maximum Voltage: 30 Vdc
Input Current:
11 mA @ 24 Vdc
Isolated 24 Vdc ± 8 %, Capac: 90 mA
Grounded by a 249 resistor
+ 5.4 Vdc ± 5 %, Capacity: 2 mA
Valid for AI1 and AI2 differential, resolution: 10 bits, (0 to 10) Vdc or
(0 to 20) mA / (4 to 20) mA 13 AI1-
14
15
- REF
AI2+
Negative Reference for Potentiometer
Analog Input 2:
No Function
-4.7 Vdc ± 5 %, Capacity: 2 mA
Valid for AI1 and AI2
Impedance: 400 k [(0 to 10) Vdc]
500 [(0 to 20) mA / (4 to 20) mA] 16 AI2-
17 AO1
Analog Output 1: Speed (0 to 10) Vdc, RL 10 k (Max load.) resolution: 11bits
18
19
GND (AO1)
AO2
0 V Reference for Analog Outputs
Analog Output: Motor Current (0 to 10) Vdc, RL 10 k (Max load.) resolution: 11 bits
20 GND (AO2)
Terminal XC1A
21 RL1 NC
22 RL1 NO
23 RL2 NO
24 RL1 C
25 RL2 C
26 RL2 NC
27
28
RL3 NO
RL3 C
0 V Reference for Analog Outputs
Factory Default Function
Relay Output - No Fault
Relay Output - Speed > P288 (N > Nx)
Relay Output - No Fault
Relay Output - Speed > P288 (N > Nx)
Relay Output - Speed Reference >
P288 (N* > Nx)
Grounded by a 5.1 resistor
Specification
Contact capacity:
Note: NC
= normally closed contact, NO = normally open contact, C = common
(*) Factory default jumper
1 A
240 Vac
Figure 3.12 a) - XC1/XC1A control terminals description (CC9 board) - Active high digital inputs
61
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
5 k
CW
CCW rpm
A
The following diagram shows the control wiring with the digital inputs as active low (without a jumper between XC1:8 and XC1:10).
Terminal XC1
1 DI1
2 DI2
3 DI3
4 DI4
5 DI5
6 DI6
7 COM
8 COM
9 24 Vdc
10 GND
11 +REF
12 AI1+
Factory Default Function
Start / Stop
FWD / REV Section (Remote Mode)
No function
No function
JOG (Remote Mode)
Ramp 2 Selection
Digital Inputs Common
Digital Inputs Common
Digital inputs 24 Vdc source
0 V Reference of the 24 Vdc Source
Positive Reference for Potentiometer
Specifications
6 Isolated Digital Inputs
Minimum High Level: 18 Vdc
Maximum Low Level: 3 Vdc
Maximum Voltage: 30 Vdc
Input Current:
11 mA @ 24 Vdc
13 AI1-
Analog Input 1:
Speed Reference (Remote Mode)
Isolated 24 Vdc ± 8 %,Capac: 90 mA
Grounded by a 249 resistor
+ 5.4 Vdc ± 5 %, Capacity: 2 mA
Valid for AI1 and AI2 differential, resolution: (0 to 10) Vdc or
(0 to 20) mA / (4 to 20) mA
14 - REF Negative Reference for Potentiometer -4.7 Vdc ± 5 %, Capacity: 2 mA
Valid for AI1 and AI2
15 AI2+ Analog Input 2:
No Function
16 AI2-
500 [(0 to 20) mA / (4 to 20) mA]
17
18
19
AO1
GND (AO1)
AO2
Analog Output 1: Speed
0 V Reference for Analog Outputs
Analog Output: Motor Current resolution: 11 bits
Grounded by a 5.1 resistor
(0 to 10) Vdc, RL 10 k (Max. Load)
Resolution: 11 bits
20 GND (AO2)
Terminal XC1A
21 RL1 NC
22 RL1 NO
0 V Reference for Analog Outputs
Factory Default Function
Relay Output - No Fault
Grounded by a 5.1 resistor
Specification
23 RL2 NO
24 RL1 C
25 RL2 C
26 RL2 NC
Relay Output - Speed > P288 (N > Nx)
Relay Output - No Fault
Relay Output - Speed > P288 (N > Nx)
Contact capacity:
27 RL3 NO
Relay Output - Speed Reference > P288
28 RL3 C
(N* > Nx)
Note: NC
= normally closed contact, NO = normally open contact, C = common
1 A
240 Vac
Figure 3.12 b) - XC1/XC1A control terminals description (CC9 board) - active low digital inputs
NOTE!
For using the digital inputs as active low it is necessary to remove the jumper between XC1:8 and XC1:10 and place it between XC1:7 and XC1:9.
62
CC9 Board
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
* Can be used for grounding of the signal and control cable shields
Figure 3.13 - Dip switch position for
(0 to 10) V or (0 to 20) mA/(4 to 20) mA selection
As a default the analogue inputs are selected as (0 to 10) V. This can be changed using the dip switch S1 on the control board.
Analog
Input
AI1
AI2
Factory Default
Function
Speed Reference
No Function
Dip
Switch
S1.2
S1.1
Selection
OFF
(0 to 10) V (Factory Default)
ON
(4 to 20) mA / (0 to 20) mA
OFF
(0 to 10) V (Factory Default)
ON
(4 to 20) mA / (0 to 20) mA
Table 3.7 - Dip switch configuration
Related Parameters: P221, P222, P234 to P240.
During the signal and control wire installation you must follow these guidelines:
1) Cable Cross Section: 0.5 mm² (20 AWG) to 1.5 mm² (14 AWG );
2) Max. Torque: 0.50 N.m (4.50 lbf.in);
3) XC1 wiring must be connected with shielded cables and installed separately from other wiring (power, control at 110 V/220 Vac, etc.), according to table 3.8.
Inverter Model
Output current
24 A
Output current
28 A
Wiring
Length
100 m (330 ft)
> 100 m (330 ft)
30 m (100 ft)
> 30 m (100 ft)
Min. Separation
Distance
10 cm (4 in)
25 cm (10 in)
10 cm (4 in)
25 cm (10 in)
Table 3.8 - Wiring separation distances
If the crossing of these cables is unavoidable, install them perpendicular, maintaining a minimum separation distance of 5 cm (2 in) at the crossing point.
63
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
Connect the shield as shown in figure 3.14.
Insulate with Tape
Inverter
Side
3.2.7 Typical Terminal
Connections
Do Not Ground
Connect to Ground:
Screw located on the CC9 Board and on support plate of the CC9 Board
Figure 3.14 - Shield connection
4) For wiring distances longer than 50 m (150 ft), it is necessary to use galvanic isolators for the XC1:11 to XC1:20 analog signals.
5) Relays, contactors, solenoids or electromagnetic braking coils installed near inverters can generate interference in the control circuit. In order to eliminate this interference, connect RC suppressors in parallel with the coils of AC relays. Connect a free - wheeling diode in case of DC relays/ coils.
6) When an external keypad (HMI) is used (Refer to chapter 8), separate the cable that connects the keypad to the inverter from other cables, maintaining a minimum distance of 10 cm (4 in) between them.
Connection 1 – Keypad Start/Stop (Local Mode)
With the factory default setting, you can operate the inverter in the local mode. This operation mode is recommended for users who are operating the inverter for the first time; without additional control connections. For start-up according to this operation mode, follow chapter 5.
Connection 2 - 2-Wire Control Start/Stop (Remote Mode)
Valid for factory default setting and inverter operating in remote mode. For the factory default programming, the selection of the operation mode (Local/
Remote) is made via the key to remote P220 = 3.
(default is Local). Pass default of the key
64
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
Start/Stop
FWD/REV
JOG
CW
5 k
CCW
Connector XC1
1 DI1
6
7
4
5
2
3
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
COM
8 COM
9 24 Vdc
10 GND
11 + REF
12 AI1 +
13 AI1 -
14 - REF
Figure 3.15 - XC1 (CC9) wiring for connection 2
Connection 3 - 3-Wire Control Start/Stop
Selection of function Start/Stop with 3 wire control.
Parameters to be programmed:
Set DI3 to START
P265 = 14
Set DI4 to STOP
P266 = 14
Program P224 = 1 (DIx) if you want the 3 wire control in local mode.
Program P227 = 1 (DIx) if you want the 3 wire control in remote mode.
To program the rotation selection via DI2
Set P223 = 4 if in Local Mode or
Set P226 = 4 if in Remote Mode.
S1 and S2 are momentary push buttons, NO contact for Start and NC contact for Stop.
The speed reference can be viaAnalog InputAI (as in Connection 2), via keypad
(HMI) (as in Connection 1), or via any other source. The function Start/Stop is described in chapter 6 in this manual.
FWD/REV
Start
Stop
Connector XC1
1
2
3
DI1
DI2
DI3
4
5
6
7
DI4
DI5
DI6
COM
8 COM
9 24 Vdc
10 GND
Figure 3.16 - XC1 (CC9) wiring for connection 3
65
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
Connection 4 - FWD Run / REV Run
Selection function FWD/REV.
Parameters to be programmed:
Set DI3 to FORWARD Run
P265 = 8
Set DI4 to REVERSE Run
P266 = 8
When the FWD Run / REV Run Function is programmed, the function is always active, in both local and remote operation modes.
At the same time, the keys or P227 = 0) and remain inactive (even when P224 = 0
The direction of rotation is defined automatically by the FWD Run / REV Run commands.
Clockwise rotation for Forward and Counter Clockwise rotation for Reverse.
The speed reference can be from any source (as in Connection 3).
FWD Run S1
REV Run S2
4
5
6
7
Connector XC1
1
2
3
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
COM
8 COM
9 24 Vdc
10 GND
Figure 3.17 - XC1 (CC9) wiring for connection 4
66
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
3.3
European EMC Directive -
Requirements for
Conforming Installations
The CFW-09 inverter series was designed taking in consideration safety and
EMC aspects. The CFW-09 units do not have an intrinsic function until connected with other components (e.g. a motor). Therefore, the basic product is not CE marked for compliance with the EMC Directive. The end user takes personal responsibility for the EMC compliance of the whole installation.
However, when installed according to the recommendations described in the product manual and including the recommended filters/EMC measures the
CFW-09 fulfill all requirements of the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) as defined by the Product Standard EN61800-3 “Adjustable speed electrical power drives systems”, specific for variable speed drives systems.
Compliance of the whole series of the CFW-09 is based on testing some representative models. A Technical Construction File was checked and approved by a Competent Body.
The CFW-09 inverter series are intended for professional applications only.
Therefore, the harmonic current emissions defined bythe standards EN 61000-
3-2 and EN 61000-3-2/A 14 do not apply.
3.3.1 Installation
NOTE!
The 500-600 V models are intended to be connected to an industrial low voltage power supply network, or public network which does not supply buildings used for domestic purpose - second environment according to the EN61800-3 standard.
The filters specified in items 3.3.2 and 3.3.3 do not apply to the 500-600 V models.
For installing the frequency inverters in accordance to the Product Standard
EN61800-3 the following items are required:
1. Output cables (motor wiring) must be flexible armored or to be installed inside a metallic conduit or in a tray with equivalent attenuation.
2. The control (inputs and outputs) and signal wiring must be shielded or installed inside a metallic conduit or a tray with equivalent attenuation.
3. It is essential to follow the grounding recommendations presented in this manual.
4. For first environment (low-voltage public network): install an RFI filter
(radio-frequency interference filter) at inverter input.
5. For second environment (industrial areas) and unrestricted distribution (EN61800-3)
: install an RFI filter at inverter input.
NOTE!
The use of a filter requires:
The cable’s shielding must be solidly connected to the common backplane, using brackets.
The inverter and the filter must be mounted in close proximity, electrically connected, to one another, on the same metallic backplane. The wiring between them should be kept as short as possible.
Two filters are suggested: Epcos and Schaffner, detailed on the following items
3.3.2 and 3.3.3. Figures 3.18 and 3.19 present a connection diagram for EMC filters, Epcos and Schaffner respectively.
67
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
3.3.2 Epcos Filters
Description of conducted emission classes according to the standard
EN61800-3:
Class B: first environment, unrestricted distribution
Class A1: first environment, restricted distribution
Class A2: second environment, unrestricted distribution
ATTENTION!
For installation with inverters that complies class A1 (first environment restricted distribution), note that this is a product of the restricted sales distribution class according to IEC/EN61800-3 (1996) + A11 (2000). In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
ATTENTION!
For installation with inverters that complies class A2 (second environment unrestricted distribution), note that this product is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is expected if used on such a network.
The following tables 3.9, 3.10 and 3.11 show the Epcos filters for CFW-09 frequency inverters with 380-480 V, 500-600 V and 660-690 V power supply respectively, the maximum motor cable length for conducted emission classes A1, A2 and B (according to EN61800-3) and the electromagnetic radiation disturbance level.
Controling and Signal Wiring
Transformer
Q1
F1
F2
F3
L1
L3
E
Filter
L2
L1
L2
L3
E
XC1 1 to 28
XR U
S
T
PE
CFW - 09
V
W
PE
PE Ground Rod/Grid or
Building Steel
Structure
Panel or Metallic Enclosure
Protective Grounding - PE
Figure 3.18 - Epcos EMC filters connection in CFW-09 frequency inverters
Motor
68
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
380-480 V power supply:
Inverter
Model
3.6 A (2)
4 A (2)
5.5 A (2)
9 A (2)
13 A
16 A
Load Type
CT/VT
CT/VT
CT/VT
CT/VT
CT/VT
CT/VT
Epcos Input Filter
B84143A8R105
B84143A16R105
B84143A25R105
Maximum motor cable length according to conducted emission class (EN61800-3)
Class A2 Class A1 Class B
100 m
N/A
50 m
100 m
20 m
35 m
Inside metallic panel
NO
Electromagnetic radiation disturbance level (Product
Standard EN61800-3
(1996)+A11 (2000))
First environment, restricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
24 A
30 A
CT/VT
CT
VT
B84143A36R105
85 m
First environment, restricted distribution
38 A (3)
CT
VT
CT
B84143A50R105
100 m
50 m
First environment, restricted distribution
45 A
60 A
(3)
VT
CT
VT
B84143A66R105
B84143A90R105
First environment, restricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
70 A
86 A
105 A
142 A
180 A
211 A
240 A
312 A
361 A
450 A
515 A
600 A
(3)
(3)
(3)
CT
VT
CT
VT
CT
VT
CT
VT
CT/VT
CT/VT
CT/VT
CT/VT
CT/VT
CT/VT
CT/VT
CT/VT
B84143A120R105
B84143G150R110
B84143G220R110
B84143B320S20
B84143B400S20
B84143B600S20
B84143B1000S20 (1)
100 m
N/A
100 m
25 m
100 m
25 m
N/A
YES
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
N/A = Not Applicable – The inverters were not tested with these limits.
Notes:
(1)
The RFI filter suggested above for model 600 A/380-480 V considers a power supply with 2 % voltage drop. For a power supply with 4 % voltage drop it’s possible to use B84143B600S20 RFI filter. In this case, consider the same motor cable lengths and radiated emission data as shown in table above.
(2)
Minimum output frequency = 2.9 Hz.
(3)
Minimum output frequency = 2.4 Hz.
Table 3.9 - Epcos filters list for CFW-09 inverter series with 380-480 V power supply
69
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
500-600 V power supply:
Inverter Model
Load
Type
Epcos Input Filter
Maximum motor cable length according to conducted emission class (EN61800-3)
Class
A2
Class
A1
Class
B
Inside metallic panel
107 A/500-690 V
147 A/500-690 V
211 A/500-690 V
247 A/500-690 V
315 A/500-690 V
343 A/500-690 V
418 A/500-690 V
472 A/500-690 V
VT
CT
VT
CT
VT
CT
VT
CT
VT
CT
CT
VT
CT
VT
CT/VT
B84143B150S21
B84143B250S21
B84143B400S125
B84143B600S125
100 m 25 m N/A YES
N/A = Not Applicable – The inverters were not tested with these limits.
Note:
Minimum output frequency = 2.4 Hz.
Table 3.10 - Epcos filters list for CFW-09 inverter series with 500-600 V power supply
Electromagnetic radiation disturbance level
(Product Standard
EN61800-3 (1996)+A11
(2000))
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
660-690 V power supply:
Inverter Model
Load
Type
Epcos Input Filter
Maximum motor cable length according to conducted emission class
(EN61800-3)
Class
A2
Class
A1
Class
B
100 A/660-690 V and
107 A/500-690 V
127 A/660-690 V and
147 A/500-690 V
179 A/660-690 V and
211 A/500-690 V
225 A/660-690 V and
247 A/500-690 V
CT
VT
CT
VT
CT/VT
CT
VT
CT
VT
B84143B150S21
B84143B180S21
100 m
259 A/660-690 V and
315 A/500-690 V
B84143B400S125
305 A/660-690 V and
343 A/500-690 V
CT
VT
340 A/660-690 V and
418 A/500-690 V
428 A/660-690 V and
472 A/500-690 V
CT
VT
CT/VT
B84143B600S125
N/A = Not Applicable – The inverters were not tested with these limits.
Note:
Minimum output frequency = 2.4 Hz.
25 m N/A
Inside metallic panel
YES
Table 3.11 - Epcos filters list for CFW-09 inverter series with 660-690 V power supply
Electromagnetic radiation disturbance level (Product Standard
EN61800-3 (1996)+A11
(2000))
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
70
3.3.3 Schaffner Filters
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
The following tables 3.12 and 3.13 show the Schaffner filters list for CFW-09 inverter series with 380-480 V and 220-230 V power supply, respectively.
Controling and Signal Wiring
Input CM Choke
Transformer
Q1
F1
F2
F3
Filter
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3
E
L3
E
XC1 1 to 28
XR U
S
T
PE
CFW - 09
V
W
PE
Output CM
Choke
PE Ground Rod/Grid or
Building Steel
Structure
Panel or Metallic Enclosure
Protective Grounding - PE
Figure 3.19 - Schaffner EMC filters connection in CFW-09 frequency inverters
380-480 V power supply:
Model Optional Device
3.6 A
4 A, 5 A
9 A
13 A
16 A
24 A
30 A
30 A
38 A
45 A
RS-232
EBA RS-485
Serial Interface
EBA RS-485
Serial Interface
No
No
EBB
RS-485 Serial
Interface
No
No
Input filter
FN-3258-7-45
FN-3258-7-45
FN-3258-16-45
FN-3258-16-45
FN-3258-30-47
Input
CM
Choke
No
No
No
No
No
Output
CM
Choke
No
No
No
No
No
Inside
Metallic
Panel
No
No
No
No
No
Electromagnetic radiation disturbance level
(Product Standard
EN61800-3 (1996)
+ A11 (2000) (1)
First environment, restricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
FN-3258-55-52 Schaffner 203 (1151-
042) -
2 turns (filter input side)
No
No Yes
FN-3258-55-52
FN-3258-100-35 2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) - (filter input/output sides)
No
No
No
No
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
Table 3.12 - Schaffner filters list for CFW-09 inverter series with 380-480 V power supply
Conducted
Emission
Class (2)
B
B
B
B
B
A1
A1
A1
Motor
71
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
380-480 V power supply:
Model Optional Device
45 A
45 A
45 A
60 A
70 A
86 A
105 A
142 A
180 A
211 A
240 A
312 A
361 A
450 A
EBA
RS-485
Serial Interface
EBB
RS-485
Serial Interface
Profibus DP
12 MBaud
No
No
No
No
No
Input filter
FN-3258-100-35
FN-3258-100-35
FN-3258-100-35
FN-3258-100-35
FN-3359-150-28
FN-3359-250-28
FN-3359-250-28
FN-3359-400-99
Input
CM
Choke
2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) - (filter input/ output sides)
2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) - (filter input/output sides)
Schaffner 203 (1151-
042) 2 turns in the control cable
2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) - (filter input/output sides)
No
2 X Schaffner 203
(1151-042)
Output filter side
2 X Schaffner 167
(1151-043) output filter side
Schaffner 159
(1151-044) output filter side
Schaffner 159
(1151-044)
Output filter side
Output
CM
Choke
No
No
No
No
2 X
Schaffner
203
(1151-042)
(UVW)
2 X
Schaffner
167
(1151-043)
(UVW)
Schaffner
159
(1151-044)
(UVW)
Schaffner
159
(1151-044)
(UVW)
Inside
Metallic
Panel
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Electromagnetic radiation disturbance level
(Product Standard
EN61800-3 (1996)
+ A11 (2000) (1)
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
515 A
600 A
No
No
FN-3359-600-99
FN-3359-1000-99
Schaffner 159
(1151-044)
Output filter side
Schaffner 159
(1151-044)
Output filter side
Schaffner
159
(1151-044)
(UVW)
Schaffner
159
(1151-044)
(UVW)
Yes
Yes
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
Notes:
(1) - First environment/restricted distribution (Basic Standard CISPR 11):
30 to 230 MHz: 30 dB (uV/m) in 30 m
230 to 1000 MHz: 37 dB (uV/m) in 30 m
Second environment/unrestricted distribution (Basic Standard CISPR 11: Group 2, class A):
30 to 230 MHz: 40 dB (uV/m) in 30 m
230 to 1000 MHz: 50 dB (uV/m) in 30 m
(2) - Motor shielded cable length:
20 m.
Table 3.12 (cont.) - Schaffner filters list for CFW-09 inverter series with 380-480 V power supply
72
Conducted
Emission
Class (2)
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
220-230 V power supply:
Model
6 A
Optional
Device
No
Input filter
FN-3258-7-45
Common mode Ferrite
(Input)
No
Common mode Ferrite
(Output)
No
Inside
Metallic
Panel
No
Electromagnetic radiation disturbance level
(Product Standard EN61800-
3 (1996)
+ A11 (2000)) (1)
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
7 A
10 A
13 A
16 A
24 A
28 A
45 A
45 A
45 A
45 A
No
No
No
No
EBA
RS-485
Serial Interface
EBB
RS-485
Serial Interface
Profibus DP
12 MBaud
FN-3258-16-45
FN-3258-30-47
FN-3258-55-52
FN-3258-100-35
FN-3258-100-35
FN-3258-100-35
FN-3258-100-35
No
No
No
2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) - (filter input/output sides)
2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) - (filter input/output sides)
2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) - (filter input/output sides)
Schaffner 203 (1151-
042)choke- 2 turns in the control cable
2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) -
(filter input/output sides)
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
54 A
70 A
86 A
105 A
130 A
No
No
No
No
FN-3258-100-35
FN-3258-130-35
FN-3359-150-28
FN-3359-250-28
2 X Schaffner 203
(1151-042)
Filter output side
2 X Schaffner 203
(1151-042)
Filter output side
2 X Schaffner 167
(1151-043)
Filter output side
No
2 X
Schaffner
203
(1151-042)
(UVW)
2 X
Schaffner
203
(1151-042)
(UVW)
2 X
Schaffner
167
(1151-043)
(UVW)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Second environment, unrestricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
First environment, restricted distribution
Notes:
(1) - First environment/restricted distribution (Basic Standard CISPR 11):
30 to 230 MHz: 30 dB (uV/m) in 30 m
230 to 1000 MHz: 37 dB (uV/m) in 30 m
Second environment/unrestricted distribution (Basic Standard CISPR 11: Group 2, class A):
30 to 230 MHz: 40 dB (uV/m) in 30 m
230 to 1000 MHz: 50 dB (uV/m) in 30 m
(2) - Motor shielded cable length:
20 m.
Conducted
Emission
Class (2)
B
B
B
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
Table 3.13 - Schaffner filters list for CFW-09 inverter series with 220-230 V power supply
73
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
3.3.4 EMC Filter Characteristics Table 3.14 shows the main technical characteristics of Epcos and Shaffner filters used in CFW-09 inverter series. Figure 3.20 presents drawings of these filters.
WEG
P/N
Filter Manufacturer
Nominal current [A]
0208.2142
0208.2143
0208.2144
0208.2075
0208.2076
0208.2077
0208.2078
0208.2079
0208.2080
0208.2081
0208.2082
0208.2083
0208.2084
0208.2085
0208.2086
0208.2087
0208.2088
0208.2126
0208.2127
0208.2128
0208.2129
0208.2130
0208.2131
0208.2132
0208.2133
0208.2134
0208.2135
0208.2136
0208.2137
0208.2138
0208.2139
0208.2140
0208.2141
B84143A8R105
B84143A16R105
B84143A25R105
B84143A36R105
B84143A50R105
B84143A66R105
B84143A90R105
B84143A120R105
B84143G150R110
B84143G220R110
B84143B320S20
B84143B400S20
B84143B600S20
B84143B1000S20
B84143B150S21
B84143B180S21
B84143B250S21
B84143B400S125
B84143B600S125
FN3258-7-45
FN3258-16-45
FN3258-30-47
FN3258-55-52
FN3258-100-35
FN3258-130-35
FN3359-150-28
FN3359-250-28
FN3359-400-99
FN3359-600-99
FN3359-1000-99
1151-042
1151-043
1151-044
Epcos
Schaffner
130
150
250
400
600
1000
250
400
600
7
16
30
55
100
150
220
320
400
(*)
600
1000
150
180
50
66
90
120
8
16
25
36
-
(*)
According to the manufacturer, this filter can be used up to 331 A.
Power losses [W]
43
28
57
50
65
91
6
12
26
35
14
33
57
3.8
57
99
12
14
48
60
21
33
15
20
27
39
6
9
12
18
-
Weight
[kg]
4.5
6.5
7.0
10.5
11
18
0.8
1.2
1.8
4.3
15
21
22
0.5
22
28
13
13
8.0
11.5
21
21
0.58
0.90
1.10
1.75
1.75
2.7
4.2
4.9
g h f e i j
Drawing
(figure
3.20) a b c d k l m n o p
t s
Connector type
-
-
/35
/35
/28
/28
/45
/45
/47
/52
Bus /99
Table 3.14 - Technical specifications of EMC filters for the CFW-09 inverter series
74
a) EPCOS B84143A8R105 Filter
8
PE M4 x 11
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
133.7
b) EPCOS B84143A16R105 Filter
9
PE M5 x 15
Terminals 4 mm²
L1
L2
L3 LINE
Marking
LOAD
155
165
L1'
L2'
L3'
199.5
Terminals 4 mm²
L1
L2
L3 LINE
Marking
LOAD
221
231
L1'
L2'
L3'
Figure 3.20 a) and b) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]
75
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION c) EPCOS B84143A25R105 Filter
9
PE M5 x 15
199.5
76
PE M6 x 14 d) EPCOS B84143A36R105 and B84143A50R105 Filter
8
PE M6 x 14
L1
L2
L3 LINE
Marking
LOAD
221
231
L1'
L2'
L3'
200
Terminals 10 mm²
L1
L2
L3 LINE
Marking
LOAD
L1'
L2'
L3'
255
265
Figure 3.20 c) and d) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]
e) EPCOS B84143A66R105 Filter
8
PE M6 x 14
200
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION f) EPCOS B84143A90R105 Filter
25
Terminals 16 mm²
L1
L2
L3 LINE
Marking
255
265
LOAD
L1'
L2'
L3 '
240
13
80
PE M10 x 34
Terminals 35 mm²
290
L1
L2
L3 LINE
Marking
LOAD
255
L1'
L2'
L3'
Figure 3.20 e) and f) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]
4.6
77
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION g) EPCOS B84143A120R105 Filter
240
25 13
90
78
PE M10 x 34
Terminals 35 mm² h) EPCOS B84143G150R110 Filter
90
Terminal blocks
50mm 2
290
L1
L2
L3
LINE
Marking
LOAD
255
L1'
L2'
L3'
350
46
500±10
Litz wire
L3'
L2'
L1'
PE
Wire end ferrule
Litz wire markings
PE M10 x 35
L1
L2
L3
380
365±0.5
Marking
LINE LOAD
Figure 3.20 g) and h) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION i) EPCOS B84143G220R110 Filter
Terminal blocks 95 mm 2
110
PE M10 x 35
L1
L2
L3
400
430
415±0.5
Marking
LINE LOAD
Litz wire Wire end ferrule
500±10
L3'
L2'
L1'
PE
Litz wire markings j) EPCOS B84143B320S20 and B84143B400S20 Filters
60
300
240±1 60 36
91
4 x M6 mm deep
LINE
Marking
LOAD
42±2
15
12
360±2
42±2
15
2
16 85±0.5
116
11 PE M10 x 30
Figure 3.20 i) and j) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]
79
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION k) EPCOS B84143B600S20 Filter
60
350
290±1
60
42±3
15
Marking
LINE LOAD
12
410±2.5
42±3
15
36
91
4 x M6 / mm deep
2
16 85±0.5
116
11 l) EPCOS B84143B1000S20 Filter
65
350
290±1
PE M10 x 30
65 61
141
4 x M6 / 6 mm deep
Marking
LINE LOAD
52±3
20
12
420±2.5
52±3
20
2.5
16 135±0.8
166
80
14
PE M12 x 30
Figure 3.20 k) and l) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]
m) EPCOS B84143B150S21 and B84143B180S21 Filters
32±1
260
150 32±1
10
97.2
LINE
Marking
LOAD
115±0.2
6.6
97.5
310±2 10
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
36
91
2 x M5 / mm deep
2
81
141
9 n) EPCOS B84143B250S21 Filter
60
300
240±0.6
60
42±1
15
LINE
12
Marking
LOAD
360±2
42±1
15
PE M10 x 30
36
91
2
116
2 x M6 / 6 mm deep
11 PE M10 x 30
Figure 3.20 m) and n) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]
81
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION o) EPCOS B84143B400S125 Filter
240
220±1
25
5
82
100
200
Figure 3.20 o) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]
p) EPCOS B84143B600S125 Filter
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
265
240±1
30
8
12
120
215
Figure 3.20 p) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]
83
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION q) Schaffner FN3258-7-45, FN3258-16-45, FN3258-30-47, FN3258-55-52, FN3258-100-35 and FN3258-130-35 filters
Rated Current
Type/35 - Terminal block for flexible and rigid cable of 50 mm 2 or AWG 1/0.
Max.Torque : 8 Nm
Connector
MECHANICALDATASIDE VIEW
FRONTVIEW Type/45 - Terminal block for 6 mm 2 cable, 4 mm 2 flexible cable AWG 12.
solid
Type/47 - Terminal block for 16 mm 2 solid wires,10 mm 2 flexible wires
AWG8.
Top
Figure 3.20 q) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm (in)]
Type/52 - Dimesions in mm (inch)
Terminal block for 25 mm 2 solid wires,16 mm 2 flexible wires AWG 6.
84
CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION r) Schaffner FN3359-150-28, FN3359-250-28, FN3359-400-99, FN3359-600-99 and FN3359-1000-99 filters
Types 400 A to 1000 A
Types 150 A to 250 A
Top Top
RATED CURRENT
Type/28
M10 bolt
Bus bar connection(Type/99)
Series FN 2259
Connector
These filters are supplied with M12 bolts for the grounding connection.
Figure 3.20 r) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]
NOTE!
The declaration of conformity CE is available on the website www.weg.net
or on the CD, which comes with the products.
85
4.1 DESCRIPTION
OF THE KEYPAD
CHAPTER 4
KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION
This chapter describes the CFW-09 operation via the standard Keypad or
Human-Machine Interface (HMI), providing the following information:
General Keypad Description;
Use of the Keypad;
Parameter Programming;
Description of the Status Indicators.
The standard CFW-09 Keypad has two readout displays: a LED readout with a 4 digit, seven-segment display and a LCD display with two lines of
16 alphanumeric characters. There are also 4 indicator LEDs and 8 keys.
Figure 4.1 shows the front view of the Keypad and indicates the position of the readouts, keys and status LEDs.
Functions of the LED Display:
The LED Display shows the fault codes, inverter status, the parameter number and its value. For units of current, voltage or frequency, the LED display shows the unit in the right side digit (L.S.D.) as shown here.
A current (A)
U voltage (V)
H frequency (Hz)
Blank speed and other parameters
NOTE!
When the indication is higher than 9999 (for instance in rpm) the number corresponding to the ten of thousand will not be displayed (ex.: 12345 rpm will be read as 2345 rpm). The correct indication will be displayed only on the LCD display.
LEDs Display
LCD-Display
Green LED "Forward"
Red LED "Reverse"
Green LED "Local"
Red LED "Remote"
Figure 4.1 - CFW-09 standard keypad
Functions of the LCD Display:
The LCD Display shows the parameter number and its value simultaneously, without requiring the toggling of the key. It also provides a brief description of each parameter function, fault code and inverter status.
86
CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION
LOCAL and REMOTE LEDs:
Inverter in Local Mode:
Green LED ON and Red LED OFF.
Inverter in Remote Mode:
Green LED OFF and Red LED ON.
Direction of Rotation (FWD/REV) LEDs:
Refer to figure 4.2 below.
Speed
Forward Reverse Forward
FWD / REV Command (Key or DI2)
ON OFF FLASHING
Figure 4.2 - Direction of rotation (FWD / REV) LEDs
Basic Functions of the Keys:
The functions described below are valid for factory default programming and
Local Mode operation. The actual function of the keys may vary if parameters
P220 through P228 are re-programmed.
Starts the inverter via acceleration ramp.After starting, the display sequences through these units at each touch of the Start key in the order shown here
(refer to item 4.2.2 a): rpm Volts Status Torque % Hz A
Stops (disables) the inverter via deceleration ramp. Also resets the inverter after a fault has occurred.
Toggles the LED display between the parameter number and its value (Number/
Value).
Increases the speed, the parameter number or the parameter value.
Decreases the speed, the parameter number or the parameter value.
Reverses the direction of motor rotation between Forward/Reverse.
Toggles between the LOCAL and REMOTE modes of operation.
Performs the JOG function when pressed.
Any DIx programmed for General Enable must be closed (and the CFW-09 must be stopped) to enable JOG function.
87
CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION
4.2 USE OF THE KEYPAD
(HMI)
4.2.1 Keypad Operation
The keypad is used for programming and operating the CFW-09 allowing the following functions:
Indication of the inverter status and operation variables;
Fault Indication and Diagnostics;
Viewing and programming parameters;
Operation.
All functions relating to the CFW-09 operation (Start, Stop, Motor Direction of
Rotation, JOG, Increment/Decrement of the Speed Reference and Selection of
Local Mode/Remote Mode) can be performed through the Keypad. This is valid with the factory default programming of the inverter.All keypad keys are enabled when the Local Mode has been selected. These same functions can be performed in Remote Mode by means of digital and analog inputs.
Flexibility is provided through the ability to program the parameters that define the input and output functions.
Keypad keys operation description:
Both and keys are enabled when P224 = 0 (I, O Key) for Local Mode and/or P227 = 0 (I, O Key) for Remote Mode.
Starts inverter via Acceleration Ramp.
Stops the inverter via Deceleration Ramp.
NOTE!
It resets the inverter after a Fault Trip (always active).
When the Jog key is pressed, it accelerates the motor according to the
Acceleration Ramp up to the JOG speed programmed in P122 (default is 150 rpm). When released, the motor decelerates according to the Deceleration
Ramp and stops.
Enabled when P225 = 1 (Keypad) for Local Mode and/or P228 = 1 (Keypad) for
Remote Mode.
If a Digital Input is set to General Enable (P263 to P270 = 2) it has to be closed to allow the JOG function.
Selects the control input and speed reference source, toggling between LO-
CAL Mode and REMOTE Mode.
Enabled when P220 = 2 (Keypad LOC) or 3 (Keypad REM).
Reverses the motor direction of rotation.
Enabled when P223 = 2 (Keypad FWD) or 3 (Keypad REV) for Local Mode and/or P226 = 2 (Keypad FWD) or 3 (Keypad REV) for Remote Mode.
The keys described below are enabled when P221 = 0 (Keypad) for Local
Mode and/or P222 = 0 (Keypad) for Remote Mode. The parameter P121 contains the speed reference set by the keypad.
When pressed it increases the speed reference.
When pressed it decreases the speed reference.
88
CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION
NOTE!
Reference Backup
The last frequency Reference set by the keys and is stored when the inverter is stopped or the AC power is removed, provided P120 = 1 (Reference
Backup active is the factory default). To change the frequency reference before starting the inverter, the value of parameter P121 must be changed.
4.2.2 “Read-Only” Variables and Status
Parameters P002 to P099 are reserved for the display of “read-only” values. The factory default display when power is applied to the inverter is P002. Motor speed in rpm. The user can scroll through the various read-only parameters or use the factory configured display of the key values. This is done by pressing the start key .
a) Some selected “read-only” variables can be viewed following the procedure below:
Press
Motor Speed
P002 = 1800 r pm
Motor Current
P003 = 24 .3 A
Press
Press Press
Output Volt age
P007 = 4 60 V
VFD Status
P006 = run
Moto r To rque
P009 = 73.2 %
Press
(Only if P203 = 1)
Press
Moto r F requency
P005 = 60 .0 Hz
Press
Process Valiable
P040 = 53.4 %
Press
Current = 24.3 A
P002 = 1800 r pm
The “read-only” variable to be shown after AC power is applied to the inverter is defined in Parameter P205:
5
6
3
4
7
P205
0
1
2
Initial Monitoring Parameter
P005 (Motor Frequency)
P003 (Motor Current)
P002 (Motor Speed)
P007 (Output Voltage)
P006 (Inverter Status)
P009 (Motor Torque)
P070 (motor speed and motor current)
P040 (PID process variable)
Table 4.1 - Choosing the initial monitoring parameter
89
CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION b) Inverter Status:
Inverter is READY to be started
(No Fault condition)
VFD ready
4.2.3 Parameter Viewing and
Programming
Inverter has been started
(Run condition)
VFD Status
P006 = run
Line voltage in too low for inverter operation
(Undervoltage condition)
DC Lin k U nder
Vol t ag e c) LED display flashing:
The display flashes in the following conditions:
During the DC Injection braking;
Trying to change a parameter value when it is not allowed;
Inverter in a current overload condition (Refer to chapter 7 - Diagnostics and Troubleshooting);
Inverter in Fault condition (Refer to chapter 7 - Diagnostics and
Troubleshooting).
All CFW-09 settings are made through the parameters. The parameters are shown on the display with the letter P followed by a number.
Example (P101):
101 = Parameter Number
De cel. T i me
P101 = 1 0. 0 s
Each parameter is associated to a numerical value (parameter content), that corresponds to an option selected among those options that are available for this parameters.
The values of the parameters define the inverter programming or the value of a variable (e.g. current, frequency, voltage). For inverter programming you should change the parameter content(s).
To allow the reprogramming of any parameter value it is required to change parameter P000 to the password value. The factory default password value is
5. Otherwise you can only read the parameter values and not reprogram them.
For more detail refer to P000 description in chapter 6.
90
ACTION
Press the key
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Motor Speed
P002 = 0 rpm
Use the reach P100 and keys to
Accel. Time
P100 = 5. 0 s
Press the key
Accel. Time
P100 = 5. 0 s
Use the set the new value and keys to
Accel. Time
P100 = 6. 1 s
CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION
Comments
Select the desired parameter
Numeric value associated to the parameter
Sets the new desired value.
(1) (4)
(4)
Press the key
(1) (2) (3)
Accel. Time
P100 = 6. 1 s
NOTES:
(1)
For parameters that can be changed with the motor running, the inverter will use the new value immediately after it has been set. For the parameters that can be changed only with motor stopped, the inverter will use this new set value only after the key is pressed.
(2)
By pressing the key after the reprogramming, the new programmed value will be stored automatically and will remain stored until a new value is programmed.
(3)
If the last value programmed in the parameter is not functionally compatible with other parameter values already programmed, an E24 - Programming Error
- will be displayed.
Example of programming error:
Programming two digital inputs (DIx) with the same function. Refer to table
4.2 for the list of programming errors that will generate an E24 Programming
Error.
91
CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION
92
(4)
To allow the reprogramming of any parameter value it is required to change parameter P000 to the password value. The factory default password value is
5. Otherwise you can only read the parameter values and not reprogram them.
For more detail refer to P000 description in chapter 6.
E24 - Incompatibility between parameters
1) Two or more parameters between P264 or P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 1 (LOC/REM).
2) Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 6 (Ramp 2).
3) Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 9 (Speed/Torque).
4) P265 equal to 8 and P266 different than 8 or vice versa (FWD Run / REV Run).
5) P221 or P222 equal to 8 (Multispeed) and P266 7 and P267 7 and P268 7.
6) [P221 = 7 or P222 = 7] and [(P265 5 and P267 5) or (P266 5 and P268 5)].
(with reference = E.P. and without DIx = increase E.P. or without DIx = decrease E.P.).
7) P264 and P266 equal to 8 (Reverse Run).
8) [P221 7 and P222 7] and [(P265 = 5 or P267 = 5 or P266 = 5 or P268 = 5)].
(without reference = E.P. and with DIx = increase E.P. or with DIx = decrease E.P.).
9) P265 or P267 or P269 equal to 14 and P266 and P268 and P270 different than 14 (with DIx = Start and DIx Stop).
10) P266 or P268 or P270 equal to 14 and P265 and P267 and P269 different than 14 (with DIx Start and DIx = Stop).
11) P220 > 1 and P224 = P227 = 1 without any DIx set for Start/Stop or DIx = Fast Stop or General Enable.
12) P220 = 0 and P224 = 1 and without DIx = Start/Stop or Fast Stop and without DIx = General Enable.
13) P220 = 1 and P227 = 1 and without DIx = Start/Stop or Fast Stop and without DIx = General Enable.
14) DIx = START and DIx = STOP, but P224 1 and P227 1.
15) Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 15 (MAN/AUT).
16) Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 17 (Disables
Flying Start).
17) Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 18 (DC Voltage Regulator).
18) Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 19 (Parameter Setting Disable).
19) Two or more parameters between P265, P266, P267, P268 and P269 equal to 20 (Load user via DIx).
20) P296 = 8 and P295 = 4, 6, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, or 49 (P295 incompatible with inverter model – To avoid damages of the internal inverter components).
21) P296 = 5, 6, 7 or 8 and P297 = 3 (P297 incompatible with inverter model).
22) Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 21 (Timer RL2).
23) Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 22 (Timer RL3).
24) P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 = 21 and P279 28.
25) P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 = 22 and P280 28.
26) P279 = 28 and P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 21.
27) P280 = 28 and P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 22.
28) P202 2 and P237 = 1 or P241 = 1 or P265 to P270 = JOG+ or P265 to P270 = JOG-.
29) P203 = 1 and P211 = 1 and [P224 = 0 or P227 = 0]
30) P220 = 0 and P224 = 1 and P227 = 0 or P227 = 1 and P263 = 0
31) P220 = 1 and P224 = 0 or P224 = 1 and P227 = 1 and P263 = 0
32) P220 = 2 and P224 = 0 or P224 = 1and P227 = 0 or P227 = 1 and P263 = 0
33) P225 or P228 0and P275 or P276 or P277 or P279 or P280 = 30 or 31 (JOG with the Mechanical Brake Logic)
34) P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 = 10 and P275 or P276 or P277 or P279 or P280 = 30 or 31 (JOG+ with the Mechanical
Brake Logic)
35) P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 = 11 and P275 or P276 or P277 or P279 or P280 = 30 or 31 (JOG- with the Mechanical
Brake Logic)
36) P224 or P227 = 0 and P275 or P276 or P277 or P279 or P280 = 30 or 31 (Start/Stop via keypad (HMI) with the Mechanical Brake Logic)
37) P265 or P267 or P269 y P266 or P268 or P270 = 14 and P275 or P276 or P277 or P279 or P280 = 30 or 31 (3 wire Start/Stop with the Mechanical Brake Logic)
38) P263 = 3 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 = 08 and P275 or P276 or P277 or P279 or P280 = 30 or 31 (Fast Stop Mode with the
Mechanical Brake Logic)
39) P232 = 1 or 2 and P275 or P276 or P277 or P279 or P280 = 30 or 31 (Coast to Stop or Fast Mode with the Mechanical Brake Logic)
Table 4.2 - Incompatibility between parameters - E24
5.1 PRE-POWER
CHECKS
5.2 INITIAL
POWER-UP
START-UP
This chapter provides the following information:
How to check and prepare the inverter before power-up;
How to power-up and check for proper operation;
How to operate the inverter.
CHAPTER 5
The inverter shall be installed according to chapter 3: Installation and Connection.
DANGER!
Disconnect the AC input power before making any connections. Even when the inverter project is different from the suggested connections, the following recommendations are applicable.
1) Check all connections
Check if the power, grounding and control connections are correct and well tightened.
2) Clean the inside of the inverter
Remove all shipping material from the inside of the inverter or cabinet.
3) Check if the selected inverter AC power is correct (refer to item 3.2.3)
4) Check the motor
Check all motor connections and verify if its voltage, current and frequency match the inverter specifications.
NOTES!
Operation in VT mode
When the motor data is set properly during the first power-up routine, the inverter automatically sets the additional parameters used for the correct operation under this control mode.
5) Uncouple the load from the motor
If the motor cannot be uncoupled, make sure that the direction of rotation
(FWD/REV) cannot cause damage to the machine.
6) Close the inverter cover or cabinet doors
After the inverter has been checked, AC power can be applied:
1) Check the supply voltage
Measure the line voltage and check if it is within the specified range (refer to item 9.1).
2) Power-up the AC input
Close the input circuit breaker or disconnect switch.
3) Check if the power-up has been successful
When the inverter is powered up for the first time or when the factory default parameter values are loaded (P204 = 5), a start-up sub-routine is run. This sub-routine requests the user to program some basic parameters to ensure proper operation and motor protection.
A start-up programming example is shown below:
Inverter
Line: CFW-09
Rated Current: 9A
Rated Voltage: 380 V to 480 V
Model: CFW090009T3848ESZ
Cooling: Self-ventilated
Motor
WEG IP55
Power: 5 hp rpm: 1730, 4 POLE
Rated Current: 7.9 A
Rated Voltage: 460 V
Frequency: 60 Hz
Cooling: Self-ventilated
93
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
ORIENTED START-UP
Initial Power-up - Programming via Keypad (HMI) (Based on the example above):
ACTION
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
After power-up, the display shows the following message l a n g u ag e
P20 1 = English
Language Selection:
0 = Português
1 = English
2 = Español
3 = Deutsch
Press the key to enter the programming mode Enter the programming mode l a n g u ag e
P20 1 = English
Selected Language:
1 = English
Use the and select the language keys to
Press the key to save the selected option and exit the programming mode l a n g u ag e
P20 1 = English
Press the key next parameter to go to the
Press the programming mode key to enter the l a n g u ag e
P20 1 = English
VFD Rated Volt.
P296 = 440 / 460 V
VFD Rated Volt.
P296 = 440 / 460 V
Exit the programming mode
Inverter Rated Voltage Selection:
0 = 220 V/230 V
1 = 380 V
2 = 400 V/415 V
3 = 440 V/460 V
4 = 480 V
5 = 500 V/525 V
6 = 550 V/575 V
7 = 600 V
8 = 660 V/690 V
Enter the programming mode
94
ACTION
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Use the and keys to select the inverter power supplyvoltage
VFD Rated Volt.
P296 = 380 V
Press the key to save the selected option and exit the programming mode
VFD Rated Volt.
P296 = 380 V
Press the parameter key to go to the next
Moto r R ated Volt
P400 = 440 V
Press the programming mode key to enter the
Moto r R ated Volt
P400 = 440 V
Use the and keys to set the correct motor rated voltage value
Moto r R ated Volt
P400 = 380 V
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Moto r R ated Volt
P400 = 380 V
Press the parameter key to go to the next
Mo to r R at ed Cur.
P401 = 9.0 A
Press the programming mode key to enter the
Mo to r R at ed Cur.
P401 = 9.0 A
Motor Rated Voltage:
0 to 690 V
Enter the programming mode
Programmed Motor Rated Voltage:
380 V
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
DESCRIPTION
Selected Inverter Rated Voltage:
1 = 380 V
Exit the programming mode
Exit the programming mode
Motor Rated Current Range:
(0.0 to 1.30) x P295
(1)
Enter the programming mode
95
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
ACTION
Use the and keys to set the correct motor rated current value
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Mo to r R at ed Cur.
P401 = 7.9 A
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Mo to r R at ed Cur.
P401 = 7.9 A
Press the key parameter to go to the next
Moto r Rated Freq
P403 = 60 Hz
Press the programming mode key to enter the
Moto r Rated Freq
P403 = 60 Hz
Use the and keys to set the correct motor rated frequency value
Moto r Rated Freq
P403 = 60 Hz
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Moto r Rated Freq
P403 = 60 Hz
Press the parameter key to go to the next
Moto r Rated rpm
P402 = 1750 rpm
Press the programming mode key to enter the
Moto r Rated rpm
P402 = 1750 rpm
96
DESCRIPTION
Programmed Motor Rated Current:
7.9 A
Exit the programming mode
Motor Rated Frequency Range:
0 to 300 Hz
Enter the programming mode
Programmed Motor Rated Frequency:
60 Hz
Exit the programming mode
Motor Rated rpm Range:
0 to 18000 rpm
Enter the programming mode
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
ACTION
Use the and keys to set the correct motor rated rpm value
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Moto r Rated rpm
P402 = 1730 rpm
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Moto r Rated rpm
P402 = 1730 rpm
DESCRIPTION
Programmed Motor Rated rpm:
1730 rpm
Exit the programming mode
Press the parameter key to go to the next
Mo to r R ated HP
P404 = 0. 33 HP
Motor Rated hp Range:
1 to 1600.0 hp
1 to 1190.0 kW
Press the programming mode key to enter the
Mo to r R ated HP
P404 = 0. 33 HP
Use the and the motor rated power keys to select
Mo to r R ated HP
P404 = 5. 0 HP
Press the key to save the selected option and exit the programming mode
Mo to r R ated HP
P404 = 5. 0 HP
Enter the programming mode
Selected Motor Rated Power:
5.0 hp/3.7 kW
Exit the programming mode
Press the parameter key to go to the next
Ventilation Type
P40 6 = Self Vent.
Press the key to enter the programming mode
Ventilation Type
P40 6 = Self Vent.
Motor Ventilation Type Selection:
0 = Self Ventilated
1 = Separate Ventilation
3 = Increased Protection
Enter the programming mode
97
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
ACTION
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Use the and keys to select the motor ventilation type
Ventilation Type
P40 6 = Self Vent.
Press the key to save the selected option and exit the programming mode Ventilation Type
P40 6 = Self Vent.
Refer to item 5.3
5.3 START-UP
DESCRIPTION
Selected Motor Ventilation Type:
0 = Self Ventilated
Exit the programming mode
The first power-up routine is finished.
Inverter is ready to operate
VFD ready
NOTE!
(1)
P401 maximum value is 1.8 x P295 for model 4.2 A/500-600 V and 1.6 x
P295 for models 7 A and 54 A/220-230 V; 2.9 A and 7 A/500-600 V; 107 A, 147 A and 247 A/500-690 V; 100 A, 127 A and 340 A/660-690 V.
ATTENTION!
Open the input circuit breaker or disconnect switch to shut down the CFW-09.
NOTES!
To repeat the initial power-up procedure:
Set the parameter P204 = 5 or 6 (this loads the factory default parameters) and follow the initial power-up sub-routine again;
The initial power-up sub-routine described above automatically sets some parameters according to the entered data. For more details, refer to chapter 6.
Modification of motor characteristics after the first power up: a) Insert the motor data at parameters P400 to P407; b) For operation in the vector mode run the self-tuning routine (P408 > 0); c) Set P156, P157, P158, P169, P170, P171, and P172; d) Power the inverter down and up for the new settings to take place and for the proper motor operation.
Modification of motor characteristics after the first power up, for operation in
VT mode:
Follow the previous procedures and also set parameter P297 to 2.5 kHz.
This item describes the start-up procedure when operating via the Keypad (HMI).
Four types of control will be considered: V/F 60 Hz, Sensorless Vector, Vector with Encoder Feedback and VVW (Voltage Vector WEG).
DANGER!
Even after the AC input is disconnected, high voltages may still be present.
Wait at least 10 minutes after powering down to allow a full discharge of the capacitors.
98
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
5.3.1 Type of Control:
V/F 60 Hz - Operation
Via Keypad (HMI)
ACTION
The V/F or Scalar Control is recommended in the following cases:
Several motors driven by the same inverter;
Motor rated current lower than 1/3 of the inverter rated current;
For test purposes, without a motor connected to the inverter.
The V/F Control can also be used in applications that do not require fast dynamic responses, accurate speed regulation or high starting torque (speed error will be a function of the motor slip).
When parameter P138 (Rated Slip) is programmed, speed accuracy of 1 % can be obtained.
The sequence below is valid for the Connection 1 (refer to item 3.2.7). Theinverter must be already installed and powered up according to chapter 3 and item 5.2.
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Inverter is ready to be operated
Enables the access to change parameters content.
With the factory default programming
[P200 = 1 (PasswordActive)], P000 must be set to 5 to allow parameters changes
Power-up the inverter
VFD ready
Press the or key. Press the keys until P000 is reached
Paramet er Access
P000 = 0
Press the key to enter the programming mode
Paramet er Access
P000 = 0
Use the and the password value keys to set
Paramet er Access
P000 = 5
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Paramet er Access
P000 = 5
Press the keys
P202 is reached or until
Type o f con t rol
P202 = V/F 60 Hz
Enter the programming mode
Password value (factory default = 5)
Exit the programming mode
Type of Control Selection:
0 = V/F 60 Hz
1 = V/F 50 Hz
2 = V/F Adjustable
3 = Sensorless Vector
4 = Vector with Encoder
5 = VVW
99
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
ACTION
Press the programming mode key to enter the
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Type o f con t rol
P202 = V/F 60 Hz
DESCRIPTION
Enter the programming mode
Use the and select the type of control keys to
Type o f con t rol
P202 = V/F 60 Hz
Press the key to save the selected option and exit the programming mode
Type o f con t rol
P202 = V/F 60 Hz
If the option V/F 60 Hz (value = 0) is already programmed, ignore this action
Exit the programming mode
Press the
P002 is reached keys or until
Motor Speed
P002 = 0 rpm
Motor Speed (rpm)
This is a read-only parameter
Press the key
Motor Speed
P002 = 0 rpm
Press the Start key
Motor Speed
P002 = 90 rpm
Press the key and hold until
1800 rpm is reached
Press the FWD / REV key.
Obs.:
The LEDs on the keypad show whether the motor is running FWD or REV.
Motor Speed
P002 = 1800 rpm
Motor Speed
P002 = 1800 rpm
100
Motor accelerates from 0 to 90 rpm*
(Minimum Speed), in the Forward (CW) direction of rotation
(1)
* for 4 pole motors
Motor accelerates up to 1800 rpm*
(2)
* for 4 pole motors
Motor decelerates
(3) down to 0 rpm and then reverses the direction of rotation accelerating back up to 1800 rpm
Press the
ACTION
Stop key
Press the key and hold it
Release the key
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
DESCRIPTION
Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm
VFD ready
Motor accelerates from 0 rpm up to the JOG speed set at P122
Ex
.: P122 = 150 rpm
CCW direction of rotation
Motor Speed
P002 = 150 rpm
Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm
VFD ready
NOTE!
The last frequency reference value set via the and keys is saved.
If you wish to change this value before enabling the inverter, change parameter
P121
(Keypad Reference).
OBSERVATIONS:
(1)
If the rotation direction of the motor is not correct, switch off the inverter.
Wait 10 minutes to allow a complete discharge of the capacitors and then swap any two wires at the motor output.
(2)
If the acceleration current becomes too high, specially at low frequencies
(< 15 Hz), adjust the Torque Boost at P136.
Increase/decrease the content of P136 gradually until you obtain an operation with constant current over the entire frequency range.
Refer to P136 in chapter 6.
(3)
If E01 fault occurs during deceleration, increase the deceleration time at
P101
/ P103.
101
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
5.3.2 Type of Control: Sensorless or Vector with Encoder
(Operation Via Keypad
(HMI))
ACTION
For the majority of the applications, the Sensorless Vector Control is recommended. This mode permits an operation over a 100:1 speed range, a speed control accuracy of 0.5 % (Refer to P412 - chapter 6), high torque and fast dynamic response.
Another advantage of this type of control is a higher immunity to sudden
AC input voltage variation and load changes, thus avoiding nuisance tripping due to overcurrent.
The adjustments necessary for a good sensorless control operation are made automatically.
The Vector Control with Encoder Feedback offers the same advantages as the Sensorless Control described above, with the following additional benefits:
Torque and speed control down to zero speed (rpm);
Accuracy of 0.01 % in the speed control.
The closed loop vector control with encoder requires the use of the optional board EBA or EBB for encoder connection - Refer to chapter 8.
OPTIMAL BRAKING:
This setting allows controlled motor braking within shortest possible times without using other means, such as DC Link chopper with braking resistor (for more details about this function refer to P151 – chapter 6).
The inverter is supplied with this function set at maximum. This means that the braking is disabled. To enable the braking, set P151 according to table 6.8.
The sequence below is based on the example in item 5.2.
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Power-up the inverter
Inverter is ready to be enabled
VFD ready
Press the or reached key. Press the keys until P000 is
Press the key to enter the programming mode
Param et er Access
P000 = 0
Enables the access to change parameters content.
With the factory default programming
[P200 = 1 (Password Active)], P000 must be set to 5 to allow parameters changes
Enter the programming mode
Param et er Access
P000 = 0
102
ACTION
Use the and set the password value keys to
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Param et er Access
P000 = 5
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Param et er Access
P000 = 5
Press the keys
P202 is reached or until
Type o f con t rol
P202 = V/F 60 Hz
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
DESCRIPTION
Password value (factory default = 5)
Exit the programming mode
Type of Control Selection:
0 = V/F 60 Hz
1 = V/F 50 Hz
2 = V/F Adjustable
3 = Sensorless Vector
4 = Vector with Encoder
5 = VVW
Enter the programming mode
Press the programming mode key to enter the
Type o f con t rol
P202 = V/F 60 Hz
Use the and keys to select the type of control
(Sensorless)
Ty pe of co n trol
P202 = Sensorless
OR
Use the and keys to select the type of control (with
Encoder)
T ype of cont rol
P202 = En co d er
Selected Type of Control:
3 = Sensorless Vector
Selected Type of Control:
4 = Vector with Encoder
103
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
ACTION
Press the key to save the selected option and start the tuning routine after changing to Vector
Control Mode
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Moto r Rated Volt
P400 = 380 V
Press the key and use the and keys to set the correct motor rated voltage value
Moto r Rated Volt
P400 = 460 V
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Moto r Rated Volt
P400 = 460 V
Press the next parameter key to go to the
Moto r Rated Freq
P403 = 60 Hz
Programmed Motor Rated Voltage:
460 V
DESCRIPTION
Motor Rated Voltage Range:
0 to 690 V
Exit the programming mode
Press the next parameter key to go to the
Mo to r R at ed Cur.
P401 = 7.9 A
Press the programming mode key to enter the
Mo to r R at ed Cur.
P401 = 7.9 A
Use the and keys to set the correct motor rated current value
Mo to r R at ed Cur.
P401 = 7.9 A
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Mo to r R at ed Cur.
P401 = 7.9 A
Motor Rated Current Range:
(0.0 to 1.30) x P295 (1)
Enter the programming mode
Programmed Motor Rated Current:
7.9 A
Exit the programming mode
Motor Rated Frequency Range:
0 to 300 Hz
104
ACTION
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Press the programming mode key to enter the
Moto r Rated Freq
P403 = 60 Hz
Use the and keys to set the correct motor rated frequency value
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Moto r Rated Freq
P403 = 60 Hz
Moto r Rated Freq
P403 = 60 Hz
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
DESCRIPTION
Enter the programming mode
Programmed Motor Rated
Frequency: 60 Hz
Exit the programming mode
Press the parameter key to go to the next
Moto r Rated rpm
P402 = 1730 rpm
Motor Rated rpm Range:
0 to 18000 rpm
Press the key to enter the programming mode
Moto r Rated rpm
P402 = 1730 rpm
Use the and keys to set the correct motor rated rpm value
Moto r Rated rpm
P402 = 1730 rpm
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Moto r Rated rpm
P402 = 1730 rpm
Press the next parameter key to go to the
Mo to r R ated HP
P404 = 5.0 HP
Enter the programming mode
Programmed Motor Rated rpm:
1730 rpm
Exit the programming mode
Motor Rated hp Range:
1 to 1600.0 hp
1 to 1190.0 kW
105
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
ACTION
Press the key to enter the programming mode
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Mo to r R ated HP
P404 = 5.0 HP
Use the and select the motor rated power keys to
Mo to r R ated HP
P404 = 5.0 HP
Press the key to save the selected option and exit the programming mode Mo to r R ated HP
P404 = 5.0 HP
Press the next parameter key to go to the
En coder PPR
P40 5 = 1024 PPR
Press the key to enter the programming mode.
(Vector with Encoder only) En coder PPR
P40 5 = 1024 PPR
Use the and keys to set the correct encoder PPR value.
(Vector with Encoder only)
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode.
(Vector with Encoder only)
En coder PPR
P40 5 = XXX X PPR
En coder PPR
P40 5 = XXX X PPR
Press the next parameter key to go to the
Ventilation Type
P4 0 6 = Self Vent.
DESCRIPTION
Enter the programming mode
Selected Motor Rated Power:
7 = 5.0 hp/3.7 kW
Exit the programming mode
Encoder Pulses per Rotation (PPR)
Range:
0 to 9999
Enter the programming mode
Programmed Encoder PPR:
XXXX
Exit the programming mode
Motor Ventilation Type Selection:
0 = Self Ventilated
1 = Separate Ventilation
2 = Optional Flux
(only for P202 = 3)
3 = Increased Protection
106
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
ACTION
Press the programming mode key to enter the
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Enter the programming mode
Ventilation Type
P4 0 6 = Self Vent.
Use the and keys to select the motor ventilation type
Selected Motor Ventilation Type:
0 = Self Ventilated
Ventilation Type
P4 0 6 = Self Vent.
Press the key to save the selected option and exit the programming mode
Press the next parameter key to go to the
Note:
Display shows during 3 s:
P409 to P413 = 0
Run Self-tuning
Press the programming mode key to enter the
Use the and keys to select the desired Self-tuning mode
Ventilation Type
P4 0 6 = Self Vent.
Run Self Tuning
P4 08 = No
Exit the programming mode
Self-tuning Mode Selection:
0 = No
1 = No Rotation
2 = Run for Im
3 = Run for Tm (only with Encoder)
4 = Estimate Tm (only with Encoder)
Enter the programming mode
Run Self Tuning
P4 08 = No
Run Self Tuning
P4 08 = No
Sensorless:
Only select option 2 (Run for Im) if no load is coupled to the motor shaft. Otherwise, select option 1 (No Rotation) (2) .
With Encoder:
In addition to the options above, it is also possible to estimate the Tm (Mechanical
Time Constant) value.
With the load coupled to the motor shaft, select 3 (Run for Tm). The motor will only run when Tm is estimated. All other parameters are estimated with the motor at standstill. If only Tm estimation is desired, select option 4 (Estimate Tm)
(Refer to P408 in chapter 6)
107
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
ACTION
Press the self-tuning routine key to start the
End of the Self-tuning routine.
Inverter is back to normal operation
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Messages and values of the estimated parameters are shown
DESCRIPTION
Self-tuning routine in progress
Motor Speed (rpm)
Motor Speed
P002 = XXXX rpm
Press the Start key
Motor Speed
P002 = 90 r pm
Motor accelerates from 0 to 90 rpm*
(Minimum Speed), in the Forward (CW) direction of rotation
* for 4 pole motors
(3)
Press the key and hold until
1800 rpm is reached
Press the FWD / REV key
Obs.:
The LEDs on the keypad show whether the motor is running
FWD or REV
Motor Speed
P002 = 1800 r pm
Motor Speed
P002 = 1800 r pm
Motor accelerates up to 1800 rpm*
* for 4 pole motors
Motor decelerates (4) down to 0 rpm and then reverses the direction of rotation accelerating back up to 1800 rpm
Press the Stop key
Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm
VFD ready
Press the key and hold it
Motor Speed
P002 = 150 rpm
Motor accelerates from 0 rpm up to the speed set at P122
Ex.:
P122 = 150 rpm
CCW direction of rotation
Release the key
Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm
VFD ready
108
5.3.3 Type of Control:
VVW - Keypad
Operation
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
NOTES!
(1)
P401 maximum value is 1.8 x P295 for model 4.2A/500-600 V and 1.6 x P295 for models 7 A and 54 A/220-230 V; 2.9 A and 7 A/500-600 V; 107 A,
147 A and 247 A/500-690 V; 100 A, 127 A and 340 A/660-690 V.
(2)
The self-tuning routine can be cancelled by pressing the key.
(3)
The last speed reference value set via the and keys is saved.
If you wish to change this value before enabling the inverter, change parameter
P121
(Keypad Reference).
(4)
If E01 fault occurs during deceleration, you must increase deceleration time at P101 / P103.
OBSERVATION:
If the rotation direction of the motor is not correct, switch off the inverter. Wait 10 minutes to allow a complete discharge of the capacitors and swap any two wires at the motor output. If motor is equipped with an encoder, change the phase of the encoder connections (exchange channel A and A).
ATTENTION!
In Vector Mode (P202 = 3 or 4), when the command STOP (START/STOP) is enabled - refer to figure 6.37, the motor will decelerate up to zero speed, but it maintains the magnetization current (no-load current). This maintains the motor with rated flux and when the next START command is given, it will achieve a quick response.
For self-ventilated motors with no-load current higher than 1/3 of the rated current
(generally small motors lower than 10 hp), it is recommended that the motor does not stay in this condition (magnetization current) for a long time, since it may overheat. In these cases, we recommend to deactivate the command “General Enable” (when the motor has stopped), thus decreasing the motor current to zero when stopped.
Another way to disable magnetization current with the motor stopped is to program
P211 to 1 (zero speed disable is ON) for both vector modes and, for vector with encoder, still another option is to program P181 to 1 (Magnetization mode). If magnetization current is disabled with the motor stopped, there will be a delay at start while the flux builds up.
The VVW (Voltage Vector WEG) Control Mode follows the same philosophy of the V/F Control. The VVW Control allows a reasonable improvement of the steadystate inverter performance: it results in a better speed regulation and in a higher torque capability at low speeds (frequencies lower than 5 Hz).
As a result, the frequency (speed) range of the system is increased with respect to the V/F Control. Other advantages of this control are the simplicity and ease of setting.
The VVW Control uses the stator current measurement, the stator resistance
(that can be obtained from the self-tuning routine) and the motor nameplate data to automatically estimate the torque value, the output compensation voltage value and, consequently, the slip compensation value, which substitute the function of parameters P137 and P138.
109
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
ACTION
Power-up the inverter
Press the keys reached or key. Press the until P000 is
In order to get a good steady-state speed regulation, the slip frequency is calculated from the estimated load torque value (which uses the motor nameplate data).
The following sequence is valid for Connection #1 (refer to item 3.2.7). The inverter should have been already installed and powered up according to instructions in chapter 3 and item 5.2.
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
VFD ready
Parameter Access
P000 = 0
Inverter is ready to be operated
Enables the access to change parameters content. With the factory default programming [P200 = 1
(PasswordActive)], P000 must be set to 5 to allow parameters changes
Press the key to enter the programming mode
Enter the programming mode
Parameter Access
P000 = 0
Use the keys and to set the password value
Password value (factory default = 5)
Parameter Access
P000 = 5
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Parameter Access
P000 = 5
Exit the programming mode
Press the keys
P202 is reached or
Press the programming mode until key to enter the
Type of control
P202 = V/F 60 Hz
Type of control
P202 = V/F 60 Hz
Type of Control Selection:
0 = V/F 60 Hz
1 = V/F 50 Hz
2 = V/F Adjustable
3 = Sensorless Vector
4 = Vector with Encoder
5 = VVW
Enter the programming mode
110
ACTION
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Use the and keys to select the type of control (VVW)
Type of control
P202 = VVW
Press the key to save the selected option and start the tuning routine after changing to VVW
Control Mode
Press the key and use the and keys to set the correct motor rated voltage value
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Motor Rated Volt
P400 = 460 V
Motor Rated Volt
P400 = 460 V
Motor Rated Volt
P400 = 380 V
Press the next parameter key to go to the
Motor Rated Cur.
P401 = 7.9 A
Press the key to enter the programming mode
Motor Rated Cur.
P401 = 7.9 A
Use the and keys to set the correct motor rated current value
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Motor Rated Cur.
P401 = 7.9 A
Motor Rated Cur.
P401 = 7.9 A
5 = VVW
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
DESCRIPTION
Selected Type of Control:
Motor Rated Voltage Range:
0 to 690 V
Programmed Motor Rated Voltage:
460 V
Exit the programming mode
Motor Rated Current Range:
(0.0 to 1.30) x P295 (1)
Enter the programming mode
Programmed Motor Rated Current:
7.9 A
Exit the programming mode
111
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
ACTION
Press the next parameter key to go to the
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Motor Rated Freq
P403 = 60 Hz
Press the key to enter the programming mode
Motor Rated Freq
P403 = 60 Hz
Use the and keys to set the correct motor rated frequency value
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Motor Rated Freq
P403 = 60 Hz
Motor Rated Freq
P403 = 60 Hz
Press the next parameter key to go to the
Motor Rated rpm
P402 = 1730 rpm
Press the key to enter the programming mode
Motor Rated rpm
P402 = 1730 rpm
Use the and keys to set the correct motor rated rpm value
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Motor Rated rpm
P402 = 1730 rpm
Motor Rated rpm
P402 = 1730 rpm
DESCRIPTION
Motor Rated Frequency Range:
0 to 300 Hz
Enter the programming mode
Programmed Motor Rated
Frequency: 60 Hz
Exit the programming mode
Motor Rated rpm Range:
0 to 18000 rpm
Enter the programming mode
Programmed Motor Rated rpm:
1730 rpm
Exit the programming mode
112
ACTION
Press the next parameter key to go to the
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Motor Rated HP
P404 = 5.0 CV
Press the key to enter the programming mode
Motor Rated HP
P404 = 5.0 CV
Use the and keys to select the motor rated power
Motor Rated HP
P404 = 5.0 CV
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Motor Rated HP
P404 = 5.0 CV
Press the next parameter key to go to the
FP Nom. Motor
P40 7 = 0.68
Press the key to enter the programming mode
FP Nom. Motor
P40 7 = 0.68
Use the and keys to select the Motor Rated Power Factor
FP Nom. Motor
P40 7 = 0.68
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
FP Nom. Motor
P40 7 = 0.68
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
DESCRIPTION
Motor Rated hp Range:
1 to 1600.0 CV
1 to 1190.0 kW
Enter the programming mode
Selected Motor Rated Power:
5.0 CV/3.7 kW
Exit the programming mode
Motor Rated Power Factor
0.50 to 0.99
Enter the programming mode
Motor Power Factor:
0.68
Exit the programming mode
113
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
ACTION
Press the next parameter key to go to the
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Rendim.Nom.Motor
P399 = 67.0 %
DESCRIPTION
Motor Rated Efficiency
50.0 to 99 %
Press the programming mode
Use the and keys to select the Motor Rated Efficiency
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode
Press the next parameter
Press the
Use the key to enter the and keys to select the motor ventilation type
Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode key to go to the key to enter the programming mode
Rendim.Nom.Motor
P399 = 67.0 %
Enter the programming mode
Rendim.Nom.Motor
P399 = 67.0 %
Motor Rated Efficiency
67.0 %
Exit the programming mode
Rendim.Nom.Motor
P399 = 67.0 %
Ventilation Type
P406 = Self Vent.
Motor Ventilation Type Selection:
0 = Self Ventilated
1 = Separate Ventilation
2 = Optimal Flux
3 = Increased Protection
Enter the programming mode
Ventilation Type
P406 = Self Vent.
Selected Motor Ventilation Type:
0 = Self Ventilated
Ventilation Type
P406 = Self Vent.
Exit the programming mode
Ventilation Type
P406 = Self Vent.
114
ACTION
Press the next parameter key to go to the
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
DESCRIPTION
Self-tuning Mode Selection:
0 = No
1 = No Rotation
Run Self Tuning
P408 = No
Press the programming mode key to enter the
Run Self Tuning
P408 = No
Enter the programming mode
Use the and keys to select the desired Self-tuning mode
Press the self-tuning routine key to start the
Note:
Display shows P409 to P413 during the Self-Tuning routine
End of the Self-tuning routine.
Inverter is back to normal operation
Only select option 1 (No Rotation)
Run Self Tuning
P4 08 = No Rotation
Messages and values of the estimated parameters are shown
Self-tuning routine in progress (2)
Motor Speed (rpm)
Motor Speed
P002 = XXXX rpm
Press the Start key
Motor Speed
P002 = 90 rpm
Motor accelerates from 0 to 90 rpm*
(Minimum Speed), in the Forward (CW) direction of rotation
* for 4 pole motors
(3)
Press the key and hold until
1800 rpm is reached
Motor Speed
P002 = 1800 rpm
Motor accelerates up to 1800 rpm*
* for 4 pole motors
115
CHAPTER 5 - START-UP
ACTION
Press the FWD / REV key
Obs.:
The LEDs on the keypad show whether the motor is running
FWD or REV
Press the Stop key
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY
Motor Speed
P002 = 1800 rpm
DESCRIPTION
Motor decelerates (4) down to 0 rpm and then reverses the direction of rotation accelerating back
1800 rpm
up to
Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm
VFD ready
Press the key and hold it
Motor Speed
P002 = 150 rpm
Motor accelerates from 0 rpm up to the speed set at P122
Ex.:
P122 = 150 rpm
CCW direction of rotation
Release the key
Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm
VFD ready
NOTE!
The inverter always stores the last speed reference value set through the keypad.
Therefore, if you want to change this value before enabling the inverter use the parameter P121 - Keypad Speed Reference.
NOTES!
(1)
P401 maximum value is 1.8 x P295 for model 4.2 A/500-600 V and 1.6 x P295 for models 7 A and 54 A/220-230 V; 2.9 A and 7 A/500-600 V; 107 A, 147 A and
247 A/500-690 V; 100 A, 127 A and 340 A/660-690 V.
(2)
The last speed reference value set via the and keys is saved.
If you wish to change this value before enabling the inverter, change parameter
P121
(Keypad Reference).
(3)
If the direction of rotation of the motor is inverted, power the inverter down, waits
10 minutes for the complete discharge of capacitors and interchange any two motor output cables.
(4)
In case of having E01 during deceleration, increase the deceleration time through
P101 / P103.
116
CHAPTER 6
DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
This chapter describes in detail all CFW-09 parameters. In order to simplify the explanation, the parameters have been grouped by characteristics and functions:
Read Only Parameters
Regulation Parameters
Configuration Parameters
Motor Parameters
Special Function Parameters
Variables that can only be viewed on the display but not changed. Examples would be motor speed or motor current.
Programmable values used by the
CFW-09 functions. Examples would be
Acceleration and Deceleration times.
Set-up parameters that are programmed during inverter start-up and define its basic operation. Examples would be Control
Type, Scale Factors and the Input/Output functions.
Motor data that is indicated on the motor nameplate. Other motor parameters are automatically measured or calculated during the Self-tuning routine.
It includes parameters related to special functions.
Symbols and definitions used in this chapter:
(1)
Indicates that the parameter can be changed only with the inverter disabled
(motor stopped).
(2)
Indicates that the values can change as a function of the motor parameters.
(3)
Indicates that the values can change as a function of P413 (Tm Constant obtained during Self-tuning).
(4)
Indicates that the values can change as a function of P409, P411
(obtained during Self-tuning).
(5)
Indicates that the values can change as a function of P412 (Tr Constant obtained during Self-tuning).
(6)
Indicates that the values can change as a function of P296.
(7)
Indicates that the values can change as a function of P295.
(8)
Indicates that the values can change as a function of P203.
(9)
Indicates that the values can change as a function of P320.
(10)
(For new inverters) User Default = no parameters.
(11)
The inverter will be delivered with settings according to the market, considering the HMI language, V/F 50 Hz or 60 Hz and the required voltage.
The reset of the standard factory setting may change the parameters related to the frequency (50 Hz/60 Hz). Values within parenthesis mean the factory setting for 50 Hz.
(12)
The maximum value of P156 and P401 is 1.8 x P295 for model 4.2 A/500-
600 V and 1.6 x P295 for models 7 A and 54 A/220-230 V; 2.9 A and 7 A/
500-600 V; 107 A, 147Aand 247A/500-690 V; 100A, 127Aand 340A/660-
690 V.
Torque Current
= it is the component of the motor total current responsible for torque generation (used in Vector Control).
Active Current
= it is the component of the motor total current proportional to active electric power absorbed by the motor (used in V/F control).
117
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
6.1 ACCESS AND READ ONLY PARAMETERS - P000 to P099
Parameter
P000
Parameter Access/
Password Value
Setting
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 999
[ 0 ]
-
Description / Notes
This parameter opens the access to change other parameter values. When
P200 = 1 (Password Active)] it is necessary to set P000 = 5 to change parameter values.
By programming P000 with the password that releases access to changing of parameter content plus 1 (Password + 1), you will obtain access only to the parameters with different content that the factory default setting.
To change the password to any other value (password 1), proceed as follows:
1) Set P000 = 5 (current password) and P200 = 0 (password inactive).
2) Press the Key .
3) Change P200 to 1 (password active).
4) Press again: display shows: P000.
5) Press again: display shows 5 (last password).
6) Use the and value (password 1).
keys to change to the desired password
7) Press : display shows P000. From this moment on, the new password becomes active. Thus, to change parameters content P000 has to be set to the new password (password 1).
P001
Speed
Reference
P002
Motor Speed
P003
Motor Current
0.0 to P134
[ - ]
1 rpm
0.0 to P134
[ - ]
1 rpm
0.0 to 2600
[ - ]
0.1 A(< 100)
-1 A(> 99.9)
NOTE!
After reset to default, the password becomes 5 again.
Speed Reference value in rpm (Factory Default). With filter of 0.5 s.
The displayed units can be changed from rpm to other units at parameters
P207, P216 and P217. The scale factor can be changed at P208 and
P210.
It does not depend on the speed reference source.
Through this parameter is possible to change the speed reference (P121) when P221 or P222 = 0.
Indicates the actual motor speed in rpm, (factory default). With filter of
0.5 s.
The displayed units can be changed from rpm to other units at parameters
P207, P216 and P217. The scale factor can be changed at P208 and
P210.
Through this parameter is possible to change the speed reference (P121) when P221 or P222 = 0.
Indicates inverter output current in ampère (A).
118
Parameter
P004
DC Link Voltage
P005
Motor Frequency
P006
Inverter Status
P007
Output Voltage
P009
Motor Torque
P010
Output Power
P012
Digital Inputs
DI1 to DI8 Status
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.0 to 1235
[ - ]
1 V
Description / Notes
Indicates the inverter DC Link voltage in volt (V).
0.0 to 1020
[ - ]
0.1 Hz
Indicates the inverter output frequency in hertz (Hz).
rdy, run, Sub, Exy
[ - ]
-
Indicates the inverter status: rdyinverter is ready to be started or enabled; runinverter is enabled;
Subinverter is disabled and line voltage is too low for operation
(undervoltage);
Exyinverter is in a fault condition, ‘xy’ is the number of the Fault code, example: E06.
0 to 800
[ - ]
1 Vac
0.0 to 150.0
[ - ]
0.1 %
Indicates the inverter output voltage in volt (V).
Indicates the torque developed by the motor. It is determined as follows:
P009 =
Tm.100
x Y
I
Tm
I
Where:
Tm = Measured motor torque current
Tm
=
Nominal motor torque current given by:
N
= Speed
Y = 1 for N
Nrated
I
Tm
= P401 2 - X 2
X = P410 x
P178
100
Y =
Nrated for N > Nrated
N
Indicates the instantaneous output power in kilowatt (kW).
0.0 to 3276
[ - ]
0.1 kW
LCD = 1 or 0
LED = 0 to 255
[ - ]
-
Indicates on the Keypad LCD display the status of the 6 digital inputs of the control board (DI1 to DI6), and the 2 digital inputs of the I/O Expansion
Board (DI7 and DI8). Number 1 stands forActive (DIx closed) and number
0 stands for Inactive (DIx open), in the following order:
DI1, DI2, ... , DI7, DI8.
The LED display shows a decimal value related to the 8 Digital Inputs, where the status of each input is considered one bit of a binary number where:
119
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
Inactive = 0, Active = 1, and the DI1 status is the most significant bit (MSB).
Example:
DI1 = Active (+24 V); DI2 = Inactive (0 V);
DI3 = Inactive (0 V); DI4 = Active (+24 V);
DI5 = Inactive (0 V); DI6 = Inactive (0 V);
DI7 = Inactive (0 V); DI8 = Inactive (0 V);
This is equivalent to the binary sequence:
10010000
Which corresponds to the decimal number 144.
The Keypad displays will be as follows:
DI1 to DI8 Status
P012 = 10010000
P013
Digital and Relay
Outputs DO1, DO2
RL1, RL2 and RL3
Status
LCD = 0 or 1
LED = 0 to 255
[ - ]
-
Indicates on the Keypad LCD Display the status of the 2 Digital Outputs of the I/O Expansion Board (DO1, DO2) and the 3 Relay Outputs of the control board. Number 1 stands forActive and number 0 stands for Inactive, in the following order: DO1, DO2, RL1, RL2, RL3.
The LED display shows a decimal value related to the status of the 5
Digital and Relay Outputs, where the status of each output is considered one bit of a binary number where:
Inactive = 0, Active = 1, and the status of DO1 is the most significant bit
(MSB). The 3 least significant bits are always ‘0’.
Example:
DO1 = Inactive; DO2 = Inactive
RL1 = Active: RL2 = Inactive; RL3 = Active
This is equivalent to the binary sequence:
00101000
Which corresponds to the decimal number 40.
The Keypad displays will be:
DO1 to RL3 Status
P013 = 00101
120
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P014
Last Fault
P015
Second Previous Fault
P016
Third Previous Fault
P017
Fourth Previous Fault
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 71
[ - ]
-
0 to 71
[ - ]
-
0 to 71
[ - ]
-
0 to 71
[ - ]
-
P018
Analog InputAI1' Value
-100 to +100
[ - ]
0.1 %
Description / Notes
Indicates the numbers of the last, second, third and fourth previous Faults.
Fault Sequence:
Exy P014 P015 P016 P017 P060 P061 P062
P063 P064 P065.
Ex: When the display shows 0 (zero), this means E00, 1 (one) means
E01 and so on.
Indicate the percentage value of the analog inputs AI1 to AI4. The indicated values are obtained after offset action and multiplication by the gain. Refer to parameters P234 to P247.
P019
Analog InputAI2' Value
P020
Analog InputAI3' Value
P021
Analog InputAI4' Value
P022
WEG Use
-100 to +100
[ - ]
0.1 %
-100 to +100
[ - ]
0.1 %
-100 to +100
[ - ]
0.1 %
-
[ - ]
-
P023
Software Version
V4.4X
[ - ]
-
Indicates the CFW-09 Software Version.
P024
A/D Conversion
Value of Analog
Input AI4
LCD: -32768 to +32767
LED: 0 to FFFFH
[ - ]
-
Indicates the A/D conversion result of the analog input A14 located on the I/O Expansion Board.
The LCD display indicates the conversion value as a decimal number and the LED display as a hexadecimal number with negative values in supplement of 2.
P025
A/D Conversion
Value of Iv Current
P026
A/D Conversion
Value of Iw Current
0 to 1023
[ - ]
-
0 to 1023
[ - ]
-
P025 and P026 indicate the A/D conversion result, in module, of the V and W phase currents, respectively.
121
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P027
Analog Output AO1
P028
Analog Output AO2
P029
Analog Output AO3
P030
Analog Output AO4
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.0 to 100
[ - ]
0.1 %
Description / Notes
Indicate the percentage value of the analog outputs AO1 to AO4 with respect to the full-scale value. The indicated values are obtained after the multiplication by the gain. Refer to the description of parameters
P251 to P258.
0.0 to 100
[ - ]
0.1 %
-100 to +100
[ - ]
0.1 %
-100 to +100
[ - ]
0.1 %
P040
PID Process Variable
0 to 100
[ - ]
%
It indicates the process variable in % (factory setting), used as the PID
Feedback.
The indication unit can be changed through P530, P531 and P532. The scale can be changed through P528 and P529.
Refer to detailed description in item 6.5 - Special Function Parameters.
This parameter also allows to modify the PID set point (see P525), when
P221 = 0 or P222 = 0.
P042
Powered Time
LCD: 0 to 65535
LED: 0 to 6553h (x10)
[ - ]
1 h
Indicates the total number of hours that the inverter was powered.
The LED Display shows the total number of hours that the inverter was energized divided by 10.
This value remains stored even when the inverter is turned OFF.
Example: Indication of 22 hours powered.
P043
Enabled Time
0 to 6553.5
[ - ]
0.1 h (< 999.9)
1 h (> 1000)
Hours Energized
P042 = 22 h
Indicates the total number of hours that the inverter has run.
Indicates up to 6553.5 hours, rolls over to 0000.
If P204 is set to 3, the P043 is reset to zero.
This value remains stored even when inverter is turned OFF.
122
P060
Fifth Error
Occurred
P061
Sixth Error
Occurred
P062
Seventh Error
Occurred
P063
Eighth Error
Occurred
P064
Ninth Error
Occurred
P065
Tenth Error
Occurred
P070
Current and
Motor Speed
Parameter
P044 kWh Counter
P071
Command Word
P072
Fieldbus Speed
Reference
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
0 to 71
[ - ]
-
0 to 71
[ - ]
-
0 to 71
[ - ]
-
0 to 71
[ - ]
-
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 65535
[ - ]
1 kWh
Description / Notes
Indicates the energy consumed by the motor.
Indicates up to 65535 kWh, then it returns to zero.
If P204 is set to 4, the P044 is reset to zero.
This value remains stored even when inverter is turned OFF.
Indicates the numbers of the fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth ninth and tenth occurred error, respectively.
Record Systematic:
Exy P014 P015 P016 P017 P060 P061 P062
P063 P064 P065
Ex: When the display show 0 (zero), this means E00, 1 (one) means
E01 and so on.
0 to 71
[ - ]
-
0 to 71
[ - ]
-
0 to 2600
[ - ]
0.1 A(< 100)
1 A(> 99.9)
0 to P134
[ - ]
1 rpm
Indicates simultaneously the motor current value (A) and the motor speed value (rpm).
It is possible to use this parameter to change the speed reference (P121) when P221 or P222 = 0.
NOTE!
The LED display shows the speed.
LCD: 0 to 65535
LED: 0 to FFFFh
Shows the command word value set through the network.
The LCD display of the keypad shows the value in a decimal representation, while the LED display shows the value in a hexadecimal representation.
LCD: 0 to 65535
LED: 0 to FFFFh
Shows the speed reference value set through the Fieldbus network.
The LCD display of the keypad shows the value in a decimal representation, while the LED display shows the value in a hexadecimal representation.
123
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
6.2 REGULATION PARAMETERS - P100 to P199
Parameter
P100
Acceleration Time
P101
Deceleration Time
P102
Acceleration Time 2
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.0 to 999
[ 20 ]
0.1 s (< 99.9) -1 s (> 99.9)
Description / Notes
Setting the value to 0.0 s results in no Acceleration ramp.
0.0 to 999
[ 20 ]
0.1 s (< 99.9) -1 s (> 99.9)
Defines the time to accelerate (P100) linearly from zero up to the maximum speed (P134) or to decelerate (P101) linearly from the maximum speed down to 0 rpm.
The selection of the acceleration / deceleration time ramp 2 (P102 or
P103) can be made by reprogramming one of the digital inputs DI3 to
DI8. Refer to P265 to P270 in ramp 2.
0.0 to 999
[ 20 ]
0.1 s (< 99.9) - 1 s (> 99.9)
P103
Deceleration Time 2
0.0 to 999
[ 20 ]
0.1 s (< 99.9) - 1 s (> 99.9)
P104
S Ramp
0 to 2
[ 0 ]
-
Speed
P104
0
1
2
S Ramp
Inactive
50 %
100 %
Table 6.1 - Choosing S or linear ramp
P120
Speed Reference
Backup
0 or 1
[ 1 ]
-
Linear
50 % S ramp
100 % S ramp
Accel. Time
(P100/102)
Decel. Time
(P101/103)
Figure 6.1 - S or linear ramp
Time
The ramp S reduces the mechanical stress during the acceleration and deceleration of the load.
Defines if the Frequency Reference Backup function is disabled (0) or enabled (1).
If P120 = Off, the inverter does not save the current reference value, when the inverter is enabled again, it will restart from the minimum frequency setting (P133).
This back-up function is applicable to the keypad (HMI), E.P., Serial,
Fieldbus and PID Setpoint (P525) references.
124
Parameter
P121
Keypad Speed
Reference
P122 (2)(11)
JOG or JOG+
Speed Reference
P123 (2)(11)
JOG - Speed
Reference
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
P120
0
1
Backup
Off
On
Table 6.2 - Speed reference backup
P133 to P134
[ 90 ]
1 rpm
0 to P134
[ 150 (125) ]
1 rpm
0 to P134
[ 150 (125) ]
1 rpm
To activate the and active: P221 = 0 or P222 = 0.
With P120 = 1 (On) the content of P121 is maintained (backup) even when the inverter is disabled or turned off.
The JOG command source is defined at P225 (Local Mode) or P228
(Remote Mode).
If the JOG command is selected for DI3 to DI8, one of the Digital Inputs must be programmed as follows:
Digital Input
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
Parameters
P265 = 3 (JOG)
P266 = 3 (JOG)
P267 = 3 (JOG)
P268 = 3 (JOG)
P269 = 3 (JOG)
P270 = 3 (JOG)
Table 6.3 - JOG Command selected by digital input
During the JOG command, the motor accelerates to the value defined at P122, following the acceleration ramp setting.
The direction of rotation is defined bythe Forward/Reverse function (P223 or P226).
JOG is effective only with the motor at standstill.
The JOG+ and JOG- commands are always via Digital Inputs.
One DIx must be programmed for JOG+ and another for JOG- as follows:
Digital Inputs
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
JOG+
P265 = 10
P266 = 10
P267 = 10
P268 = 10
P269 = 10
P270 = 10
Parameters
JOG-
P265 = 11
P266 = 11
P267 = 11
P268 = 11
P269 = 11
P270 = 11
Table 6.4 - JOG+ and JOG- command selection
125
P128 (2) (11)
Multispeed
Reference 5
P129 (2) (11)
Multispeed
Reference 6
P130 (2) (11)
Multispeed
Reference 7
P131 (2) (11)
Multispeed
Reference 8
P124 (2) (11)
Multispeed
Reference 1
P125 (2) (11)
Multispeed
Reference 2
P126 (2) (11)
Multispeed
Reference 3
P127 (2) (11)
Multispeed
Reference 4
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
During the JOG + or JOG- commands the values of P122 or P123 are respectivelyadded to, or subtracted from the speed reference to generate the total reference. Refer to figure 6.26.
P133 to P134
[ 90 (75) ]
1 rpm
P133 to P134
[ 300 (250) ]
1 rpm
P133 to P134
[ 600 (500) ]
1 rpm
P133 to P134
[ 900 (750) ]
1 rpm
P133 to P134
[ 1200 (1000) ]
1 rpm
P133 to P134
[ 1500 (1250) ]
1 rpm
P133 to P134
[ 1800 (1500) ]
1 rpm
P133 to P134
[ 1650 (1375) ]
1 rpm
These parameters (P124 to P131) are shown only when P221 = 8 and/ or P222 = 8 (Multispeed).
Multispeed is used when the selection of a number (up to 8) of preprogrammed speeds is desired.
If you want to use only 2 or 4 speeds, any input combination of DI4, DI5 and DI6 can be used. The input(s) programmed for other function(s) must be considered as 0 V in the table 6.5.
It allows control of the speed by relating the values programmed in parameters P124 to P131 to a logical combination of the Digital Inputs.
The advantages of this function are stability of the fixed references and electrical noise immunity (isolated digital inputs DIx).
Multispeed function is active when P221 (Local Mode) or P222 (Remote
Mode) is set to 8 (Multispeed).
DI6
0 V
0 V
0 V
0 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
Digital Input
DI4
DI5
DI6
Programming
P266 = 7
P267 = 7
P268 = 7
8 speeds
4 speeds
2 speeds
DI5
0 V
0 V
24 V
24 V
0 V
0 V
24 V
24 V
DI4
0 V
24 V
0 V
24 V
0 V
24 V
0 V
24 V
Table 6.5 - Multispeed references
Speed Ref.
P124
P125
P126
P127
P128
P129
P130
P131
126
Parameter
P132 (1)
Maximum
Overspeed Level
0 to 100
[ 10 ]
1 %
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
Speed
P124
P125
P126
P127
P128
P129
P130
DI6
DI5
DI4
Figure 6.2 - Multispeed
P131
Accel. Ramp
Time
24 V
0 V (Open)
24 V
0 V (Open)
24 V
0 V (Open)
When the effective overspeed exceeds the value of P134+P132 longer than 20 ms, the CFW-09 will disable the PWM pulses by E17.
The P132 setting is a value in percent of P134.
When programmed P132 = 100 %, this function remains disabled.
P133 (2) (11)
Minimum Speed
Reference
P134 (2) (11)
Maximum Speed
Reference
0.0 to (P134-1)
[ 90 (75) ]
1 rpm
(P133 + 1) to (3.4 x P402)
[ 1800 (1500) ]
1 rpm
Define the maximum and minimum motor operation speed reference.
Are valid for any type of speed reference signal.
For more details about the actuation of P133 refer to P233 (Analog
Inputs Dead Zone).
a)
P134
Speed
-10 V
P133
-P133
+10 V
Speed
Reference
-P134
127
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes b)
P134
Speed
P135 (2)
Speed Transition to I/F
Control
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 (Sensorless
Vector Control)
P136
Current Reference for I/F Mode
For Sensorless
Vector Control
(P202 = 3)
0 to 90
[ 18 ]
1 rpm
0 to 9
[ 1 ]
1
P133
0
0 ....................... 100 %
0 .......................... 10 V
0 ....................... 20 mA
4 mA .................. 20 mA
10 V............................ 0
20 mA ......................... 0
20 mA .................. 4 mA
Speed
Reference
Figure 6.3 a) and b) - Speed limits considering the “Dead Zone” active (P233 = 1)
The speed at which the transition from Sensorless Vector Control to I/F
(Scalar Control with Imposed Current) occurs. The minimum speed recommended for Sensorless Vector Control is 18 rpm for 60 Hz motors and 15 rpm for 50 Hz motors, with 4 poles.
For P135 3 the CFW-09 will always operate in Sensorless Vector Mode when P202 = 3, (there is no transition to the I/F Mode).
The current level to be applied on the motor in the I/F Mode is set at
P136.
Scalar Control with imposed current means only current control working with current reference level adjusted by P136. There is no speed control, just open loop frequency control.
Sets the current to be applied to the motor when in I/F Mode. I/F Mode occurs when the motor speed is lower than the value defined by parameter P135.
P136
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
0
1
Current in I/F Mode
% of P410 (Imr)
100 %
111 %
122 %
133 %
144 %
155 %
166 %
177 %
188 %
200 %
Table 6.6 - Current reference for I/F mode
128
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P136
Manual Torque
Boost
For V/F Control
(P202 = 0, 1 or 2)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 9
[ 1 ]
1
Description / Notes
Compensates for the voltage drop on the motor stator resistance at low frequencies and increases the inverter output voltage in order to maintain a constant torque in V/F operation.
Always set P136 to the lowest value that permits the motor to start satisfactorily. If the value is higher than required, an inverter overcurrent
(E00 or E05) may occur due to high motor currents at low frequencies.
Nominal
Output Voltage
P136 = 9
1/2 Nominal
P136 = 0
0
30 Hz 60 Hz
Frequency
Figure 6.4 - P202 = 0 - V/F 60 Hz curve
Nominal
Output Voltage
P136 = 9
1/2 Nominal
P136 = 0
0
25 Hz 50 Hz
Frequency
Figure 6.5 - P202 = 1 - V/F 50 Hz curve
129
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P137
Automatic Torque
Boost
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 0, 1 or 2
(V/F Control)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.00 to 1.00
[ 0.00 ]
0.01
Description / Notes
The automatic Torque Boost compensates for the voltage drop in the stator resistance as a function of the motor active current.
The criteria for setting P137 are the same as for the parameter P136.
Speed
Reference
Torque Boost
P136
P007
Motor
Voltage
Output
Active
Current
Automatic
Torque Boost
P137
P139
Figure 6.6 - Block diagram P137
Output Voltage
Nominal
1/2 Nominal
Boost
Zone
1/2 Nom Nominal
Speed
Figure 6.7 - V/F curve with automatic torque boost
P138
Slip Compensation
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 0, 1 or 2
(V/F Control)
-10.0 to +10.0 %
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 %
P138 (for values between 0.0 % and +10.0 %) is used in the Motor Slip
Compensation output frequency function, which compensates for the speed drop as the load increases.
P138 allows the user to set the VSD for more accurate slip compensation.
Once set up P138 will compensate for speed variations due to load by automatically adjusting both voltage and frequency.
Total Reference
(Refer to figures 6.26 and 6.27b))
Speed
Active
Output
Current
P139
Slip
Compensation
P138
F
Figure 6.8 - Block diagram P138
130
Parameter
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
Vnom
Output Voltage
P139
Output Current Filter
[only for P202 = 0, 1 or 2 (for V/F Control)]
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 0, 1, 2
(V/F Control) or 5
(VVW)
P140
Dwell Time at Start
0.00 to 16.00
[ 1.00 ]
0.01 s
P141
Dwell Speed at Start
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 0, 1, 2
(V/F Control) or 5
(VVW)
0.0 to 10.0
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 s
0 to 300
[ 90 ]
1 rpm
(Function to motor load)
Nnom
Frequency
Figure 6.9 - V/F curve with slip compensation
To set Parameter 138:
Run the motor without load up to approximately half of the application top speed;
Measure the actual motor or equipment speed;
Apply load;
Increase P138 until the speed reaches its no-load value.
Values of P138 < 0.0 are used in special applications, where the reduction of the output speed is desired as function of the motor current increase. Ex.: load sharing between two motor/drive sets.
Adjusts the time constant of the active current filter.
It is used in the Automatic Torque Boost and Slip Compensation functions. Refer to figures 6.7 and 6.8.
Adjusts the response time of the slip compensation and automatic torque boost. Refer to figures 6.6 and 6.8.
Assist during high torque starts by allowing the motor to establish the flux before starting to accelerate the load.
131
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
Speed
P141
P144 is given by
P140
These parameters allow changing the standard V/F curves defined at
P202. Special V/F profiles may be necessary when motors with nonstandard voltages/frequencies are used.
This function allows changing the predefined standard curves, which represents the relationship between the output voltage and the output frequency of the inverters and consequently, the motor magnetization flux. This feature may be useful with special applications that require rated voltage values or rated frequency values different from the standard ones.
Function activated by setting P202 = 2 (V/F Adjustable).
The factory default value of P144 (8.0 %) is defined for standard 60 Hz motors. If the rated motor frequency (set at P403) is different from 60
Hz, the factory default value of P144 can become unsuitable and may cause troubles during motor start. A good approach for the setting of
P144 =
Time
Figure 6.10 - Curve for high torque starts
P142 (1)
Maximum Output
Voltage
P143 (1)
Intermediate Output
Voltage
P144
Output Voltage at 3 Hz
P145
Speed
P146
(1)
(1)
Field Weakening
(1)
Intermediate Speed
0.0 to 100.0
[ 100.0 ]
0.1 %
0.0 to 100.0
[ 50.0 ]
0.1 %
0.0 to 100.0
[ 8.0 ]
0.1 %
P133(> 90) to P134
[ 1800 ]
1 rpm
90 to P145
[ 900 ]
1 rpm
These parameters are shown on the display(s) only when P202 = 2
(Adjustable V/F
Control)
If an increase of the starting torque is required, increase the value of
P144 gradually.
Procedures for the parameter setting of the function “Adjustable V/F”:
1.Disable Inverter;
2.Check inverter data (P295 to P297);
3.Set motor data (P400 to P406);
4.Set display data in P001 and P002 (P208, P210, P207, P216 andP217);
5.Set speed limits (P133 and P134);
6.Set parameters of the function “Adjustable V/F” (P142 to P146);
7.Enable function “Adjustable V/F” (P202 = 2).
132
Parameter
P150 (1)
DC Link Voltage
Regulation Mode
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
Output Voltage
100 %
P142
P202 = 2
P143
P144
0.1 Hz 3 Hz P146 P145
Figure 6.11 - Adjustable V/F curve V/F
P134
Speed/
Frequency
0 to 2
[ 1 ]
-
P150
0 = With losses
(Optimal Braking)
1 = Without losses
2 = Enable/Disable via DIx
Action
Optimal braking is active as described in P151 for vector control. This gives the shortest possible deceleration time without using dynamic braking or regeneration.
Automatic deceleration ramp control. Optimal braking is not active. The deceleration ramp is automatically adjusted to keep the DC link voltage below the level set in P151. This avoids E01 DC link overvoltage tripping. Can also be used with eccentric loads.
DIx = 24 V:
The Braking acts as described for 150 = 0;
DIx = 0 V:
The Without Losses braking becomes inactive.
The DC link voltage will be controlled by parameter
P153 (Dynamic Braking).
Table 6.7 - DC Link voltage regulation mode
P151 (6)
DC Link Voltage
Regulation Level
339 to 400 (P296 = 0)
[ 400 ]
1 V
For V/F Control
(P202 = 0,1, 2 or 5)
585 to 800 (P296 = 1)
[ 800 ]
1 V
616 to 800 (P296 = 2)
[ 800 ]
1 V
678 to 800 (P296 = 3)
[ 800 ]
1 V
P151 sets the DC Link Voltage Regulation Level to prevent E01overvoltage. This Parameter jointly with the Parameter P152 allows two operation modes for the DC Link Voltage Regulation. Please find below a description of the two operation modes.
DC Link Voltage Regulation type when P152 = 0.00 and P151 is different from the maximum value: ramp Holding – When the DC
Link Voltage reaches the Regulation Level during the deceleration, the deceleration ramp time is increased and the speed is maintained at a constant value till the DC Link Voltage leaves the actuation. Refer to figure 6.12.
This DC Link Voltage Regulation (ramp holding) tries to avoid the inverter disabling through fault relating to DC Link Overvoltage(E01), when the deceleration of loads with high inertia is carried out, or deceleration with short times are performed.
133
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
739 to 800 (P296 = 4)
[ 800 ]
1 V
Description / Notes
P151
Nominal
DC Link Voltage (Ud) (P004)
809 to 1000 (P296 = 5)
[ 1000 ]
1 V
885 to 1000 (P296 = 6)
[ 1000 ]
1 V
924 to 1000 (P296 = 7)
[ 1000 ]
1 V
1063 to 1200 (P296 = 8)
[ 1200 ]
1 V
Speed
E01 - Overvoltage Level
Regulation Level
Time
Time
Figure 6.12 - Deceleration with ramp holding
With this function you can achieve an optimized deceleration time
(minimum) for the driven load.
This function is useful in application where loads with medium moment of inertia are driven, that require short deceleration ramps.
If even so the inverter is disabled during the acceleration due to overvoltage
(E01), reduce the value of P151 gradually, or increase the deceleration ramp time (P101 and/or P103).
In case the supply line is permanently under overvoltage (Ud > P151), the inverter cannot decelerate. In this case reduce the line voltage or increment P151.
If even after these settings the motor cannot decelerate within the required deceleration time, use the dynamic braking. (For more details about the dynamic braking, refer to item 8.10).
Type of DC Link Voltage Regulation when P152 > 0.00 and P151 are set different that than the maximum value:
When the DC Link
Voltage reaches the regulation level during the deceleration, the deceleration ramp time is increased and the motor is also accelerated until the DC Link voltage leaves the defined over-voltage level. There after deceleration is continued. Refer to figure 6.13.
Inverter
V rated
P296
P151
220/
230 V
0
375 V
380 V
1
618 V
400/
415 V
2
675 V
440/
460 V
3
748 V
480 V
4
780 V
500/
525 V
5
893 V
550/
575 V
6
972 V
600 V
7
972 V
Table 6.8 - Recommended values for DC Link voltage regulation level
660/
690 V
8
1174 V
134
Parameter
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
DC Link Voltage (Ud) (P004)
P151
Nominal
E01 - Overvoltage Level
Regulation Level
Time
Speed
Time
Figure 6.13 - Deceleration curve with DC Link voltage limitation (regulation)
NOTES!
The factory setting is at maximum (Link regulation is deactivated). To activate this regulation, we recommend to set
P151 according table 6.8.
If even after this setting the inverter is still disabled due to overvoltage (E01) during the load acceleration, increase the value of the Parameter P152 gradually, or increase the deceleration ramp time (P101 and/or P103). The inverter will not decelerate, if the supply line is permanently under overvoltage Ud > P151).
In this case reduce the line voltage or increment P151.
P152
DC Link
Voltage (Ud)
Speed
P151 Speed Ramp
Output
Figure 6.14 - Voltage regulation block diagram of the DC Link
NOTE!
For large motors it’s recommended the use of the ramp holding function.
135
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P151 (6)
DC Link Voltage
Regulation Level
For Vector Control
(P202 = 3 or 4)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
339 to 400 (P296 = 0)
[ 400 ]
1 V
Description / Notes
P151 defines the level for the DC Link voltage regulation during braking.
The time of the deceleration ramp is automaticallyextended, thus avoiding overvoltage error (E01).
The DC Link voltage regulation has two modes of operation:
585 to 800 (P296 = 1)
[ 800 ]
1 V
616 to 800 (P296 = 2)
[ 800 ]
1 V
1. With losses (Optimal braking) – set P150 to 0. In this mode the flux current is modulated so as to increase the losses in the motor, there by increasing the braking torque. It works better with lower efficiency motors (smaller motors). It is not recommended for motors bigger than 75 hp/55 kW. Refer to explanation below.
678 to 800 (P296 = 3)
[ 800 ]
1 V
739 to 800 (P296 = 4)
[ 800 ]
1 V
2. Without losses – set P150 to 1. Only the DC Link voltage regulation is active.
NOTE!
P151 factory setting is set at maximum this disables the DC Link voltage regulation. To enable it, adjust according to table 6.8.
809 to 1000 (P296 = 5)
[ 1000 ]
1 V
885 to 1000 (P296 = 6)
[ 1000 ]
1 V
924 to 1000 (P296 = 7)
[ 1000 ]
1 V
1063 to 1200 (P296 = 8)
[ 1200 ]
1 V
Optimal Braking:
The Optimal Braking is a unique method of stopping the motor that provides more braking torque than DC Injection Braking without requiring
Dynamic Braking components. In the case of DC Braking, except for the friction losses, only the rotor losses are used to dissipate the stored energy due to the driven mechanical load.
With Optimal Braking, both the total motor losses and the inverter losses are used. In this way, it is possible to achieve a braking torque of approximately 5 times higher than with the DC braking (Refer to figure
6.15).
This feature allows high dynamic performance without the use of a
Dynamic Braking resistor.
Figure 6.15 shows a Torque x Speed curve of a typical 7.5 kW/10 hp, IV pole motor. The braking torque developed at full speed, with torque (P169 and P170) limited by the CFW-09 at a value equal to the motor rated torque, is given by TB1 point (figure 6.15).
TB1 value depends on the motor efficiency and disregarding the friction losses it is given by the following equation:
1
TB1 =
Where:
= motor efficiency
For the case in figure 6.15, the motor efficiency at full load condition is
84 % = 0.84, that results in TB1 = 0.19 or 19 % of the motor rated torque. Starting at TB1 point, the braking torque varies in the reverse proportion of the speed (1/N).At low speeds, the braking torque reaches the torque limit level set by the inverter. For the case of figure 6.15, the torque limit (100 %) is reached when the speed is 20 % of the rated speed.
136
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
The braking torque indicated in figure 6.15 can be increased by increasing the inverter torque limit: P169 (maximum forward torque current) or P170
(maximum reverse torque current).
In general, smaller motors have lower efficiency (higher losses) consequently Optimal Braking can achieve higher braking torques with smaller motors.
Examples: 0.75 kW/1 hp, IV poles: = 0.76 that results in TB1 = 0.32
15 kW/20 hp, IV poles: = 0.86 that results in TB1 = 0.16
P152
Proportional Gain of the DC Link Voltage
Regulator
[Only for P202 = 0,
1, 2 (V/F Control) or 5 (VVW)]
P153 (6)
Dynamic Braking
Voltage Level
0.00 to 9.99
[ 0.00 ]
0.01
339 to 400 (P296 = 0)
[ 375 ]
1 V
585 to 800 (P296 = 1)
[ 618 ]
1 V
616 to 800 (P296 = 2)
[ 675 ]
1 V
1.0
Torque (PU)
(a)
(b)
TB1
0
0 0.2
(c)
1.0
2.0
Speed (PU)
Figure 6.15 - T x rpm curve for optimal braking and typical 10 hp/7.5 kW motor driven by an inverter with torque limitation set for a value equal to the rated motor torque
(a) Torque generated by the motor in normal operation, driven by an inverter in “motor mode”.
(b) Braking torque generated by Optimal Braking
(c) Braking torque generated with DC Injection Braking
NOTE!
The enabling of the optimal braking can increase the motor noise level and the vibration level. If this is not desired, disable the optimal braking.
Refer to P151 for V/F Control (figure 6.14).
If P152 = 0.00 and P151 is different from the maximum value, the
Ramp Holding function is active. (Refer to P151 for the Scalar Control
Mode)
P152 multiplies the DC Link voltage error, i.e. DC Link actual - DC
Link setting (P151). P152 is typically used to prevent overvoltage in applications with eccentric loads.
Dynamic braking can only be used if the inverter is fitted with a dynamic braking resistor. The voltage level for actuation of the brake chopper must be set according to the supply voltage. If P153 is set too close to the overvoltage trip level (E01) an overvoltage trip may occur before the brake chopper and resistor can dissipate the braking energy. The following are the recommended settings:
137
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
678 to 800 (P296 = 3)
[ 748 ]
1 V
739 to 800 (P296 = 4)
[ 780 ]
1 V
809 to 1000 (P296 = 5)
[ 893 ]
1 V
885 to 1000 (P296 = 6)
[ 972 ]
1 V
924 to 1000 (P296 = 7)
[ 972 ]
1 V
1063 to 1200 (P296 = 8)
[ 1174 ]
1 V
Description / Notes
Inverter V nom
220/230 V
380 V
400/415 V
440/460 V
480 V
500/525 V
550/575 V
600 V
660/690 V
Table 6.9 - Recommended settings of the dynamic braking actuation
P153
Nominal
5
6
3
4
P296
0
1
2
7
8
P153
375 V
618 V
675 V
748 V
780 V
893 V
972 V
972 V
1174 V
DC Link Voltage (Ud) (P004)
E01
> 400 V
> 800 V
> 1000 V
> 1200 V
E01 -Overvoltage Level
Dynamic Braking Level
Time
DB Resistor
Voltage Ud Ud
P154
Dynamic Braking
Resistor
P155
DB Resistor Power
Rating
0.0 to 500
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 ( 99.9)-
1 ( 100)
0.00 to 650
[ 2.60 ]
0.01 kW (< 9.99)
0.1 kW (> 9.99)
1 kW(> 99.9)
Time
Figure 6.16 - Curve of the dynamic braking actuation
To actuate the Dynamic Braking:
Connect the DB resistor. Refer to chapter 8.
Set P154 and P155 according to the size of the Dynamic braking resistor.
Set P151 to its maximum value: 400 V (P296 = 0), 800 V (P296 = 1, 2,
3 or 4), 1000 V (P296 = 5, 6 or 7) or 1200 V (P296 = 8), to avoid actuation of the DC Link Voltage Regulation before Dynamic Braking.
Resistance value of the Dynamic Braking resistor (in ohms).
P154 = 0 disables the braking resistor overload protection. Must be programmed to 0 when braking resistor is not used.
Adjusts the overload protection for Dynamic Braking resistor. Set it according to the power rating of the DB resistor (in kW).
If the average power in the braking resistor during 2 minutes is higher than the value set at P155, the inverter trips on an E12 fault.
Refer to item 8.10.
138
Parameter
P156 (2) (7) (12)
Motor Overload
Current at 100 %
Speed
P157 (2) (7)
Motor Overload
Current at 50 %
Speed
P158 (2) (7)
Motor Overload
Current at 5 %
Speed
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
P157 to 1.3 x P295
[ 1.1 x P401 ]
0.1A(< 100)
-1A(> 99.9)
Description / Notes
4
I (A) =
Motor Current (P003)
Overload Current
P156 to P158
[ 0.9 x P401 ]
0.1A(< 100)
-1 A(> 99.9)
0.2 x P295 to P157
[ 0.55 x P401 ]
0.1A(< 100)
-1A(> 99.9)
3
2.5
2
1.5
1.3
1.1
0.5
0
0 15 30 60 75 100 150
Figure 6.17 - Ixt function - Overload detection
% P401
110
P156
90
P157
300 t (s)
55
0
0 5 50
Curve for motor with separate ventilation
Curve for self-ventilated motor
Increased Protection Curve
100
Figure 6.18 - Overload protection levels
% Speed
Used to protect motor and inverter against timed overload (Ixt - E05).
The Motor Overload Current (P156, P157 and P158) is the current level above which the CFW-09 will consider the motor operating under overload. The higher the overload, the sooner the Overload Fault E05 will occur.
Parameter P156 (motor overload current at base speed) must be set 10 % higher than the used rated motor current (P401).
The overload current is given as a function of the motor speed. The parameters P156, P157 and P158 are the three points used to form the overload curve, as shown in figure 6.18 with the factory default levels.
139
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P160
(1)
Optimization of the
Speed Regulator
(for torque control)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
This overload curve adjustment improves the protection of self-ventilated motors, or it can be programmed with a constant overload level at any speed for blower cooled motors.
This curve is changed when P406 (Ventilation Type) is changed during the start-up subroutine. (Refer to item 5.2).
0 or 1
[ 0 ]
-
When use P160 = 1?
Speed Regulator
Normal or
Saturated ?
Saturated
Set P160 = 1 (P202 = 4)
Set P160 = 0 (P202 = 3)
Normal
Maintain
P160 = 0
Standard
Operation
Speed reference setting.
Refer to the text below.
Setting of the desired
Torque. Refer to the text below.
Figure 6.19 - Torque control
Speed Regulator operating with Current Limitation (Saturated) for torque limitation purposes
The speed reference shall be set to value at least 10 % higher than the working speed. It ensures that the output of the speed regulator will be equal to the maximum allowed value set for the maximum torque current
(P169, or P170, or external limitation through AI2 orAI3). In such way, the regulator will operate with current limitation, i.e., saturated.
When the speed regulator is positively saturated, i.e., in the forward direction (set in P223/P226), the value for the torque current limitation is set at parameter P169.
When the speed regulator is negatively saturated, i.e., in the reverse direction (set in P223/P226), the value for the torque current limitation is set at parameter P170.
The torque limitation with the saturated speed regulator has also a protection function (limitation). For instance: in a winder, if the winding material is disrupted, then the regulator leaves the saturated condition and starts controlling the motor speed, which will be limited by the speed reference value.
140
Parameter
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
Torque limitation settings
The torque can be limited as follows:
1. Through parameters P169/P170 (by using the keypad, the Serial
Wegbus protocol or the Fieldbus protocols)
2. Through AI2 (P237 = 2 - Maximum torque current)
3. Through AI3 (P241 = 2 - Maximum torque current)
Notes:
The motor current shall be equivalent to the CFW-09 inverter current so that the torque control can achieve its best precision.
The Sensorless Control (P202 = 3) does not work with torque limitation at frequencies lower than 3 Hz. Use the Vector with Encoder Control
(P202 = 4) for applications that require torque limitation at frequencies lower than 3 Hz.
The torque limitation (P169/P170) shall be greater than 30 % in order to guarantee the motor start in the Sensorless Mode (P202 = 3). After the motor has started and it is running above 3 Hz, the torque limitation value (P169/P170) may be reduced below 30 %, if required.
The motor torque (Tmotor) can be calculated from the value at P169/
P170 by using the following equation:
T motor
P
P 295
401
2
P 169
100
*
K
P 410
P 178
100
2
100 where:
Tmotor - Percentage value of the rated motor torque.
K
1
Nrated
N for
N Nrated
P 180
100 for N Nrated
Nrated = Motor synchronous speed
N = Motor actual speed
* The above equation is valid for forward torque. To reverse torque, replace
P169 by P170.
141
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P161 (3)
Proportional Gain of the Speed Regulator
P162 (3)
Integral Gain of the
Speed Regulator
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.0 to 63.9
[ 7.4 ]
0.1
0.000 to 9.999
[ 0.023 ]
0.001
Description / Notes
The gains for the speed regulator are automatically set based on the value of parameter P413 (Tm Constant).
However, these gains can be manually adjusted in order to optimize the dynamic response of the speed. Increase this value to have a faster response. Although, reduce this value in case of speed oscillations.
In general, P161 smoothes abrupt changes of speed or reference, while
P162 reduces the error between the set point and the real speed value, as well as improves the torque response at low speeds.
Optimization of the Speed Regulator – Procedure for manual setting:
1 - Select the acceleration (P100) and/or deceleration (P101) time according to the application;
2 - Set the speed reference to 75 % of the maximum value;
3 - Configure the analog output AO3 or AO4 to Real Speed by setting
P255 or P257 to 2;
4 - Block the speed ramp – Start/Stop = Stop and wait until the motor stops;
5 - Release the speed ramp – Start/Stop = Start; observe the motor speed signal at the analog output AO3 or AO4 with an oscilloscope;
6 - Check among theoptions in figure 6.20whichwaveform best represents the signal measured with the oscilloscope.
N (V) N (V) N (V) a) Low Gain(s) t (s) t (s) b) Optimized Speed
Regulator c) High Gain(s)
Figure 6.20 - Types of response for the speed regulator t (s)
Settings of P161 and P162 as a function of the type of response presented in figure 6.20: a) Increase the proportional gain (P161), and/or increase the integral gain (P162).
b) Speed regulator is optimized.
c) Decrease the proportional gain (P161), and/or decrease the integral gain (P162).
142
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P163
Local Speed
Reference Offset
P164
Remote Speed
Reference Offset
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
-999 to 999
[ 0 ]
1
Description / Notes
Parameters P163 or P164 may be used to compensate a bias offset at the analog input signals, when the speed reference is given by the analog inputs (AI1 to AI4).
Refer to figure 6.26.
-999 to 999
[ 0 ]
1
These parameters (P160 to P164) are shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4 (Vector
Control)
P165
Speed Filter
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
0.012 to 1.000
[ 0.012 ]
0.001 s
Adjusts the time constant for the Speed Filter. Refer to figure 6.27 a).
NOTE!
In general, this parameter shall not be changed. Increasing the speed filter value renders the system response slower.
P166
Speed Regulator
Differential Gain
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
0.00 to 7.99
[ 0.00 ]
-
The differential action may reduce the effects on the motor speed caused by the load variation. Refer to figure 6.27 a).
P166
0.0
0.01 to 7.99
Differential Gain Action
Off
On
Table 6.10 - Speed regulator differential gain action
P167 (4)
Proportional Gain of the Current Regulator
P168 (4)
Integral Gain of the
Current Regulator
0.00 to 1.99
[ 0.5 ]
0.01
0.000 to 1.999
[0.010 ]
0.001
The parameters P167 and P168 are set by the self-tuning routine as a function of parameters P411 and P409, respectively.
NOTE!
These parameters must not be changed.
Parameters
(P166 and P167 and
P168) are shown on the display(s) only when P202 = 3 or 4 (Vector
Control)
143
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P169 (7)
Maximum Output
Current
For V/F Control
(P202 = 0, 1, 2 or 5)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.2 x P295 to 1.8 x P295
[ 1.5 x P295 ]
0.1A(< 100) -1A(> 99.9)
Description / Notes
This parameter limits the motor output current by reducing the speed, which avoids motor stalling under overload conditions.
As the motor load increases, the motor current also increases. When this current exceeds the value set at parameter P169, the motor speed is reduced (by using the deceleration ramp) until the current value falls below the value set at P169. The motor speed is resumed when the overload condition stops.
Motor current
P169
P169 (7)
Maximum Forward
Torque Current
For Vector Control
(P202 = 3 or 4)
0 to 180
[ 125 ]
1 %
P170
Maximum Reverse
Torque Current
This parameters (P169 and
P170) are shown on the display(s) only when P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
144
0 to 180
[ 125 ]
1 %
Time
Speed
Decel. Ramp
(P101/P103)
Decel.
Ramp
Accel.
Ramp
Accel. Ramp
(P100/P102)
During
Acceleration
During
Cont. Duty
During
Deceleration
Figure 6.21 - Curves showing the actuation of the current limitation
Time
This parameter limits the value of the component of the motor current that produces forward torque. The setting is expressed as a percentage value of the inverter rated current (P295 = 100 %).
The values of P169/P170 can be calculated from the maximum desired value for the motor current (Imotor) by using the following equation:
P169/P170 (%) =
100 x Imotor
P295
2
-
100 x P410
P295
2
This parameter limits the value of the component of the motor current that produces reverse torque. While operating in torque limitation, the motor current can be calculated by:
Imotor =
2
+ (P410) 2
Parameter
P171
Maximum Forward
Torque Current at the Maximum Speed
(N = P134)
P172
Maximum Reverse
Torque Current at the Maximum Speed
(N = P134)
These parameters (P171 and
P172) are shown on the display(s) only when P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
P173
Type of Curve for the
Maximum Torque
This parameter is show on the display(s) only when P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
The maximum torque produced by the motor is given by:
Tmotor (%) =
(P401) 2 - P410 x P178
2 where:
1 for N Nrated
K = x 100
0 to 180
[ 125 ]
1 %
While the Optimal Braking is operating, P169 limits the maximum output current in order to produce the braking forward torque (refer to P151).
Refer to the description for P169 above.
Torque current limitation as a function of the speed:
Torque Current
0 to 180
[ 125 ]
1 %
0 or 1
[ 0 ]
-
P170/P169
P173 = 0
P172/P171
P173 = 1
P134
Speed
Synch. Speed x P180
100
Figure 6.22 – Operation curve of the torque limitation at maximum speed
This function is disabled while the value of P171/P172 is equal to or greater than the value of P169/170.
P171 and P172 operate also during the optimal braking by limiting the maximum output current.
It defines the operation curve of the torque limitation at the field-weakening region. Refer to figure 6.22.
P173
0
1
Curve Type
Ramp
Step
Table 6.11 - Curve type of the maximum torque
145
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P175 (5)
Proportional Gain of the Flux Regulator
P176 (5)
Integral Gain of the Flux Regulator
P177
Minimum Flux
P178
Rated Flux
P179
Maximum Flux
P177 and P179 are active only when
P202 = 3 (Sensorless
Vector)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.0 to 31.9
[ 2.0 ]
0.1
0.000 to 9.999
[ 0.020 ]
0.001
Description / Notes
P175 and P176 are automatically set as a function of parameter P412.
In general the automatic setting is adequate and there is no need for a reconfiguration.
These gains shall only be manually reconfigured when the excitation current signal (id*) is oscillating and compromising system operation.
NOTE!
The excitation current (id*) may be unstable in case of P175 > 12.
Note
: (id*) can be observed at analog outputs AO3 and /or AO4 by setting P255 = 14 and / or P257 = 14, or at P029 and / or P030.
0 to 120
[ 0 ]
1 %
0 to 120
[ 100 ]
1 %
0 to 120
[ 120 ]
1 %
Parameters P177 and P179 define the output limits of the flux regulator in the Sensorless Vector Control.
NOTE!
These parameters shall not be changed.
P178 is the flux reference to both Vector controls (Sensorless and with
Encoder).
P180
Starting Point of the
Field Weakening
Region
These parameters (P175, P176,
P178 and P180) are shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4 (Vector
Control)
P181
(1)
Magnetization Mode
This parameter is shown on the display only when
P202 = 4 (Vector
Control with Encoder)
146
0 to 120
[ 95 ]
1 %
0 or 1
[ 0 ]
-
This parameter is represented as a percentage of the motor rated speed
(P402) and defines the speed where the field weakening region of the motor starts.
If the inverter is operating in Vector Control and the motor is not reaching its rated speed, it is possible to gradually reduce the value of parameters
P180 and/or P178 until it works appropriately.
P181
0
1
Function
General Enable
Start/Stop
Action
It applies magnetization current after
General Enable ON
It applies magnetization current after
Start/Stop ON
Table 6.12 - Magnetization mode
In sensorless vector, magnetization current is permanently ON. To disable magnetization current when the motor is stopped, program P211 to 1
(ON). This can be given a time delay by programming P213 greater than zero.
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
6.3 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS - P200 to P399
Parameter
P200
Password
P201 (11)
Language Selection
P202 (1)(2)(11)
Type of Control
P203 (1)
Special Function
Selection
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 or 1
[ 1 ]
-
0 to 3
[ - ]
-
0 to 5
[ 0 (1) ]
-
0 or 2
[ 0 ]
-
Description / Notes
P200
0
1
Function
3
4
5
P202
0
1
2
Off
On
Result
Disables the Password and allows changing parameters content independently of P000.
Enables the Password and allows changing parameters content only when P000 is set to the password value.
Table 6.13 - Password
The factory default for the password is P000 = 5.
To change the password refer to P000.
P201
0
1
2
3
Language
Português
English
Español
Deutsch
Table 6.14 - Language selection
Type of Control
V/F 60 Hz
V/F 50 Hz
V/F Adjustable (Refer to P142 to P146)
Sensorless Vector
Vector with Encoder
VVW (Voltage Vector WEG)
Table 6.15 - Type of control selection
For details on the Type of Control selection Refer to item 5.3.
It defines the selection type of special functions:
P203
0
1
2
Functions
Not Used
PID Regulator
Mechanical Brake Logic
Table 6.16 - Special function selection
P203=1:
For the special function of PID regulator, refer to detailed description of related parameters (P520 to P535).
When P203 is changed to 1, P265 is changed automatically to 15 -
Manual/Auto.
P203=2:
When P203 is changed to 2, parameters P220, P222, P224, P225,
P227, P228, P264, P265, P266, P279 and P313 are automatically changed to functions compatible with the brake logic;
To obtain details on the "Brake Logic" function, refer to the detailed description of parameter P275 to P280 and figure 6.39q.
Note: Parameters that are automatically changed when P203=2 is programmed serve only to help with parameterization of the brake logic function.
147
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P204 (1)(10)
Load/Save
Parameters
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 11
[ 0 ]
-
Description / Notes
The parameters P295 (Inverter Rated Current), P296 (Inverter Rated
Voltage), P297 (Switching Frequency), P308 (SerialAddress) and P201
(Language) are not changed when the factory default parameters are loaded through P204 = 5 and 6.
In order to load the User Parameters #1 (P204 = 7) and/or the User
Parameters #2 (P204 = 8) into the operation area of the CFW-09, it is necessary that the User Memory #1 and/or the User Memory #2 have been previously saved (P204 = 10 and/or P204 = 11).
Once entered the user parameters are automatically saved to the VSD
EEPROM. In addition it is possible to save two further sets of parameters, or to use these as a “backup”.
The operation of Load User 1 and/or 2 can also be done by DIx (refer to parameters P265 to P269).
The options P204 = 5, 6, 7, 8, 10 and 11 are disables when P309 0
(Active Fieldbus).
User
Default
1
Current
Inverter
Parameters
P204 = 5 or 6
Factory
Default
User
Default
2
Figure 6.23 - Parameter transference
148
Parameter
P205
Display Default
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
P204
0, 1, 2, 9
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
Action
Not Used:
No action
Reset P043:
Resets the Time Enabled hour meter to zero
Reset P044:
Resets the kWh counter to zero
Load WEG-60 Hz:
Resets all parameters to the 60 Hz factory default values.
Load WEG-50 Hz:
Resets all parameters to the 50 Hz factory default values.
Load User 1:
Resets all parameters to the values stored in Parameter Memory 1.
Load user 2:
Resets all parameters to the value stored in Parameter Memory 2.
Save User 1:
Stores all current inverter parameter values to Parameter Memory 1.
Save User 2:
Stores all current inverter parameter values to Parameter Memory 2.
Table 6.17 - Action of loading/saving parameters
NOTE!
The action of loading/saving parameters will take effect only after
P204 has been set and the key is pressed.
0 to 7
[ 2 ]
-
Selects which of the parameters listed below will be shown on the display as a default after the inverter has been powered up:
5
6
3
4
7
P205
0
1
2
Display Default
P005 (Motor Frequency)
P003 (Motor Current)
P002 (Motor Speed)
P007 (Motor Voltage)
P006 (Inverter Status)
P009 (Motor Torque)
P070 (Motor Speed and Motor Current)
P040 (PID Process Variable)
Table 6.18 - Options displays default
149
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P206
Auto-Reset
Time
P207
Reference
Engineering Unit 1
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 255
[ 0 ]
1 s
Description / Notes
In the event of a fault trip, except for E09, E24, E31 and E41, the CFW-09 can initiate an automatic reset after the time given by P206 is elapsed.
If P206 2 Auto-Reset does not occur.
If after Auto-Reset the same fault is repeated three times consecutively, theAuto-Reset function will be disabled.Afault is considered consecutive if it happens again within 30 seconds after Auto-Reset.
Hence, if an error occurs four consecutive times, it will be permanently indicated (and the inverter will be disabled).
32 to 127
[ 114 = r ]
-
This parameter is useful only for inverters provided with a keypad with
LCD display.
P207 is used to apply a customized display to P001 (Speed reference) and P002 (motor speed). The letters rpm can be changed to user selected characters, E.g. CFM, L/s, etc.
The Reference Engineering Unit is formed by three characters, which will be applied to the Speed Reference (P001) and the Motor Speed
(P002) LCD display indications. P207 defines the left character. P216 defines the center character and P217 the right character.
All characters correspondent to the ASCII code from 32 to 127 can be chosen.
Examples: A, B, ... , Y, Z, a, b, ... , y, z, 0, 1, ... , 9, #, $, %, (, ), *, +,...
P208
Reference Scale
Factor
(2)(11)
1 to 18000
[ 1800 (1500) ]
1
Defines how the Speed Reference (P001) and the Motor Speed (P002) will be displayed.
For indicating the values in rpm:
Set the synchronous speed according to table 6.19.
Frequency
50 Hz
60 Hz
Motor Pole
Number
2
4
2
4
6
8
6
8
Table 6.19 - Synchronous speed reference in rpm
Syncronous
Speed - rpm
3000
1500
1000
750
3600
1800
1200
900
For indicating other values:
The displayed value when the motor is running at synchronous speed can be calculated through the following equations:
P002 = Speed x P208 / Sync speed x (10) P210
150
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P209 (1)
Motor Phase Loss
Detection
P210
Decimal Point of the Speed Indication
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
P001 = Reference x P208 / Sync speed x (10) P210
Where:
Reference = Speed Reference in rpm;
Speed = Motor speed in rpm;
Sync Speed = Motor synchronous speed (120 x P403 / Poles);
Poles = Motor number of poles (120 x P403 / P402).
Example:
Desired indication: 90.0 l/s at 1800 rpm
Motor synchronous speed: 1800 rpm
Programming: P208 = 900, P210 = 1, P207 = l, P216 = /, P217 = s
0 or 1
[ 0 ]
-
P209
0
1
Motor Phase Loss (E15)
Off
On
Table 6.20 - Actuation motor phase loss detection
With the Motor Phase Loss Detector enabled (P209 = 1), E15 happens when the following conditions occur simultaneously during a minimum time of 2 seconds:
0 to 3
[ 0 ]
1
I.
P209 = On;
II.
Inverter enabled;
III. Speed reference higher than 3 %;
IV. | I u
- I v
| > 0.125 x P401 or | I u
– I w
| > 0.125 x P401 or | I v
– I w
| > 0.125 x P401.
Defines the number of digits after the decimal point of the Speed
Reference (P001) and the Motor Speed indications (P002).
P211 (1)
Zero Speed
Disable
0 or 1
[ 0 ]
-
P211
0
1
Zero Speed Disable
Off
On
Table 6.21 - Zero speed disable
When active, it disables (general disabling, motor runs freely) the inverter when the speed reference and the actual motor speed are lower than the value set at P291 (Zero Speed Zone).
The CFW-09 will be enabled again, when one of the conditions defined by the Parameter P212 is satisfied.
151
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P212
Condition to Leave
Zero Speed Disable
P213
Time Delay for Zero
Speed Disable
P214 (1)(9)
Line Phase Loss
Detection
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 or 1
[ 0 ]
-
Description / Notes
P212
(P211 = 1)
0
1
Inverter leaves zero speed disable if
P001 (Speed ref. N*) >
P291 or P002 (Motor speed N) > P291
P001 (Speed ref. N*) > P291
Table 6.22 - Condition to leave zero speed disable
When the PID Regulator is active (P203 = 1) and in Automatic mode, the inverter leaves the Zero Speed, besides the programmed condition in
P212, only when the PID input error (the difference between setpoint and process variable) is higher than the value programmed in P535.
0 to 999
[ 0 ]
1 s
P213 = 0: Zero speed disable without timing.
P213 > 0: Zero speed disable will only become active after the time delay set in P213. Timing starts when the zero speed zone conditions are met. If these conditions are no longer met during the delay time, the timer will reset.
0 or 1
[ 1 ]
-
P214
0
1
Line Undervoltage/
Phase Fault (E03)
Off
On
Table 6.23 - Actuation line phase loss detection
The phase loss detector is active when:
P214 = On and the CFW-09 is enabled.
The display indication and the updating of the fault memory happen 3 seconds after the fault has occurred.
P215 (1)
Copy Function
0 to 2
[ 0 ]
-
NOTE!
The phase loss detection is not available in types up to 28 A for
220-230 V and 380-480 V supply voltage and in types up to 14 Afor
500-600 V supply voltage, independently of the value set in P214.
P215
0 = Off
Action
None
1 = INV Transfers the current parameter
Keypad values and the content of the
User 1/2 Memories to the non volatile
EEPROM memory of the Keypad
(HMI). The current inverter parameters are not changed.
2 = Keypad Transfers the content of the Keypad
INV (HMI) memory to the current inverter parameters and to the User 1/2
Memories.
Table 6.24 - Action copy function
152
Parameter
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
The copy function is used to transfer the content of the parameters from one inverter to another. The inverters must be of the same type (voltage/ current and the same software version must be installed.
NOTE!
If the HMI has parameters saved of a “different version” than installed in the inverter to which it is trying to copy the parameters, the operation will not be executed and the inverter will display the error
E10 (Error: not permitted Copy Function). “Different Version” are those that are different in “x” or “y”, supposing that the numbering of Software Versions is described as Vx.yz.
Example:version V1.60 (x = 1,y= 6 and z = 0) storedintheHMIpreviously
I.
II.
Inverter version: V1.75 (x´ = 1, y´ = 7 and z´ = 5)
P215 = 2 E10 [(y = 6) (y´ = 7)]
Inverter version: V1.62 (x´ = 1, y´ = 6 and z´ = 2)
P215 = 2 normal copy [(y = 6) = (y´ = 6)]
The procedure is as follows:
1. Connect the Keypad to the inverter from which the parameters will be copied (Inverter A).
2. Set P215 = 1 (INV HMI) to transfer the parameter values from the
Inverter A to the Keypad.
3. Press the key. P204 resets automatically to 0 (Off) after the transfer is completed.
4. Disconnect the Keypad from the inverter.
5. Connect the same Keypad to the inverter to which the parameters will be transferred (Inverter B).
6. Set P215 = 2 (HMI INV) to transfer the content of the Keypad memory (containing the Inverter Aparameters) to Inverter B.
7. Press the key. When P204 returns to 0, the parameter transfer has been concluded. Now InvertersAand B have the same parameter values.
Note:
In case Inverters Aand B are not of the same model, check the values of
P295 (Rated Current) and P296 (Rated Voltage) of Inverter B.
If the inverters are driving different motors, check the motor related parameters of Inverter B.
8. To copy the parameters content of the Inverter A to other inverters, repeat items 5 to 7 of this procedure.
153
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
INVERTER
A
P216
ReferenceEngineering
Unit 2
P217
ReferenceEngineering
Unit 3
P218
LCD Display
ContrastAdjustment
P220 (1)
LOCAL/REMOTE
Selection Source
32 to 127
[ 112 = p ]
0 to 150
[ 127 ]
-
-
32 to 127
[ 109 = m ]
-
0 to 10
[ 2 ]
-
INVERTER
B
Parameters Parameters
INVkeypad
P215 = 1
Press keypadINV
P215 = 2
Press
EEPROM EEPROM
Keypad Keypad
Figure 6.24 -Copying the parameters from the “Inverter A” to the “Inverter B”
While the Keypad runs the reading or writing procedures, it cannot be operated.
These parameters are useful only for inverters provided with a keypad with LCD display.
The engineering unit of the speed reference is composed of three characters, which will be displayed on the indication of the Speed
Reference (P001) and Motor Speed (P002). P207 defines the left character, P216 the center character and P217 the right character.
For more details, refer to Parameter P207.
This parameter is useful only for inverters provided with a keypad with
LCD display.
It allows the adjustment of the LCD Display contrast. Increase/decrease the parameter content to obtain the best contrast.
Defines the source of the LOCAL / REMOTE selection command.
154
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P221 (1)
LOCAL Speed
Reference Selection
P222 (1)
REMOTE Speed
Reference Selection
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
5
6
3
4
P220
0
1
2
7
8
9
10
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection
Always LOCAL Mode
Key
Key
Always REMOTE mode of the Keypad (HMI) (LOCAL Default) of the Keypad (HMI) (REMOTE Default)
Digital inputs DI2 to DI8 (P264 to P270)
Serial (Local Default) - SuperDrive or incorporated Modbus
Serial (Remote Default) - SuperDrive or incorporated Modbus
Fieldbus (Local Default) - Optional Fieldbus board
Fieldbus (Remote Default) - Optional Fieldbus board
PLC (L) - Optional PLC board
PLC (R) - Optional PLC board
Table 6.25 - LOCAL/REMOTE selection
In the factory default setting, the key of the Keypad (HMI) will select
Local or Remote Mode. When powered up, the inverter starts in Local
Mode.
0 to 11
[ 0 ]
0 to 11
[ 1 ]
-
-
The descriptionAI1’ as apposed toAI1 refers to the analogue signal after scaling and/or gain calculations have been applied to it (Refer to figure
6.29).
P221/P222
0
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
8
9
10
11
LOCAL/REMOTE Speed Reference Selection and of the keypad
Analog Input AI1' (P234/P235/P236)
Analog Input AI2' (P237/P238/P239/P240)
Analog Input AI3' (P241/P242/P243/P244)
Analog Input AI4' (P245/P246/P247)
Sum of the Analog Inputs AI1' + AI2' > 0 (Negative values are zeroed)
Sum of the Analog Inputs AI1' + AI2'
Electronic Potentiometer (E.P.)
Multispeed (P124 to P131)
Serial
Fieldbus
PLC
Table 6.26 - LOCAL/REMOTE speed reference selection
The reference value set bythe
P121.
and keys is contained in parameter
Details of the Electronic Potentiometer (E.P.) operation in figure 6.37m).
When option 7 (E.P.) is selected, program P265 or P267 = 5 and P266 or
P268 = 5.
When option 8 is selected, program P266 and/or P267 and/or P268 to 7.
When P203 = 1 (PID), do not use the reference via E.P. (P221/P222 = 7).
When P203 = 1 (PID), the value programmed in P221/P222 becomes the
PID setpoint.
155
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P223 (1) (8)
LOCAL FWD/REV
Selection
P224 (1)
LOCALSTART/STOP
Selection
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 11
[ 2 ]
-
Description / Notes
5
6
3
4
P223
0
1
2
9
10
7
8
11
Key
Key
LOCAL FWD/REV Selection
Always Forward
Always Reverse of the Keypad (Default Forward) of the Keypad (Reverse Default)
Digital Input DI2 (P264 = 0)
Serial (FWD Default)
Reserved Serial (REV Default)
Fieldbus (FWD Default)
Fieldbus (REV Default)
Polarity AI4
PLC (FWD)
PLC (REV)
Table 6.27 - LOCAL FWD/REV selection
0 to 4
[ 0 ]
-
P224
0
1
2
3
4
LOCAL START/STOP Selection and of the Keypad
Digital Input (DIx)
Serial
Fieldbus
PLC
Table 6.28 - LOCAL START/STOP selection
Note:
If the Digital Inputs are programmed for Forward Run/Reverse
Run, the and keys will remain disabled independently of the value programmed at P224.
P225 (1) (8)
LOCAL JOG
Selection
0 to 5
[ 1 ]
-
P225
0
1
2
3
4
5
LOCAL JOG Selection
Disable
Key of the Keypad
Digital inputs DI3 to DI8 (P265 to P270)
Serial
Fieldbus
PLC
Table 6.29 - LOCAL JOG selection
The JOG speed reference is given by parameter P122.
156
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P226 (1) (8)
REMOTE FWD/REV
Selection
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 11
[ 4 ]
-
Description / Notes
5
6
3
4
P226
0
1
2
7
8
9
10
11
Key
Key
REMOTE FWD/REV Selection
Always Forward
Always Reverse of the Keypad (Default Forward ) of the Keypad (Default Reverse )
Digital Input DI2 (P264 = 0)
Serial (FWD Default)
Serial (REV Default)
Fieldbus (FWD Default)
Fieldbus (REV Default)
Polarity AI4
PLC (FWD)
PLC (REV)
Table 6.30 - REMOTE FWD/REV selection
P227 (1)
REMOTE START/
STOP Selection
0 to 4
[ 1 ]
-
P227
0
1
2
3
4
REMOTE START/STOP Selection and
Digital Input (DIx)
Serial
Fieldbus
PLC of the Keypad
Table 6.31 - REMOTE START/STOP selection
Note:
If the Digital Inputs are programmed for Forward Run/Reverse
Run, the and keys will remain disabled independently of the value programmed at P227.
P228 (1) (8)
REMOTE JOG
Selection
0 to 5
[ 2 ]
-
P228
0
1
2
3
4
5
REMOTE JOG Selection
Key
Disable of the Keypad
Digital inputs DI3 to DI8 (P265 to P270)
Serial
Fieldbus
PLC
Table 6.32 - REMOTE JOG selection
The JOG speed reference is given by parameter P122.
157
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
LOCAL
REFERENCE
(P221) (*)
FWD/REV
(P223)
START/STOP
(P224)
JOG
(P225)
LOCAL/REMOTE
Selection (P220)
LOCAL
REFERENCE
REMOTE
REFERENCE
LOCAL
COMMANDS
REMOTE
COMMANDS
REFERENCE
COMMANDS
REFERENCE
REMOTE
REFERENCE
(P222) (*)
FWD/REV
(P226)
START/STOP
(P227)
JOG
(P228)
COMMANDS
(*)
For P221 = 11 (PLC) or P222 = 11 (PLC) the speed reference will be the total reference according to the figure 6.26.
Figure 6.25 - Block diagram of the local / remote mode
158
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
(*)
Valid only for P202 = 3 and 4.
Figure 6.26 - Block diagram of the speed reference
159
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
160
Figure 6.27 a) - Block diagram of the Vector Control
V
P202 =Type of Control
P202 = 0 ou 1 = V/F
P136
Total
Reference
Automatic
Torque BOOST
V
Speed
V
P202 = 2 = Adjustable V/F
P142
P143
P144
P146 P145
Speed
V
Reference
V
P137 P138
Speed Speed
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
V
F
TRANSF.
Active
Current
P139
PWM
PWM
Is = Output Current
Start/Stop
P169 = Max. Output Current
ON
OFF
P169 Is
Figure 6.27 b) - Block diagram of the V/F control (Scalar)
161
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
162
Figure 6.27 c) - Block diagram of the VVW Control
Parameter
P232 (1)
Stop Mode
Selection
P233
Analog Inputs
Dead Zone
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 2
[ 0 ]
-
Description / Notes
P232
0
1
2
Stop Mode
Ramp to Stop
Coast to Stop
Fast Stop
Table 6.33 - Stop mode selection
Parameter P232 is valid only for the following commands:
1) The key of the keypad;
2) Start/Stop function with 2-wire control (through DI1 = 1);
3) Start/Stop function with 3-wire control (refer to parameters from P265 to P270 for a complete description about the function 14).
In the V/F Mode the option 2 (Fast Stop) is not available.
NOTE!
When the “Coast to Stop” option is selected, only start the motor if it is completely stopped.
0 or 1
[ 0 ]
-
This parameter is active only for the analog inputs (AIx) programmed as speed reference.
When set to 1 enables the Dead Zone for the Analog Inputs.
If P233 = 0 (Off) the “zero” signal at the Analog Inputs (0 V/0 mA/ 4 mA or 10 V/20 mA) is directly related to the minimum speed programmed at
P133. Refer to figure 6.28 a).
If P233 = 1 (On) the Analog Inputs have a “dead zone”, and the speed reference remains at its minimum value (defined by P133) until the input signal reaches a level proportional to the minimum speed. Refer to figure
6.28 b).
a) Inactive Dead Zone P233 = 0
Reference
P134
P133
0
4 mA .............................. 20 mA
20 mA .................................0
Alx Signal
163
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes b) Active Dead Zone P233 = 1
Reference
P134
P234
AnalogInputAI1Gain
0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001
P133
0 Alx Signal
10 V .................................. 0
20 mA ............................. 4 mA
Figure 6.28 a) and b) - Actuation of the analog inputs
When the Analog InputAI4 is programmed for -10 V to +10 V (P246 = 4), the curves shown in figure 6.27 are still valid, with the difference that with
AI4 negative the direction of rotation is reversed.
P234, P242, P245
GAIN
AI1' - P018
AI3' - P020
AI4' - P021
AIx
P235
P243
P246
+
+
OFFSET (P236, 244, P247)
Figure 6.29 - Block diagram of the analog input AI1, AI3, AI4
The internal values AI1', AI3', and AI4' are the results of the following equation:
AIx' = (AIx + OFFSET x 10 V) x Gain
100
For example: AI1 = 5 V, Offset = -70 % and Gain = 1.00:
AI1' = (5 + (-70) x 10 V) x 1 = -2 V
100
AI1' = -2 V, means that the motor will run in reverse with a reference equal to 2 V.
164
Parameter
P235 (1)
Analog Input AI1
Signal
P236
Analog Input AI1
Offset
P237 (1)(8)
Analog Input AI2
Function
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 3
[ 0 ]
-
Description / Notes
P235
0
1
2
3
Input AI1 Signal
(0 to 10) V / (0 to 20) mA
(4 to 20) mA
(10 to 0) V / (20 to 0) mA
(20 to 4) mA
Table 6.34 - AI1 signal selection
Switch S1.2
OFF/ON
ON
OFF/ON
ON
When a current signal is used at the Analog Input AI1, set the S1.2
switch on the control board to “ON”.
Options 2 and 3 provide an inverse reference with which is possible to have maximum speed with minimum reference.
-100.0 to +100.0
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 %
Refer to P234.
0 to 3
[ 0 ]
-
P237
0
1
2
3
4
Input AI2 Function
P221/P222
After Ramp Reference
Maximum Torque Current
PID Process Variable
Maximum Torque Current (AI2+AI1)
Table 6.35 - AI2 function
When the option 0 (P221/P222) is selected, AI2 may supply the speed reference (if set to do so at P221/P222), which is subject to the speed limits (P133, P134) and the acceleration/deceleration ramps (P100 to
P103). Refer to figure 6.26.
The option 1 (After Ramp Reference, valid only for P202 = 3 and 4) is generally used as an additional reference signal, for instance, in applications with a dancer. Refer to figure 6.25. It bypasses the accel/ decel ramp.
The option 2 (Maximum Torque Current) permits controlling the torque current limit P169, P170 through the analog inputAI2. In this case P169,
P170 will be Read Only Parameters. Refer to figure 6.26 a). For this type of control, check if P160 should be equal to one or zero.
When AI2 is set to maximum (P019 = 100 %), the torque limit will be also maximum - P169/P170 = 180 %.
The option 3 (PID Process Variable) defines the input AI2 as feedback signal of the PID regulator (for instance: pressure, temperature sensor, etc.), if P524 = 0.
When AI2 is set to its maximum value (P019 = 100 %), the PID process variable will be on its maximum value (100 %).
165
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P238
Analog Input AI2
Gain
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
Option 4 – Maximum Torque Current (AI2+AI1)
:
When parameters P237 = 2 and P241 = 0, the torque current limit (P169 and P170) is given by the signal at the Analog Input AI2.
When parameters P237 = 4 and P241 = 0, the torque current limit (P169 and P170) is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs AI1 and
AI2.
When parameters P237 = 2 and P241 = 2, the torque current limit (P169 and P170) is given by the signal at the Analog Input AI2.
When parameters P237 = 4 and P241 = 2, the torque current limit (P169 and P170) is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs AI1 and
AI2.
When parameters P237 = 4 and P241 = 4, the torque current limit (P169 and P170) is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs AI1 and
AI2.
Note:
The range of the sum between AI1 and AI2 may vary from 0 to
180 %. If the sum result is negative, then the value will be set to zero.
0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001
AI2' - P019
AI2
P239
P238
Gain
Filter (P248)
OFFSET
(P240)
Figure 6.30 - Block diagram of the analog input AI2
The internal value of AI2' is the result of the following equation:
For example: AI2 = 5 V, OFFSET = -70 % and Gain = 1.00:
P239
Analog Input AI2
Signal
(1)
0 to 3
[ 0 ]
-
AI2' = -2 V, means that the motor runs in reverse direction reference equal to 2 V
P239
0
1
2
3
Input AI2 Signal
(0 to 10) V / (0 to 20) mA
(4 to 20) mA
(10 to 0) V / (20 to 0) mA
(20 to 4) mA
Table 6.36 - AI2 signal selection
Switch S1.1
OFF/ON
ON
OFF/ON
ON
166
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P240
Analog Input AI2
Offset
P241 (1)
Analog Input AI3
Function
(Isolated analog input on the optional board EBB.
Refer to chapter 8)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
When a current signal is used at the Analog Input AI2, set the switch
S1.1 on the control board to “ON”.
Options 2 and 3 provide an inverse reference with which is possible to have maximum speed with minimum reference.
-100.0 to +100.0
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 %
Refer to P234.
0 to 3
[ 0 ]
-
P241
0
1
2
3
4
Input AI3 Function
P221/P222
After Ramp Reference
Maximum Torque Current
PID Process Variable
Maximum Torque Current (AI3+AI2)
Table 6.37 - AI3 function
When the option 0 (P221/P222) is selected, AI3 may supply the speed reference (if set to do so at P221/P222), which is subject to the speed limits (P133, P134) and the acceleration/deceleration ramps (P100 to
P103). Refer to figure 6.26.
The option 1 (After Ramp Reference, valid only for P202 = 3 and 4) is generally used as an additional reference signal, for instance, in applications with a dancer. Refer to figure 6.25. It bypasses the accel/ decel ramp.
The option 2 (Maximum Torque Current) permits controlling the torque current limit P169, P170 through the analog inputAI3. In this case P169,
P170 will be Read only parameters. Refer to figure 6.26 a). For this type of control, check if P160 should be equal to one or zero.
When AI3 is set to maximum (P020 = 100 %), the torque limit will be also maximum - P169/P170 = 180 %.
The option 3 (Process Variable) defines the inputAI3 as feedback signal of the PID Regulator (for instance: pressure, temperature sensor, etc.), if
P524 = 1.
When AI3 is set to its maximum value (P020 = 100 %), the PID process variable will be on its maximum value (100 %).
Option 4 - Maximum Torque Current (AI3+AI2)
:
When parameters P237 = 0 and P241 = 2, the torque current limit (P169 and P170) is given by the signal at the Analog Input AI3.
When parameters P237 = 0 and P241 = 4, the torque current limit (P169 and P170) is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs AI2 and
AI3.
167
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P242
Analog Input AI3
Gain
P243 (1)
Analog Input AI3
Signal
P244
Analog Input AI3
Offset
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
When parameters P237 = 2 and P241 = 2, the torque current limit (P169 and P170) is given by the signal at the Analog Input AI2.
When parameters P237 = 2 and P241 = 4, the torque current limit (P169 and P170) is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs AI2 and
AI3.
When parameters P237 = 4 and P241 = 4, the torque current limit (P169 and P170) is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs AI1 and
AI2.
Note:
The range of the sum between AI2 and AI3 may vary from 0 to
180 %. If the sum result is negative, then the value will be set to zero.
Refer to P234.
0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001
0 to 3
[ 0 ]
-
-100.0 to +100.0
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 %
P243
0
1
2
3
Input AI3 Signal
(0 to 10) V / (0 to 20) mA
(4 to 20) mA
(10 to 0) V / (20 to 0) mA
(20 to 4) mA
Table 6.38 - AI3 signal selection
Switch S4.1 (EBB)
Off/On
On
Off/On
On
When a current signal is used at the Analog Input AI3, set the S4.1
switch on the EBB board to “ON”.
Options 2 and 3 provide an inverse reference with which is possible to have maximum speed with minimum reference.
Refer to P234.
P245
Analog Input AI4
Gain (14 bit Analog
Input of the optional board EBA. Refer to chapter 8)
P246 (1)
Analog Input AI4
Signal
0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001
0 to 4
[ 0 ]
-
Refer to P234.
P243
0
1
2
3
4
Input AI4 Signal
(0 to 10) V / (0 to 20) mA
(4 to 20) mA
(10 to 0) V / (20 to 0) mA
(20 to 4) mA
(-10 to +10) V
Table 6.39 - AI4 signal selection
Switch S2.1 (EBA)
OFF/ON
ON
OFF/ON
ON
OFF
168
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P247
Analog Input AI4
Offset
P248
Filter Input AI2
P251
Analog Output AO1
Function
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
When a current signal is used at the Analog Input AI4, set the switch
S2.1 on the EBA board to “ON”.
Options 2 and 3 provide an inverse reference with which is possible to have maximum speed with minimum reference.
-100.0 to +100.0
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 %
Refer to P234.
It sets the time constant of the RC Filter of the Input AI2 (refer to figure
6.29).
0.0 to 16.0
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 s
0 to 14
[ 2 ]
-
Check possible options on table 6.40.
With factory default values (P251 = 2 and P252 = 1.000) AO1 = 10 V when the motor speed is equal to the maximum speed defined at P134.
TheAO1 output can be physically located on the control board CC9 (as a
0 V to 10 V output) or on the option board EBB (AO1', as a (0 to 20) mA/
(4 to 20) mA output). Refer to chapter 8.
P252
Analog Output AO1
Gain
P253
Analog Output AO2
Function
0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001
0 to 14
[ 5 ]
-
Adjusts the gain of the AO1 analog output. For P252 = 1.000 the AO1 output value is set according to the description after figure 6.31.
Check possible options on table 6.40.
With factory default values (P253 = 5 and P254 = 1.000) AO2 = 10 V when the output current is equal to 1.5 x P295.
TheAO2 output can be physically located on the control board CC9 (as a
0 V to 10 V output) or on the option board EBB [(AO2', as a (0 to 20) mA/
(4 to 20) mA output)]. Refer to chapter 8.
Adjusts the gain of the AO2 analog output. For P254 = 1.000 the AO2 output value is set according to the description after figure 6.31.
P254
Analog Output AO2
Gain
P255
Analog Output AO3
Function (Located on the Optional I/O
Expansion Board
EBA)
0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001
0 to 63
[ 2 ]
-
Check possible options on table 6.40.
With factory default values (P255 = 2 and P256 = 1.000) AO3 = 10 V when the motor speed is equal to maximum speed defined at P134.
For more information about the Analog Output AO3, refer to chapter 8.
169
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P256
Analog Output AO3
Gain
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001
Description / Notes
Adjusts the gain of the AO3 analog output for P256 = 1.000 the AO3 output value is set according to the description after figure 6.31.
P257
Analog Output AO4
Function (Located on the Optional I/O
Expansion Board
EBA)
0 to 63
[ 5 ]
-
Check possible options on table 6.40.
For factory default values (P257 = 5 and P258 = 1.000) AO4 = 10 V when the output current is equal to 1.5 x P295.
For more information about the AO4 output, refer to chapter 8.
Functions
Speed Reference
Total Reference
Real Speed
Torque Reference
[P202 = 3 or 4 (Vector)]
Torque Current
[P202 = 3 or 4 (Vector)]
Output Current
(with filter 0.3 s)
PID Process Variable
Active Current
[P202 = 0, 1, 2 or 5]
(with filter 0.1 s)
Power (kW)
(with filter 0.5 s)
PID Setpoint
Torque Positive [P202 = 3 or 4 (vector)]
Motor Torque
PLC
Dead Zone for Speed
Indication
WEG Use
Motor Voltage
P251
(AO1)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
-
14
8
9
P253
(AO2)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
-
14
8
9
P255
(AO3)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P257
(AO4)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8
9
10 10
11
12
11
12
-
15 to 63 15 to 63
14 14
Table 6.40 - Functions of the analog outputs
P258
Analog Output AO4
Gain
0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001
Adjusts the gain of the AO4 analog output for P258 = 1.000 the AO4 output value is set according to the description after figure 6.31.
170
Parameter
P259
Dead Zone for
Speed Indication
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
P251
P253
P255
P257
Speed Reference
Total Reference
Real Speed
Torque Reference
Torque Current
Output Current
PID Process Variable
Active Current
Power
PID Setpoint
Positive Torque Current
Motor Torque
Dead Zone for Speed
Indication
PLC
Motor Voltage
P252, P254, P256, P258
Gain
Figure 6.31 - Block diagram of the analog outputs
AOX
0 a P134
[ 1000 ]
1 rpm
Scale of the Analog Outputs indications:
Full Scale = 10 V: for outputs AO1 and AO2 located on the control board
CC9 and AO3 and AO4 located on the optional board EBA.
Full Scale = 20 mAfor the outputsAO1I andAO2I located on the optional board EBB.
Speed Reference (P001): full scale = P134
Total Reference: full scale = P134
Motor Speed (P002): full scale = P134
Torque Reference: full scale = 2.0 x P295
Torque Current: full scale = 2.0 x P295
Output Current: full scale = 1.5 x P295
PID Process Variable: full scale = 1.0 x P528
Active Current: full scale = 1.5 x P295
Power: full scale = 1.5 x 3 x P295 x P296
PID Setpoint: full scale = 1.0 x P528
Motor Torque: full scale = 2.0 x P295
Dead Zone for Speed Indication: full scale = P134
Motor Voltage: full scale = 2.0 x P400
While the speed indication in P002 is below of the value set at P259
(P002 < P259), the value of the analog output (P251 and/or P253 = 13) will remain at 0 V or 0 mA/4 mA. When the speed value is above the value set at P259, then the analog output will vary between its minimum and maximum value.
171
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
A01
A02
20 mA
10 V
P263 (1)
Digital Input DI1
Function
P264 (1)
Digital Input DI2
Function
P265 (1) (8)
Digital Input DI3
Function
P266 (1)
Digital Input DI4
Function
P267 (1)
Digital Input DI5
Function
0 to 3
[ 1 (Start/Stop) ]
-
0 to 8
[ 0 (FWD/REV) ]
-
0 to 22
[ 0 (Not Used) ]
-
0 to 22
[ 0 (Not Used) ]
-
0 to 22
[ 3 (JOG) ]
4 mA
0 V
P259 P134
Figure 6.32 - Dead zone for speed indication n
NOTES!
For current analog output (0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA) it is necessary to use the EBB expansion board.
A voltage analog output (0 to 10 V) is available at the CC9 control board.
The analog outputs AO3 and AO4 do not have this function, i.e., set P255 and/or P257 = 13 will program no function.
Check possible options on table 6.41 and details about each function’s operation on figure 6.37.
The status of the digital inputs can be monitored at Parameter P012.
172
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P268 (1)
Digital Input DI6
Function
P269 (1)
Digital Input DI7
Function
(Located on the optional board EBA or EBB)
P270 (1)
Digital Input DI8
Function
(Located on the optional board EBA or EBB)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 22
[ 6 (Ramp 2) ]
-
0 to 22
[ 0 (Not Used) ]
0 to 22
[ 0 (Not Used) ]
-
-
Description / Notes
Function
Not Used
Start/Stop
General Enable
Fast Stop
FWD/REV
Local/Remote
JOG
No external Fault
Increase E.P.
Decrease E.P.
Ramp 2
FWD Run
REV Run
Speed/Torque
JOG+
JOG-
Reset
Fieldbus
Start (3 wire)
Stop (3 wire)
Multispeed (MSx)
Manual/Automatic
Motor Thermistor
Disables Flying
Start
DC Link Voltage
Regulator
Parameter Setting
Disable
Load User
Timer RL2
Timer RL3
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
3
-
(DI1) (DI2) (DI3) (DI4) (DI5) (DI6) (DI7) (DI8)
0 2 to 7
0, 7 0 and 0 and 0 and 0, 5, 7 0, 5 and 16 16 16 16 and 16 and 7
1
2
-
-
-
2
-
2
-
2
-
2
-
2
-
2
-
0
1
-
-
-
1
3
-
-
1
3
8
-
1
3
8
-
1
3
8
-
1
3
1
3
8
-
-
-
-
-
-
8
-
-
4
5
-
6
8
-
9
10
4
-
5
6
-
8
9
10
4
5
-
6
-
-
9
10
4
-
5
6
-
-
9
10
4
-
-
6
-
-
9
10
9
10
-
-
-
6
4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
15
-
-
-
11
12
13
14
17
18
14
7
15
-
11
12
13
-
17
18
-
7
15
-
11
12
13
14
17
18
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
19
20
21
22
19
20
21
22
19
20
21
22
Table 6.41 - Functions of the digital inputs
14
7
15
-
11
12
13
-
17
18
19
20
21
22
15
-
-
-
11
12
13
14
17
18
19
20
21
22
19
-
21
22
14
-
15
16
11
12
13
-
17
18
Notes about the Digital Inputs Functions:
- Start/Stop - To ensure the right actuation, this function needs programming P224 and/or P227 = 1.
- Increase E.P. (ElectronicPotentiometer) is activewhenDI3orDI5=+24V.
Beyond parameters P265 and P267 = 5, it is also necessary setting P221 and/or P222 to 7.
- Decrease E.P. (Electronic Potentiometer) is active when DI4 or
DI6 = 0 V. Beyond parameters P266 and P268 = 5, it is also necessary setting P221 and/or P222 to 7.
- Local/Remote = 0 V/24 V at the digital input, respectively.
- Speed /Torque is valid for P202 = 3 and 4 (Vector Control Sensorless and Vector Control with encoder).
173
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
- Speed = DIx Open (0 V), Torque = DIx Closed (+24 V).
When Torque is selected the speed regulators gains P161 and P162 are not used and changed to: Gp (Proportional Gain) = 1.00 and Gi
(Integral Gain) = 0.00. Thus the Total Reference becomes the input of the Torque Regulator. Refer to figure 6.26.
When Speed is selected, the speed regulator gains are defined again by P161 and P162. In applications with torque control, proceed as described at P160.
- The Option DC Link Voltage Regulator must be used, when P150 = 2.
Refer to description of parameter P150.
- DI8 is designed to be used as Motor Thermistor (PTC) input on the option boards EBA/EBB. It can also be used with just one PTC.
2
XC4/XC5:
EBA/EBB
PTC DI8 (P270 = 16)
3
Temperature increase
Temperature decrease
PTC resistance oscillation in ohms ()
Inactive /
Without error
Inactive /
Without error Active / E32
Inactive /
Without error
Active / E32
1k6 3k9
Active / E32
Figure 6.33 - DI8 used as PTC input
- If DI8 should be used as normal digital input - Program the parameter P270 to the required function and connect a resistor between
270 and 1600 in series with the input 4, as indicated below:
XC4/XC5:
CONTACT 2
R=270 to 1600
3
EBA/EBB
DI8
(P270)
CONTACT
OPEN
CLOSED
DI8
DEACTIVATED
ACTIVATED
Figure 6.34 - DI8 used as normal DI
174
Parameter
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
- The functions JOG+ and JOG – are valid only for P202 = 3 and 4.
- The option Fieldbus sets the DI as a remote input for the Fieldbus system and in order to become effective it must be read as any other
DI of the inverter.
Disable Flying Start
: Put +24 V at the digital input to disable Flying
Start.
- The function Loads user via DIx, permits the memory selection of the user 1 or 2, process similar to P204 = 7 and P204 = 8, but the user is loaded from the transition of a DIx programmed for this function.
The memory of user 1 is loaded, when the DIx status changes from low level to high level (transition from 0 V to 24 V) and P265 to P269 = 20, provided the current parameter contents of the inverter have been transferred previously to the parameter memory 1 (P204 = 10).
The memory of user 2 is loaded, when the DIx status changes from high level to low level (transition from 24 V to 0 V) and P265 to P269 = 20, provided the current parameter contents of the inverter have been transferred previously to the parameter memory 2 (P204 = 11).
Inverter
Parameters
P204 = 10
P204 = 11
User 1
User 2
P265 to P269 (DIx) = 20
DIx = 24 V
DIx = 0 V
P265 to P269 (DIx) = 20
DIx = 24 V
DIx = 0 V
Figure 6.35 - Details about the operation of the function load user via DIx
NOTE!
Ensure that when using this function, the parameter sets (User
Memory 1 and 2) are totally compatible with the used installations
(motors, ON/OFF commands, etc.).
User memory cannot be loaded when motor is enabled.
When two different motor parameter sets are saved into the User
Memory 1 and 2, respectively, set for each user the correct values at the Parameters P156, P157 and P158.
When the function 'Parameter Setting Disable' is programmed and the DIx input is +24 V, the parameters cannot be changed, independent of the values that have been set at P000 and P200. When the Dix input is set to 0 V, the parameter changing will be conditioned to the values set at P000 and P200.
175
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
‘Timer RL2 and RL3’ function enables and disables the Relays 2 and
3 (RL2 and RL3).
When the timing function of the relays 2 and 3 is programmed at any
DIx, and when the transition is effected from 0 V to 24 V, the relay will be enabled according to the time set at P283 (RL2) or P285 (RL3).
When the transition from 24 V to 0 V occurs, the programmed relay will be disabled according to the time set at P284 (RL2) or P286 (RL3).
After the DIx transition, to enable or disable the programmed relay, it is required that the DIx remains in on/off status during the time set at parameters P283/P285 and P284/P286. Otherwise the relay will be reset.
Refer to figure 6.36.
Note:
For this function, program P279 and/or P280 = 28 (Timer).
+24 V
DIx
0 V
RL2/
RL3
OFF
ON
P283/
P285
P284/
P286
P283/
P285
P284/
P286
Figure 6.36 - Operation of the function of the timers RL2 and RL3
Multispeed:
The selection of P266 and/or P267 and/or P268 = 7 requires that P221 and/or P222 = 8. Refer to parameters P124 to P131.
176
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION a) START/STOP b) GENERAL ENABLE
Accel. Ramp
Motor Coasts to Stop
Accel. Ramp
Motor Speed
Decel. Ramp
24 V
Time
DI1 Open
Time
Note:
All digital inputs set to general enable must be on in order that the inverter operates as shown above.
Motor Speed
24 V
Time
DIx Open
Time
Note:
All digital inputs set to start/stop must be on in order that the inverter operates as shown above.
c) NO EXTERNAL FAULT
Motor Speed
Motor Coasts to Stop
DIx e) RAMP 2
Start/Stop
DIx
Ramp 2 DIx
P102
P100
Motor Speed d) FWD/REV
Motor Speed
FWD
Time
Time
REV
24 V
DIx
24 V
Open
Open
Time Time f) FAST STOP
24 V
Open
Motor Speed
Time
24 V
Open
P103
P101
Time
24 V
Fast Stop DIx
Time g) LOAD USER VIA DIx
24 V
0 V
Load User 1
DIx
Time
DIx
24 V
Load User 2
0 V
Time
Figure 6.37 a) to g) - Details about the function of the digital inputs
Motor Decelerates with Zero Ramp
Time
Open
Time
177
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION h) JOG
Motor
Speed Accel. Ramp
24 V
Start/Stop DIx
Open
JOG Speed
(P122)
Decel. Ramp
24 V
JOG -
DIx
Open
24 V
General/ Enable DIx
Open i) JOG + and JOG -
Motor
Speed
DIx - JOG ±
24 V
General Enable / Start/Stop
Open
24 V
Start/Stop Open
JOG+ Speed (P122)
JOG- Speed (P123)
Time
Time
General Enable Open
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time j) RESET
Fault (EXY)
Inverter
Status Ready
(*)
Time
24 V
Reset - DIx Open
Time
24 V
Reset
(*)
Fault condition persists
Figure 6.37 (cont.) h) to j) - Details about the function of the digital inputs
Time
178
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION k) 3 WIRE START / STOP
Start - DIx
Open
24 V
Stop -
DIx
24 V
Open
Time
Time
Time
Motor
Speed l) FORWARD RUN / REVERSE RUN
Forward Run - DIx
24 V
Open
Time
Time
24 V
Reverse Run -
DIx
Open
Time
FWD
Motor
Speed Time
Rev.
m) ELECTRONIC POTENTIOMETER (E.P.)
Increase E.P.
Decrease E.P.
Accel.
Decel.
Speed
Reference
Start/Stop
Motor Speed
Minimum
Speed
&
Reset to
Zero
DI3, DI5 Increase E.P.
Reset
24 V
24 V
Open
DI4, DI6 Decrease E.P.
24 V
Start/Stop - DIx Open
Figure 6.37 (cont.) k) to m) - Details about the function of the digital inputs
Time
Time
Time
Time
179
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P275 (1)
Digital Output DO1
Function (located on theOptional I/O
Expansion Board
EBA or EBB)
P276 (1)
Digital Output DO2
Function (located on the Optional I/O
Expansion Board
EBA or EBB)
P277 (1)
Relay Output RL1
Function
P279
Relay Output RL2
Function
P280
(1)
(1)
Relay Output RL3
Function
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 40
[ 0 (Not Used) ]
-
0 to 40
[ 0 (Not Used) ]
0 to 40
[ 13 (No Fault) ]
0 to 40
[ 2 (N > Nx) ]
0 to 40
[ 1 (N* > Nx) ]
-
-
-
-
Description / Notes
Check possible options on table 6.42 and details about each function’s operation on the charts in the figure 6.36.
The status of the Digital Outputs can be monitored at Parameter P013.
The Digital Output will be activated when the condition stated by its function becomes true. In case of a Transistor Output, 24 Vdc will be applied to the load connected to it. For a Relay Output, the relay will pick up when the output is activated.
Function
Not Used
Parameter
(Output)
N* > Nx
N > Nx
N < Ny
N = N*
Zero Speed
Is > Ix
Is < Ix
Torque > Tx
Torque < Tx
Remote run ready
No Fault
No E00
No E01+E02+E03
No E04
No E05
(4 to 20) mA OK
Fieldbus
FWD
Proc. Var. > VPx
Proc. Var. < VPy
Ride-Through
Pre-charge OK
With error
Enabled Hours > Hx
PLC
Timer
N > Nx and Nt > Nx
Brake (Vel) - Real Speed
Brake (Ref) -
Total Reference
Overweight
Slack Cable
Torque Polarity +/-
Torque Polarity -/+
F > Fx _ 1
F > Fx _ 2
Set point =
Process Variable
No E32
Ready 2
26
-
-
29
30
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
P275
(DO1)
P276
(DO2)
P277
(RL1)
0,27and 28 0,27and28 0 and 28
1 1 1
4
5
2
3
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
26
-
-
29
30
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
26
27
-
29
30
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
26
27
28
29
30
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
P279
(RL2)
0
1
26
27
28
29
30
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
P280
(RL3)
0
1
Table 6.42 - Functions of the digital outputs and relay outputs
180
Parameter
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
Additional Notes about the Digital Output Functions:
- Remote:
Inverter is operating in Remote mode.
- Run:
Inverter is enabled (the IGBTs are switching, the motor may be at any speed, including zero).
- Ready:
Inverter neither is in fault non in undervoltage condition.
- No Fault:
Inverter is not in any fault condition.
- With Error means that the inverter is disabled due to some error.
- No E00:
Inverter is not in an E00 fault condition.
- No E01+E02+E03:
Inverter is not in an E01 or E02 or E03 fault condition.
- No E04:
Inverter is not in an E04 fault condition.
- No E05:
Inverter is not in an E05 fault condition.
- 4 to 20 mA OK:
If applicable, the 4 to 20 mA current reference is present.
- Zero Speed:
Motor speed is lower than the value set at P291 (Zero
Speed Zone)
- Not Used:
Digital Output remains inactive.
- Forward:
Motor is running forward.
- Torque > Tx and Torque < Tx:
Valid only for P202 = 3 or 4 (Vector
Control).
Torque corresponds to motor Torque as indicated in Parameter P009.
- Ride-Through: means that the inverter is executing the Ride-Through function.
- Pre-charge OK: means that the DC-Link voltage is higher than the precharge voltage level.
- Fieldbus: allows changing the state of the digital outputs (P275 to
P280) from the Fieldbus network. Refer to item 8.12.7.
- N > Nx and Nt > Nx:
(this option works only for P202 = 4 - Vector with
Encoder Control) means that both conditions must be satisfied in order that DOx = Saturated Transistor and/or RLx = relay picked up. The
Digital Outputs will come back to its OFF state, that is, DOx = Cut-off
Transistor and/or RLx = released relay, when only N>Nx condition is not satisfied (that is, independent of Nt>Nx condition).
- Timer:
These times enable and disable the relays 2 and 3 (refer P283 to P286).
- Brake (Vel)
– Real Speed
It uses the Real Speed in the comparison of N > Nx to activate the brake.
Note:
Nx is programmable at P288.
- Brake (Ref)
– Total Speed Reference
Uses the total speed reference in the comparison of N*t > Nx .
Note: Nx programmable in P288.
181
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
NOTE!
I. For further details, refer to figures 6.39 q), r) and s).
II. Programming P203=2 some parameters that are used in the brake logic function will be automatically changed. See description of parameter P203.
III. Only one of the options: Brake (Vel.) or Brake (Ref.) must be programmed in the digital or relay outputs. For further details, contact WEG.
NOTE!
Refer to figures 6.39 q), r) and s).
Preliminary settings:
Nx (P288) = 7 % to 10 % of the motor speed (Sensorless Control), 2 % to 5 % of the speed (Vector with Encoder Control)
Ix (P290) = 20 % to 130 % of P401
P355 = 0 seconds
P354 = 1.5 x time to activate the brake
P356 = 0.85 x time to release the brake
P353 = 0.2 seconds
NOTE!
These preliminary settings are suggestive and may be changed according to the application.
- Overweight
- Situation where the lifted load weight is greater than the maximum allowed.
When the CFW-09 is powered up, the output set to the option “32 =
Overweight” is activated. In order to deactivate the output, i.e., detect the overweight condition, the following conditions shall be satisfied:
- P361 = 1 (Load Detection = On);
- Parameters P362, P363 and P367 properly set;
- P367 (Overweight Level) lower than the output current (P367 < Is) during the stabilization time.
If P361 = 0 (Load Detection = Off) – the output always remains activated.
- Slack Cable
- Situation where the lifted load weight is lower than the minimum weight detected by the crane.
When the CFW-09 is powered up, the output set to the option “33 =
Slack Cable” is activated. In order to deactivate the output, i.e., detect the slack cable condition, the following conditions shall be satisfied:
- P361 = 1 (Load Detection = On);
- Parameters P362, P363, P364 and P365 properly set;
- Slack cable condition detected.
182
Parameter
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
NOTES!
If the slack cable condition is detected during the stabilization time, the motor remains at the stabilization speed until receiving a “Stop” command. However, if this condition is detected outside of the stabilization time, the output set to this option will be deactivated and the motor will maintain the same speed.
The only way of disabling the Slack Cable function is stopping the motor.
To a better understanding refer to figures 6.46 a) and b).
If P361 = 0 (Load Detection = Off) – the output always remains activated.
- Torque Polarity +/-
The output programmed to this function will be activated when the torque is positive.
- Torque Polarity -/+
The output programmed to this function will be activated when the torque is negative.
NOTE!
The outputs that are set to the function “Torque Polarity” have a hysteresis in its operation that can be configured at parameter P358
(Hysteresis for the Torque Current – Iq). This resource works in the transition of these outputs at the moment they are activated or deactivated.
DOx or RLx = 34 – Torque Polarity +/-
Torque
Polarity
XC4 Voltage
DO1 (5, 6)
DO2 (7, 6)
(NC) RL1 (NO)
21-24
Status of the contacts at XC1
22-24
(NO) RL2 (NC) RL3 (NO)
23-25 25-26 27-28
Positive
(+)
0 V Open Closed Closed Open Closed
Negative
(-)
+24 V Closed Open Open Closed Open
Table 6.43 a) - Status of the DOx and RLx contacts with the torque polarity +/- function
DOx or RLx = 35 – Torque Polarity -/+
Torque
Polarity
XC4 Voltage
DO1 (5, 6)
DO2 (7, 6)
(NC) RL1 (NO)
21-24
Status of the contacts at XC1
22-24
(NO) RL2 (NC)
23-25 25-26
RL3 (NO)
27-28
Positive
(+)
Negative
(-)
+24 V
0 V
Closed Open
Open
Open
Closed Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Table 6.43 b) - Status of the DOx and RLx contacts with the torque polarity -/+ function
183
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
NOTE!
It is used only with the Master/Slave function to indicate the torque polarity at the digital or relay outputs.
Description of the Torque Polarity +/- function for the Torque
Master/Slave function
The implementation of this function requires the digital or relay outputs of the “master” CFW-09 to be set to the options P275 = 34 (Torque
Polarity +/-) or P275 = 35 (Torque Polarity -/+).
Therefore, a load resistor (Rc) shall be connected at the digital output
DO1 (XC4:5) or DO2 (XC4:7), as presented in figure 8.1. This output shall be connected to the digital input DI2 of the “Slave” CFW-09, which shall be set to the option P264 = 0 (Direction of Rotation).
In the master CFW-09
(Vector with encoder):
P275 or P276 = 34 or 35
P357 = 0.1 s
P358 = 2.00 %
P253 = 4
In the slave CFW-09
(Vector with encoder):
P100 = P101 = 0
P160 = 1
P223 = P226 = DI2 = 4
P264 = 0
P237 = 2
P234 = 1.2
Table 6.44 - Minimum required settings for the torque Master/Slave function
For P275 or P276 = 34 or 35
When the torque current of the “master” CFW-09 is positive, the digital output DO1 or DO2 will be set to zero, which will force the speed regulator of the “slave” to saturate positively, producing a positive torque current.
When the torque current of the “master” CFW-09 is negative, the digital output DO1 or DO2 will be set to 24 V, which will force the speed regulator of the “slave” to saturate negatively, producing a negative torque current.
184
Parameter
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
Master
EBA.01
XC4:6
COM
XC4:4
DGND
XC4:8
24 Vcc
XC4:5
DO1 (Torque +/-)
CFW-09
XC1:17, 18
AO1
XC1:19, 20
AO2
EBA.01
R 500
3 W
Slave
XC1:10
GND
CFW-09
XC1:2
DI2 (FWD/REV)
XC1:12, 13
AI1 (Speed Reference)
XC1:15, 16
AI2 (Max. Torque
Current)
EBA.01
M M
Figure 6.38 - Diagram for the torque master/slave function
- F > Fx _ 1:
This function activates the relay and/or transistorized outputs set to this option when the output frequency calculated value (F) is greater than the value set at P369 (Fx) plus the hysteresis value set at
P370. When F < Fx - P370, the outputs set to this option are deactivated
(refer to figure 6.39 t)).
- F > Fx _ 2:
With this option the hysteresis for the acceleration is disabled, therefore, this function activates the relay and/or transistorized outputs set to this option when the output frequency calculated value
(F) is greater than the value set at P369 (Fx). When F < Fx - P370, the outputs set to this option are deactivated (refer to figure 6.39 v)).
- Set point = Process Variable.
This function activates the digital or relay output when the Set point value equals the Process Variable value
(refer to figure 6.39 v)).
- No E32 -
It indicates that the inverter is disabled due to an E32 error.
- Ready 2
- Indicates that the motor is disabled (motor stopped) without error and without undervoltage.
Symbols used in the Digital Output functions:
N
= P002 (Motor speed)
N*
= Speed Reference (P001) - Any value originated from parameter or digital or analog input. See figure 6.26 and description of parameter
P001.
N*t
= Total Speed Reference - Sum of the speed references P001, N* without ramp, JOG, JOG+, JOG-). See figure 6.26.
185
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
Nx
= P288 (Speed Nx) - User selected speed reference point.
Ny
= P289 (Speed Ny) - User selected speed reference point.
Ix
= P290 (Current Ix) - User selected current reference point.
Is
= P003 (Motor Current).
Torque
= P009 (Motor Torque).
Tx
= P293 (Torque Tx) - User selected torque reference point.
Vpx
= P533 (Process Variable x) - User selected reference point.
Vpy
= P534 (Process Variable y) - User selected reference point.
Nt
= Total Reference (Refer to figure 6.26) after all scalings, offsets, additions, etc.
Hx
= P294 (Hours Hx).
PLC
= Refer to PLC board manual.
Fx
= P370 (Frequency Fx) – Frequency reference defined by the user.
P283
Time for RL2 ON
P284
Time for RL2 OFF
P285
Time for RL3 ON
P286
Time for RL3 OFF
0.0 to 300
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 s
0.0 to 300
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 s
0.0 to 300
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 s
0.0 to 300
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 s
Used in the function as Relay Output: Timer of the relay 2 or 3.
When the timing function of the relays 2 and 3 is programmed at any
DIx, and when the transition is effected from 0 V to 24 V, the relay will be enabled according to the time set at P283 (RL2) or P285 (RL3).
When the transition from 24 V to 0 V occurs, the programmed relay will be disabled according to the time set at P284 (RL2) or P286 (RL3).
After the DIx transition, to enable or disable the programmed relay, it is required that the DIx remains in on/off status during the time set at parameters P283/P285 and P284/P286. Otherwise the relay will be reset.
Refer to figure 6.34.
Note:
For this function, program P279 and/or P280 = 28 (Timer).
186
a) N > Nx
Motor Speed
P287
P287
N
Relay/Transistor
Output
ON
OFF
Nx (P288)
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION b) N < Ny
P287
P287
N
Ny (P289)
Relay/Transistor
Output ON
ON
OFF c) N = N*
N* N
Relay/Transistor
Output OFF
ON
OFF d) Is > Ix
Relay/Transistor
Output OFF
ON
Is
Ix (P290)
OFF e) N* > Nx
N*
Nx (P288) f) Is < Ix
Is
Ix (P290)
ON Relay/
Transistor
Output
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Relay/
Transistor
Output
OFF g) Torque > Tx
Motor Torque
(P009)
Relay/
Transistor
OFF
Output h) Torque < Tx
Motor Torque
(P009)
Tx (P293)
ON
OFF
ON
Relay/
Transistor
Output
OFF
Figure 6.39 a) to h) - Details about the operation of the digital and relay output functions
ON
Tx (P293)
187
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION i) Enabled Hours > Nx
6553.5 h j) N > Nx and Nt > Nx
N
Nt
Hx (P294)
0
Hours
Enable
(P043)
Relay/
Transistor
ON
OFF OFF k) No External Fault
Ready/
Run
State
Fault (Exy)
State c/ EOX
Relay/Transistor
OFF l) 4 to 20 mA OK
Ref
ON
N
Nx (P288)
OFF
2 mA
Relay/
Transistor
Output ON OFF
Relay/Transistor
Output
ON n) Process Var. > VPx
OFF ON m) N = 0
Zero Speed Zone P291
VPx (P533)
Process Var.
ON
Relay/
Transistor
OFF OFF
Relay/Transistor
Output
OFF ON OFF o) Pre charge Ok
Link CC p) Process Var. < VPy
188
Pre-Charge
Level
VPy (P534)
Relay/Transistor
Output
ON
ON
Relay/
Transistor
ON
OFF
OFF ON
Figure 6.39 (cont.) i) to p) - Details about the operation of the digital and relay output functions
Process Var.
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION q) Logic for the Brake Activation when DOx or Relay = 30 or 31
N > Nx or
N*t > Nx
Start
Command
CFW-09
Is > Ix
V/F Control
Activate the brake
Auxiliary
Is > Imr Release the brake
No Error
Run
Auxiliary
Figure 6.39 (cont.) q) - Details about the operation of the digital and relay output functions
NOTES!
1) To release the brake (transition from NO to NC), it is performed the comparison in series Is > Ix, Is > Imr, the check of start command (*) , be in Run and Without Error;
2) To engage the brake (transition NC to NO), it is performed the comparison by N > Nx ou N*t > Nx;
3) When P202 = 4 (Vector with Encoder) the brake will not engage when the speed pass by zero in the reversal of the rotation direction;
4) The hysteresis used in the comparison N > Nx or N*t > Nx can be adjusted in parameter P287;
5) Programming P203 = 2, some parameters that are used in the brake logic function will be automatically programmed. See details in parameter P203.
(*) The following start parameters are available:
- Start/Stop (via DI1);
- Forward Run / Reverse Run (via DI3 and DI2 or DI4);
- Fieldbus (**) .
Note: If another kind of start command – which was not mentioned above – is used together with the brake logic function, E24 will be generated and an incompatibility message will be displayed. See detailed description in table 4.2
(**) When the start command used is via “Fieldbus”, WEG recommends to program P313=5 (Cause Fatal Error)
189
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION r) Operation of Parameters P353 to P356 with Ix > Imr.
Current Ix
Imag
Start/Stop
P356
RLx or DOx Output
(brake activation)
Speed
Reference
P354
Reset Pulse for the integrator of the speed regulator
Accepted only after P355
P356
Nx
P353 P355
Real Brake
Real Speed
Nx
Time
Note:
The Start/Stop function in the figure above is valid only for commands from the DI1 (Digital Input #1) set to the option “1 = Start/Stop”.
Figure 6.39 (cont.) r) - Details about the operation of the digital and relay output functions
190
s) Operation of Parameters P353 to P356 with Ix < Imr.
Current
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Magnetized
Motor
Imag
Start/Stop
RLx or DOx Output
(brake activation)
P356
Ix
P354
Reset Pulse for the integrator of the speed regulator
Accepted only after P355
P356
Speed Reference
Nx
P353 P355
Real Brake
Real Speed
Nx
Figure 6.39 (cont.) s) - Details about the operation of the digital and relay output functions
Time
191
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION t) F > Fx _ 1
ON
P369 + P370
Fx (P369)
P369 - P370
N u) F > Fx _ 2
Relay
Transistor OFF OFF
Relay
Transistor OFF
ON
OFF
Fx (P369)
P369 - P370
N v) Set Point = Process Variable
P040
P537
P525
P537
ON
Relay/
Transistor OFF OFF
Figure 6.39 (cont.) t) to v) - Details about the operation of the digital and relay output functions
192
P294
Hours Hx
Used in the functions of the digital outputs Hours Enabled higher than
Hx.
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P287
Hysteresis for Nx/Ny
P288
Nx Speed
P289
(2) (11)
(2) (11)
Ny Speed
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.0 to 5.0
[ 1.0 ]
0.1 %
Description / Notes
Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs functions:
N > Nx, N < Ny and Mechanical Brake Logic.
0 to P134
[ 120 (100) ]
1 rpm
0 to P134
[ 1800 (1500) ]
1 rpm
Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs functions:
N* > Nx, N > Nx and N < Ny.
P290 (7)
Ix Current
0.0 to 2.0 x P295
[ 1.0 x P295 ]
0.1A(< 100)-1A(> 99.9)
Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs functions:
Is > Ix and Is < Ix.
P291
Zero Speed Zone
Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs function Zero Speed and the
Zero Speed Disable (Refer to P211 and P212).
P292
N = N* Band
(At Speed Band)
P293
Tx Torque
1 to 100
[ 1 ]
1 %
1 to 100
[ 1 ]
1 %
0 to 200
[ 100 ]
1 %
Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs function N = N* (At Speed).
Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs functions Torque > Tx and
Torque < Tx. In this output mode, the motor torque indicated in parameter P009 is compared with the value programmed in P293.
The setting is expressed in % of the motor rated current (P401 = 100 %)
0 to 6553
[ 4320 ]
1 h
193
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P295 (1)
Inverter Rated
Current
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 82
[ According to the
CFW-09 rated current for CT application]
-
Description / Notes
Even if some models withstand a higher current for VT applications, the setting of P295 shall be kept in accordance with the inverter rated current
(CT).
Do not modify the value of P295 for VT applications.
6 A
7 A
10 A
13 A
16 A
24 A
28 A
45 A
54 A
70 A
86 A
105 A
130 A
220-230 V Models
IN P295
3
4
6
Size
1
13
14
16
17
7
8
9
10
18
19
2
3
4
5
6
63 A
79 A
600 A
652 A
794 A
897 A
978 A
1191 A
1345 A
10 A
12 A
14 A
22 A
27 A
32 A
44 A
53 A
IN
2.9 A
4.2 A
7 A
500-600 V Models
P295 Size
49
25
72
73
45
46
47
48
76
78
79
81
41
42
43
44
39
40
4
6
2
4
7 above
500 hp
100 A
127 A
179 A
225 A
259 A
305 A
340 A
428 A
492 A
580 A
646 A
813 A
869 A
969 A
1220 A
IN
660-690 V Models
P295
50
52
54
Size
8E
64
68
70
71
56
58
59
61
74
75
77
80
10E above
500 hp
211 A
240 A
312 A
361 A
450 A
515 A
600 A
686 A
855 A
1140 A
1283 A
1710 A
1468 A
38 A
45 A
60 A
70 A
86 A
105 A
142 A
180 A
3.6 A
4 A
5.5 A
9 A
13 A
16 A
24 A
30 A
IN
380-480 V Models
P295
0
1
2
Size
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
21
55
22
67
16
17
18
20
11
12
13
15
8
9
5
7
33
34
35
36
23
24
69
25
37
82
8
9
10 above
500 hp
107 A
147 A
211 A
247 A
315 A
343 A
418 A
472 A
500-690 V Models
IN P295
51
53
55
Size
8E
57
60
62
63
65
10E
33 A
200 A
230 A
320 A
400 A
570 A
700 A
900 A
IN
2 A
Special Models
P295
38
66
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Table 6.45 - Inverter rated current selection
194
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P296 (1) (11)
Inverter Rated
Voltage
(RatedInputVoltage)
P297 (1) (2)
Switching Frequency
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 8
[ 0 for models
220-230 V
3 for models
380-480 V
6 for models
500-600 V and 500-690 V
8 for models
600-690 V ]
-
Description / Notes
5
6
3
4
P296
0
1
2
7
8
Inverter Rated Voltage
220 V/230 V
380 V
400 V/415 V
440 V/460 V
480 V
500 V/525 V
550 V/575 V
600 V
660 V/690 V
Table 6.46 - Inverter rated voltage selection
ATTENTION!
Set P296 according to the rated AC line voltage! Do not set according to short term peak values.
For CFW-09 models 86 A/380-480 V, 44 A/500-600 V and
500-690 V models, also adjust the voltage selection jumper
(Refer to item 3.2.3).
0 to 3
[ 2 (5.0 kHz) ]
1
P297
0
1
2
3
Switching Frequency
1.25 kHz
2.5 kHz
5.0 kHz
10.0 kHz
Table 6.47 - Switching frequency selection
The rated switching frequency for each model is shown in item 9.1. When a higher switching frequency is used, it is necessary to derate the output current as specified in item 9.1 note 3.
Note that the switching frequency must be reduced from 5 kHz to 2.5 kHz when the VT rated current is used in the following models: from 54 A to
130 A/220-230 V, from 30 A to 142 A/380-480 V and 63 A/500-600 V.
Note that the following models have a rated switching frequency of 2.5 kHz: from 180 A to 600 A/380-480 V, 44 A and 79 A/500-600 V, from 107 A to
472 A/500-690 V and all 660-690 V models.
The switching frequency is a compromise between the motor acoustic noise level and the inverter IGBTs losses. Higher switching frequencies cause lower motor acoustic noise level, but increase the IGBTs losses, increasing inverter components temperature, thus reducing their useful life.
The predominant frequency on the motor is twice the switching frequency programmed at P297.
P297 = 5.0 kHz results in an audible motor noise corresponding to
10.0 kHz. This is due to the PWM technique used.
A reduction of the switching frequency also:
- Helps reducing instability and resonance problems that may occur in certain application conditions.
- Reduces the leakage currents to ground, which may avoid nuisance
E11 (Output Ground Fault).
195
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P300
DC Braking Time
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 0, 1, 2, 3 or 5
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
The option 1.25 kHz is not valid for the Vector Control (P202 = 3 or 4).
The option 10 kHz is not valid for the Sensorless Vector Control (P202 = 3) and for the models with supply voltage between 500 V and 690 V (2.9Ato
79A/500-600 V, 107Ato 472A/500-690 V and 100Ato 428A/660-690 V).
0.0 to 15.0
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 s
The DC braking feature provides a motor fast stop through the injection of
DC current.
This parameter sets the DC Braking Time when the inverter is operating in the V/F, VVW or Sensorless Vector Control modes.
Control Mode
V/Hz
DC Braking at Start
-
VVW P302 and P371
Vector Sensorless P371 and P372
DC Braking at Stop
P300, P301 and P302
P300, P301 and P302
P300, P301 and P372
Table 6.48 - Parameters related to the DC braking
Figure 6.40 shows the operation of the DC Braking with a ramp to stop
(stop command). Refer to P301: a) V/F Control
Motor
Speed
P300
P301
Time
Dead
Time
+24 V
Start/ Stop - DIx
Open b) VVW and Sensorless Control
Motor
Speed
P300
P301
Time
+24 V
Start/ Stop - DIx
Open
Figure 6.40 a) and b) - DC braking operation with a ramp to stop
196
Parameter
P301
DC Braking Starting
Speed
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 0, 1, 2, 3 or 5
P302
DC Braking
Voltage
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 0, 1, 2 or 5
P303
Skip Speed 1
P304
Skip Speed 2
P305
Skip Speed 3
P306
Skip Band Range
0 to 450
[ 30 ]
1 rpm
0.0 to 10.0
[ 2.0 ]
0.1 %
P133 to P134
[ 600 ]
1 rpm
P133 to P134
[ 900 ]
1 rpm
P133 to P134
[ 1200 ]
1 rpm
0 to 750
[ 0 ]
1 rpm
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
For the V/F Control, there is a “Dead Time” (motor runs freely) before the DC braking starts. This time is required in order to demagnetize the motor and it is a function of the motor speed.
During the DC Braking the LED displays flashes .
The DC braking does not work with P202 = 4 (Vector with Encoder
Control).
If the inverter is enabled during the DC braking operation, the braking process is interrupted and the inverter will return to its normal operation.
ATTENTION!
The DC braking may continue working even after the motor has already stopped. Pay special attention to the motor thermal sizing for cyclic braking of short time.
This parameter establishes the starting point from where the DC Braking takes place. Refer to figure 6.40.
This parameter adjusts the DC voltage (DC braking torque) applied to the motor during the braking process.
The setting shall be done by gradually increasing the value of P302, which varies from 0 to 10 % of the rated supply voltage, until the desired braking torque is reached.
This parameter works only for the V/F and VVW Control Modes. For the
Sensorless Mode, refer to parameter P372.
Motor
Speed
P305
P304
2 x P306
2 x
P306
P303
Speed
Reference
Figure 6.41 - Actuation of the skip speed
197
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P308 (1)
SerialAddress
P309 (1)
Fieldbus
P310 (1)
STOP Detection in a
Profibus Network
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
This feature prevents the motor from operating permanently at speeds where the mechanical system enters into resonance, causing high vibration or noise levels.
The passage through the skip speed band (2 x P306) is made at the programmed acceleration/deceleration rates.
This function does not operate properly when two skip speeds are overlapped.
1 to 30
[ 1 ]
-
0 to 10
[ 0 ]
-
Sets the address of the inverter for the serial communication. Refer to item 8.13.
Defines the Fieldbus standard to be used (Profibus DP/DP-V1,
DeviceNet, EtherNet/IP or DeviceNet Drive Profile) and the number of variables to be exchanged with the master. Refer to item 8.12.7.
5
6
3
4
P309
0
1
2
7
8
9
10
Fieldbus Options
Inactive
Profibus DP/DP-V1 2 I/O
Profibus DP/DP-V1 4 I/O
Profibus DP/DP-V1 6 I/O
DeviceNet 2 I/O
DeviceNet 4 I/O
DeviceNet 6 I/O
EtherNet/IP 2 I/O
EtherNet/IP 4 I/O
EtherNet/IP 6 I/O
DeviceNet Drive Profile
Table 6.49 - Fieldbus options
It’s only applicable if an optional Fieldbus communication kit were used.
NOTE!
If the PLC1 or PLC2 boards are used, the parameter P309 must be programmed as inactive.
0 or 1
[ 0 ]
-
This parameter allows programming the bit #6 of the Fieldbus control word (refer to item 8.12.7.2 - Variable Written in the Inverter).
P310
0
1
Function
Off
On
Bit #6
No function
If bit6 = 0
If bit6 = 1
CFW-09 Action
-
Executes a General
Disable command, regardless of the value of the remaining bits of the control word.
Executes the commands that were programmed at the remaining bits of the control word.
Table 6.50 - STOP detection in a Profibus network
198
Parameter
P312
(1)
Type of Serial
Protocol
P313
Disabling with
E28/E29/E30
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
If this parameter is set to ON, the bit #6 of the control word shall be kept in 1 to the inverter operation. It will allow the inverter to be disabled in case of STOP in the master of the Fieldbus network, where the control word is reset (all bits are set to zero).
0 to 9
[ 0 ]
-
5
6
3
4
P312
0
1
2
7
8
9
Type of Serial Protocol
WBUS Protocol
Modbus-RTU, 9600 bps, no parity
Modbus-RTU, 9600 bps, odd parity
Modbus-RTU, 9600 bps, even parity
Modbus-RTU, 19200 bps, no parity
Modbus-RTU, 19200 bps, odd parity
Modbus-RTU, 19200 bps, even parity
Modbus-RTU, 38400 bps, no parity
Modbus-RTU, 38400 bps, odd parity
Modbus-RTU, 38400 bps, even parity
Table 6.51 - Type of serial protocol
It defines the protocol type used for the serial communication.
0 to 5
[ 0 ]
-
P313
0
1
2
3
4
5
Disabling with E28/E29/E30
Disable via Start/Stop
Disable via General Enable
No Action
Changes to LOCAL 1
Changes to LOCAL 2 - Keeping the Commands and the Reference
Causes Fatal Error
Table 6.52 - Disabling with E28/E29/E30
Defines the inverter behavior when the serial communication is inactive
(causing error E28), when physical connection with the master of the
Fieldbus is interrupted (causing error E29) or when the Fieldbus board is inactive (causing error E30). Refer to item 8.12.7.
For P313 = 4, when the inverter detects Fieldbus communication fault and changes from Remote to Local mode, then the Start/Stop and the speed reference commands the inverter was receiving in Remote mode will be kept in Local mode, if these commands were 3-wire Start/Stop and Electronic Potentiometer or Start/Stop and reference via HMI.
For P313 = 5, when the inverter detects Fieldbus communication fault, a fatal error will be generated in the equipment, disabling the motor and making it necessary an error reset, so that the operation be possible again.
199
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P314 (1)
Time for Serial
Watchdog Action
P318
Watchdog detection for the PLC board
P320 (1)
Flying Start/Ride-
Through
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.0 to 999.0
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 s
Description / Notes
P314
0.0
0.1 to 999.0
Time for serial watchdog action
Disable
Enable
Table 6.53 - Serial Watchdog action
If the inverter does not receive any valid serial telegram after the time programmed at P314 has elapsed, the Fault Message E28 on the HMI and the inverter will return to the action programmed at P313 - Type of
Disabling by E28/E29/E30.
To enable the inverter to execute this action, the inverter commands must be programmed to the “Serial” option at the parameters P220 to
P228.
0 or 1
[ 0 ]
-
P318
0
1
Function
Off
On
Description
Disables the activation of the Watchdog Error for the PLC board - E71.
Enables the activation of the Watchdog Error for the PLC board - E71.
Table 6.54 - Watchdog detection for the PLC board
0 to 3
[ 0 (Inactive) ]
-
The Parameter P320 selects the use of the following functions:
P320
0
1
2
3
Function
Inactive
Only Flying Start is active
[valid for P202 = 0, 1, 2 (V/F Control), 3 (sensorless) or 5 (VVW)]
Flying Start and Ride-Through are active
[valid for P202 = 0, 1, 2 (V/F Control), 3 (sensorless) or 5 (VVW)]
Only Ride-Through is active
Table 6.55 - Flying Start/Ride-Through
The activation of the Ride-Through function can be visualized at the outputs DO1, DO2, RL1, RL2 and/or RL3 (P275, P276, P277, P279 and/or P280
) provided they are also programmed to “23 = Ride-Through”.
P321 (6)
Ud Line Loss Level
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
178 V to 282 V
(P296 = 0)
[252 V]
1 V
307 V to 487 V
(P296 = 1)
[436 V]
1 V
NOTE!
When one of the functions, Ride-Through or Flying Start is activated, the parameter P214 (Line Phase Loss Detection) is automatically set to 0 = Off.
200
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P322 (6)
Ud Ride-Through
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
324 V to 513 V
(P296 = 2)
[459 V]
1 V
356 V to 564 V
(P296 = 3)
[505 V]
1 V
388 V to 615 V
(P296 = 4)
[550 V]
1 V
425 V to 674 V
(P296 = 5)
[602 V]
1 V
466 V to 737 V
(P296 = 6)
[660 V]
1 V
486 V to 770 V
(P296 = 7)
[689 V]
1 V
559 V to 885 V
(P296 = 8)
[792 V]
1 V
178 V to 282 V
(P296 = 0)
[245 V]
1 V
307 V to 487 V
(P296 = 1)
[423 V]
1 V
Description / Notes
NOTE!
This parameter works together with P322, P323, P325, P326 for
Ride-Through in Vector Control, and with P331, P332 for V/F Control
Ride-Through and Flying Start.
NOTE!
Ud = Vac x 1.35.
Ride-Through for Vector Control (P202 = 3 or 4)
The purpose of the Ride-Through function, in Vector Mode (P202 = 3 or
4), is to ensure that the inverter maintains the motor running during the line loss, not allowing interruption or fault storing. The energy required for motor running is obtained from the kinetic energy of the motor (inertia) during its deceleration. As soon as the line is reestablished, the motor accelerates again to the speed defined by the reference.
After line loss (t0), the DC Link voltage (Ud) starts to decrease in a rate that depends on the motor load condition and mayreach the undervoltage level (t2), if the Ride-Through function is not operating. The time required for this condition, typical for rated load, situates in a range from 5 to 15 ms.
With Ride-Through function active, the line loss is detected when Ud voltage becomes lower than the “Ud line loss” value (t1). The inverter immediately starts a controlled motor deceleration, regenerating the energy into the DC Link and thus maintaining the motor running, where the Ud voltage is regulated to the “Ud Ride-Through” value.
If the line loss is not recovered, the motor remains in this condition as long as possible (depending on the energy equilibrium), until the undervoltage condition (E02 at t5) occurs. If the line loss is recovered
(t3) before the undervoltage condition, the inverter detects its reestablishment when the Ud voltage reaches the “Ud Loss Recover” level (t4). Then the motor is accelerated according to the set ramp, from the current speed value up to the value defined by the active speed reference. Refer to figure 6.42.
If the input voltage drops to a value between parameters P322 and
P323, the values of P321, P322 and 323 shall be readjusted.
201
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P323 (6)
Ud Loss Recover
Level
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
324 V to 513 V
(P296 = 2)
[446 V]
1 V
356 V to 564 V
(P296 = 3)
[490 V]
1 V
388 V to 615 V
(P296 = 4)
[535 V]
1 V
425 V to 674 V
(P296 = 5)
[588 V]
1 V
466 V to 737 V
(P296 = 6)
[644 V]
1 V
486 V to 770 V
(P296 = 7)
[672 V]
1 V
559 V to 885 V
(P296 = 8)
[773 V]
1 V
178 V to 282 V
(P296 = 0)
[267 V]
1 V
307 V to 487 V
(P296 = 1)
[461 V]
1 V
324 V to 513 V
(P296 = 2)
[486 V]
1 V
Description / Notes
NOTE!
Cares with Application:
The use of the line reactance or DC choke is mandatory to limit the inrush current when the network is reestablished.
NOTE!
The function Ride-Through in Vector Mode for models 107Ato 472A/
500-690 V and 100 A to 428 A/660-690 V works only up to a maximum time of 2 s. In these models the control power supply is not fed from the DC Link, it is a separate power supply with 2 s autonomy.
NOTE!
To activate the Ride-Through, the line supply must fall to a value lower than (P321 1.35).
Nominal
Loss Recover (P323)
Line Loss (P321)
Ride-Through (P322)
Undervoltage (75 %)
Ud
E02 t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5
Figure 6.42 - Actuation of the Ride-Through function in Vector Control mode t
(t)
202
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
356 V to 564 V
(P296 = 3)
[534 V]
1 V
388 V to 615 V
(P296 = 4)
[583 V]
1 V
425 V to 674 V
(P296 = 5)
[638 V]
1 V
466 V to 737 V
(P296 = 6)
[699 V]
1 V
486 V to 770 V
(P296 = 7)
[729 V]
1 V
559 V to 885 V
(P296 = 8)
[838 V]
1 V
Description / Notes t0 - Line Loss; t1 - Line Loss Detection; t2 - Trip by Undervoltage (E02 without Ride-Through); t3 - Line Recover; t4 - Line Recover Detection; t5 - Trip by Undervoltage (E02 with Ride-Through).
P325
Ride-Through
Proportional Gain
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
0.0 to 63.9
[22.8]
0.1
P326
Ride-Through
Integral Gain
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
0.000 to 9.999
[0.128]
0.001
Ud Ride-Through
Kp, Ki
Ud
Figure 6.43 - Ride-Through PI controller
Blockdiagram figure 6.27 a)
Input
Normally the factory setting for P325/P326 is adequate for most applications.
Regulator RT
203
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P331
Voltage Ramp
P332
Dead Time
These parameters ( P331 and P332) are only displayed when
P202 = 0, 1, 2 or 5
(V/F / VVW Control)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.2 to 60.0
[ 2.0 ]
0.1 s
0.1 to 10.0
[ 1.0 ]
0.1 s
Description / Notes
The Flying Start function allows the inverter to start a motor that is running freely. This function takes the motor from its actual speed to the speed reference set at the inverter.
In order to enable the Flying Start function set P320 = 1 or 2.
If the Flying Start function is not needed at some moments, a digital input may be set to disable the Flying Start (set only one of the parameters between P265 and P270 to 17).
Flying Start for V/F/VVW Control Mode:
To do that it has a voltage ramp (adjusted in P331) and the motor frequency is fixed and defined by the speed setpoint. The Flying Start will always work when a start or run command is given, after the time adjusted in P332 (to allow for the motor demagnetization).
Parameter P331 sets the time required for the output voltage reaching the rated voltage.
Flying Start (FS) function for the Sensorless Vector Control (P202 = 3)
The Flying Start function takes place after the START command. At this moment, the inverter senses the motor speed, and once the motor speed is found, which may be in the forward or reverse direction, the motor is accelerated to the speed reference indicated in P001.
Parameters P135, P331 and P332 are not used by the Flying Start function when P202 = 3.
Settings:
It is recommended to adjust P151 to the value in table 6.8 and P150 to
1.
Ride-Through for V/F Control Mode or VVW:
The Ride-Through function for the V/F and VVW Control Modes works in a different manner than in the Vector Control Mode. As soon as the line supply falls to a value lower than the undervoltage (E02) Trip level (refer to item 7.1), the IGBT inverter is disabled (no voltage pulses at the motor).
There is no tripping due to undervoltage, and the DC Link voltage will slowly fall until the line supply comes back.
If the line supply takes too long to come back (more than 2 s) the inverter may trip by E02 or E70. If it comes back before, the inverter will start the motor with a voltage ramp like in the Flying Start function. The voltage ramp time is defined also in P331. Refer to figures 6.44 a) and b).
The parameter P332, used for the Ride-Through function, sets the minimum time which the inverter will wait to restart the motor after voltage re-establishment. This time is computed from the line loss and is required for the motor demagnetization. Set this time at two times the motor rotor constant, refer to table in P412.
The Ride-Through function allows recovering the inverter without E02 trip
(under voltage) during a momentary power supply interruption.
204
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Line Supply Returns
DC Link Voltage
E02 level
P332
Disabled
Enabled
Output Pulses
P331
Output Voltage
0 V
Output Speed (P002)
0 rpm
Figure 6.44 a) - Ride-Through actuation (line returns before time set at P332 elapses) in V/F mode
Line Supply Returns
Enabled
DC Link Voltage
E02 level
Output Pulses
Disabled
P332
Time Ajusted
P332
P331
Output Voltage
0 V
Output Speed (P002)
0 rpm
Figure 6.44 b) - Ride-Through actuation (line returns after time set in P332, but before 2 sec for
P332
1 sec or before 2 x P332 for P332 > 1 sec) in V/F mode
205
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P335
DeviceNet I/O
Instances
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 3
[ 0 ]
-
Description / Notes
This parameter is applicable only if an optional DeviceNet Drive Profile communication kit were used.
It allows programming the I/O instances used by the DeviceNet Drive
Profile interface. These instances define the contents and the number of I/O words exchanged with the network master.
P335
0
1
2
3
DeviceNet I/O Instances
Instances 20/70
Instances 21/71
Instances 100/101
Instances 102/103
Table 6.56 - DeviceNet I/O instances
The modification of this parameter will become valid only after cycling the power of the inverter.
In order to get more information on the parameterization and the operation of the DeviceNet Drive Profile interface, refer to the CFW-09 frequency inverter DeviceNet Drive Profile Communication Manual.
0 to 749
[ 0 ]
-
P336
Input Word #3
P337
Input Word #4
P338
Input Word #5
P339
Input Word #6
P340
Input Word #7
These parameters are applicable only if an optional DeviceNet Drive
Profile communication kit were used.
The parameters P336 to P340 permit programming the content of the input words 3 to 7 (input: the inverter sends to the master). Using these parameters it is possible to program the number of another parameter whose content must be made available at the network master input area.
If for instance one wants to read from the CFW-09 inverter the motor current in Amps, one must program the value 3 in one of these parameters, because the parameter P003 is the one that contains this information. It is worthwhile to remind that the value read from any parameter is represented with a 16 bit word with sign, in two’s complement. Even if the parameter has decimal resolution, the value is transmitted without the indication of the decimal point. E.g., if the parameter P003 has the value 4.7A, the value supplied via the network will be 47.
These parameters are used only if the number of input/output words programmed in P346 were greater than 2, and if the I/O instances 102/
103 were programmed in P335.
In order to get more information on the parameterization and the operation of the DeviceNet Drive Profile interface, refer to the CFW-09 frequency inverter DeviceNet Drive Profile Communication Manual.
206
Parameter
P341
Output Word #3
P342
Output Word #4
P343
Output Word #5
P344
Output Word #6
P345
Output Word #7
P346
Number of I/O
Words
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 749
[ 0 ]
-
Description / Notes
These parameters are applicable only if an optional DeviceNet Drive
Profile communication kit were used.
The parameters P341 to P345 permit programming the content of the output words 3 to 7 (output: the master sends to the inverter). Using these parameters it is possible to program the number of another parameter whose content must be made available at the network master output area.
For instance, if one wishes to write the acceleration ramp value in the
CFW-09 inverter, one must program the value 100 in one of these parameters, because the parameter P100 is the one where this data is programmed. It is worthwhile to remind that the value read from any parameter is represented with a 16 bit word with sign, in two’s complement. Even if the parameter has decimal resolution, the value is transmitted without the indication of the decimal point. E.g., if one wishes to write value 5.0s in the parameter P100, the value programmed via the network must be 50.
These parameters are used only if the inverter were programmed to use the I/O instances 102/103, and if the number of input/output words programmed in P346 were greater than 2.
In order to get more information on the parameterization and the operation of the DeviceNet Drive Profile interface, refer to the CFW-09 frequency inverter DeviceNet Drive Profile Communication Manual.
2 to 7
[ 2 ]
-
This parameter is applicable only if an optional DeviceNet Drive Profile communication kit were used.
If the option 3, instances 102/103, is programmed in P335, it will be possible to program in P346 the number of words exchanged with the master from 2 up to 7 words.
The modification of this parameter will become valid only after cycling the power of the inverter.
In order to get more information on the parameterization and the operation of the DeviceNet Drive Profile interface, refer to the CFW-09 frequency inverter DeviceNet Drive Profile Communication Manual.
207
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
6.3.1 Parameters for Crane Applications and for Torque Master/Slave Function - P351 to P368
Parameter
P351 (1)
Delay for E33
Speed without Control
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.0 to 99.9
[ 99.9 ]
0.1 s
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4.
Description / Notes
If the difference between N (Real Speed) and N*t (Total Speed Reference) remains greater than the value set at parameter P292 for a period longer than that set at parameter P351 the inverter will trip with an error code
E33.
99.9 = E33 is disabled
P352 (1)
Delay for E34
Long Period at
Torque Limitation
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4.
0 to 999
[ 999 ]
1 s
P353 (1)
Delay for N < Nx
BrakeActivation
0.0 to 20.0
[0.0]
0.1 s
P354 (1)
Delay for Resetting the Integrator of the
Speed Regulator
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 4 (vector with encoder)
0.0 to 10.0
[2.0]
0.1 s
P355 (1)
Delay for Accepting new “Start/Stop” commands
0.0 to 10.0
[1.0]
0.1 s
If the CFW-09 remains at torque limitation for a period longer than the value set at P352 the inverter will trip with an error code E34.
999 = E34 is disabled.
NOTE!
When the CFW-09 is used in “master/slave” applications, disable this function on the slave inverter.
Defines the time to activate the brake, i.e., the time that elapses between the condition N < Nx and the brake activation.
This adjustment is needed to ensure that the motor current will be reduced after the brake activation.
ATTENTION!
If this value is lower than time needed to activate the mechanical braking, jerking, swinging or even falling may happen. If this value is greater than that set at P351 or P352, the inverter may trip with an error code E33 or E34, respectively.
This is the dead time that ensures the braking activation. Any other
“Start/Stop” command is not accepted during this period.
Defines the time that the CFW-09 waits before accepting a new “Start” command after the motor is stopped. During the period set at P355 the commands are ignored.
Function valid for commands via digital input only.
208
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P356 (1)
Delay for
Ramp Enable
P357 (1)
Filter for the
Torque Current -Iq
P358 (1)
Hysteresis for the
Torque Current - Iq
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.0 to 10.0
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 s
Description / Notes
This is the time that the CFW-09 waits before enabling the ramp after receiving the “Start” command.
Function valid for commands via digital input only.
0.00 to 9.99
[0.00]
0.01 s
Time constant of the filter applied to the torque current. The sampling time is 5 ms.
It works along with P358 and activates a digital or relay output that was set to the option Torque Polarity +/-.
The filtered torque current may be available at analog outputs AO3 and
AO4 when they are set to the option “Iq with P357” (P255 and/or P257 =
38).
0.00 to 9.99
[2.00]
0.01 %
Establishes the percentage of hysteresis that is applied to the commutation of a digital (DOx) or relay output when they are set to the options 34 or 35.
Torque Polarity
Positive Torque (+)
H2 H1
Iq with P357
Negative Torque (-)
H1 = P358 x rated torque
H2 = P358 x rated torque
Figure 6.45 - Hysteresis for the torque current - Iq
P361 (1)
Load Detector
0 or 1
[0]
-
P362 (1)
Stabilization Speed
Available only if P361 = 1 (On)
0 to P134
[90]
1 rpm
P361
0
1
Function
Off
On
Description
Functions that are set at parameters from P362 to P368 are disabled.
The following functions are enabled: Slack Cable Detection, Lightweight Level and Overweight Detection.
Table 6.57 - Load detector
NOTE!
Refer to figures 6.46 a) and b).
The motor accelerates up to the stabilization speed and remains at this speed during the time set at parameter P363.
During this period, the CFW-09 detects the load condition by using the average current.
209
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P363 (1)
Stabilization Time
Available only if P361 = 1 (On)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.1 to 10.0
[ 0.1 ]
0.1 s
Description / Notes
Time that the CFW-09 waits before starting the load detection after the stabilization speed has been reached.
P364 (1)
Slack Cable Time
Available only if P361 = 1 (On)
0.0 to 60.0
[0.0]
0.1 s
Time that the CFW-09 waits to commutate the digital (DOx) and relay outputs set to the option “Slack Cable Detection”. If the Slack Cable condition is no longer valid, the CFW-09 resets the digital or relay outputs.
NOTE!
When P364 = 0, the detection logic of slack cable is disabled.
Output current value used to detect the slack cable condition.
P365 (1)
Slack Cable Level
Available only if P361 = 1 (On)
0.0 to 1.3 x P295
[0.1 x P295]
0.1 A
P366 (1)
Light Load Level
Available only if P361 = 1 (On)
0.0 to 1.3 x P295
[0.3 x P295]
0.1 A
Output current value used to detect the light load condition.At the end of this process the speed reference is increased according to P368. The new speed value is N = N* x P368. This condition is reset when the motor remains stopped for 1 second.
P367 (1)
Overweight Level
Available only if P361 = 1 (On)
0.0 to 1.8 x P295
[1.1 x P295]
0.1 A
NOTE!
This condition is verified only during the stabilization time.
Output current value used to detect the overweight condition. This function is only enabled during the stabilization time. This condition is reset when the motor remains stopped (N = 0) for 1 second.
NOTE!
This condition is verified only during the stabilization time.
P368 (1)
Speed Reference Gain
Available only if P361 = 1 (On)
1.000 to 2.000
[1.000]
-
This parameter increases the speed reference under the light load condition.
P369 (2) (11)
Frequency Fx
0.0 to 300.0
[4.0]
0.1 Hz
It is used in functions of the digital and relay outputs: F > Fx.
NOTE!
Details of this function can be obtained in the function description of parameters P275 to P280.
210
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION a) Activation of the load detection parameters during the stabilization time and with P361 = On
Speed
N* x P368
N*
P362
Time
Show Overweight
Output
Current
P367
(1)
(2)
P366
P365
P363 Calculate Im
P364
Show Slack
Cable
(1)
Overweight Condition
(2)
Normal Condition
Light load condition
Slack cable condition
Im - Average Current
Figure 6.46 a) - Details of the operation of digital functions
Time
211
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION b) Diagram of the Load Detection Logic
Start
P361 = 1?
S
N > P362
S
N = 0
S
To = 0
Repeat
Detection
S
Ramp Hold
1
Repeat
Detection
S
P364 >0
S
Cable OK
S
Th > P363
Calculate Im
Th = 0
Im < P366
S
N* = N* x P368
Is > P365
S
Im > P367
S
Show
Overweight
End
To = Time in N = 0 rpm Is = Output Current (P003)
Th = Ramp Hold Time
N = Real Speed
Im = Average Current
N* = Speed Reference Iq = Torque Current
Figure 6.46 b) - Details of the operation of digital functions
To > 1 s
S
Repeat
Detection
Slack Cable
Counter = 0
1
P364 > 0
S
Is > P365
S
212
Increase To
Cable OK
Show Slack
Cable
Th = Th-1
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P370
Hysteresis for Fx
P371
DC Braking Time at Start
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 (Sensorless) or 5 (VVW)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.0 to 15.0
[2.0]
0.1 Hz
0.0 to 15.0
[0.0]
0.1 s
Description / Notes
It is used in functions of the digital and relay outputs: F > Fx.
The DC braking at start consists of applying a DC current to the motor between the “Start” command and the motor acceleration.
This parameter adjusts the DC braking time at start for the VVW and
Sensorless Vector Control Modes.
If the inverter is disabled during the DC braking operation, the braking process will continue until the braking time set at P371 finishes. After that the inverter returns to the “RDY” state.
The DC braking at start is not available for:
- The V/Hz and Vector with Encoder Control Modes;
- JOG, JOG+ and JOG- command;
- Start commands through the serial and Fieldbus interfaces with P202 = 3;
- When P211 = 1(Zero Speed Disable);
- When the Flying Start function is set (P320 1).
The DC current level is set at P302 (VVW) and P372 (sensorless).
During the DC Braking the LED displays flashes .
P372
DC Braking
Current Level
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when P202 = 3
(Sensorless)
P398 (1)
Slip Compensation
During Regeneration
0.0 to 90.0
[40.0]
0.1 %
0 or 1
[1]
-
This parameter adjusts the DC voltage (DC braking torque) applied to the motor during the braking process.
The current level set at this parameter represents a percentage of the inverter rated current.
This parameter works only for the Sensorless Vector Control.
P398
0
1
Function
Off
On
Table 6.58 - Slip compensation during regeneration
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when P202 = 5
(VVW)
P399 (1)(2)
Rated Motor
Efficiency
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when P202 = 5
(VVW)
50.0 to 99.9
[According to the motor rated power
(P404)]
0.1 %
This parameter sets the motor rated efficiency;
This parameter is important to the correct operation of the VVW Control.
The incorrect setting of this parameter results in the incorrect calculation of the slip compensation;
The default value of this parameter is automatically set when parameter
P404 is modified. The suggested value is valid only for IV pole standard three-phase WEG motors. The user shall set this parameter manually for other motor types.
213
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
6.4
MOTOR PARAMETERS - P400 to P499
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
P400 (1) (6)
Motor Rated Voltage
0 to 690
[ P296 ]
1 V
Set this parameter value according to the motor nameplate and the connection diagram in the terminal box.
This value cannot be greater than the rated voltage value set at P296.
In order to make a new setting of P400 effective while not in the guided start-up routine, it is necessary to power the inverter down/up.
P401 (1) (12)
Motor Rated Current
0.0 to 1.30 x P295
[ 1.0 x P295 ]
0.1 A(< 100)-1 A(> 99.9)
Set this parameter according to the motor nameplate, considering the motor operating voltage.
P402 (1) (2) (11)
Motor Rated Speed
Set this parameter according to the motor nameplate.
0 to 18000 rpm for V/F and VVW Control.
0 to 7200 rpm for Vector Control.
P403 (1) (11)
Motor Rated
Frequency
P404 (1)
Motor Rated Power
0 to 18000
[ 1750 (1458) ]
1 rpm
0 to 7200
[ 1750 (1458) ]
1 rpm
0 to 300
[ 60 (50) ]
1 Hz
30 to 120
[ 60 (50) ]
1 Hz
0 to 50
[ 4 ]
-
Set this parameter according to the motor nameplate.
0 to 300 Hz for V/F and VVW Control.
30 to 120 Hz for Vector Control.
Set this parameter according to the motor nameplate.
P404
Motor Rated
Power (hp/kW)
0.33/0.25
0.50/0.37
0.75/0.55
1.0/0.75
1.5 /1.1
2.0 /1.5
3.0 /2.2
4.0 /3.0
5.0 /3.7
5.5 /4.0
6.0/4.5
7.5/5.5
10.0/7.5
12.5/9.0
15.0/11.0
20.0/15.0
25.0/18.5
30.0/22.0
40.0/30.0
50.0/37.0
60.0/45.0
75.0/55.0
100.0/75.0
125.0/90.0
150.0/110.0
175.0/130.0
P404
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
24
25
Table 6.59 - Motor rated power selection
38
39
40
41
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
26
27
28
29
46
47
48
49
50
42
43
44
45
Motor Rated
Power (hp/kW)
180.0/132.0
200.0/150.0
220.0/160.0
250.0/185.0
270.0/200.0
300.0/220.0
350.0/260.0
380.0/280.0
400.0/300.0
430.0/315.0
440.0/330.0
450.0/335.0
475.0/355.0
500.0/375.0
540.0/400.0
600.0/450.0
620.0/460.0
670.0/500.0
700.0/525.0
760.0/570.0
800.0/600.0
850.0/630.0
900.0/670.0
1100.0/ 820.0
1600.0/1190.0
214
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P405 (1)
Encoder PPR
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 4 (Vector
Control with Encoder)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
100 to 9999
[ 1024 ]
1 ppr
Description / Notes
Sets the number of pulses per revolution (PPR) of the incremental encoder, when P202 = 4 (Vector with Encoder).
P406
Motor Ventilation
Type
(1)
0 to 3
[ 0 ]
-
P406
0
1
2
3
Function
Self-ventilated
Forced Ventilation
Optimal Flux
Increased Protection
Table 6.60 - Type of motor ventilation
At the first inverter power up (refer to items 5.2, 5.3 and 5.3.1) or when
P202 is modified from 0, 1 or 2 (V/Hz) to 5 (VVW), 3 or 4 (Vector - refer to item 5.3.2), from 5 to 3 or 4 and vice versa, the value set at P406 automatically changes the overload protection as follows:
P406
0
1
2
3
P156 P157 P158
1.1 x P401 0.9 x P401 0.55 x P401
1.1 x P401 1.0 x P401 1.0 x P401
1.1 x P401 1.0 x P401 1.0 x P401
0.98 x P401 0.9 x P401 0.55 x P401
Table 6.61 - Motor overload protection action
ATTENTION!
The option P406 = 2 may be used (refer to Use Conditions below) when motor should be operated at low frequencies with rated torque, without requiring forced ventilation, for the operation range 12:1, i.e., 5 at 60 Hz/4.2 at 50 Hz according the rated motor frequency.
CONDITIONS FOR USING OPTION P406 = 2:
I. Sensorless Vector Mode (P202 = 3);
II. WEG motors series: Nema Premium Efficiency, Nema High Efficiency,
IEC Premium Efficiency, IEC TOP Premium Efficiency and Alto
Rendimento Plus.
When P406 = 3, the switching frequency is limited to 5 kHz.
215
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P407 (1) (2)
Rated Motor Power
Factor
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 5 (VVW)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.50 to 0.99
[ According to the motor rated power
(P404) ]
-
Description / Notes
This parameter sets the motor power factor;
This parameter is important to the correct operation of the VVW Control.
The incorrect setting of this parameter results in the incorrect calculation of the slip compensation;
The default value of this parameter is automatically set when parameter
P404 is modified. The suggested value is valid only for IV pole standard three-phase WEG motors. The user shall set this parameter manually for other motor types.
P408 (1)
Run Self-Tuning
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
The Self-tuning
Routine can be cancelled by pressing the key, only when P409 to P413 are different from zero.
Self-tuning can be realized only with
P309 = Inactive (0)
0 to 2
(P202 = 3)
[ 0 ]
1
0 to 4
(P202 = 4)
[ 0 ]
1
0 or 1
(P202 = 5)
[ 0 ]
1
This parameter controls the self-tuning routine, which estimates the value of parameters related to the motor under use. When P408 is set to options 1, 2, or 3, the self-tuning routine estimates the value of parameters
P409 to P413. When this parameter is set to option 4, the self-tuning routine only estimates the value of parameter P413.
Note:
Best results for the self-tuning routine are obtained with a hot motor.
P408
0
1
2
3
4
Self-tuning
No
No rotation
Run for Imr
Run for Tm
Measure Tm
Type of Control
-
Sensorless Vector, Vector with
Encoder or VVW
Sensorless Vector or Vector with Encoder
Vector with Encoder
Vector with Encoder
Table 6.62 - Self-tuning options
P202
-
3, 4 or 5
3 or 4
4
4
- No rotation
- The motor remains stationary during the self-tuning routine.
The value of P410 is obtained from a table, which is valid for WEG motors up to 12 poles.
Thus, P410 must be set to zero before starting the self-tuning routine. If
P410 0, the self-tuning routine will keep the existing value.
Note:
When using a non-WEG motor, set P410 to the proper value (no load current) before running the self-tuning routine.
- Run for Imr - The value of P410 is estimated with the motor rotating.
This option shall be executed without load coupled to the motor.
ATTENTION!
If the self-tuning routine is executed with a load coupled to the motor and with P408 set to option 2 (Run for Imr), a wrong value of
P410 (Imr) may be obtained. This will result in a wrong estimation of P412 (Lr/Tr Constant) and P413 (Mechanical Time Constant -
Tm).An overcurrent fault (E00) may also occur during the inverter operation.
Note:
The word “load” represents anything coupled to the motor shaft such as a gearbox, an inertia wheel, etc.
216
Parameter
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
- Run for Tm - The value of parameter P413 (Mechanical Time Constant
- Tm) is measured with the motor rotating. It shall be run, preferentially, with the load coupled to the motor.
- Measure Tm
– It estimates only the value of P413 (Mechanical Time
Constant – Tm) with the motor rotating. It shall be run, preferentially, with the load coupled to the motor.
NOTES!
When P408 = 1 or 2:
The parameter P413 (Mechanical Time Constant – Tm) is set to an approximated value of the motor mechanical time constant.
The value of this parameter is set based on the motor rotor inertia
(table data is valid for WEG motors), on the Drive Rated Current, and on the Drive Rated Voltage.
Vector with Encoder Control (P202 = 4):
When P408 is set to option 2 (Run for Imr) and the self-tuning routine is finished, it is mandatory to couple the load to the motor and set parameter P408 to 4 (Measure Tm) in order to estimate
P413 (Mechanical Time Constant – Tm). In this case, parameter
P413 will also consider the driven load.
VVW Control - Voltage Vector WEG (P202 = 5):
In the self-tuning routine for the VVW Control, only the mot stator resistance (P409) is obtained. Therefore, the self-tuning routine is always run with the motor stationary.
P409 (1)
Motor Stator Resistance
(Rs)
0.000 to 77.95
[ 0.000 ]
0.001
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3, 4 (Vector
Control) a 5 (VVW)
Value estimated by the Self-tuning routine.
217
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P410
Motor Magnetizing
Current (I mr
)
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 1.25 x P295
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 A
Description / Notes
When the motor can operate decoupled from the load (P408 = 2) this value is estimated by the Self-tuning routine (P408 = 1 or 3) otherwise it is obtained from a pre-stored value array valid for WEG motors.
If a non WEG motor is being used set this parameter to the correct value before starting Self-tuning.
For P202 = 4 (vector with encoder), the value set at P410 determines the motor flux. Thus ensure correct setting. If this setting is too low, the motor will lose flux and torque, if too high, the motor running starts to oscillate at rated speed or even this speed may not be reached. In this case, decrement P410 or P178 till speed oscillation stops or the rated speed is reached.
P411 (1)
Motor Flux Leakage
Inductance
0.00 to 99.99
[ 0.00 ]
0.01 mH
Value estimated by the Self-tuning routine.
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
P412
Lr/Rr Constant (Rotor
Time Constant - Tr)
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
0.000 to 9.999
[ 0.000 ]
0.001 s
The setting of P412 determines the gains of the flux regulator (P175 and P176).
The value of P412 is estimated by the self-tuning routine for motors up to 75 hp/55 kW. For higher ratings, this parameter is set according to the values for the WEG standard motors (table 6.63 shows typical values for some motors).
The value of this parameter affects the speed accuracyfor the Sensorless
Vector Mode Control.
Usually, the self-tuning routine is run when the motor is cold. Depending on the motor, the value of P412 may vary more or less according to the motor temperature. Therefore, when running a hot motor, adjust P412 so that the loaded motor speed (measured at the motor shaft with a tachometer) is the same as that indicated on the inverter keypad (P001).
This setting shall be performed at the half of the rated speed.
For P202 = 4 (Vector with Encoder Control), if the setting of P412 is incorrect the motor will lose torque. In this case, set P412 so that the motor current (P003) reaches the lowest value at the half of the rated speed and with a steady load.
In the Sensorless Vector Control the value of the parameter P175 will be limited in the range: 3.0 P175 8.0.
218
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P413 (1)
Tm Constant
(Mechanical Time
Constant)
This parameter is shown on the display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
Typical T
R values for WEG standard motors:
Motor Power
CV-hp / kW
2 / 1.5
5 / 3.7
10 / 7.5
15 / 11
20 / 15
30 / 22
50 / 37
100 / 75
150 / 110
200 / 150
300 / 220
350 / 250
500 / 375
2 4
T
R
(s):
Number of poles
6 8
(50 Hz/60 Hz) (50 Hz/60 Hz) (50 Hz/60 Hz) (50 Hz/60 Hz)
0.19 / 0.14
0.29 / 0.29
- / 0.38
0.52 / 0.36
0.49 / 0.51
0.70 / 0.55
- / 0.84
1.64 / 1.08
1.33 / 1.74
- / 1.92
- / 2.97
- / -
- / -
0.13 / 0.14
0.18 / 0.12
0.32 / 0.25
0.30 / 0.25
0.27 / 0.29
0.37 / 0.34
0.55 / 0.54
1.32 / 0.69
1.05 / 1.01
- / 0.95
1.96 / 2.97
1.86 / 1.85
- / 1.87
0.1 / 0.1
- / 0.14
0.21 / 0.15
0.20 / 0.22
0.38 / 0.2
0.35 / 0.37
0.62 / 0.57
0.84 / 0.64
0.71 / 0.67
- / 0.65
1.33 / 1.30
- / 1.53
- / -
0.07 / 0.07
0.14 / 0.11
0.13 / 0.14
0.28 / 0.22
0.21 / 0.24
- / 0.38
0.31 / 0.32
0.70 / 0.56
- / 0.67
- / 1.03
- / -
- / -
- / -
Table 6.63 - Typical T
R values for some WEG standard motors
0.00 to 99.99
[ 0.00 ]
0.01 s
The setting of P413 determines the gains of the speed regulator (P161 and P162).
When P408 = 1 or 2, observe the following:
- If P413 = 0, then the Tm constant will be obtained as a function of the motor inertia (memory stored value).
- If P413 > 0, then the value of P413 will not be changed during the selftuning routine.
Sensorless Vector Control (P202 = 3):
When the value of P413 (obtained from the self-tuning routine) provides unsuitable gains for the speed regulator, modify this parameter to better adjust the speed regulator gains.
The value of P161, provided by the self-tuning routine or through the changing of P413, will be limited in the range: 6.0 P161 9.0.
The value of P162 varies according to the value of P161.
In case it is needed to increase more these gains, set them directly at
P161 and P162.
Note:
Values of P161 > 12.0 may cause oscillations in the torque current
(iq) and in the speed.
Vector with Encoder Control (P202 = 4):
The value of P413 is estimated by the self-tuning routine when P408 = 3 or 4. In case it is not possible to estimate it, the setting shall be performed manually. (Refer to P161/P162).
219
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
6.5
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
PARAMETERS -
P500 to P699
6.5.1 PID Regulator
6.5.2 Description
The CFW-09 is fitted with the PID regulator that can be used for closed loop process control. This function acts as a proportional, integral and derivative regulator, superimposed on the normal inverter speed control.
The speed will be changed in order to maintain the process variable (the variable that should be controlled - for instance: water level of a container) at the desired value, set in the setpoint.
This regulator can control, for example, the flow in a piping system through the flow feedback to the analog input AI2 or AI3 (selected via P524), and the flow reference set at P221 or P222 -AI1, when the inverter drives the motor of a pump that circulates the fluid through this piping system.
Other application examples: level control, temperature control, dosing control, etc.
The function of the PID regulator is activated by setting P203 to 1.
Figure 6.47 shows the block diagram of the Academic PID regulator.
The transference function in the frequency domain of the Academic PID regulator is: y ( s ) Kp e ( s )[ 1
1 sTi
sTd ]
Substituting the integrator by a sum and the derivative by the incremental quotient, we will obtain an approximate value for the discrete (recursive) transfer equation shown below: y ( kTa )
Kie ( k
y ( k
1 ) Ta
1 ) Ta
Kp [( e ( kTa
Kd ( e ( kTa )
)
2 e ( k
e ( k
1 ) Ta
1 ) Ta
e ( k
)
2 ) Ta )] where:
Kp (Proportional Gain): Kp = P520 x 4096;
Ki (Integral Gain) : Ki = P521 x 4096 = [Ta/Ti x 4096];
Kd (Differential Gain) : Kd = P522 x 4096 = [Td/Ta x 4096];
Ta = 0.02 s (sampling period of the PID Regulator);
SP*: reference, has 13 bits max. (0 to 8191);
X: process variable (or controlled), read at AI2 or AI3, has 13 bits maximum; y(kTa): current PID output, has 13 bits maximum; y(k-1)Ta: previous OPID output; e(kTa): current error [SP*(k) – X(k)]; e(k-1)Ta: previous error [SP*(k-1) – X(k-1)]; e(k-2)Ta: error of the two previous samplings [SP*(k-2) – X(k-2)].
The feedback signal must be sent to the analog inputs AI2' and AI3' (refer to figure 6.29 and 6.30).
NOTE!
When using the PID function P233 must be set to 1, otherwise the minimum speed (P133) will be added to the PID feedback via AI2.
220
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
The setpoint can be defined:
Keypad: parameter P525.
Analog inputs AI1’, AI2’, AI3’, AI4’, (AI1’+ AI2’)>0, (AI1’+ AI2’), Multispeed,
Serial, Fieldbus and PLC.
NOTE!
When P203 = 1, do not use the reference via E.P. (P221/P222 = 7).
When the PID function (P203 = 1) is set:
The following parameters are automaticallychanged: P223 = 0 (always forward),
P225 = 0 (JOG disabled), P226 = 0 (always forward), P228 = 0 (JOG disabled),
P237 = 3 (PID process variable) e P265 = 15 (Manual/Automatic).
The JOG Function and the direction of rotation function remain disabled. The
Enabling and Start/Stop controls are defined in P220, P224 and P227.
The digital input DI3 is programmed automatically for the function Manual/
Automatic (P265 = 15), according to table 6.64.
DIx
0 (0 V)
1 (24 V)
Operating Mode
Manual
Automatic
Table 6.64 - DIx operating mode
The change between Manual/Automatic can be realized by one of the digital inputs DI3 to DI8 (P265 to P270).
Parameter P040 indicates the value of the Process Variable feedback) in the chosen scale/unit. This parameter can be selected as monitoring variable
(refer to item 4.2.2), provided P205 = 6. To prevent the saturation of the analog feedback input during the regulation “overshoot”, the signal must vary between
0 V to 9.0 V [(0 to 18) mA / (4 to 18) mA]. The adaptation between the setpoint and the feed back can be realized by changing the gain of the selected analog input as feedback (P238 forAI2 or P242 forAI3). The Process Variable can also be displayed at the outputs AO1 to AO4 provided they were programmed at P251, P253, P255 or P257. The same is valid for the PID setpoint.
The outputs DO1, DO2 and RL1 to RL3 can be programmed (P275 to P277,
P279 or P280) to the functions of the Process Variable > VPx (P533) and
Process Variable < VPy (P534).
When the setpoint is defined by P525 (P221 or P222 = 0), and if it is changed from manual to automatic, following setting P525 = P040 is performed automatically, provided the parameter P536 is active. In this case, the commutation from manual to automatic is smooth (there is no abrupt speed oscillation).
In case of function “Stop Logic” is active (P211 = 1) and P224 = 0, P224 is automatically changed to the option “Digital Input (DIx)” (P224 = 1).
In case of function “Stop Logic” is active (P211 = 1) and P227 = 0, P227 is automatically changed to the option “Digital Input (DIx)” (P227 = 1).
221
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
222
Figure 6.47 - Block diagram of the PID regulator function
Parameter
P520
PID Proportional
Gain
P521
PID Integral Gain
P522
PID Differential
Gain
P523
PID Ramp Time
P524
(1)
Selection of the
PID Feedback
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.000 to 7.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001
0.000 to 7.999
[ 0.043 ]
0.001
0.000 to 3.499
[ 0.000 ]
0.001
0.0 to 999
[ 3.0 ]
0.1 s (< 99.9 s)
1 s (> 99.9 s)
Description / Notes
Some examples of initial settings of the PID Regulator Gains and PID
Ramp Times for some applications mentioned in item 6.5.1, are shown in table 6.65.
Magnitude
Pressure pneumatic system
Flow pneumatic system
Pressure hydraulic system
Flow hydraulic system
Temperature
Level
Proportional
P520
1
1
1
1
2
1
Gains
Integral
P521
0.043
0.037
0.043
0.037
0.004
Refer to note (2)
Derivative
P522
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
PIDRamp
Time
P523
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
Action Type
P527
0 = Direct
0 = Direct
0 = Direct
0 = Direct
Refer to note (1)
Refer to note (1)
Table 6.65 - Suggestions for gain settings of the PID regulator
NOTES!
(1)
For temperature and level control, the action type will depend on the process. For instance, in the level control, when the inverter drives the motor that removes fluid from a tank, the action will be contrary as when the inverter drives the motor that fills a tank and thus the fluid level increases and the inverter should increase the motor speed to lower the fluid level, otherwise the inverter action that drives the pump motor to pump fluid into the tank will be direct.
(2)
In case of level control, the setting of the integral gain will depend on the time required to fill the tank from the minimum acceptable level up the desired level, in the following conditions:
I. For the direct action, the time should be measured by considering the maximum input flow and the minimum output flow.
II.In the inverse action, the time should be measured by considering the minimum input flow and the maximum output flow.
The equation to calculate an initial value for P521 (PID Integral Gain) as a function of the system response time, is presented below:
P521 = 0.02 / t t = time (seconds)
0 or 1
[ 0 ]
-
It selects the feedback input (Process Variable) of the PID regulator:
P524
0
1
AIx
AI2 (P237 to P240)
AI3 (P241 to P244)
Table 6.66 - Feedback selection
223
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
After the feedback input has been chosen, you must set the input function selected at P237 (to AI2) or P241 (to AI3).
Feedback Type:
The PID actionType described above considers that the variable feedback signal increases when the process variable also increases (direct feedback). This is the most common used feedback type.
When the process variable feedback decreases when the process variable increases (inverse feedback), it is required to program the selected analog input for the PID (AI2 or AI3) as inverse reference: P239 = 2 [(10 to 0) V/(20 to 0) mA] or P239 = 3 [(20 to 4) mA]. When the feedback is through AI2 and P243 = 2 [(10 to 0) V/(20 to 0) mA] or P243 = 3 [(20 to
4) mA] when the feedback is through AI3. When this setting is not present, PID does not operate correctly.
P525
Keypad PID Setpoint
0.0 to 100.0
[ 0.0 ]
0.1 %
It provides the setpoint via the and keys for the PID Regulator
(P203 = 1) provided that P221 = 0 (LOC) or P222 = 0 (REM) and the inverter is in the Automatic mode. If it has been set to Manual Mode, the speed reference is given by P121.
The value of P525 is maintained at the last set value (backup), even when inverter is disabled or enabled with [P120 = 1 (Active)].
Once PID is in Automatic mode, the Setpoint value for PID regulator is entered into the CFW-09 via any reference set by P221 (LOCAL mode) or P222 (REMOTE mode). Particularly, most of general PID applications uses the setpoint via theAI1 [P221 = 1 (LOC) or P222 = 1(REM)] or via the and keys [P221 = 0 (LOC) or P222 = 0 (REM)]. Refer to figure 6.47 - Block Diagram of the PID Regulator.
P526
Process Variable
Filter
P527
PID Action Type
0.0 to 16.0
[ 0.1 ]
0.1 s
0 or 1
[ 0 ]
-
It sets the time constant of the Process Variable Filter.
Generally 0.1 will be a suitable value, excepting the process variable signal has a too high noise level. In this case, increase this value gradually by checking the result.
It defines the control action type:
P527
0
1
Action Type
Direct
Reverse
Table 6.67 - PID action type
224
Parameter
P528
Process Variable
Scale Factor
P529
Decimal Point of
Process Variable
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
Select according to the process
Motor Speed
Increase
Fault
Positive
Negative
Select
Direct
Reverse
Table 6.68 - PID action selection
Process requirement:
PID action type: the PID action should be selected as Direct, when it is required to increase the motor speed in order to increase the process variable. Otherwise, select the Reverse.
Example 1 - Direct: pump driven by frequency inverter and filling a tank, where PID regulates the level. To increase the level (process variable) it is required to increase the flow and consequently, the motor speed.
Example 2 - Reverse: Fan driven by frequency inverter and cooling a cooling tower, with PID controlling its temperature. With the temperature increase the error becomes negative and the speed increases, cooling down the tower.
0 to 9999
[ 1000 ]
1
0 to 3
[ 1 ]
-
P528 and P529 define the way the Process variable (P040) will be shown.
P529 defines how many digits are indicated after the decimal point.
P528 must be set according to the equation below:
P528 =
F. S. V. Indication Process x (10) P529
Gain (AI2 or AI3) where:
F. S. V. Indication Process is the full scale value of the Process Variable, corresponding to 10 V (20 mA) at the Analog Input (AI2 or AI3) used as feedback.
Example 1: (Pressure Transducer 0 to 25 bar - Output 4 to 20 mA)
- Desired indication: 0 to 25 bar (F. S.)
- Feedback Input: AI3
- Gain AI3 = P242 = 1.000
- Signal AI3 = P243 = 1 (4 to 20 mA)
- P529 = 0 (no digit after decimal point)
P528 =
25 x (10) 0
1.000
= 25
225
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit Description / Notes
Example 2 (values are factory standards):
- Desired indication: 0.0 % to 100.0 % (F. S.)
- Feedback Input: AI2
- Gain AI2 = P238 = 1.000
- P529 = 1 (one number after decimal point)
P528 =
100.0 x (10) 1
1.000
= 1000
P530
Engineering Unit of the Process Variable 1
P531
Engineering Unit of the Process Variable 2
P532
Engineering Unit of the Process Variable 3
32 to 127
[ 37 (%) ]
-
32 to 127
[ 32 ( ) ]
-
32 to 127
[ 32 ( ) ]
-
These parameters are only useful, if the inverter is fitted with HMI with
LCD display.
The Engineering Unit of the Process Variable is formed by three characters that are used for the indication of P040. P530 defines the left character, P531 defines the central character and P532 defines the right character.
Possible characters to be chosen:
Characters corresponding to the ASCII code from 32 to 127.
Examples:
A, B, ... , Y, Z, a, b, ... , y, z, 0, 1, ... , 9, #, $, %, (, ), *, +, ...
-
Examples:
To indicate “bar”:
P530 = “b” (98)
P531 = “a” (97)
P532 = “r” (114)
To indicate “%”:
P530 = “%” (37)
P531 = “ ” (32)
P532 = “ ” (32)
P533
Value of Process
Variable X
P534
Value of Process
Variable Y
0.0 to 100
[ 90.0 ]
0.1 %
0.0 to 100
[ 10.0 ]
0.1 %
Used in the functions of the Digital/Relay Outputs:
V. Pr. > VPx and V. Pr. < VPy aiming signaling/alarm.
Full scale percentage values of the Process Variable:
(P040 =
(10) P529
P528 x100 %)
226
CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter
P535
Wake Up Band
P536 (1)
Automatic Set of
P525
P537
Hysteresis for the
Set Point =
Process Variable
Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 100
[ 0 ]
1 %
0 or 1
[ 0 ]
-
Description / Notes
The value of this parameter is used along with P212 (Condition to Leave
Zero Speed Disable), providing additional condition to leave zero speed disable, that is, error of PID > P535. Refer to P211 to P213.
When the setpoint of the PID regulator is by HMI (P221/P222 = 0) and
P536 is zero (active) by commutating from manual to automatic, the process variable value will be loaded at P525. In this way you prevent
PID oscillations during the commutation from “Manual” to “Automatic”.
P536
0
1
Action Type
Active
Inactive
Table 6.69 - Automatic set of P525
0 to 100
[ 1 ]
1 %
When the Set Point value is equal to the Process Variable and it is within the range defined by the hysteresis value (set at parameter P537), the digital or relay output set to the option Set Point = Process Variable
(SP = PV) is activated and remains in this condition until the process variable reaches a value outside of the hysteresis range (refer to figure
6.39 v)).
NOTE!
This function is enabled only in the automatic mode and when
P203 = 1.
P538
Hysteresis VPx/VPy
0.0 to 50.0
[ 1.0 ]
0.1 %
It is used in functions of the digital and relay outputs:
Process Variable > VPx and Process Variable < VPy
227
CHAPTER 7
DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 FAULTS AND POSSIBLE
CAUSES
FAULT
E00
Output
Overcurrent
E01
Overvoltage (Ud)
E02
Undervoltage (Ud)
This chapter assists the user to identify and correct possible faults that can occur during the CFW-09 operation. Guidance on Preventive
Maintenance is also provided.
When a fault is detected, the inverter is disabled and the Fault Code is displayed on the readout in the EXX form, where XX is the actual Fault
Code. (ie. E01).
To restart the inverter after a fault has occurred, the inverter must be reset.
The reset can be made as follows:
Disconnecting and reapplying AC power (power-on reset).
By pressing the key (manual reset).
Automatic reset through P206 (auto-reset).
By digital input: DIx = 12 (P265 to P270).
By Serial interface.
By Fieldbus interface.
The table below defines each Fault Code, explains how to reset the fault and shows the possible causes for each Fault Code.
RESET
Power-on
Manual reset (Key
Auto-reset
DIx (Digital Input)
Serial
Fieldbus
)
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Short-circuit between two motor phases
Short-circuit between braking resistor cables
When the output current reaches 2 x P295, caused by: very high load inertia, acceleration ramp too fast or incorrect regulation and/ or configuration parameters
Transistor module shorted
P169 to P172 set too high
Power Supply voltage too high, check Ud in P004:
220-230 V Models - Ud > 400 V
380-480 V Models - Ud > 800 V
500-600 V and 500-690 V Models with power supply between
500 V and 600 V - Ud > 1000 V
500-690 V models with power supply between 660 V and 690 V and 660-690 V models - Ud > 1200 V
Load inertia too high or deceleration ramp too short
P151 or P153 set too high
Power Supply voltage too low, DC Link check Ud in P004:
220-230 V power supply - Ud < 223 V
380 V power supply - Ud < 385 V
400-415 V power supply - Ud < 405 V
440-460 V power supply - Ud < 446 V
480 V power supply - Ud < 487 V
500-525 V power supply - Ud < 532 V
550-575 V power supply - Ud < 582 V
600 V power supply - Ud < 608 V
660-690 V power supply - Ud < 699 V
Phase loss at the input
Auxiliary circuit fuse blown (only valid for 105 A and 130 A/220-230 V,
86 A to 600 A/380-480 V and 44 A to 79 A/500-600 V refer to item 3.2.3)
Pre-charge contactor defective
P296 set to a voltage higher than the power supply voltage
Table 7.1 - Faults and possible causes
228
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
FAULT
E03
(1)
Input Undervoltage/
Phase Loss
E04
(2) (3)
Inverter
Overtemperature or Pre-charge
Circuit
Defective
Serial
Fieldbus
RESET
Power-on
Manual reset (Key
Auto-reset
DIx (Digital Input)
Serial
Fieldbus
Power-on
Manual reset (Key
Auto-reset
DIx (Digital Input)
)
)
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Power Supply voltage is too low, check Power Supply voltage:
220-230 V Models - Power Supply < 154 V
380-480 V Models - Power Supply < 266 V
500-600 V and 500-690 V Models - Power Supply < 361 V
660-690 V Models - Power Supply < 462 V
Phase loss at the inverter input
Activation Time: 2.0 s
Ambient temperature too high (> 40 °C) and/or output current too high; or ambient temperature < -10 ºC
Blowers locked or defective
Auxiliary circuit fuse blown (only valid for 105 A and 130 A/220-230 V,
86 A to 600 A/380-480 V and 44 A to 79 A/500-600 V refer to item 3.2.3)
Problem with the supply voltage - voltage sag or interruption (phase loss) - last for more than 2 seconds and with the phase loss detection disabled (P214 = 0)
Signal with inverted Polarity at Analog inputs AI1/AI2
P156, P157 and P158 set too low for the motor being used
Motor is under an actual overload condition
E05
Inverter / Motor
Overload
I x t Function
E06
External Fault
E07
Encoder Fault
(Valid only if
P202 = 4 - Vector with Encoder)
E08
CPU Error
(watchdog)
E09
Program Memory
Error (Checksum)
E10
Error in the
Copy Function
E11
(7)
Ground Fault
Contact WEG
Power-on
Manual Reset (Key
Auto-reset
DIx
Serial
Fieldbus
)
Any DIx (DI3 to DI7) programmed for external fault detection (P265 to
P270 set to 4 – No Ext Flt) is open (not connected to + 24 V)
Terminal block XC12 on the control board CC9 is not properly connected
Miswiring between encoder and terminal block XC9 (optional board
EBA/EBB/EBC/EBE). Refer to item 8.2
Encoder is defective
Electrical noise
Memory with corrupted values
A bid to copy the HMI parameters to the inverter with different Software version
Short-circuit between one or more output phases and ground
Motor cable capacitance to ground is too high
Table 7.1 (cont.) - Faults and possible causes
229
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
FAULT
E12
Braking Resistor
Overload
E13
Incorrect encoder sense of rotation
(for P202 = 4 -
Encoder), with
P408 = runs to Imr
E15
Motor Phase
Loss
E17
Overspeed
Fault
E24
Programming
Error
E31
(5)
Keypad (HMI)
Connection Fault
E32
Motor
Overtemperature
(4)
E33
Speed without
Control
(8)
E34
Long Period at
Torque Limitation
(9)
E41
Self Diagnosis
Fault
RESET
Power-on
Manual Reset (Key
Auto-reset
DIx
)
Do not reset this fault and restart without first correcting the direction of either the encoder or of the motor.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Load inertia too high or deceleration ramp too short
Load on the motor shaft too high
P154 and P155 programmed incorrectly
Cables U, V, W to motor are inverted
Encoder channels A and B are inverted
Encoder mounted in wrong position
Note:
This fault can only occur during Self-tuning
Power-on
Manual Reset (Key
Auto-reset
DIx
Serial
Fieldbus
)
Bad contact or broken wiring between motor and inverter
Incorrect value programmed in P401
Vector Control without orientation
Vector Control with encoder, encoder wiring or connection to motor is inverted
When the effective overspeed exceeds the value of P134+P132 longer than 20 ms
Incompatible parameters were programmed. Refer to table 4.2
It is automatically reset when the incompatible parameters are correctly programmed.
It is automatically reset when
HMI communication with inverter is reestablished.
Power-on
Manual Reset (Key
Auto-reset
DIx
Serial
Fieldbus
)
Contact WEG
Keypad cable misconnected
Electrical noise in the installation (electromagnetic interference)
Motor is under an actual overload condition
Duty cycle is too high (too many starts/stops per minute)
Ambient temperature is too high
Motor thermistor miswiring or short-circuit (resistance < 100 ) at the terminals XC4:2 and XC4:3 of the optional board EBA or at the terminals
XC5:2 and XC5:3 of the optional board EBB
P270 programmed to 16 unintentionally, with EBA/EBB board not installed and/or motor thermistor not connected
Motor in locked rotor condition
Overweight
Brake Failure
The load was too heavy and the CFW-09 operated at torque limitation for a period longer than allowed
Failure on the brake opening caused the CFW-09 to operate at torque limitation for a period longer than allowed
Memory error or any internal inverter circuit defective
Table 7.1 (cont.) - Faults and possible causes
230
FAULT
E70
Internal DC Supply
Undervoltage
(6)
E71
Watchdog error for the PLC board
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
RESET
Power-on
Manual Reset (key
Auto-reset
DIx
Serial
Fieldbus
)
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Phase loss at the R or S input
Auxiliary circuit fuse blown (only valid for 500-690 V and 660-690 V models - refer to figures 3.7 f) and g))
When the PLC board stops communicating with the CFW-09 for more than 200 ms
Table 7.1 (cont.) - Faults and possible causes
Notes:
(1)
E03 Fault can occur only with:
- 220-230 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 45A;
- 380-480 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 30A;
- 500-600 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 22A;
- 500-690 V Models;
- 660-690 V Models;
- P214 set to 1.
(2)
In case of E04 Fault due to inverter overtemperature, allow the inverter to cool before trying to reset it. The E04 fault code can also indicate a failure in the pre-charge circuit. But this is valid only for:
- 220-230 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 70 A;
- 380-480 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 86 A.
- 500-690 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 107 A;
- 660-690 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 1000 A.
The failure in the pre-charge circuit means that the pre-charge contactor sizes up to 130 A/220-230 V, 142 A/380-480 V and 79 A/500-600 V) or pre-charge thyristor (sizes above 130 A/220-230 V, 142 A/380-480 V,
500-690 V and 660-690 V) is not closed, thus overheating the precharge resistors.
(3)
For:
- 220-230 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 16 A;
- 380-480 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 13 A, and equal or lower than 142 A;
- 500-600 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 12 A, and equal or smaller than 79 A;
E04 Fault can also be caused by internal airflow overtemperature.
In this case, check the electronics blower.
(4)
When E32 is displayed due to motor overtemperature, please allow the motor to cool down before restarting the inverter.
(5)
When an incompatible parameter is programmed, a Fault Message –
E24 - will be displayed and the LCD display will show a Help Message by indicating the Cause and how to correct the fault status.
(6)
Only for models 107Ato 472A/500-690 V and 100Ato 428A/660-690 V.
(7)
Long motor cables (longer than 100 m (330 ft)) can cause excessive capacitance to ground. This can cause nuisance E11 ground fault trips immediately after the inverter has been enabled.
231
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
SOLUTION:
Reduce the switching frequency (P297).
Connect a load reactor in series with the motor supply line. Refer to item
8.8.
(8)
This error occurs when the comparison [N = N*] is greater than the maximum admissible error (set at P292) for a period longer than that set at
P351. When P351 = 99.9 the detection logic for the error E33 is disabled.
This error is only active in Vector Modes (P202 = 3 or 4).
(9)
If the CFW-09 remains at torque limitation for a period longer than the value set at P352 the inverter will trip with an error code E34. When P352 = 999 the detection logic for the error E34 is disabled. This error is only active in
Vector Modes (P202 = 3 or 4).
NOTE!
When a fault occurs the following steps take place:
E00 to E08, E10, E11, E12, E13, E15, E17, E32, E33, E34 and E71:
- “No Fault” relay drops “out”;
- PWM pulses are stopped;
- The LED display indicates the fault code;
- The LCD display indicates the fault code and description;
- The “ERROR” LED flashes;
- The following data is stored in the EEPROM:
- Speed reference via Keypad or E.P. (Electronic Potentiometer), if the function “Reference Backup” is active (P120 set to 1 – On);
- Fault code;
- The status of the I x t function (motor overload);
- The status of the powered time (P042) and Enabled Time (P043).
E09:
- Does not allow inverter operation.
E24:
- Indicates thecodeon theLEDdisplayplusanddescriptionontheLCDdisplay;
- It blocks the PWM pulses;
- It doe nor permit motor driving;
- It switches OFF the relay that has been programmed to “Without Error”;
- It switches ON the relay that has been programmed to “With Error”.
E31:
- The inverter continues to operate normally;
- It does not accept the Keypad commands;
- The fault code is indicated on the LED display;
- The LCD display indicates the fault code and description;
- E31 is not stored in the fault memories (P014 to P017 and P060 to P065).
E41:
- Does not allow inverter operation;
- The fault code is indicated on the LED display;
- The LCD display indicates the fault code and description;
- The “ERROR” LED flashes.
232
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Indication of the inverter status LEDs:
LED
Power
LED
Error
Description
Inverter is powered up and is ready
A fault has been detected.
The FAULT LED flashes, indicating the number of the Fault Code
Example:
(Flashing)
E04
2.7 s 1 s
Note:
If the fault E00 occurs, the ERROR
LED is ON continuously.
7.2 TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM
Motor does not run
POINT TOBE
CHECKED
Incorrect Wiring
Analog Reference
(if used)
Incorrect Programming
Fault
Motor Stall
CORRECTIVEACTION
1. Check the power and control connections. For example the digital inputs DIX programmed for Start/Stop, General Enable and No External Fault must be connected to +24 V. For factory default programming, XC1:1 (DI1) must be connected to +24 V(XC1:9) and XC1:10 connected to XC1:8.
1. Check if the external signal is properly connected.
2. Check the status of the speed potentiometer (if used).
1. Check if the parameters are properly programmed for the application.
1. Check if the inverter is not disabled due to a Fault condition (Refer to table 7.1).
2. Check if there is a short-circuit between terminals XC1:9 and XC1:10 (shortcircuit at 24 Vdc power supply).
1. Reduce the motor load.
2. Increase P169/P170 or P136/P137.
Table 7.2 - Troubleshooting
233
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM
Motor speed varies (oscillates)
Motor speed too high or too low
POINT TOBE
CHECKED
Loose Connections
CORRECTIVEACTION
1. Disable the inverter, switch OFF the supply voltage and tighten all connections.
2. Check if all internal connection is tightened.
1. Replace the speed potentiometer.
Speed
Potentiometer
Variation of the external analog reference
1. Identify the cause of the variation.
Parameters not set correctly (for P202 = 3 or 4)
1. Refer to chapter 6, parameters P410, P412, P161, P162, P175 and P176.
Programming error
(reference limits)
Signal of the reference control
1. Check if the contents of P133 (Min. Speed) and P134 (Max. Speed) are according to the motor and the application.
1. Check the control signal level of the reference.
2. Check the programming (gains and offset) in P234 to P247.
Motor Nameplate Data 1. Check if the used motor meets the application requirements.
1. Reduce P180 (set to 90 to 99 %).
Motor does not reach rated speed or it starts to oscillate at rated speed for
P202 = 3 or 4 - Vector
Display OFF Connection of the
Keypad
Power Supply voltage
Blown Fuse(s)
1. Check the Keypad connections to the inverter.
1. The power supply voltage must be within the following ranges:
220-230 V power supply: - Min: 187 V
- Max: 253 V
380-480 V power supply: - Min: 323 V
- Max: 528 V
500-600 V power supply: - Min: 425 V
- Max: 660 V
660-690 V power supply: - Min: 561 V
- Max: 759 V
1. Replace the fuse(s).
1. Set P180, between 90 % and 99 %.
Motor does not enter the field weakening range
(for P202 = 3 or 4)
Motor speed too low and P009 = P169 or P170 (motor with torque limitation), for P202 = 4 -
Vector with encoder
Encoder signals or power connections
Check the signals A - A, B - B according to figure 8.7. If this connections are correct invert two output phases, for instance U and V. Refer to figure 3.9.
Table 7.2 (cont.) - Troubleshooting
234
7.3 CONTACTING
WEG
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE!
When contacting WEG for service or technical assistance, please have the following data on hand:
Inverter Model;
Serial number, manufacturing date and hardware revision, as indicated on the inverter nameplate (Refer to item 2.4);
Software Version (Refer to item 2.2);
Information about the application and inverter programming.
7.4 PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
COMPONENT
Terminal Blocks, Connectors
Blowers
(1)
/ Cooling System
Printed Circuit Boards
Power Module
(3)
/ Power Connections
DC Bus Capacitors
(2)
Power Resistor
DANGER!
Always disconnect the power supply voltage before touching any component of the inverter.
Even after switching OFF the inverter, high voltages may be present. Wait 10 minutes to allow complete discharge of the power capacitors.
Always connect the equipment frame to a suitable ground (PE) point.
ATTENTION!
Electronic boards have components sensitive to electrostatic discharges.
Never touch the components or connectors directly. If this is unavoidable, first touch the metallic frame or use a suitable ground strap.
Never apply a high voltage test on the inverter!
If this is necessary, contact WEG.
To avoid operation problems caused by harsh ambient conditions, such as high temperature, moisture, dirt, vibration or premature aging of the components, periodic inspections of the inverter and installations are recommended.
Loose screws
Loose connectors
PROBLEMS
Blowers are dirty
Abnormal acoustic noise
Blower is not running
Abnormal vibration
Dust in the air filters
Dust, oil or moisture accumulation
Smell
Dust, oil or moisture accumulation, etc.
Connection screws are loose
Discoloration / smell / electrolyte leakage
Safety valve is expanded or broken
Deformation
Discoloration
Smell
Table 7.3 - Periodic inspections after start-up
CORRECTIVEACTIONS
Tighten them
Clean them
Replace the blower
Clean or replace them
Clean them
Replace them
Clean them
Tighten them
Replace them
Replace it
235
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.4.1 Cleaning Instructions
Notes:
(1)
It is recommended to replace the blowers after each 40.000 hours of operation.
(2)
Check the capacitors every six months. It is recommended to replace them after five years of operation.
(3)
If the inverter is stored for long periods, we recommend to power it up once a year during 1 hour. For 220-230 V and 380-480 V models apply supply voltage of approximately 220 Vac, three-phase or single-phase input, 50 or
60 Hz, without connecting motor at output. After this energization, wait 24 hours before installing it. For 500-600 V, 500-690 V and 660-690 V models use the same procedure applying a voltage between 300 V and 330 Vac to the inverter input.
When necessary clean the CFW-09 following the instructions below:
Cooling system:
RemoveAC power from the inverter and wait 10 minutes;
Remove all dust from the ventilation openings by using a plastic bush or a soft cloth;
Remove dust accumulated on the heat sink fins and from the blower blades with compressed air.
Electronic Boards:
RemoveAC power form the inverter and wait 10 minutes;
Remove all dust from the printed circuit boards by using an anti-static soft brush or remove it with an ionized compressed air gun;
If necessary, remove the PCBs from the inverter;
Always use a ground strap.
236
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
7.5 SPARE PART LIST
KMR-CFW09
CFI1.01
EBA1.01
EBA1.02
EBA1.03
EBB.01
EBB.02
EBB.03
EBB.04
EBB.05
EBC1.01
EBC1.02
EBC1.03
SCI1.00
Fuse
HMI-CFW09-LCD
CC9 - 00
CFI1.00
DPS1.00
CRP1.00
KML-CFW09
P06 - 2.00
P07 - 2.00
P10 - 2.00
P13 - 2.00
P16 - 2.00
P24 - 2.00
P28 - 2.00
P45 - 2.00
HMI-CFW09-LED
Models 220-230 V
Name
Fan
Item N o
Specification
S41512334
S41512342
S41512350
S41510587
S417102023
S417102036
S41510226
S41510110
S41511761
S41511770
S41510200
S41511788
S41511796
S41512671
S41512741
S41513174
S41513175
S41513176
S41510846
5000.5275
5000.5292
5000.5267
5000.5364
5000.5305
0305.6716
S417102024
S41509651
S41509929
S41512431
S41510960
S417102035
S41512296
S41512300
S41512318
S41512326
Fan 0400.3681 Length 255 mm (60 x 60)
Fan 0400.3679 Length 165 mm (40 x 40)
Fan 0400.3682 Length 200 mm (80 x 80)
Fan 0400.3679 Length 230 mm (40 x 40)
Fan 2x04003680 (60 x 60)
Fuse 6.3X32 3.15 A 500 V
HMI-LCD
Control Board CC9.00
Interface Board with the HMI
Driver and Power Supply Board
Pulse Feedback Board
Kit KML
Power Board P06-2.00
Power Board P07-2.00
Power Board P10-2.00
Power Board P13-2.00
Power Board P16-2.00
Power Board P24-2.00
Power Board P28-2.00
Power Board P45-2.00
HMI-LED (Optional)
Kit KMR (Optional)
Interface Board with HMI (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
Types (Ampères)
10 13 16 24 28 45
Units per Inverter
1 1
1 1 1
2
1
1 1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 1 1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
237
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
238
Models 220-230 V
Name Item N o
Specification
Pre-charge 035502345 Cont.CWM32.10 220 V 50/60 Hz
Contactors
035502394 Cont.CWM50.00 220 V 50/60 Hz
Pre-charge Resistor
0301.1852
Vitrified wire Resistor 20 R 75 W
5000.5267
Fan 0400.3682 Length 200 mm
5000.5127
Fan 0400.3682 Length 285 mm
Fan
5000.5208
Fan 0400.3683 Lenght 230 mm (120 x 120)
5000.5364
Fan 0400.3679 Length. 230 mm (40 x 40)
5000.5216
Fan 0400.3683 Length 330 mm
0400.2547
Fan 220 V 50/60 Hz
Fuse
0305.6716
0305.5604
Fuse 6.3 x 32 3.15 A 500 V
Ret Fuse 0.5 A 600 V FNQ-R1
HMI-CFW09-LCD
S417102024 HMILCD
CC9.00
S41509651 Control Board CC9.00
LVS1.01
S41510927 Board LVS1.01
CFI1.00
S41509929 Interface Board with the HMI
DPS1.00
S41512431 Power Supplies and Firing Board
KML-CFW09
S417102035 Kit KML
DPS1.01
S41512440 Driver and Power Supply Board
*P54 - 2.00
S41510552 Power Board P54-2.00
P54 - 2.01
S41511443 Power Board P54-2.01
*P70 - 2.00
S41511354 Power Board P70-2.00
P70 - 2.01
S41511451 Power Board P70-2.01
*P86 - 2.00
S41510501 Power Board P86-2.00
P86 - 2.01
S41511460 Power Board P86-2.01
*P105 - 2.00
S41511362 Power Board P105-2.00
P105 - 2.01
S41511478 Power Board P105-2.01
*P130 - 2.00
S41510439 Power Board P130-2.00
P130 - 2.01
S41511486 Power Board P130-2.01
HMI-CFW09-LED
S417102023 HMI LED (Optional)
KMR-CFW09
S417102036 Kit KMR (Optional)
CFI1.01
S41510226 Interface Board with HMI (Optional)
EBA1.01
S41510110 Function Expansion Board (Optional)
EBA1.02
S41511761 Function Expansion Board (Optional)
EBA1.03
S41511770 Function Expansion Board (Optional)
EBB.01
S41510200 Function Expansion Board (Optional)
EBB.02
S41511788 Function Expansion Board (Optional)
EBB.03
S41511796 Function Expansion Board (Optional)
EBB.04
S41512671 Function Expansion Board (Optional)
EBB.05
S41512741 Function Expansion Board (Optional)
EBC1.01
S41513174 Function Expansion Board (Optional)
EBC1.02
S41513175 Function Expansion Board (Optional)
EBC1.03
S41513176 Function Expansion Board (Optional)
SCI1.00
S41510846 RS-232 module for PC (Optional)
Current Transformer 0307.2495
Current transformer 200 A/100 mA
* Only the types specified with braking (DB)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
Types (Ampères)
54 70 86 105 130
Units per Inverter
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Models 380-480 V
Fan
Name
KMR-CFW09
CFI1.01
EBA1.01
EBA1.02
EBA1.03
EBB.01
EBB.02
EBB.03
EBB.04
EBB.05
EBC1.01
EBC1.02
EBC1.03
SCI1.00
Fuse
CC9.00
HMI-CFW09-LCD
CFI1.00
DPS1.00
CRP1.01
KML-CFW09
P03 - 4.00
P04 - 4.00
P05 - 4.00
P09 - 4.00
P13 - 4.00
P16 - 4.00
P24 - 4.00
P30 - 4.00
HMI-CFW09-LED
Item N o
Specification
S41512393
S41512407
S41512415
S41512423
S41509759
S417102023
S417102036
S41510226
S41510110
S41511761
S41511770
S41510200
S41511788
S41511796
S41512671
S41512741
S41513174
S41513175
S41513176
S41510846
5000.5275
5000.5305
5000.5292
5000.5283
5000.5259
5000.5364
0305.6716
S41509651
S417102024
S41509929
S41512431
S41510820
S417102035
S41512369
S41512377
S41512385
Fan 0400.3284 Length 190 mm (60 x 60)
Fan 2 x 0400.2423 150/110 mm (60 x 60)
Fan 0400.3679 Length 165 mm (40 x 40)
Fan 2 x 0400.3681 (135/175) mm (60 x 60)
Fan 0400.3682 Length 140 mm (80 x 80)
Fan 0400.3679 Length 230 mm (40 x 40)
Fuse 6.3 x 32 3.15 A 500 V
Control Board CC9.00
HMILCD
Interface Board with HMI
Driver and Power Supply Board
Pulse Feedback Board
Kit KML
Power Board P03-4.00
Power Board P04-4.00
Power Board P05-4.00
Power Board P09-4.00
Power Board P13-4.00
Power Board P16-4.00
Power Board P24-4.00
Power Board P30-4.00
HMI LED (Optional)
Kit KMR (Optional)
Interface Board with HMI (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3.6 4
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Type (Ampères)
5.5 9 13 16 24 30
Units per Inverter
1 1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
2
1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
239
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Models 380-480 V
Name Item N o
Specification
Pre-charge Contactor
Pre-charge
Transformer
Pre-charge Resistor
Fan
Fuse
S41513108
S41513109
S41513110
S41513111
S41513112
S41513113
S417102023
S417102036
S41510226
S41510110
S41511761
S41511770
S41510200
S41511788
S41511796
S41512671
S41512741
S41512431
S41512440
S41510269
S41509996
S41510285
S417102035
S41511753
S41511370
S41509805
S41511389
S41513141
S41513142
S41513118
S41513140
035502394
0307.0034
0307.0042
0301.1852
5000.5267
5000.5208
5000.5216
5000.5364
0400.2547
0305.5604
0305.5663
0305.6716
S417102024
S41509651
S41509929
P70-4A.01
*P86-4A.00
P86-4A.01
*P105-4A.00
P105-4A.01
*P142-4A.00
P142-4A.01
HMI-CFW09-LED
KMR-CFW09
CFI1.01
EBA1.01
EBA1.02
EBA1.03
EBB.01
EBB.02
EBB.03
EBB.04
EBB.05
HMI-CFW09-LCD
CC9.00
CFI1.00
DPS1.00
DPS1.01
LVS1.00
CB1.00
CB3.00
KML-CFW09
*P38-4.00
P38-4.01
*P45-4.00
P45-4.01
*P60-4A.00
P60-4A.01
*P70-4A.00
Contactor CWM50.10 220 V 50/60 Hz
Transformer 100 VA
Transformer 300 VA
Vitrified wire Resistor 20 R 75 W
Fan 0400.3682 Length.200 mm (80 x 80)
Fan 0400.3683 Length 230 mm (120 x 120)
Fan 0400.3683 Length 330 mm (40 x 40)
Fan 0400.3679 Length230 mm (40 x 40)
Fan 220 V 50/60 Hz
Ret. Fuse 0.5 A 600 V FNQ-R1
Ret. Fuse 1.6 A 600 V
Fuse 6.3 x 32 3.15 A 500 V
HMILCD
Control Board CC9.00
HMI Interface Board
Driver and Power Supply Board
Driver and Power Supply Board
Voltage Selection Board
Board CB1.00
Board CB3.00
Kit KML
Power Board P38-4.00
Power Board P38-4.01
Power Board P45-4.00
Power Board P45-4.01
Power Board P60-4A.00
Power Board P60-4A.01
Power Board P70-4A.00
Power Board P70-4A.01
Power Board P86-4A.00
Power Board P86-4A.01
Power Board P105-4A.00
Power Board P105-4A.01
Power Board P142-4A.00
Power Board P142-4A.01
HMI LED (Optional)
Kit KMR (Optional)
Interface Board with HMI (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
240
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Type (Ampères)
38 45 60 70 86 105 142
Units per inverter
1 1 1
1 1
1
1 1 1
3 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 1 1
1 1
2 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
2
1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1
2
2 2 2
1 1 1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1 1
1 1
1
1
Name Item N o
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Specification
EBC1.01
EBC1.02
EBC1.03
CB7D.00
CB7E.00
CB4D.00
CB4E.00
SCI1.00
Current Trasformer
S41513174
S41513175
S41513176
S41513136
S41513134
S41513058
S41513107
S41510846
0307.2495
*Only for the types specified with braking (DB)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Board CB7D.00
Board CB7E.00
Board CB4D.00
Board CB4E.00
RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)
Current transformer 200 A/100 mA
1
1
1
Type (Ampères)
38 45 60 70 86 105 142
Units per inverter
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 1 1 1
2
1 1
2 2
Models 380-480 V
Name Item Nº
IGBT Module
Inverter Arm
Thyristor-DiodeModule
Pre-charge
Transformer
Pre-charge Resistor
Rectifier Bridge
Electrolytic Capacitor
Fan
Fuse
HMI-CFW09-LCD
KML-CFW09
CC9.00
DPS2.00
DPS2.01
CRG2.00
CRG3X.01
CRG3X.00
CIP2.00
CIP2.01
6431.3207
0305.5663
0305.6112
S417102024
S417102035
S41509651
S41510897
S41511575
S41512615
S41512618
S41512617
S41513217
S41513218
0303.7118
0298.0001
0303.9315
417102497
417102498
417102499
417102496
0298.0016
0303.9986
0303.9994
0298.0003
0307.0204
0307.0212
0301.9250
0303.9544
0302.4873
Specification
IGBT Module 200 A 1200 V
IGBT Module 300 A 1200 V - (EUPEC)
IGBT Module 300 A 1200 V
Inverter Arm 361 A - EP
Inverter Arm 450 A - EP
Inverter Arm 600 A - EP
InverterArm 600 A
Thyristor-Diode Module TD330N16
Thyristor-Diode Module TD425N16
Thyristor-Diode Module TD500N16
Thyristor-Diode Module SKKH 250/16
Transformer of Fan and SCR Firing Pulse 250 VA
Transformer of Fan and SCR Firing Pulse 650 VA
Vitrified Wire Resistor 35 R 75 W
Three-Phase Rectifier Bridge 35 A 1400 V
Electrolytic Capacitor 4700 uF/400 V
Centrifugal Fan 230 V 50/60 Hz
Ret. Fuse 1.6 A 600 V
Ret. Fuse 2.5 A 600 V
HMI LCD
Kit KML
Control Board CC9.00
Driver and Power Supply Board DPS2.00
Driver and Power Supply Board DPS2.01
Gate Resistor Board CRG2X.00
Gate Resistor Board CRG3X.01
Gate Resistor Board CRG3X.00
CIP2A.00 Board
CIP2A.01 Board
Type (Ampères)
180 211 240 312 361 450 515 600
Units per inverter
6
6
6
3
6
3
9 12 12
3
6
3
6
3
9
3
12
3
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3 3
3 3
1 1
6 6
1 1
6
1
1
8
1
1
8
1
1
10
1
1
10
1
1
10
1
8 12 12 18 18 24 30 30
1 1
2 2
3
1
1
2
3 3 3 3 3
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1 1 1
3 3 3 3 3
3
3 3
1
1
241
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Name
Item Nº
CIP2.02
CIP2.03
CIP2.04
CIP2.52
CIP2.53
CIP2.54
SKHI23MEC8
SKHI23MEC10
HMI-CFW09-LED
KMR-CFW09
CFI1.01
EBA1.01
EBA1.02
EBA1.03
EBB.01
EBB.02
EBB.03
EBB.04
EBB.05
EBC1.01
EBC1.02
EBC1.03
SCI1.00
Current Transducers
S41513219
S41513220
S41513221
S41513228
S41513229
S41513230
S41511532
S41511540
S417102023
S417102036
S41510226
S41510110
S41511761
S41511770
S41510200
S41511788
S41511796
S41512671
S41512741
S41513174
S41513175
S41513176
S41510846
0307.2509
0307.2550
0307.2070
Specification
CIP2A.02 Board
CIP2A.03 Board
CIP2A.04 Board
CIP2A.52 Board
CIP2A.53 Board
CIP2A.54 Board
Board SKHI23/12 for MEC8
Board SKHI23/12 for MEC10
HMI LED (Optional)
Kit KMR (Optional)
Interface Board with HMI (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)
Current Transformer 500 A/250 mA
Current Transformer 5000 A/1 A LT SI
Current Transformer 1000 A/200 mA LT 100SI
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Type (Ampères)
180 211 240 312 361 450 515 600
Units per inverter
1
1
1
1
1
1
3 3 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1 1
2 2
1
2
1 1 1 1 1
2 2
2 2 2
Models 500-600 V
Name
Fan
CC9.00
HMI-CFW09-LCD
CIF1.00
CRP2.00
P02-6.00
P04-6.00
P07-6.00
P10-6.00
P12-6.00
P14-6.00
Item N o
Specification
5000.5291
5000.5435
S41509651
S417102024
S41509929
S41512862
S41512855
S41512856
S41512857
S41512858
S41512859
S41512860
Fan 0400.3217 Comp. 145 mm (40 x 40)
Fan 2 x 400.3284 290/200 mm (60 x 60)
Control Board CC9.00
HMILCD
Interface Board with HMI
Pulse Feedback Board
Power Board P02-6.00
Power Board P04-6.00
Power Board P04-6.00
Power Board P10-6.00
Power Board P12-6.00
Power Board P14-6.00
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
Types (Ampères)
2.9 4.2
7 10 12 14
Units per Inverter
1 1
1
1
1
1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
242
Name
HMI-CFW09-LED
KMR-CFW09
CIF1.01
EBA1.01
EBA1.02
EBA1.03
EBB.01
EBB.02
EBB.03
EBB.04
EBB.05
EBC1.01
EBC1.02
EBC1.03
SCI1.00
Item N o
Specification
S417102023
S417102036
S41510226
S41510110
S41511761
S41511770
S41510200
S41511788
S41511796
S41512671
S41512741
S41513174
S41513175
S41513176
S41510846
HMI LED (Optional)
Kit KMR (Optional)
Interface Board with HMI (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Types (Ampères)
2.9 4.2
7 10 12 14
Units per Inverter
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Models 500-600 V
Name
Fan
Fuse
CC9.00
HMI-CFW09-LCD
CIF1.00
KML-CFW09
DPS4.00
P22-6.01
P22-6.00
P27-6.01
*P27-6.00
P32-6.01
*P32-6.00
HMI-CFW09-LED
KMR-CFW09
CIF1.01
EBA1.01
EBA1.02
EBA1.03
EBB.01
EBB.02
EBB.03
Item N o
Specification
5000.5267
0305.6716
S41509651
S417102024
S41509929
S417102035
S41512864
S41512867
S41512866
S41512869
S41512868
S41512872
S41512871
S417102023
S417102036
S41510226
S41510110
S41511761
S41511770
S41510200
S41511788
S41511796
Fan 0400.2482 Comp. 150mm (80 x 80)
Fuse 6.3 x 32 3.15 A 500 V
Control Board CC9.00
HMILCD
Interface Board with HMI
Kit KML
Driver and Power Supply Board
Power Board P22-6.01
Power Board P22-6.00
Power Board P27-6.01
Power Board P27-6.00
Power Board P32-6.01
Power Board P32-6.00
HMI LED (Optional)
Kit KMR (Optional)
Interface Board with HMI (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
Types (Ampères)
22 27 32
Units per Inverter
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
243
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Models 500-600 V
Name Item N o
Specification
EBB.04
EBB.05
EBC1.01
EBC1.02
EBC1.03
SCI1.00
S41512671
S41512741
S41513174
S41513175
S41513176
S41510846
* Only for types specified with braking (DB).
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)
Models 500-600 V
Name
Pre-charge Contactor
Pre-charge Transformer
Pre-charge Resistor
Fan
Fuse
HMI-CFW09-LCD
CC9
CFI1.00
DPS5.00
LVS2.00
CB5D.00
CB5E.00
CB5E.01
KML-CFW09
*P44-6.00
P44-6.01
*P53-6.00
P53-6.01
*P63-6.00
P63-6.01
*P79-6.00
P79-6.01
HMI-CFW09-LED
KMR-CFW09
CFI1.01
EBA1.01
EBA1.02
EBA1.03
Item N o Specification
S41512973
S41512974
S41512975
S41512976
S41512977
S41512978
S417102023
S417102036
S41510226
S41510110
S41511761
S41511770
035506138
0299.0160
0301.1852
0400.2547
0305.6166
S417102024
S41509651
S41509929
S41512966
S41512990
S41512986
S41413063
S41413081
S417102035
S41512968
S41512969
Contactor CWM50.00 220 V 50/60 Hz
Preload Transformer
Vetrified Wire Resistor 20 R 75 W
Fan 220 V 50/60 Hz
Fuse 14 x 51 mm 2 A 690 V
HMILCD
Control Board CC9
HMI Interface Board
Driver and Power Supply Board DPS5.00
Voltage Selection Board LVS2.00
Board CB5D.00
CB5E.00 Board
CB5E.01 Board
Kit KML
Power Board P44-6.00
Power Board P44-6.01
Power Board P53-6.00
Power Board P53-6.01
Power Board P63-6.00
Power Board P63-6.01
Power Board P79-6.00
Power Board P79-6.01
HMI LED (Optional)
Kit KMR (Optional)
HMI Interface Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
1
1
1
1
1
1
Types (Ampères)
22 27 32
Units per Inverter
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Types (Ampères)
44 53 63 79
Units per Inverter
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
2 2
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1 1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
244
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Name
Item N o Specification
EBB.04
EBB.05
EBC1.01
EBC1.02
EBC1.03
SCI1.00
DC Link Inductor
DC Link Inductor
DC Link Inductor
DC Link Inductor
S41512671
S41512741
S41513174
S41513175
S41513176
S41510846
0299.0156
0299.0157
0299.0158
0299.0159
* Only for types specified with braking (DB).
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)
DC Link Inductor 749 H
DC Link Inductor 562 H
DC Link Inductor 481 H
DC Link Inductor 321 H
Models 500-690 V
Name
Item N o
Specification
IGBT Module
Inverter Arm
Thyristor-Diode
Module
Rectifier Bridge
Pre-charge Resistor
Fan
Electrolytic Capacitor
Fuse
HMI-CFW09-LCD
KML-CFW09
CC9
DPS3
CRG7
CRG6
FCB1.00
FCB1.01
FCB2
CIP3
0298.0008
0298.0009
S417104460
S417104461
S417104462
S417104463
S417104464
0303.9978
0303.9986
0303.9994
0298.0026
0301.9250
64313207
0302.4873
0302.4801
0305.6166
0305.6171
S417102024
S417102035
S41509651
S41512834
S41512951
S41512798
S41512821
S41512999
S41513011
S41512803
IGBT Module 200 A 1700 V
IGBT Module 300 A 1700 V
Inverter Arm 247 A – EP
Inverter Arm 315 A – EP
Inverter Arm 343 A – EP
Inverter Arm 418 A – EP
Inverter Arm 472 A – EP
Thyristor-Diode Module TD250N16
Thyristor-Diode Module TD425N16
Thyristor-Diode Module TD500N16
Rectifier Bridge 36MT160
Vitrified Wire Resistor 35 R 75 W
Centrifugal Fan 230 V 50/60 Hz
Electrolytic Capacitor 4700 uF/400 V
Electrolytic Capacitor 4700 uF/400 V
Fuse 2 A 690 V
Fuse 4 A 690 V
HMILCD
Kit KML
Control Board CC9
Driver and Power Supply Board DPS3.00
Gate Resistor Board CRG7.00
Gate Resistor Board CRG6.00
Board FCB1.00
Board FCB1.01
Board FCB2.00
Board CIP3.00
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
Types (Ampères)
44 53 63 79
Units per Inverter
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Types (Ampères)
107 147 211 247 315 343 418 472
Units per inverter
6
3 6 6
3
9 9 12 12
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3 3
3
1
1
1
1
3
3
2
1
1
1
1
3
3 3
3
1 1
6 6
1
6
1
8
1
8
1 1
8 8
1 1 1 3 3 3 3
9 12 12 18 18 18
18 27
3
1
10
3
2 2 2
1
1
2
1
1
2 2 2
1 1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1 1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 3
3 3
3 3
1 1
1 1
1
1 1 1 1 1 1
245
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
RCS3
CIS1
Name
GDB1.00
HMI-CFW09-LED
KMR-CFW09
CFI1.01
EBA1.01
EBA1.02
EBA1.03
EBB.01
EBB.02
EBB.03
EBB.04
EBB.05
EBC1.01
EBC1.02
EBC1.03
SCI1.00
Item N o
Specification
S41512846
S41512836
S41512883
S41512884
S41512885
S41512886
S41512887
S41512888
S41512889
S41512963
S417102023
S417102036
S41510226
S41510110
S41511761
S41511770
S41510200
S41511788
S41511796
S41512671
S41512741
S41513174
S41513175
S41513176
S41510846
Rectifier Snubber Board RCS3.00
Signal Interface Board CIS1.00
Signal Interface Board CIS1.01
Signal Interface Board CIS1.02
Signal Interface Board CIS1.03
Signal Interface Board CIS1.04
Signal Interface Board CIS1.05
Signal Interface Board CIS1.06
Signal Interface Board CIS1.07
Gate Driver Board GDB1.00
HMI LED (Optional)
Kit KMR (Optional)
Interface board with HMI (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)
Models 660-690 V
Name
Item N o
Specification
IGBT Module
Inverter Arm
Thyristor-Diode
Module
Rectifier Bridge
Pre-charge Resistor
0298.0008
0298.0009
S417104460
S417104461
S417104462
S417104463
S417104464
0303.9978
0303.9986
0303.9994
0298.0026
0301.9250
IGBT Module 200 A 1700 V
IGBT Module 300 A 1700 V
Inverter Arm 225 A – EP
Inverter Arm 259 A – EP
Inverter Arm 305 A – EP
Inverter Arm 340 A – EP
Inverter Arm 428 A – EP
Thyristor-Diode Module TD250N16
Thyristor-Diode Module TD425N16
Thyristor-Diode Module TD500N16
Rectifier Bridge 36MT160
Vitrified Wire Resistor 35 R 75 W
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
Types (Ampères)
107 147 211 247 315 343 418 472
Units per inverter
3 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
3 3
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
Types (Ampères)
100 127 179 225 259 305 340 428
Units per Inverter
6
3 6 6
3
9 9 12 12
3
3
3
3
3 3 3 3 3 3
1
6
1
6
1
6
1
8
1
8
1
8
3
3
1 1
8 10
246
Name
Item N o
Specification
GDB1.00
HMI-CFW09-LED
KMR-CFW09
CFI1.01
EBA1.01
EBA1.02
EBA1.03
EBB.01
EBB.02
EBB.03
EBB.04
EBB.05
EBC1.01
EBC1.02
EBC1.03
SCI1.00
Fan
Electrolytic Capacitor
Fuse
HMI-CFW09-LCD
KML-CFW09
CC9
DPS3
CRG7
CRG6
FCB1
FCB2
CIP3
RCS3
CIS1
S41512890
S41512891
S41512892
S41512893
S41512894
S41512895
S41512896
S41512897
S41512963
S417102023
S417102036
S41510226
S41510110
S41511761
S41511770
S41510200
6431.3207
0302.4873
0302.4801
0305.6166
0302.6171
S417102024
S417102035
S41509651
S41512834
S41512951
S41512798
S41512821
S41512999
S41513011
S41512803
S41512846
S41511788
S41511796
S41512671
S41512741
S41513174
S41513175
S41513176
S41510846
Centrifugal Fan 230 V 50/60 Hz
Electrolytic Capacitor 4700 uF/400 V
Electrolytic Capacitor 4700 uF/400 V
Fuse 2 A 690 V
Fuse 4 A 690 V
HMILCD
Kit KML
Control Board CC9
Driver and Power Supply Board DPS3.00
Gate Resistor Board CRG7.00
Gate Resistor Board CRG6.00
Board FCB1.00
Board FCB1.01
Board FCB2.00
Board CIP3.00
Rectifier Snubber Board RCS3.00
Signal Interface Board CIS1.08
Signal Interface Board CIS1.09
Signal Interface Board CIS1.10
Signal Interface Board CIS1.11
Signal Interface Board CIS1.12
Signal Interface Board CIS1.13
Signal Interface Board CIS1.14
Signal Interface Board CIS1.15
Gate Driver Board GDB1.00
HMI LED (Optional)
Kit KMR (Optional)
Interface board with HMI (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
Function Expansion Board (Optional)
RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
3 3
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
Types (Ampères)
100 127 179 225 259 305 340 428
Units per Inverter
1 1 1 3 3 3
9 12 12 18 18 18
3 3
18 27
2 2 2
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
2
1
1
3
2 2 2
1 1 1
1 1
1 1
1 1 1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3 3
3 3
3 3
3
3
3
1 1
1 1
1
1 1 1 1 1 1
3 3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
247
8.1 I/O EXPANSION
BOARDS
8.1.1 EBA
(I/O Expansion Board A)
CHAPTER 8
CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
This chapter describes the optional devices that are available for the CFW-09 and the accessories that may be necessary in specific applications. Options include the Expanded I/O Boards (EBA/EBB), LED-only Keypad, Remote
Keypad and Cables, Blank Cover, RS-232 PC Communication kit, The accessories comprise: Encoder, Line Reactor, DC Bus Choke, Load Reactor and RFI filter, boards for Fieldbus communication, kit for extractable assembling,
NEMA 4X/IP56 line, HD and RB and PLC board line.
The I/O expansion boards expand the function of the CC9 control board. There are four different I/O expansion boards available and their selection depends on the application and extended functions that are required. The four boards cannot be used simultaneously. The difference between EBAand EBB option boards is in the analog inputs/outputs. The EBC1 board is used for the encoder connection. The EBE board is for RS-485 and motor PTC.Adetailed description of each board is provided below.
The EBA board can be supplied in different configurations, combining some specific features. The available configurations are show on table 8.1.
Included Features
Differential input for incremental encoder with isolated internal 12 V power supply;
Buffered encoder output signals: isolated input signal repeater, differential output, available to external 5 V to 15 V power supply;
Analog differential input (AI4): 14 bits (0.006 % of the full scale range), bipolar:
-10 V to +10 V, (0 to 20) mA/(4 to 20) mA programmable;
2 Analog outputs (AO3/AO4): 14 bits (0.006 % of the range [±10 V]), bipolar:
-10 V to + 10 V, programmable;
Isolated RS-485 serial port;
Digital Input (DI7): isolated, programmable, 24 V;
Digital Input (DI8) for special motor thermistor (PTC) function: actuation
3.9 k, release 1.6 k;
2 isolated Open Collector transistor outputs (DO1/DO2): 24 V, 50 mA, programmable.
Table 8.1 - EBA board versions and included features
A1
EBA Board models - Code
EBA.01
Available
EBA.02
A2
Not available
EBA.03
A3
Not available
Available
Available
Not available
Not available
Not available
Available
Available
Not available
Available
Available Available
Not available
Available Available Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
NOTE!
The use of the RS-485 serial interface does not allow the use of the standard
RS-232 input - they can not be used simultaneously.
248
PTC
RL 500
RES
RL 500
RES
rpm
A
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
1
2
Terminal XC4
NC
DI8
3 DGND (DI8)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
4
5
20
DGND
DO1
COMMOM
DO2
24 Vdc
DI7
SREF
A-LINE
B-LINE
AI4 +
AI4 -
AGND
AO3
AGND
AO4
+ V
COM 1
Factory Default Function
Not connected
Motor Thermistor Input 1 - PTC1
(P270 = 16 refer to figure 6.33). As DI normal refer to P270 - figure 6.34.
Motor Thermistor Input 2 - PTC2
(P270 = 16 refer to figure 6.33). As DI normal P270 - figure 6.34.
0 V reference of the 24 Vdc source
Reference to DGND (DI8) through a
249 resistor.
Specifications
Actuation 3k9 Release: 1k6
Min. resistance: 100
Transistor output 1: Not Used
Common point for Digital Input DI7 and Digital Outputs DO1 and DO2
Grounded via a 249 resistor
Isolated, open collector, 24 Vdc, 50 mA max., allowed load (RL) 500
Transistor Output 2: Not Used
Power Supply for the digital inputs/ outputs
Isolated Digital Input: Not used
Isolated, open collector, 24 Vdc, 50 mA max., allowed load (RL) 500
24 Vdc ± 8 %. Isolated,
Capacity: 90 mA
Min. high level: 18 Vdc
Max. low level: 3 Vdc
Max. Voltage: 30 Vdc
Input Current.: 11 mA @ 24 Vdc
Reference for RS-485
RS-485 A-LINE (-)
RS-485 B-LINE (+)
Isolated RS-485 serial Port
Analog input 4: Frequency Reference
Program P221 = 4 or P222 = 4
0 V Reference for Analog Output
(internally grounded)
Analog output 3: Speed
0 V Reference for Analog Output
(internally grounded)
Analog Output 4: Motor Current
Avaliable to be connected to an external power supply to energise the encoder repeater output (XC8)
0 V reference of the external power supply
Differential analog input programmable on P246: -10 V to +10 V or (0 to 20) mA / (4 to 20) mA lin.: 14 bits (0.006 % of full scale range)
Impedance: 40 k [-10 V to +10 V]
500 [(0 to 20) mA / (4 to 20) mA]
Analog outputs signals:
-10 V to +10 V
Scales: refer to P255 and P257.
lin.: 14 bits (0.006 % of ± 10 V range)
Allowed load (RL) 2 k
External power supply: 5 V to 15 V
Consumption: 100 mA @ 5 V
Outputs not included.
Figure 8.1 – XC4 terminal block description (EBA board complete)
ENCODER CONNECTION: Refer to item 8.2.
INSTALLATION
The EBA board is installed on the CC9 control board, secured with spacers and connected via terminal blocks XC11 (24 V) and XC3.
NOTE!
For the CFW-09 Size 1 Models (6 A, 7 A, 10 A and 13A/220-230 V and 3.6 A,
4 A, 5.5 A and 9 A/380-480 V) the plastic cover must be removed to install the
EBA board.
Mounting Instructions:
1. Set the board configuration via S2 and S3 dip switches (Refer to table 8.2);
2. Carefully insert terminal block XC3 (EBA) into the female connector XC3 of the CC9 control board. Check that all pins fit in the XC3 connector;
249
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
3. Press on the EBA board (near XC3) and on the left top edge until complete insertion of the connector and plastic spacer;
4. Secure the board to the metallic spacers with the screws provided;
5. Plug XC11 connector of the EBA board to the XC11 connector of the
(CC9) control board.
EBA BOARD
CUTOUT
CUTOUT
Figure 8.2 - EBA board layout
EBA BOARD
CC9 Board
Figure 8.3 - EBA board installation procedure
M3 x 8 Screw
1Nm Torque
250
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Switch Function
S2.1
AI4 – Speed reference
S3.1
S3.2
RS-485 B-LINE (+)
RS-485 A-LINE (-)
OFF
(Standard)
(0 to 10) V
Without termination
ON
(0 to 20) mA or (4 to 20) mA
With termination (120 )
Obs.:
Both S3.1 and S3.2 switches must be set for the same option (ON or OFF).
Note:
For Size 1 models the CFI1 board (interface between the CC9 control board and the
HMI) must be removed to clear access to these switches.
Table 8.2 a) - EBA board selector switches configurations
Trimpot
RA1
RA2
RA3
RA4
Function
AO3 – Offset
AO3 – Gain
AO4 – Offset
AO4 – Gain
Factory default function
Motor Speed
Motor Current
Table 8.2 b) - Trimpots configurations EBA board
NOTE!
The external signal and control wiring must be connected to XC4 (EBA), following the same recommendations as for the wiring of the control board
CC9 (refer to item 3.2.6).
8.1.2 EBB
(Expansion I/O Board B)
The EBB board can be supplied in different configurations, combining the features included. The available configurations are shown in table 8.3.
Included Features
Differential input for incremental encoder with isolated internal 12 V power supply;
Buffered encoder output signals: isolated input signal repeater, differential output, must use to external 5 V to
15 V power supply;
Analog input (AI3): 10 bits, isolated, unipolar, (0 to 10) V,
(0 to 20) mA/(4 to 20) mA, programmable;
2 Analog outputs (AO1’/AO2’): 11 bits (0.05 % of full scale), unipolar, isolated (0 to 20) mA/(4 to 20) mA, programmable;
Isolated RS-485 serial port;
Digital Input (DI7): isolated, programmable, 24 V;
Digital Input (DI8) for special motor thermistor function
(PTC): actuation 3.9 k, release 1.6 k;
2 isolated Open Collector transistor outputs (DO1/DO2):
24 V, 50 mA, programmable.
* Board with 5 V power supply for the encoder.
EBB.01
B1
EBA Board models - code
EBB.02
B2
Available Available
EBB.03
B3
EBB.04
B4*
Not available Available
Available
Not available
Not available Available
EBB.05
B5
Not available
Not available
Available
Not available
Available Available
Not available
Available
Available
Not available
Not available
Available Available Available
Not available Available
Available Available Available Available
Available Available
Available Available
Available Available
Available Available
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
Table 8.3 – EBB board versions and included features
NOTE!
The use of the RS-485 serial interface does not allow the use of the standard
RS-232 input - they can not be used simultaneously.
The functions analogic outputs AO1’ and AO2’ are identical to the AO1/AO2 outputs of the control board CC9.
251
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
PTC
RL 500
RES
RL 500
RES rpm
A
9
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
1
2
Terminal XC5
NC
DI8
3 DGND (DI8)
4
5
DGND
DO1
Factory Default Function
Not Connected
Motor Thermistor Input 1 - PTC1
(P270 = 16 refer to figure 6.33). As DI normal refer to P270 figure 6.34.
Motor Thermistor Input 2 - PTC2
(P270 = 16 refer to figure 6.33). As DI normal refer to P270 figure 6.34.
0 V reference of the 24 Vdc source
Transistor Output 1: Not used
6
7
COMMOM
DO2
Commom point for Digital Input DI7 and Digital Outputs DO1 and DO2
Transistor Output 2: Not Used
8 24 Vdc
Power Supply for the digital inputs/ outputs
Isolated digital input: Not Used
18
19
20
DI7
SREF
A-LINE
B-LINE
AI3 +
Specifications
Actuation: 3.9 k Release:1.6 k
Min: resistance: 100
Referenced to DGND* through a 249 resistor
Grounded via a 249 resistor
Isolated, open collector, 24 Vdc, 50 mA
Max. allowed load (RL) 500
Isolated, open collector, 24 Vdc, 50 mA
Max. allowed load (RL) 500
24 Vdc ± 8 %. Isolated,
Capacity: 90 mA
Min. high level: 18 Vdc
Max. low level: 3 Vdc
Max. Voltage: 30 Vdc
Input Current.: 11 mA @ 24 Vdc
Isolated RS-485 serial port Reference for RS-485
RS-485 A-LINE (-)
RS-485 B-LINE (+)
Analog Input 3: Frequency Reference
Program P221 = 3 or P222 = 3
Isolated analog input programmable on
P243: (0 to 10) V or (0 to 20) mA/(4 to
20) mA lin.: 10 bits (0.1 % of full scale range) Impedance: 400 k (0 to 10) V
500 [(0 to 20) mA/(4 to 20) mA] AI3 -
AGND
AO1 I
AGND
I
I
0 V Reference for Analog Speed
Analog Output 1: Speed
0 V Reference for analog Output
Isolated analog Outputs signals:
(0 to 20) mA / (4 to 20) mA
Scales: refer to P251 and P253 lin.: 11 bits (0.5 % of full scale range)
Allowed load (RL) 600
Analog Output 2 : Motor Current
AO2 I
+ V
COM 1
Avaliable to be connected to an external power supply to energise the encoder repeater output (XC8)
0 V reference of the external power supply
External power supply: 5 V to 15 V, consumption: 100 mA @ 5 V
Outputs not included.
Figure 8.4 - XC5 terminal block description (complete EBB board)
ATTENTION!
The isolation of the analog input AI3 and the analog outputs AO1 high potentials.
I and AO2 I is designed only to interrupt the ground loops. Do not connect these inputs to
ENCODER CONNECTION: Refer to item 8.2.
INSTALLATION
The EBB board is installed on the CC9 control board, secured with spacers and connected via Terminal blocks XC11 (24 V) and XC3.
NOTE!
For the CFW-09 Size 1 Models (6 A, 7 A, 10 A and 13 A / 220-230 V and 3.6 A,
4 A, 5.5 A and 9 A / 380-480 V) the plastic cover must be removed to install the
EBB board.
252
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Mounting Instructions:
1. Set the board configuration via S4, S5, S6 and S7 dip switches (refer to table 8.4 a) );
2. Carefully insert terminal block XC3 (EBB) into the female connector
XC3 of the CC9 control board. Check that all pins fit in the XC3 connector;
3. Press on the EBB board (near XC3) and on the left top edge until complete insertion of the connector and plastic spacer;
4. Secure the board to the metallic spacers with the screws provided;
5. Plug XC11 connector of the EBB board to the XC11 connector of the
(CC9) control board.
EBB BOARD
CUTOUT
CUTOUT
Figure 8.5 - EBB board layout
EBB BOARD
CC9 BOARD
Figure 8.6 - EBB board installation procedure
M3 x 8 Screw
1Nm Torque
253
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.1.3 EBE
8.2
INCREMENTAL
ENCODER
8.2.1 EBA/EBB Boards
Switch
S4.1
S5.1 and S5.2
S6.1 and S6.2
S7.1 and S7.2
Function
AI3 – Speed reference
AO1 - Speed
AO2 – Motor Current
RS-485 B-Line (+)
RS-485 A-Line (-)
OFF
(0 to 10) V*
(0 to 20) mA**
Without termination*
ON
(0 to 20) mA or (4 to 20) mA
(4 to 20) mA*
With termination (120 )
*Factory default
Obs.:
Each group of switches must be set for the same option (ON or OFF for both).
Ex.: S6.1 and 6.2 = ON.
**Factory default
When the outputs are set to (0 to 20) mA, it may be necessary to readjust the full scale.
Note:
For Size 1 models the CFI1 board (interface between the CC9 control board and the HMI) must be removed to clear access to these switches.
Table 8.4 a) - EBB board selector switches configurations
Trimpot
RA5
RA6
Function
AO1 – Full scale adjustment
AO2 – Full scale adjustment
Factory default function
Motor Speed
Motor Current
Table 8.4 b) - Trimpots configurations EBB board
NOTE!
The external signal and control wiring must be connected to XC (EBB), following the same recommendations as for the wiring of the control board CC9 (refer to item 3.2.6).
Please download from www.weg.net the EBE Board Quick Guide.
For applications that require high-speed accuracy, the actual motor speed must be fed back via motor-mounted incremental encoder. The encoder is connected electrically to the inverter through the XC9 (DB9) connector of the
Function Expansion Board - EBA or EBB and XC9 or XC10 to EBC.
When the board EBA or EBB is used, the selected encoder should have the following characteristics:
Power supply voltage: 12 Vdc, less than 200 mA current draw;
2 quadrature channels (90º) + zero pulse with complementary outputs
(differential): signals A, A, B, B, Z and Z;
“Linedriver” or “Push-Pull” output circuit type (level 12 V);
Electronic circuit isolated from encoder frame;
Recommended number of pulses per revolution: 1024 ppr.
For mounting the encoder on the motor, follow the recommendations bellow:
Couple the encoder directly to the motor shaft (use a flexible coupling without torsional flexibility);
Both the shaft and the metallic frame of the encoder must be electrically isolated from the motor (min. Spacing: 3 mm (0.119 in));
Use high quality flexible couplings to prevent mechanical oscillation or backlash.
The electrical connections must be made with shielded cable, maintaining a minimum distance of about 25 cm (10 in) from other wires (power, control cables, etc.). If possible, install the encoder cable in a metallic conduit.
254
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
At start-up, program Parameter P202 – Type of Control = 4 (Vector with
Encoder) to operate the motor with incremental encoder speed feedback.
For more details about Vector Control operation refer to chapter 5.
The Expanded I/O Boards EBA and EBB are provided with externally powered, isolated encoder output signals.
Encoder Connector***
A
H
B
A
A
B
D
F
I
C
J
E
G
B
Z
Z
+VE
COM
NC red blue yellow green grey pink white brown cable shield
7
4
6
5
9
8
3
2
1
Connector XC9
B
Z
A
A
B
Z
+VE
COM
Descripition
Encoder Signals
12 V differential
(88C20)
Power Supply*
0 V Reference**
Ground
CFW-09 EBA or EBB Board
Encoder
Max. Recommended lenght: 100 m (300 ft) Connector XC9 (DB9 - Male)
* Power supply voltage 12 Vdc / 220 mA for encoder.
** Referenced to ground via 1 F in parallel with 1 k
*** Valid pin position with encoder HS35B models from Dynapar. For other encoder modules, check the correct connection to meet the required sequence.
Figure 8.7 – Encoder cable
NOTE!
The max. permitted encoder frequency is 100 kHz.
Sequence of the encoder signals:
B t
A t
Motor running clockwise.
5 1
Connector XC8 (DB9 Female)
9 6
*For on external power supply: 5 V to 15 V
Consumption: 100 mA @ 5 V, outputs not included.
Note:
Optionally, the external power supply can also be connected via:
XC4:19 and XC4:20 (EBA) or
XC5:19 and XC5:20 (EBB)
NOTE!
There is no internal power supply for XC8 at EBA or EBB board.
CFW-09 EBA or EBB Board
Connector XC8
3
2
8
7
4
6
5
1
9
A
A
B
B
Z
Z
+V*
COM 1*
Descrition
Encoder Signals
Line Driver differential
(88C30)
Average high level current: 50 mA
Power Supply*
0 V Refrence
Ground
Figure 8.8 – Encoder signals repeater output
255
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.2.2 EBC1 Board When the board EBC1 is used, the selected encoder should have the following characteristics:
Power Supply Voltage: 5 V to 15 V;
2 quadrature channels (90º) with complementary outputs (differential):
- Signals A, A, B and B;
- “Linedriver” or “Push-Pull” output circuit type (with identical level as the power supply voltage).
Electronic circuit isolated from the encoder frame;
Recommended number of pulse per revolution: 1024 ppr.
INSTALLATION OF THE EBC BOARD
The EBC board is installed directly on the control board CC9, fixed by means of spacers and connected through the XC3 connector.
NOTE!
For installation in the models of size 1, remove the lateral plastic cover of the product.
Mounting instructions:
1. Insert carefully the pins of the connector XC3 (EBC1) into the female connector XC3 of the control board CC9. Check if all pins of the connector
XC3 fit exactly;
2. Press on the board center (near to XC3) until the connector is inserted completely;
3. Fix the board to the 2 metallic spacers by means of the 2 bolts.
Figure 8.9 - EBC board layout
EBC1 BOARD
CC9 BOARD
SPACER
Figure 8.10 - EBC1 board installation procedures
M3 x 8 Screw
1Nm Torque
256
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
CONFIGURATIONS
Expansion
Board
EBC1.01
Power
Supply
External 5 V
EBC1.02
EBC1.03
External 8 to 15 V
Internal 5 V
Internal 12 V
Encoder
Voltage
5 V
8 to 15 V
5 V
12 V
Customer
Action
Commutate switch S8 to ON, refer to figure 8.9
None
None
None
Table 8.5 - EBC1 board configuration
NOTE!
The terminals XC10:22 and XC10:23 (refer to figure 8.9), should be used only for encoder supply, when encoder power supply is not coming from DB9 connection.
MOUNTING OF THE ENCODER
For mounting the encoder on the motor, follow the recommendations below:
Couple the encoder directly to the motor shaft (use a flexible coupling without torsional flexibility);
Both the shaft and the metallic frame of the encoder must be electrically isolated from the motor. (min. spacing: 3 mm (0.119 in));
Use high quality flexible couplings to prevent mechanical oscillation or backlash.
The electrical connection must be made with shielded cable, maintaining a minimum distance of about 254 mm (10 in) from other wiring (power, control cables, etc.). If possible, install the encoder cable in a metallic conduit.
At start-up, program Parameter P202 - type of control - = 4 (vector with encoder) to operate the motor with speed feedback through incremental encoder. For more details about Vector Control operation, refer to chapter 5.
Encoder Connector***
A
H
B
A
A
B
J
D
F
I
C
B
Z
Z
+VE
COM
E
G
NC red blue yellow green white brown cable shield
Connector
XC9
3
2
1
9
8
7
4
6
5
XC10
26
25
28
27
-
-
21, 22
23, 24
-
Signal
Z
Z
B
B
A
A
+VE
COM
Description
Encoder Signal
(5 to 15 V)
Power Supply*
0 V Reference**
Ground
CFW-09 EBC1 Board
Encoder
Max. Recommended lenght: 100 m (300 ft)
Connector XC9 (DB9 - Male)
* External Power Supply Voltage for encoder: 5 to 15 Vdc, consumption = 40 mA plus consumption of the encoder.
** 0 V reference of the Power Supply Voltage.
*** Valid pin position with encoder HS35B models from Dynapar. For other encoder models, check the correct connection to meet the required sequence.
Figure 8.11 – EBC1 encoder input
257
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.3 KEYPAD WITH
LEDs ONLY
NOTE!
The maximum permitted encoder frequency is 100 kHz.
Sequence of the encoder signals:
B t
A t
Motor running clockwise
The CFW-09 standard Keypad (HMI) is provided with LEDs and LCD display.
It can also be supplied with an LED Display only.
In this case the keypad model number is: HMI-CFW-09-LED. It operates in the same way as the standard keypad, but it does not show the text messages of the LCD and does not provide the copy function.
The dimensions and the electrical connections are the same as for the standard keypad. Refer to item 8.4.
8.4 REMOTE KEYPAD
AND CABLES
Figure 8.12 - Keypad with LED display only
The CFW-09 keypad (both the standard or the LED displayonly) can be installed directly on the inverter cover or remotely. If the keypad is installed remotely, the HMI-09 Frame can be used. The use of this frame improves the visual aspect of the remote keypad, as well as provides a local power supply to eliminate voltage drop problems with long cables. It is necessary to use the frame when the keypad cable is longer than 5 m (15 ft).
The table below shows the standard cable lengths and their part numbers:
Cable Length WEG Part N o
1 m (3 ft)
2 m (6 ft )
3 m (10 ft)
5 m (15 ft)
7.5 m *(22 ft)
10 m * (30 ft )
0307.6890
0307.6881
0307.6873
0307.6865
0307.6857
0307.6849
* These cables require the use of the remote
HMI-09 frame
Table 8.6 - CFW-09 keypad cables
The keypad cable must be installed separately from the power cables, following the same recommendations as for the CC9 control board (refer to item 3.2.6).
For assembling refer to details in figure 8.13 and 8.14.
258
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Figure 8.13 - Standard HMI, remote HMI frame kit and HMI CFW09 – LCD N4 for panel installation
To meet NEMA 250 and IEC 60529 the HMI can be supplied with two specific degrees of protection: a) Dimensions of the HMI – CFW09 – LED/LCD with NEMA 5-IP51 degree of protection.
Keypad Dimensions
65
(2.56)
23
(0.9)
Front View Back View
19
(0.75)
Screw M3x8 (2x)
Torque 0.5Nm
18
(0.71)
Cutout Dimensions for Panel
Door Installation
65
(2.56)
(1.43)
2 (0.08)
15
(0.59)
4.0 (2x)
Figure 8.14 a) - Keypad dimensions in mm (inch) and mounting procedures
259
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES b) Dimensions of the HMI – CFW09 – LED/LCD + remote HMI frame kit with NEMA5-IP51 degree of protection.
Keypad Dimensions
112
(4.41)
25
(0.984)
43
(1.69)
18
(0.708)
Front View Back View
Screw
M3x8 (2x)
Torque 0.5Nm
Cutout Dimensions for Panel
Door Installation
73
(2.874)
4 (5x)
37 (1.456)
42 (1.653)
84
(3.3) c) Dimensions of the HMI – CFW09 – LED/LCD-N4 with NEMA 4-IP56 degree of protection.
Keypad Dimensions
112
(4.41)
25
(0.984)
43
(1.69)
18
(0.708)
Front View Back View
Screw
M3x8 (2x)
Torque 0.5Nm
Cutout Dimensions for Panel
Door Installation
73
(2.874)
4 (5x)
37 (1.456)
42 (1.653)
84
(3.3)
Figure 8.14 b) and c) - Keypad dimensions in mm (inch) and mounting procedures
260
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Remote HMI connection for distances lower than 10 m (30 ft):
Inverter key pad (HMI)
Insert spacer to connect the cable to the inverter.
Max. recommended cable length: 10 m (30 ft)
Connector DB9 - Male Connector DB9 - Female
Figure 8.15 - Cable for remote keypad connection
10 m
CABLE CONNECTION 5 m
(15 ft)
Connector Pin/
Inverter Side
Connector Pin/
HMI Side
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
8 8
9 9
Note:
The frame can be used or not.
Signal
+5 V
Rx
Tx
GND
+15 V
SHIELD
Table 8.7 - Connections for remote keypad cable up to 5 m (15 ft)
CABLE CONNECTION > 5 m (> 15 ft)
Connector Pin/
Inverter Side
2
3
4
8
9
Connector Pin/
HMI Side
2
3
4
8
9
Signal
Rx
Tx
GND
+15 V
SHIELD
Note:
The frame must be used.
Table 8.8 - Connections for remote keypad cable from 7.5 m (22 ft) to 10 m (30 ft)
Remote HMI connection for distances higher than 10 m (30 ft):
The HMI can be connected to the inverter using a cable length up to 200 m
(600 ft). It is necessary to use an external power supply of 15 Vdc, according to figure 8.16.
- Screw
- Do not use nut and washer
GND +15 V
@ 300 mA
External power supply
Figure 8.16 - Cable for remote keypad connection > 10 m
261
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.5 BLANK COVERS
Connector Pin/
Inverter Side
2
3
-
-
9
CABLE CONNECTION
Connector Pin/
HMI Side
2
3
4
8 (Ext. power supply)
9 (Ext. power supply)
Table 8.9 - Pin connection (DB9) for cable > 10 m (32.80 ft ) and
200 m (656 ft)
Signal
Rx
Tx
GND
+15 V
Shield
As shown in figure 8.17, two types of blank covers are available to be used, in the inverter or in the frame, when the keypad is not in place.
a) CFW-09 Blank Cover
(to be mounted in the frame) b) CFW-09 Blank Cover with Power and Error LEDs
(to be mounted in the inverter)
Figure 8.17 a) and b) - CFW-09 blank covers
8.6 RS-232 PC
COMMUNICATION KIT
The CFW-09 can be controlled, programmed and monitored via an RS-232
Serial Interface. The communication protocol is based on question/response telegrams according to ISO 1745 and ISO 646 standards, withASCII characters exchanged between the inverter and a master (network controller, which can be a PLC, PC, etc.). The maximum transfer rate is 9600 bps. The RS-232 serial interface is not galvanically isolated from the 0 V reference of the inverter electronics, therefore the maximum recommended serial cable length is
10 m (30 ft).
To implement the serial communication, an RS-232 SERIAL INTERFACE module has to be added to the CFW-09. This module is installed in place of the Keypad, making the RS-232 connection (RJ11 connector) available. If the use of the HMI is also required, the RS-232 module also provides its connection.
262
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.7 LINE REACTOR /
DC BUS CHOKE
Figure 8.18 - RS-232 module
The RS-232 PC Communication Kit which allows the connection of the CFW-09 to a PC via the RS-232 interface is composed of:
RS-232 Serial Interface Module;
3 m (10 ft) Cable for RJ-11 to DB9 connection;
SuperDrive Software for Windows for CFW-09 programming, operation and monitoring. Refer to hardware and system needs for SuperDrive.
To install the RS-232 PC communication kit, proceed as follows:
Remove the keypad (HMI) from the inverter;
Install RS-232 Serial Interface Module in place of the keypad;
Install the SuperDrive software in the PC. Consult the on-line help or installation guide;
Use the cable to connect the inverter to the PC;
Follow the SuperDrive software instructions. Consult the on-line help or installation guide.
Due to the input circuit characteristic, common to all passive front end inverters available in the market, which consists of a six diode rectifier and capacitor bank, the input current (drained from the power supply line) of inverters is non sinusoidal and contains harmonics of the fundamental frequency.
These harmonic currents circulate through the power supply line, causing harmonic voltage drops which distort the power supply voltage of the inverter and other loads connected to this line. These harmonic current and voltage distortions may increase the electrical losses in the installation, overheating components (cables, transformers, capacitor banks, motors, etc.), as well as a lowering power factor.
The harmonic input currents depend on the impedance values that are present in the rectifier input/output circuit. The addition of a line reactor and/or DC bus choke reduces the current harmonic content, providing the following advantages:
Increased input power factor;
Reduced RMS input current;
Reduced power supply voltage distortion;
Increased life of the DC Link capacitors.
263
CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8.7.1 Application Criteria
The Line Reactor and the DC Bus Choke, when properly sized, have practically the same efficiency in reducing the harmonic currents. The DC Bus Choke has the advantage of not introducing a motor voltage drop, while the Line
Reactor is more efficient to attenuate power supply voltage transients.
DC Link Inductor equivalent to the line reactor is:
L
DC
-
EQUIVALENT
= L
AC
X
3
NOTE!
The 44 A to 79 A/500-600 V, 107 A to 472 A/500-690 V and 100 A to 428 A/
660-690 V models have a DC Link inductor built in the standard version. It is not necessary to have minimum supply impedance or add external line inductors for protecting these models.
The line reactor or the DC Link Inductor shall be applied when required impedance is insufficient for limiting the input current peaks, thus preventing damages to the CFW-09. The minimum required impedances, expressed as impedance drop in percent are following: a) For the model with rated current 130 A/220-230 V, 142 A/380-480 V or
32 A/500-600 V: drop of 1 % for the line voltage; b) For the model with rated current 180 A/380-480 V : drop of 2 % for the line voltage; c) For models with rated current 44 A/500-600 V or 107A/500-690 V or
100 A/660-690 V: there is no requirement for the minimum required line impedance for the CFW-09 protection. These impedances are ensured by the internal existing DC choke. The same is applicable when DC Link inductor is incorporated into the product (Special Hardware - Code HC or
HV), in the models with currents 16 A/220-230 V or 13 A/380-480 V and 240 A/380-480 V.
As an alternative criteria, a line reactor should be added when the inverter supply transformer has a rated power higher than indicated below:
CFW-09 Rated Current/ volts
6 A to 28 A/220-230 V
3.6 A to 24 A/380-480 V
2.9 A to 14 A/500-600 V
45 A to 130 A/220-230 V
30 A to 142 A/380-480 V
22 A to 32 A/500-600 V
180 A to 600 A/380-480 V
Transformer
Power [kVA]
125
5 X Inverter Rated Power
2 X Inverter Rated Power
Table 8.10 - Line reactor usage criteria
To determine the line reactor needed to obtain the desired voltage drop, use equation below:
L
= Voltage Drop [%] x Line Voltage [V]
Line Freq [Hz] x Rated Cur.[A]
[H]
264
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
The electrical installation of an input line reactor is shown on figure 8.19 a).
For CFW-09 sizes above 16A/220-230 V or 13 A/380-480 V, the connection of a DC Bus Choke is possible. The DC bus choke connection is also possible in all 2.9 A to 32 A/500-600 V models. Figure 8.19 b) shows this connection.
PE R S T U V W PE
PE
R
S
T
AC Input
Disconnect
Switch
Fuses Reactor
Figure 8.19 a) – Line reactor connection
PE R S T U V W PE +UD DCR
DC Bus
Choke
AC Input
Figure 8.19 b) – DC bus choke connection
265
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.7.2 DC Link Inductor Built in The following CFW-09 inverter models, can be fitted with an inductor at the DC
Link already incorporated into the product:
Models 16 A/220-230 V, Models 13A/380-480 V and Models 240A/380-
480 V.
To request the inverter with an inductor already assembled, please add the code “HC” (for inverter operating at constant torque) or “HV” (for inverter operating with variable torque) in the model CFW-09, in the option field “Special Hardware”
(refer to item 2.4).
NOTE!
Remember that the operation at higher currents than the rated current in variable
Torque mode is not possible with all inverter types (refer to items 9.1.2 and
9.1.3). Thus the HV option is only possible with the types that can be operated in that situation.
CFW-09 with DC Link inductor
Sizes 2 to 8
Dimensions mm (inch)
Model
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6-7
Size 8
L
160
H
120
P
105.5
(6.30) (4.72) (4.15)
153 137 134
(6.02) (5.39) (5.27)
180 172 134
(7.08) (6.77) (5.27)
265 193.5
134
B
-
-
-
-
(10.43) (7.57) (5.27)
265 212.5
159 -
(10.43) (8.36) (6.25)
325 240 221.5
80.5
(12.79) (9.44) (8.72) (3.16)
Table 8.11 - CFW-09 with DC Link inductor dimensions
266
8.8 LOAD REACTOR
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
The use of a three-phase load reactor, with an approximate 2 % voltage drop decreases the dv/dt (voltage rising rate) of the PWM pulses commonlygenerated at the inverter output of anyAC frequency converter.
This practice reduces the voltage spikes on the motor windings and leakage currents that may be generated when long distance cables between inverter and motor are used.
There are many factors that influence the peak level (Vp) and rise time (tr) of voltage spikes: Cable type, cable length, motor size, switching frequency and other variables all affect Vp and dv/dt.
WEG, as specialists in both VSDs and motors are able to provide an integrated solution. The load reactor value is calculated in the same way as the line reactor (refer to item 8.7.1).
If the cables between inverter and motor are longer than 100 m (300 ft), the cable capacitance to ground may cause nuisance overcurrent (E00) or ground fault (E11) trips. In this case it is also recommended to use a load reactor.
PE R S T U V W PE
8.9 RFI FILTER
AC
Input
Load reactor near the inverter
Figure 8.20 – Load reactor connection
The installation of frequency inverters requires certain care in order to prevent electromagnetic interference (EMI). This interference maydisturb the operation of the inverter itself or other devices, such as, electronic sensors, PLCs, transducers, radio equipment, etc.
To avoid these problems, follow the installation instructions contained in this
Manual. Never install electromagnetic noise generating circuits such as input power and motor cables near analog signal or control cables.
Care should also be taken with the radiated interference, by shielding the cables and circuits that tend to emit electromagnetic waves and cause interference.
The electromagnetic interference can also be transmitted through the power supply line. This type of interference is minimized in the most cases by capacitive Radio Frequency Filters (common and differential mode) which are already installed inside the CFW-09. However, when inverters are installed in residential areas, the installation of an external additional filter may be required.
In this case contact WEG to select the most suitable filter type.
267
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.10 DYNAMIC BRAKING
8.10.1 DB Resistor Sizing
Driving Panel
CFW-09
Filter
Conduit or shielded cable MOTOR
Supply
Line
PE PE
Earth install it as near as possible the inverter
Figure 8.21 – RFI filter connection
Motor
Earth
(Frame)
Instructions for the RFI filter installation:
Install the inverter and the filter on a metallic grounded plate as near to each other as possible and ensure a good electrical contact between the grounded plate and the inverter and filter frames;
If the cable between inverter and filter is longer than 30 cm (12 in), use a shielded cable and ground each shield end on the grounded mounting plate.
NOTE!
Installations that must meet the European standards, refer to item 3.3.
The amount of braking torque that can be generated when a motor is controlled by an inverter, without dynamic braking or any other braking schemes, varies from 10 % to 35 % of the motor rated torque.
During the deceleration process, the kinetic energy of the load is regenerated into the inverter’s DC Link. This energy loads up the capacitors increasing the
DC Link voltage. When this energy is not fully dissipated, it may generate a
DC Link overvoltage trip (E01).
To obtain higher braking torque, the use of Dynamic Braking, where the excess regenerated energy is dissipated in an external resistor, is recommended.
The Dynamic Braking is used in cases where short braking times are required or where high inertia loads are driven.
For Vector Control Modes the “Optimal Braking” feature can be used and in many cases eliminate the need for Dynamic Braking. Refer to chapter 6,
Parameter P151.
NOTE!
If dynamic braking will be used, set P151 to its maximum value.
For a precise sizing of the dynamic braking resistor, application data, such as: deceleration time, load inertia and braking duty cycle must be considered.
The RMS current capacity of the inverter’s dynamic braking transistor must also be taken into account, as well as its maximum peak current, which defines the minimum resistance value (ohms) of the braking resistor. Refer to table 8.12.
The DC Link voltage level at which dynamic braking is activated is defined by the Parameter P153 – Dynamic Brake Level.
268
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
CFW-09 Model
Power Supply
Voltage [V]
Rated
Current [A]
220-230
380 and
400-415
440-460 and
480
500-525 and
575-600
30
38 and 45
60 and 70
86 and 105
142
3.6 and 4
5.5
9 and 13
16
24
30
38 and 45
60 and 70
86 and 105
142
2.9 and 4.2
6
7 and 10
13 and 16
24
28
45
54
70 and 86
105 and 130
3.6 and 4
5.5
9 and 13
16
24
7
10
12
14
22, 27 and 32
44 and 53
63 and 79
The braking resistor is defined according to the deceleration time, load inertia and resistive torque. In most cases a resistor with an ohmic value indicated on table 8.12 and a power rating of 20 % of the driven motor can be used.
Use Wire type resistors with suitable insulation to withstand the instantaneous current peaks.
For critical applications with very short braking times, high inertia loads (Ex: centrifuges) or with very short and frequent duty cycles, contact WEG, to define the most suitable resistor.
Maximum
Braking
Current [A]
(1)
P max
[kW]
(3)
RMS Braking
Current [A]
(2)
P rated
[kW]
(3)
Minimum recommended resistor
[ohms]
Power Wiring
(BR, -UD, +UD) mm² - AWG
13.1
15.2
24.5
38.1
51.6
2.08
2.5
3.05
3.68
3.68
16.67
25
30.49
1.6
4.7
6.5
9.7
20.1
31.6
42.2
1.5
17.8
1.2
1.4
3.9
5.3
7.9
10.9
13.1
0.97
1.3
2.2
2.5
3.2
4.2
10.8
11.9
Table 8.12 - Recommended braking resistor
4.2
5
6.1
7.4
39
60
90
125
10
14
21
27
90
125
3.5
4
7.4
33.33
50
61
21
27
39
60
3.5
4
10
14
22
48
60
90
5
7
10
13
18
60.8
97.9
152.3
206.3
12
10
4.3
6.4
12.0
19.0
25.4
41.5
12.81
20.83
15.3
337.5
225
184.5
20.8
34.6
52.3
80.6
126.4
168.8
3.9
6.1
8.8
10.1
14.4
17.4
42.4
47.5
71.3
3.6
5.5
10.0
15.6
48
78
120
180
250
8.33
10
12.2
14.71
14.71
66.67
100
121.95
8
16
24
34
120
180
250
6
24
34
48
78
180
6
8
16
38
45
95
120
10
15
20
26
25 - 4
50 - 1
95 - 3/0
120 - 4/0
2.5 - 14
2.5 - 14
4.0 - 12
6.0 - 10
10 - 8
10 - 8
25 - 4
50 - 1
95 - 3/0
120 - 4/0
2.5 - 14
2.5 - 14
2.5 - 14
4.0 - 12
6.0 - 10
10 - 8
10 - 8
35 - 3
50 - 1
95 - 3/0
2.5 - 14
2.5 - 14
4.0 - 12
6.0 - 10
10 - 8
10 - 8
2.5 - 14
2.5 - 14
4.0 - 12
2.5 - 14
95 - 3/0
95 - 3/0
95 - 3/0
4.7
3.3
120
100
22
18
10
6.8
120
100
47
33
8.6
5.6
3.9
2.7
82
68
68
15
10
8.2
39
27
18
15
3.3
2.2
100
86
15
10
8.6
4.7
39
27
22
269
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.10.2 Installation
(1)
The maximum current can be determined by:
I max
= Value set at P153 [V] / Resistor Ohms
(2)
The RMS braking current can be calculated by
I rms
= I max
.
t br
[min]
5
Where t br corresponds to the sum of the braking times during the most severe 5 minute cycle.
(3)
P max and P rated are the maximum peak and rated powers that the braking chopper can deliver. The resistor power must be sized according to the application braking duty cycle.
Connect the braking resistor between the +UD and BR power terminals
(refer to item 3.2.1);
Make this connection with a twisted pair. Run this cable separately from any signal or control wire;
Size the cable cross section according to the application, considering the maximum and RMS current;
If the braking resistor is installed inside the inverter panel, consider the heat dissipated by the resistor when defining the panel ventilation;
Set Parameter P154 to the Ohms value of the DB resistor and Parameter
P155 to the resistor power rating in kW.
DANGER!
The CFW-09 provides an electronic thermal protection for the braking resistor to avoidoverheating. The braking resistor and thetransistor can be damaged if:
They are not properly sized;
Parameters P153, P154 and P155 are not properly set;
The line voltage exceeds the maximum allowed value.
The electronic thermal protection provided by the inverter, if properly programmed, protects the DB resistor in case of overloads not expected during normal operation, but it does not ensure protection in case of a dynamic braking circuit failure.
In this case the only guaranteed method to avoid burning the resistor and eliminate risk of fire is the installation of a thermal overload relay in series with the resistor and/or the installation of a thermostat on the resistor body, wiring it in a way to disconnect the inverter power supply is case of overheating, as shown below:
Contactor or
Circuit Breaker
CFW-09
Power
Supply
BR +UD
Control Power
Supply
Overload
Relay
Thermostat
Braking
Resistor
Figure 8.22 – Braking resistor connection
NOTE!
Through the power contacts of the bimetallic overload relay circulates Direct
Current during the DC-Braking process.
270
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.10.3 Dynamic Braking module -
DBW-01 and DBW-02
In the CFW-09 220-230 V or 380-480 V types with currents higher or equal to
180 A, dynamic braking uses the DBW-01 external braking module. For 500-
690 V and 660-690 V with currents higher or equal 100 A, dynamic braking uses the DBW-02 external braking module.
Supply Voltage
[V]
380-480 V
500-690 V /
660-690 V
Inverter
Types
180 A
211 A
240 A
312 A
361 A
450 A
515 A
600 A
100 A/107 A
127 A/147 A
179 A/211 A
225 A/247 A
259 A/315 A
305 A/343 A
340 A/418 A
428 A/472 A
Braking
Module
Max. Braking
Current
A
(1)
RMS Braking
Current
A
(2)
Minimum
Resistor
(3)
Power Wiring
(BR, -UD, +UD) mm 2 (AWG)
DBW010165D21802SZ
DBW010240D21802SZ
DBW010240D21802SZ
DBW010300D21802SZ
DBW010300D21802SZ
DBW010300D21802SZ
DBW010300D21802SZ
DBW010300D21802SZ
DBW020210D5069SZ
DBW020210D5069SZ
DBW020210D5069SZ
DBW020210D5069SZ
DBW020300D5069SZ
DBW020300D5069SZ
DBW020380D5069SZ
DBW020380D5069SZ
200
320
320
400
400
400
400
400
250
250
250
250
400
400
500
500
165
240
240
300
210
210
210
300
300
380
380
300
300
300
300
210
Table 8.13 - Inverter and corresponding DBW
4.8
4.8
4.8
4.8
3
2
2
2
4
2.5
2.5
2
2
3
2.5
2.5
70 (2/0)
120 (250MCM)
120 (250MCM)
2 x 50 (2 x 1/0)
2 x 50 (2 x 1/0)
2 x 50 (2 x 1/0)
2 x 50 (2 x 1/0)
2 x 50 (2 x 1/0)
120( 250 MCM)
120 (250 MCM)
120 (250 MCM)
120 (250 MCM)
2 x 50 (2 x 1/0)
2 x 50 (2 x 1/0)
2 x 120 (2 x 250 MCM)
2 x 120 (2 x 250 MCM)
(1)
The maximum current can be calculated by:
I max
= set value at P153 [V]/value of the resistor [ohms].
(2)
The rms braking current can be calculated by:
I rms
= I max
.
t br
[min] where t br corresponds to the sum of the braking
5 actuation times during the most severe 5-minute cycle.
(3)
The minimum resistor value of each shown model has been calculated so the braking current does not exceed the maximum current specified in table 8.13.
For this, following parameters have been considered
- DBW-01: rated line voltage = 480 V.
- DBW-02: rated line voltage = 690 V.
- Factory Standard Value of P153.
HOW TO SPECIFY THE DBW TYPE:
DBW-01 0165
WEG Braking
Module:
DBW-01
DBW-02
Rated Output Current:
220 to 480 V:
0165 = 165 A
0240 = 240 A
0300 = 300 A
0210 = 210 A
0380 = 380 A
D
DC Supply at Input
2180
Input Supply Voltage:
2180 = 210 to
800 Vdc
1
Fan Supply Voltage:
1 = 110 Vrms
2 = 220 Vrms
S
Standard
Z
Code End
5069 = 500 to
1200 Vdc
271
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.10.3.1 DBW-01 and DBW-02
Identification Label DBW Type
Rated Output
Data
Serial Number
Front View A - View
A
WEG Item N o
Figure 8.23 - Identification label
8.10.3.2 Mechanical Installation The environmental operating conditions of the DBW are the same as of the
CFW-09 inverter (refer to item 3.1.1).
For panel installation, provide an additional airflow of 120 CFM (57 L/s) for cooling of the braking module.
When installing module, provide free spaces around the module, as shown in figure 8.24, whereA= 100 mm (4 in), B = 40 mm (1.57 in) and C = 130 mm (5.12
in).
Figure 8.24 - Free spaces for cooling
272
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Check the other recommendations for the CFW-09 inverter installation, since from the mechanical viewpoint, the module is compatible with CFW-09 frame size 3.
External dimensions and mounting holes are according to figure 8.25.
Dimension A mm (in)
DBW-01 DBW-02
252 (9.92) 277 (10.91)
Figure 8.25 - Dimensional drawing of DBW-01 and DBW-02 - mm (inch)
Figure 8.26 - Installation procedures for the DBW-01 and DBW-02 on surface
273
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Air Flow
Figure 8.27 - DBW-01 and DBW-02 positioning
The DBW-01 and DBW-02 can also be installed with a through surface mounting kit as described in item 8.11. In this case, use the available installation kit, which contains the respective installation supports. Figure 8.28 shows the mounting cutouts.
274
Figure 8.28 - Cutout dimensions in air duct - Dimensions mm (inch)
Table 8.14 shows the weights of the different DBW-01 types.
Type
Fastening Screw
Weight (Kg)
Degree of
Protection
DBW-01 165
DBW-01 240
DBW-01 300
DBW-02 210
DBW-02 300
DBW-02 380
M6
14.2
13.8
13.4
14.2
13.8
13.4
IP20
Table 8.14 - Mechanical data of the DBW-01 and DBW-02
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.10.3.3 Installation/Connection Location of the power connections is shown in figures 8.29, 8.30 and 8.31.
X7
BR -UD
Figure 8.29 - Connection location
+UD
Figure 8.30 - Power terminals o t
M
1~
X7
1 2 3 4
Figure 8.31 - X7 terminal block
275
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Supply the fan of the braking module with the suitable supply voltage
(110 Vrms or 220 Vrms) at X7:1 and X7:2, connector (refer to figure 8.32). The fan requires a current of about 0.14 A. The terminals 3 and 4 of the terminal bock X7 are the NC-contact of a thermostat that must be installed for the thermal protection of the braking module. This protection must be installed external to the braking module (refer to figure 8.32); in this example, the relay is connected to DI3 (XC1:3,9 of the board CC9) and the parameter P265 is programmed as Without External Error (P265 = 4).
o t
M
1~
X7
1 2 3 4
Figure 8.32 - Example of thermal protection
Connect the +UD grounding of the braking module to the +UD terminal of the inverter;
Connect the -UD grounding of the braking module to the -UD terminal of the inverter;
The control connection between the CFW-09 and the braking module is made through a cable (0307.7560). One end of this cable is connected to the XC3 connector that can be found at the CRG4 board (refer to figure 8.33 ) in the braking module. The other end of this cable is connected to a DB9 connector that is fastened to a metallic support at the side of the control board in the
CFW-09.
Figure 8.33 - Location of the XC3 connector
XC3
276
Thermal
Protection
XC1: 9.3
P265 = 4
Supply
Network
Contactor
R
S
T
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Figure 8.34 shows the connection of the braking module to the inverter, as well as the connections of the resistor to the braking module. It shows also the inclusion of a thermal relay and a thermostat in contact with the resistor body, thus ensuring its thermal protection. The connection cables between the inverter and the module and between the module and the braking resistor must be dimensioned according to the thermal braking cycle.
CFW-09
DBW-01/02
XC3
Cable 2.3m
0307.7560
XC3
Fan
110or 220V
Fan
110or 220V
DIx (CC9)
No External
Fault
Thermal
Relay
Thermostat
Braking
Resistor
Control
Supply
8.12 FIELDBUS
Figure 8.34 - Connections between the DBW, the CFW-09 and the braking resistor
8.11 THROUGH SURFACE
MOUNTING KIT
NOTE!
Through the power contacts of the bimetallic overload relay circulates Direct
Current during the DC-Braking process.
The DBW-02 has a duplicated XC3 connector (A and B). The XC3B is for connecting other DBW-02 module for parallel operation. It is possible to connect up to 3 DBW-02 modules in parallel. The interconnecting cable should be limited to 2 meters maximum cable length.
The kit for through surface mounting is composed of metallic supports that must be mounted on the rear of the CFW-09 frames 3 to 8 to allow through surface mounting. For further information refer to item 3.1.3.3, figure 3.4 and table 3.4. Degree of protection is NEMA 1/IP20.
CFW-09 can be connected to Fieldbus networks allowing its control and parameter setting. For this purpose you need to include an optional electronic board according to the desired Fieldbus standard: Profibus DP, DeviceNet or
EtherNet/IP.
277
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.12.1 Installation of the
Fieldbus kit
NOTE!
The chosen Fieldbus option can be specified in the suitable field of the
CFW-09 coding.
In this case the CFW-09 will be supplied with all needed components already installed in the product. For later installation you must order and install the desired Fieldbus kit (KFB).
The communication board that forms the Fieldbus Kit is installed directly onto the CC control board, connected to the XC140 connector and fixed by spacers.
NOTE!
Follow the Safety Notices in chapter 1.
If a Function Expansion Board (EBA/EBB) is already installed, it must be removed provisionally. For the frame size 1 you must remove the lateral plastic cover of the product.
1. Remove the bolt from the metallic spacer near to the XC140 (CC9) connector.
2. Connect carefully the pin connector of the Fieldbus board to the female connector XC140 of the CC9 control board. Check the exact coincidence of all pins of the XC140 connector (refer to figure 8.35).
Section AA
Board Devicenet
Board Profibus DP
Board CC9
278
A
A
Figure 8.35 - Installation of the electronic board of the Fieldbus
M3x8 Bolt
Torque 1Nm
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
3. Press the board near to XC140 and on the lower right edge until the connector and the plastic spacer is inserted completely.
4. Fix the board to the metallic spacer through the bolt (except ModBus RTU).
5. Fieldbus Connector:
Sizes 1 and 2 (Models up to 28 A):
- Fix the Fieldbus connector to the inverter frame by using the 150 mm (5.9 in) cable (refer to figure 8.36).
Figure 8.36 - Fastening of the Fieldbus connector
279
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Sizes 3 to 10 - (models up to 30 A):
- Connect the Fieldbus connector to the metallic “L” by using the 150 mm
(5.9 in).
- Fasten the set to the metallic support plate of the control board (refer to figure 8.37).
280
Figure 8.37 - Fastening of the Fieldbus connector
6. Connect the other cable end of the Fieldbus connector to the electronic
Fieldbus board, as shown in figure 8.38.
DEVICENET PROFIBUS DP
Figure 8.38 - Connection to the Fieldbus board
8.12.2 Profibus DP
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Introduction
The inverter that is fitted with the Profibus DP Kit operates in slave mode, allowing the reading/writing of their parameters through a master. The inverter does not start the communication with other nodes, it only answers to the master controls. A twisted pair of copper cable realizes the connection of the
Fieldbus (RS-485) allowing the data transmission at rates between 9.6 kbits/s and 12 Mbits/s. Figure 8.39 show a general view of a Profibus DP network.
PROFIBUSDP
Master
RS-232
Personal
Computer with
Configuration
Software
DP
PROFIBUS DP slavenode #1
PROFIBUS DP slavenode #2
Figure 8.39 - Profibus DP network
PROFIBUS DP slavenode #n
- Fieldbus Type: PROFIBUS DP EN 50170 (DIN 19245)
Physical Interface
- Transmission means: Profibus bus bar line, type A or B as specified in
EN50170.
- Topology: Master-Slave communication.
- Insulation: the bus is supplied by DC/DC inverter and isolated galvanically from remaining electronics and the signals A and B are isolated by means of optocouplers.
- It allows the connection/disconnection of only one node without affecting the network.
Fieldbus connector of the inverter user
- Connector D-sub 9 pins - female.
- Pins:
6
7
4
5
8
Pin
1
2
3
9
Frame
Name
Not connected
Not connected
B-Line
Not connected
GND
+ 5 V
Not connected
A-Line
Not connected
Shield
Function
-
-
RxD/TxD positive, according to specification RS-485
-
0 V isolated against RS-485 circuit
5 V isolated against RS-485 circuit
-
RxD/TxD negative, according to specification RS-485
-
Connected to the ground protection (PE)
Table 8.15 - Pin connection (DB9) to the Profibus DP
281
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Line Termination
The initial and the en points of the network must be terminated with the characteristic impedance in order to prevent reflections. The DB 9 cable male connector has the suitable termination. When the inverter is the first or the last of the network, the termination switch must be set to Pos. “ON”. Otherwise set the switch to Pos. “OFF”. The terminating switch of the PROFIBUS DP board must be set to 1 (OFF).
Transfer Rate (baud rate)
The transfer rate of a Profibus DP network is defined during the master configuration and only one rate is permitted in the same network. The Profibus
DP board has automatic baud rate detection and the user does not need to configure it on the board. The supported baud rates are: 9.6 kbits/s, 19.2 kbits/ s, 45.45 kbits/s, 93.75 kbits/s, 187.5 kbits/s, 500 kbits/s, 1.5 Mbits/s, 3 Mbits/ s, 6 Mbits/s and 12 Mbits/s.
Node Address
The node address is established by means of two rotating switches on the electronic Profibus DP board, permitting the addressing from 1 to 99 addresses.
Looking onto the front view of the board with the inverter in normal position, the switch at left sets the ten of the address, while the left switch sets the unit of the address:
Address = (set left rotary switch x 10) + (set right rotary switch x 1)
NOTE!
The node address can not be changed during operation.
Configuration File (GSD File)
Each element of a Profibus DP network is associated to a GSD file that has all information about the element. This file is used by program of the network configuration. Use the file with the extension .gsd stored on the floppy disk contained in the Fieldbus kit.
Signaling
The electronic board has a bicolor LED at right underside indicating the status of the Fieldbus according to the table 8.16 and figure 8.40 below:
Color LED
Red
Green
Green
Red
Red
Frequency
2 Hz
2 Hz
1 Hz
1 Hz
4 Hz
Status
Fault during the test of the ASIC and Flash ROM
Board has not been initialized
Board has been initialized and is operating
Fault during the RAM test
Fault during the DPRAM test
Table 8.16 - Signaling LED of the Fieldbus board status
NOTE!
The red fault indications mean hardware problems of the electronic board. The reset is realized by switching OFF / ON the inverter. If the problem persists, replace the electronic board.
The electronic board is also fitted with four other bicolor LEDs placed at the right bottom side, indicating the Fieldbus status according to the figure below:
282
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Acyclic Traffic
On-line
Fieldbus
Diagnostics
Off-line
Figure 8.40 - LEDs indicating the status of the Profibus DP network
LED
Fieldbus Diagnostics
On-Line
Off-Line
Acyclic Traffic
8.12.3 Profibus DP-V1
Color
Red
Green
Red
Green
Function
Indicates certain faults at the Fieldbus:
Flashing at 1 Hz
- Configuration error: the IN/OUT area size programmed at the board initialization is different from the size programmed during the network configuration.
Flashing at 2 Hz
- User parameter data error: the size/contents of the user parameter data programmed at the board initialization are different from the size/contents programmed during the network configuration.
Flashing 4 Hz
- Enabling error of the Profibus Communication ASIC.
OFF
- no problems.
Indicates that the board is On-line at the Fieldbus.
ON
- the board is off-line and the data exchange is not possible.
OFF
- the board is not On-line.
Indicates that the board is Off-line at the Fieldbus.
ON
- the board is off-line and the data exchange is not possible.
OFF
- the board is not Off-line.
Valid only for the Profibus DP-V1 interface. It indicates that the board is processing a
DP-V1 request:
ON
- The board is executing a DP-V1 request.
OFF
- There is no DP-V1 request being processed.
Table 8.17 - Signaling LEDs indicating the status of the Profibus DP network
NOTE!
When power is applied to the inverter and both on-line and off-line LEDs on the
Profibus DP board keep flashing, then a network address configuration or installation problem may be present.
Check the installation and the network node address.
NOTE!
Use of the Profibus DP/related CFW-09 Parameters. Refer to item 8.12.7.
By using the DP-V1 communication kit, besides the exchange of cyclic data, which is performed in a similar form to that of Profibus DP-V0, it is also possible to perform services of reading/writing parameters through DP-V1 acyclic functions, by the network master as well as by a commissioning tool. The parameter mapping is done based in the slot and index addressing, according to the equationing below:
Slot: (parameter number - 1) / 255
Index: (parameter number -1) MOD 255
NOTE!
MOD represents the remainder of the integer division.
For instance, the parameter P100 will be identified through the acyclic messages as being located at slot 0, index 99.
The value for the parameters is always communicated with a 2 byte (1 word) size. The value is also transmitted as an integer, without decimal point, and its representation depends on the used resolution.
E.g.: P003 = 3.6 A; value read via the network = 36.
283
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.12.4 DeviceNet
NOTE!
The parameters P000, P001, P215 and P408 are not available for access via network.
In order to be able to use the Profibus DP-V1 interface, one must select the option 1, 2 or 3 at P309. This programming is the same for the Profibus
DP-V0 or DP-V1 interfaces.
A specific GSD file for this interface is supplied with the Profibus DP-V1 communication kit.
Introduction
The DeviceNet communication is used for industrial automation, mainly for the control of valves, sensors, input/output units and automation equipment.
The DeviceNet communication Link is based on a communication protocol
“broadcast oriented”, the Controller Area Network (CAN). The connection to the DeviceNet network is realized by means of a shielded cable comprising a twisted pair and two wires for the external power supply. The baud rate can be set to 125 kbits/s, 250 kbits/s or 500 kbits/s. Figure 8.41 gives a general view of a DeviceNet network.
Controller
DeviceNet
Device
Configuration
Other
Devices
Motor
Starter
Sensor
Input/Output
Devices Motor
Controller
Inverter
Figure 8.41 - DeviceNet network
Push button
Clusler
Bar Code
Scanner
Fieldbus connector of user of the inverter
- Connector: 5 ways-connector of type plug-in with screwed terminal
(screw terminal).
- Pin:
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
Description
V-
CAN_L
Shield
CAN_H
V+
Color
Black
Blue
-
White
Red
Table 8.18 - Connection of the pins to the DeviceNet
284
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Line Termination
To avoid reflection, the initial and the end points of the network must be terminated with the characteristic impedance. Thus a 120-ohms/0.5W resistor must be connected between the pins 2 and 4 of the Fieldbus connector.
Baud Rate/ Node Address
There are three different baud rates for the DeviceNet: 125 kbits/s, 250 kbits/ s or 500 kbits/s. Choose one of these baud rates by setting the DIP switches on the electronic board.
The node address is selected through the six DIP switches on the electronic board, permitting an addressing from 0 to 63 addresses.
Baud Rate [bits/s]
125 k
250 k
500 k
Reserved
DIPs 1 and 2
00
01
10
11
DIP 3 to DIP 8
000000
000001
000010
111101
111110
111111
Baud Rate Address
ON 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0
Address
0
1
2
61
62
63
Figure 8.42 - Baud rate configuration an addressing to the DeviceNet
Configuration File (EDS File)
Each element of a DeviceNet network is associated to an EDS file that has all information about the element. This file is used by program of the network configuration during its configuration. Use the file with the extension .eds stored on the floppy disk contained in the Fieldbus kit.
Setting parameter P309 to 4, 5 or 6 selects 2, 4 or 6 input/output words (refer to item 8.12.7).
With the assistance of the network configuration software define the number of words for the device according to the value set on parameter P309. The type of connection used for data exchange shall be set for “Polled I/O”.
NOTE!
The PLC (master) must be programmed for Polled I/O connection.
Signaling
The electronic board has a bicolor LED at right topside indicating the status of the Fieldbus according to the table 8.16.
285
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
NOTE!
The red fault indications mean hardware problems of the electronic board. The reset is realized by switching OFF / ON the inverter. If the problem persists, replace the electronic board.
The electronic board is also fitted with other four bicolor LEDs placed at the right bottom side, indicating the DeviceNet status according to figure 8.43 and table
8.19:
Reserved
Reserved
Network Status
Module
Network Status
Figure 8.43 - LEDs for status indication of the DeviceNet network
8.12.5 DeviceNet Drive
Profile
LED
Module Network Status
Module Network Status
Module Network Status
Module Network Status
Network Status
Network Status
Network Status
Network Status
Network Status
Color
ON
Red
Green
Red Flashing
Off
Green
Red
Green Flashing
Red Flashing
Description
Without supply
Fault not recoverable
Board operating
Smaller fault
Without supply/off-line
Link operating, connected
Critical fault at Link
On-line not connected
Timeout of the connection
Table 8.19 - Signaling LEDs indicating the DeviceNet status
NOTE!
Use of the DeviceNet /related CFW-09 Parameters. Refer to item 8.12.7.
The DeviceNet Drive Profile communication board has the purpose of making available at the product a communication interface for a DeviceNet network with the following characteristics:
It makes it possible the parameterization of the inverter via the network, with direct access to the parameters through messages sent by the master.
It follows the Device Profile standard for AC and DC Inverters specified by the
ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association), which defines a common set of objects for inverters that operate in a DeviceNet network.
With the DeviceNet Drive Profile interface the I/O data exchanged with the
DeviceNet network master present format and parameterization different from the data exchanged by using the normal DeviceNet board. For more information on the parameterization and operation of this interface, refer to the CFW-09 frequency inverter DeviceNet Drive Profile Communication Manual.
286
8.12.6
EtherNet/IP
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
EtherNet/IP (Industrial EtherNet Protocol) is a communication system proper for the industrial environment. This system allows application data exchange, timerestricted or critical, between industrial systems. The EtherNet/IP is available for simple devices such as sensors/actuators as well as for complex devices such as robots, PLCs, keypads and inverters.
The EtherNet/IP application layer protocol is based on the Control and Information
Protocol (CIP) layer that is used in both DeviceNet™ and ControlNet™. The CIP organizes the devices as collection of objects and defines the methods and procedures for data access. Furthermore, the EtherNet/IP uses the standard
IEEE 802.3 for the low level layers and the TCP/IP and UDP/IP protocols for the intermediary layers to transport the CIP packets.
Therefore, the infrastructure used by the EtherNet/IP is the same used by the corporate computer networks (EtherNet). This fact extends considerably the means of controlling and monitoring the devices connected to the network:
Availability of application protocols (HTTP, FTP, etc.).
Integration between the assembly line and the corporate.
It is based on a widely used and accepted standard.
Greater data flow than the standard protocols used for the industrial automation.
Hub or Switch
PLC With EtherNet/IP
(192.168.0.1)
PC
(192.168.0.2)
Inverter
(192.168.0.3)
HMI
(192.168.0.5)
RemoteI I/O
(192.168.0.4)
EtherNet/IP
Figure 8.44 - Example of an EtherNet/IP network
287
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Fieldbus Connector
- Connector: RJ-45 connector with 8-pin.
- Pinout: two standards for straight-through cables are available: EtherNet:
T-568A and T-568B. The function of each pin is shown in figure 8.45 a) and b). The cable to be used with the CFW-09 shall follow one of these two standards. Furthermore, only one standard shall be used for the cables, i.e., the connectors of both cable ends shall be crimped according to standard T-568A or T-568B.
a) RJ-45 Plug - T-568A Standard
12345678
6
7
4
5
8
Pin
1
2
3
Cable Color
White/Green
Green
White/Orange
Blue
White/Blue
Orange
White/Brown
Brown
Signal
TX+
TX-
RX+
RX-
-
-
-
-
6
7
4
5
8
Pin
1
2
3 b) RJ-45 Plug - T-568B Standard
Cable Color
White/Orange
Orange
White/Green
Blue
White/Blue
Green
White/Brown
Brown
Signa
TX+
TX-
RX+
RX-
-
-
-
-
12345678
12345678
Figure 8.45 a) and b) - Straight-Through EtherNet cables
Line Termination
With the EtherNet 10BASE-T (10 Mbps) or 100BASE-TX (100 Mbps) the line termination is already on the communication board and also on any other device that uses a point-to-point twisted pair cable. Therefore, no additional setting is needed for the CFW-09.
Communication Bit-rate
The CFW-09 can operate in an EtherNet network at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps and also in half-duplex or full-duplex modes. When operating at 100 Mbps in full-duplex mode, the effective rate doubles to 200 Mbps. These configurations are performed through the network configuration and programming software. No board setting is needed. It is recommended to use the auto-sensing resource.
Configuration File (EDS file)
Each device on an EtherNet/IP network is associated to an EDS file that contains information about the device operation. The EDS file provided along with the product is used by the network configuration software.
288
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Configuration of the Network Master Data
For the master configuration, besides the IP address used by the EtherNet/IP board, it is necessary to indicate the number of I/O instances and the quantity of data exchanged with the master in each instance. For the CFW-09 withAnybus-S
EtherNet/IP board, the following values must be programmed:
Input Instance: 100
Output Instance: 150
Data amount programmable through P309: it may be 2, 4 or 6 words with 16 bits (4, 8 or 12 bytes).
The EtherNet/IP board for the CFW-09 is described in the network as a Generic
Ethernet Module. By using these configurations it is possible to program the network master so that it communicates with the inverter.
Indication
The communication board has four two-color LEDs located on the right bottom corner to indicate the module and the network status.
Link
Activity
1
4
2
3
Module
Status
Network
Status
Figure 8.46 - Indication LEDs for the status of the EtherNet/IP network
LED
Link
Module Status
Network Status
Activity
Color
Green
Green or Red
Green or Red
Green
Function
On: the module is connected to another device on the network (typically a hub or switch).
Off
: the module is not connected to another device.
Steady Off:
No power applied o the module.
Steady Green:
The module is operating correctly.
Flashing Green: the module has not been configured.
Flashing Red:
A minor recoverable error has been detected.
Steady Red:
A major internal error has been detected.
Flashing Green/Red:
The module is performing a power on self-test.
Steady Off:
The module has no power or no IP address has been assigned.
Steady On: the module has at least one established EtherNet/IP connection.
Flashing Green:
There are no EtherNet/IP connections established to the module.
Flashing Red:
One or more of the connections in which this module is the target has timed out.
Steady Red:
The module has detected that its IP address is already in use.
Flashing Green/Red:
The module is performing a power on self-test.
Flashing: indicates that a packet has been received and/or transmitted.
289
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
NOTE!
The communication board that comes with the product has been developed by the HMS Industrial Networks AB company. Therefore, the network configuration software will not recognize the product as the CFW-09 variable frequencyinverter, but as the “Anybus-S EtherNet/IP” at the “Communication
Adapter”. The differentiation among several CFW-09 inverters will be based on the device address on the network.
Related errors
The EtherNet/IP uses the same error codes as the other Fieldbus protocols, i.e., E29 and E30.
E29
: Fieldbus communication is off.
E30
: Communication board is off.
For detailed information refer to the item 8.12.7.3.
NOTE!
The inverter will indicate E29 only when the connection with the master is lost. The inverter will not indicate this error while no connection has been established.
Control and Monitoring Through the WEB
The EtherNet/IP communication board has an HTTP server internally. This means that the communication board can serve HTML pages. In such a way, it is possible to configure network parameters, control, and monitor the CFW-09 inverter through a WEB browser installed in a computer connected to the same network of the inverter. Use the same read/write variables of the inverter to perform these operations (refer to items 8.12.7.1
and 8.12.7.2).
NOTE!
For the first WEB access use the factory default username and password.
Username: web
Password: web
290
Figure 8.47 - Open window when accessing the CFW-09 through the WEB
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Figure 8.48 - Control and monitoring window when accessing the CFW-09 through the WEB
NOTE!
It is necessary to have a PC with an EtherNet card connected to the same network of the CFW-09 and a WEB browser (MS Internet Explorer or Mozilla/Firefox.
Configurations
Follow the steps below to operate the CFW-09 in an EtherNet/IP network.
1) Install the KFB-EN kit into the CFW-09 variable frequency inverter.
2) At parameter P309 select the EtherNet/IP protocol and the number of input/ output words, P309 = 7, 8 or 9.
3) Connect the RJ-45 plug of the EtherNet cable to the inverter and make sure that the Link LED is ON (LED 1).
4) Open your WEB browser and type the inverter address on the network. The factory default value is ‘http://192.168.0.1’. Make sure that JavaScript and cookies are enabled in the WEB browser.
The data access is protected by username and password. The CFW-09 has the following factory default values: Username: web Password: web
291
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
5) At the ‘Configuration’ tab of the WEB page shown in figure X set, if needed, the ‘Network Parameters’. Set also the value of parameter P309.
6.1) If the inverter address on the network belongs to the reserved range
‘192.168.0.X’, it is possible to use the DIP-switches of the communication board for addressing purposes. In this case, the DIP-switch represents the binary value of the last byte in the IP address.
Example:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
(MSB) (LSB)
The DIP-switch is set to 00010100 (20 in decimal format).
Thus, the inverter address on the network is 192.168.0.20
.
6.2) If the inverter has an IP address out of the default range (192.168.0.X), deactivate the hardware addressing by setting the DIP-switches to zero
(00000000).
6.3) If the network addressing is performed through a DHCP server, select the box ‘DHCP enabled’ and set the DIP-switches to zero (00000000).
7) Click on the button ‘STORE CONFIGURATION’ to save the new settings.
Restart the CFW-09.
Access to the communication board
The communication board supports FTP and Telnet services. In such a way, it is possible to upload/download files to/from the board and also access the file system in an interactive way.
In order to use these services follow the instructions below:
- Open a MS-DOS command window.
- Type the desired service (FTP or Telnet) followed by the IP address or hostname of the CFW-09 on the network.
- Enter with: Login: user Password: user
Examples:
Telnet session for the CFW-09 with IP address 192.168.0.4.
292
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
FTP session for the CFW-09 whit IP address 192.168.0.4.
Security and access passwords
The file system of the communication board has two security levels for the user: admin and normal.
It is only permitted to connect in the normal mode. In this case, the users are restricted to the directory ‘user\’, where it is possible to create or delete files and/or folders. The accounts for normal users are defined in the file ‘sys_pswd.cfg’ that is located under directory ‘user\pswd\’. Each line of the file has a pair
‘login:password’ that corresponds to a user account.
In order to change the file containing the user accounts, create, with the assistance of a simple text editor, a file that contains in each line a pair
‘login:password’.A colon shall separate the two words. Notice that no password cryptography is available, i.e., the login and the password are completely visible.
After creating/modifying the user accounts, transfer via FTP the file ‘sys_pswd.cfg’ to the directory ‘user\pswd\’.
Example of file transfer through FTP :
NOTE!
The CFW-09 that comes from the factory has a normal user account:
Username: user
Password: user
Users of the normal security level are restricted to the directory ‘\user’.
293
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.12.7 Use to the Fieldbus/
8.12.7.1
Related Parameters of the CFW-09
Variables Read from the Inverter
In addition to the access control for the file system, there is also an access control for the HTML pages of the communication board. The file containing the access passwords is located under the directory ‘user\pswd’, and it is named ‘web_accs.cfg’. As in the previous case, each line of the
‘web_accs.cfg’ file represents an access account. In order to change the user accounts for the HTML pages, create a text file with the same name
(‘web_accs.cfg’) and insert in each line of this file a pair ‘login:password’ for the users with access permission. After that, transfer this new file through
FTP to the communication board, exactly as in the previous case.
NOTE!
It is strongly recommended to change all passwords of the EtherNet/IP communication board after the start-up of the device. The new passwords will be effective only after powering down and up the CFW-09.
NOTE!
When the inverter returns from the off-line state the output values are reset.
There are two main parameters: P309 and P313:
P309
- defines the used standard Fieldbus (Profibus DP, DeviceNet or
EtherNet/IP) and the number of variables (I/O) exchanged with the master
(2, 4 or 6). The parameter P309 has the following options:
0 = Inactive, 4 = DeviceNet 2 I/O, 8 = EtherNet/IP 4 I/O,
1 = Profibus DP 2 I/O, 5 = DeviceNet 4 I/O, 9 = EtherNet/IP 6 I/O,
2 = Profibus DP 4 I/O, 6 = DeviceNet 6 I/O, (for EtherNet/IP).
3 = Profibus DP 6 I/O, (for DeviceNet),
(for Profibus DP), 7 = EtherNet/IP 2 I/O,
10 = DeviceNet Drive
Profile
P313
- defines the inverter behavior when the physical connection with the master is interrupted and/or the Fieldbus board is inactive (E29/E30).
- The parameter P313 has the following options:
0 = Disables the inverter by using the Start/Stop controls via deceleration ramp.
1 = Disables the inverter by using the General Enabling, stop by inertia.
2 = The inverter status is not changed.
3 = The inverter goes to Local mode.
4 = The inverter changes to Local mode keeping the commands and the reference.
1 - Logical Status of the inverter,
2 - Motor speed,
For the option P309 = 1or 4 (2I/O) - read 1 and 2,
3 - Status of the Digital Inputs (P012),
4 - Parameter Status,
For the option P309 = 2 or 5 (4I/O) - it reads 1, 2, 3 and 4,
5 - Torque current (P009),
6 - Motor current (P003),
For the option P309 = 3 or 6 (6I/O) - it reads 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
1. Logical Status (E.L.):
The word that defines the E.L. is formed by 16 bits, being 8 bits of high order and 8 bits of low order. It has the following construction:
294
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
High-Order Bits
- they indicate the status of the associated function
EL.15
- Active error: 0 = No, 1 = Yes;
EL.14
- PID Regulator 0 = Manual, 1 = Automatic;
EL.13
- Undervoltage : 0 = Without, 1 = With;
EL.12
- Local/Remote Control: 0 = Local, 1 = Remote;
EL.11
- JOG Control: 0 = Inactive, 1 = Active;
EL.10
- Direction of rotation: 0 = Counter-Clockwise, 1 = Clockwise;
EL.09
- General Enabling: 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled;
EL.08
- Start/Stop: 0 = Stop, 1 = Start.
Low-Order Bits
- they indicate the error code number, (i.e. 00, 01, ... ,09, 11(0Bh),
12(0Ch), 13(0Dh), 24(18h), 32(20h) and 41(29h) ). Refer to item 7.1- Faults and
Possible Causes.
2. Motor Speed:
This variable is shown by using the 13-bit resolution plus signal. Thus the rated value will be equal to 8191(1FFFh) (clockwise rotation) or -8191(E001h) (counterclock wise rotation) when the motor is running at synchronous speed (or base speed, for instance 1800 rpm for IV-pole motor, 60 Hz).
3. Status of the Digital Inputs:
Indicates the content of the Parameter P012, where the level 1 indicates active input (with +24 V), and the level 0 indicates the inactive input (with 0 V). Refer to item 6.1 - Access and Read Parameter. The digital inputs are so distributed in this byte:
Bit.7 - DI1 status
Bit.6 - DI2 status
Bit.5 - DI3 status
Bit.4 - DI4 status
Bit.3 - DI5 status
Bit.2 - DI6 status
Bit.1 - DI7 status
Bit.0 - DI8 status
4. Parameter Content:
This position permits to read the inverter parameter contents that are selected at
Position 4. Number of parameter to be read from the “Variables Written in the
Inverter”. The read values will have the same order as described in the product
Manual or shown on the HMI.
The values are read without decimal point, when it is the case. Examples: a) HMI displays 12.3, the read via Fieldbus will be 123, b) HMI displays 0.246, the read via Fieldbus will be 246.
There are some parameters which representation on the 5 segment display can suppress the decimal point when the values are higher than 99.9. These parameters are: P100, P101, P102, P103, P155, P156, P157, P158, P169 (for
P202 = 0, 1, 2 and 5), P290 and P401.
Example: Indication on the 7 segment display: 130,
Indication on the LCD display LCD: 130.0, the read value via
Fieldbus is: 1300.
The read of the Parameter P006 via Fieldbus has the following meaning:
0 = ready;
1 = run;
2 = Undervoltage;
3 = with fault, except E24 to E27.
5. Torque Current:
This position indicates de P009 Parameter content, disregarding the decimal point. A lowpass filter with a time constant of 0.5s filters this variable.
295
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.12.7.2
Variables Written in the Inverter
6. Motor Current:
This position indicates de P003 Parameter content, disregarding the decimal point. A lowpass filter with a time constant of 0.3 s filters this variable.
The variables are written in the following order:
1 - Logical Control;
2 - Motor speed reference, for option P309 = 1 or 4 (2I/O) - it writes in 1 and 2;
3 - Status of the Digital Outputs;
4 - Number of the Parameter to be read, for option P309 = 2 or 5 (4I/O) - it writes in 1, 2, 3 and 4;
5 - Number of the Parameter to be changed;
6 - Content of the Parameter to be changed, selected in the previous position, for option P309 = 3 or 6 (6I/O) - it writes in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
1. Logical Control (C.L.):
The word that defines the C.L. is formed by 16 bits, being 8 bits of high orders and 8 bits of low orders and having the following construction:
High-Order Bits
- they select the function that shall be driven when the bit is set to 1.
CL.15
- Inverter fault reset;
CL.14
- Without function;
CL.13
- To save the changes of the parameter P169/P170 in the EEPROM;
CL.12
- Local/Remote control;
CL.11
- Jog control;
CL.10
- Direction of rotation;
CL.09
- General enabling;
CL.08
- Start/Stop.
Low-Order Bits
- they determine the status that is wanted for the function selected in the high-order bits.
CL.7
- Inverter fault reset: always it varies from 0 1, an inverter reset is caused, with the presence of faults (except E24, E25, E26 e E27);
CL.6
- No function / STOP detection. It is not necessary to activate the correspondent upper bit (refer to the description of parameter P310);
CL.5
- To save P169/P170 in the EEPROM: 0 = to save, 1 = to not save;
CL.4
- Local/Remote control: 0 = Local, 1 = Remote;
CL.3
- Jog control: 0 = Inactive, 1 = Active;
CL.2
- Direction of rotation: 0 = counter-clockwise, 1 = clockwise;
CL.1
- General enabling: 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled;
CL.0
- Start/Stop: 0 = Stop, 1 = Start.
NOTE!
The inverter will execute only the command indicated in the low-order bit, when the corresponding high-order bit has the value 1 (one). When the high-order bit has the value 0 (zero), the inverter will disregard the value of the corresponding low-order bit.
296
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
NOTE!
CL.13:
The function to save the changes of the parameters content in EEPROM occurs usually when the HMI is used. The EEPROM admits a limit number of writings
(100 000). In the applications where the speed regulator is saturated, but the torque control is desired, you must change the current limitation value at P169/
P170 (valid for P202 = 3 and 4). In this torque control condition, check if P160
(control type) = 1 (Regulator for torque control). When the network Master is writing in P169/P170 continuously, avoid to save the changes in the EEPROM, by setting:
CL.13 = 1 and CL.5 = 1
To control the functions of the Logical Control, you must set the respective inverter parameters with the Fieldbus option.
a) Local/Remote selection - P220; b) Speed reference - P221 and/or P222; c) Direction of rotation - P223 and/or P226; d) General Enabling, Start/Stop - P224 and/or P227; e) Jog Selection - P225 and/or P228.
2. Motor Speed Reference
This variable is shown by using 13-bit resolution. Hence, the reference value for the motor synchronous speed will be equal to 8191 (1FFFh).
This value shall be used just as a base speed to calculate the desired speed
(reference speed).
For example:
1) 4-poles motor, 60 Hz, synchronous speed = 1800 rpm and reference speed = 650 rpm
1800 rpm - 8191
650 rpm - X speed reference.
X = 2958 = 0B8Eh
This value 0B8Eh shall be written in the second word which represents motor
2) 6-poles motor, 60 Hz, synchronous speed = 1200 rpm and reference speed = 1000 rpm.
1200 rpm - 8191
1000 rpm - X speed reference.
X = 4096 = 1AAAh
This value 1AAAh shall be written in the second word which represents motor
NOTE!
It is possible to use values higher than 8191 (1FFFh) when it is desired to have values higher than the motor synchronous speed, since the maximum speed reference set for the inverter is respected.
3. Status of the Digital Outputs:
It allows changing the status of the Digital Outputs that are programmed for the
Fieldbus in the Parameters P275 to P280.
The word that defines the status of the digital outputs is formed by 16 bits, having the following construction:
High-order bits: define the output that shall be controlled when set to 1: bit.08
- 1 = control of the output DO1; bit.09
- 1 = control of the output DO2;
297
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.12.7.3
Fault Indications bit.10
- 1 = control of the output RL1; bit.11
- 1 = control of the output RL2; bit.12
- 1 = control of the output RL3.
Low-order bits: define the status desired for each output: bit.0
- output status DO1: 0 = output inactive, 1 = output active; bit.1
- output status DO2: 0 = output inactive, 1 = output active; bit.2
- output status RL1: 0 = output inactive, 1 = output active; bit.3
- output status RL2: 0 = output inactive, 1 = output active; bit.4
- output status RL3: 0 = output inactive, 1 = output active.
4. Parameter Number to be Read:
Through this position you can read any inverter parameter.
You must enter the number corresponding to the desired parameter and its content will be displayed in Position 4 of the “Read Inverter Variables”.
5. Number of the Parameter to be changed:
(Parameter Content Changing)
This position works jointly with Position 6 below.
If no Parameter change is desired, you have to enter in this position the code
999
.
During the changing process you must:
1) Maintain in Position 5. the code 999;
2) Change the code 999 by the parameter number you want to change;
3) If no fault code (24 to 27) is displayed in the E.L., replace the code number by the code 999, to end the change.
The change can be checked through the HMI or byreading the parameter content.
NOTES!
1) The control change from Scalar Control to Vector Control will not be accepted if any of the parameters P409 to P413 is set to zero. This must be effected through the HMI.
2) Do not set P204 = 5, since P309 = Inactive in the factory setting.
3) The desired content must be maintained by the master during 15.0 ms.
Only after this time you can send a new value or write another parameter.
6. Content of the Parameter to be changed, selected at Position 5.
(Number of the Parameter to be changed)
The format of the values set at this position must be as described in the Manual, but the value must be written without the decimal point, when the case.
When Parameters P409 to P413 are changed, small content differences can occur, when the value sent via Fieldbus is compared with the value read at Position
4 (“Parameter Content”), or with the value read via HMI. This is due the truncation
(rounding off) during the reading process.
During the read/write process via Fieldbus the following variable indications in the Logical Status can occur:
Indications in the Logical Status variable:
E24
- Parameter changing only permitted with disabled inverter.
- Parameter setting fault (refer to item 4.2.3).
E25
- Caused by:
- Read Parameter inexistent, or
- Write Parameter inexistent, or
- Write in P408 and P204.
298
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.12.7.4
Addressing of the
CFW-09 Variables in the Fieldbus
Devices
E26
- The desired content value is out of permitted range.
E27
- Caused by: a) The function selected in the Logical Control is not enabled for the
Fieldbus, or b) The control of the Digital Output is not enabled for the Fieldbus, or c) The parameter write is read-only.
The fault indication described above will be removed from the Logical
Status when the desired action is sent correctly. Except for E27 (case (b)), which reset is via write in the Logical Control.
Example: supposing that no digital output is programmed for Fieldbus, thus when in position 3, the word 11h is written, the inverter answer indicating
E27 in E.L.. To remove this indication from E.L., you must:
1) Write zero in Pos. 3.(since no DO is programmed for Fieldbus);
2) Change the variable of the logical control, to remove from E.L. the E27 indication.
The removal of the fault indication from E.L. described above, can also be realized by writing the code 999 in Pos. 5 of the “Variables written in the
Inverter”. Except for the fault E27(in the cases (a) and (b)), which reset is realized only through the writing in the Logical Control, as above exemplified.
NOTE!
The faults E24, E25, E26 and E27 do not cause any change in the inverter operation status.
HMI displays:
E29
- Fieldbus is inactive.
- This display appears when the physical connection of the inverter to the
Master is interrupted.
- You can program in Parameter P313 the action that the inverter shall execute when the fault E29 is detected.
- When the PROG key of the HMI is pressed, the E29 Fault indication is removed from the display.
E30
- Fieldbus Board is inactive.
This fault is displayed when:
1) P309 is programmed different than Inactive, without Fieldbus board in the XC140 connector of the CC9 control board; or
2) The Fieldbus board is inserted, but is defective; or
3) The Fieldbus board is inserted, but the standard programmed at P309 is not equal to the standard of the used board.
You can program in Parameter P313 which action the inverter will perform when E30 is detected.
When the PROG key of the HMI is pressed, the E30 Fault indication is removed from the display.
The variables are arranged in the memory of the Fieldbus device, starting at the address 00h, both for writing and reading. The address differences are corrected by the protocol and by communication board.
The way the variables are arranged at each address in the memory of the
Fieldbus depends on the equipment that is used as Master. For instance: in the PLC A the variables are arranged as High and Low, and in the PLC B the variables are arranged as Low and High.
299
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.13 SERIAL COMMUNICATION
8.13.1 Introduction The basic objective of the serial communication is the physical connection of inverters in a configured equipment network, as shown below:
Master PC, PLC, etc.
Slave 1
(Inverter)
Slave 2
(Inverter)
Slave n
(Inverter) n 30
The inverters possess a control software for the transmission/reception of data through the serial interface, to facilitate the data reception sent by the master and the sending of data requested by the same.
The transfer rate is 9600 bits/s, following an exchange protocol, question/ answer type by using ASCII characters.
The master is able to realize the following operations related to each inverter:
- IDENTIFICATION network number; inverter type; software version.
- CONTROL general enabling/disabling; enabling/disabling by ramp; direction of rotation; speed reference; local/remote;
JOG; error RESET.
- STATUS RECOGNITION ready;
Sub; run; local/remote; fault;
JOG; direction of rotation; setting mode after Reset to Factory Setting; setting mode after changing the Scalar Control Mode to Vector Mode; self-tuning.
300
8.13.2 Interfaces Description
8.13.2.1 RS-485
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
- PARAMETERS READING
- CHANGE OF PARAMETERS
Typical examples of network use:
PC (master) for parameterization of one or several inverters at the same time;
SDCD monitoring inverter variables;
PLC controlling the operation of an inverter in an industrial process.
The physical connection between the inverters and the network master is performed according to one of the standards below: a. RS-232 (point-to-point, up to 10 m); b. RS-485 (multipoint, galvanic isolation, up to 1000 m).
This interface allows the connection of up to 30 inverters to a master (PC,
PLC, etc), attributing to each inverter an address (1 to 30) that must be set.
In addition to these 30 addresses, there are two other addresses to perform special tasks:
Address 0: any network inverter is inquired, independently of its address.
Only one inverter can be connected to the network (point-to-point) in order to prevent short- circuits in the line interface.
Address 31: a control can be transmitted to all inverters in the network simultaneously, without acceptance recognition.
List of addresses and corresponding ASCII characters
ADDRESS
(P308)
28
29
30
31
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Table 8.20 - ASCII characters
CHAR
^
_
[
\
Z
]
X
Y
T
U
V
W
R
S
P
Q
N
O
L
M
J
K
H
I
F
G
D
E
@
A
B
C
ASCII
DEC
92
93
94
95
88
89
90
91
84
85
86
87
80
81
82
83
76
77
78
79
72
73
74
75
68
69
70
71
64
65
66
67
HEX
5C
5D
5E
5F
58
59
5A
5B
54
55
56
54
50
51
52
53
4C
4D
4E
4F
48
49
4A
4B
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
301
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.13.2.2 RS-232
8.13.3 Protocol Definitions
8.13.3.1 Used Terms
Other ASCII characters used in protocol
CODE
8
9
=
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
NAK
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
ASCII
DEC
03
04
05
06
21
56
57
61
02
52
53
54
55
48
49
50
51
HEX
03
04
05
06
15
38
39
3D
02
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
Table 8.21 - ASCII characters used in protocol
The connection between the network participants is performed through a pair of wires. The signal levels are according to STANDARD EIA RS-485 with differential receivers and transmitters. Expansion boards of the types EBA.01,
EBA.02 or EBB.01 (refer to items 8.1.1 and 8.1.2).
When the master is fitted with only a serial interface - standard RS-232, you must apply a level conversion module from RS-232 to RS-485.
In this case we have the connection of a master to an inverter (point-to-point).
Data can be changed in a bi-directional way, but not simultaneous (HALF
DUPLEX).
The logical levels meet STANDARD EIA RS-232C that determines the use of balanced signals.
In this case, one wire is used for transmission (TX), one for reception (RX) and one for return (0 V) .This configuration is a three-wire economy model. (Refer to item 8.6)
This item describes the protocol used for serial communication.
Parameters: are those existing in the inverters whose visualization or alteration is possible through the HMI interface.
Variables: are values that have specific inverter functions and that can be read and, in some cases, modified by the master.
Basic variables: are those that can be accessed only through the serial interface.
302
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM:
INVERTER
BASIC
VARIABLES
PARAMETERS
SERIALCONECTION
VARIABLES
MASTER
8.13.3.2 Parameters/Variables
Resolution
During the parameter reading/changing the decimal point is disregarded in the values received with the telegram, excepting the Basic Variables V04 (Reference via Serial) and V08 Motor Speed) that are standardized in 13 bits (0 to 8191).
For instance:
Writing: if the purpose is to change the content of P100 to 10.0 s, you must send 100 (disregarding the decimal point);
Reading: If we read 1387 in P409, the value is 1.387 (the decimal point is disregarded);
Writing: to change the content of V04 to 900 rpm, we must send:
V
04 = 900 x 8191 = 4096
Supposing P208 = 1800 rpm
Reading: If we read 1242 in V08, this value is given by:
V
08 = 1242 x P208 = 273 rpm
8.13.3.3 Characters
Format
Supposing P208 = 1800 rpm
1 start bit;
8 information bits [they codify text characters and transmission characters, removed from the 7 bits code, according to ISO 646 and complemented for even parity (eighth bit)];
1 stop bit.
After the start bit, follows the less significant bit:
START B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 STOP
Start bit
8 bits of information
Stop bit
8.13.3.4 Protocol The transmission protocol meets Standard ISO 1745 for data transmission in code. Only text characters sequences without header are used.
The errors monitoring is made through transmission related to the parity of the individual 7 bit characters, according to ISO 646. The parity monitoring is made according to DIN 66219 (even parity).
The master uses two types of messages:
303
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
READING TELEGRAM: for inquiring of the inverter variable content;
WRITING TELEGRAM: to change inverter variable content or to send controls to the inverters.
NOTE!
No transmission between two inverters is possible. The master has the bus access control.
Reading Telegram
This telegram allows the master receive from the inverter the content corresponding to the inquiry code. In the answer telegram the inverter transmits the data requested by the master.
1) Master:
EOT ADR ENQ
CODE
2) Inverter:
ADR STX
CODE
TEXT
= xH xH xH
VAL
(Hexadecimal) xH ETX BCC
Format of the reading telegram:
EOT: control character of End of Transmission;
ADR: inverter address (ASCII@, A, B, C, to ) (ADdRess);
CODE: address of the 5-digit variable coded inASCII;
ENQ: control character ENQuiry (enquiry).
Format of the inverter answer telegram:
ADR:
1 character - inverter address;
STX: control character - Start of TeXt;
TEXT: consists in:
CODE: address of the variable;
“=”: separation of character;
VAL:
4 digits value (HEXADECIMAL);
ETX: control character - End of TeXt;
BCC:
CheCksum Byte- EXCLUSIVE OR of all the bytes between STX
(excluded) and ETX (included).
NOTE!
In some cases there can be an inverter answer with:
ADR NAK refer to item 8.13.3.5
304
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Writing Telegram
This telegram sends data to the inverters variables. The inverter answers by indicating if the data have been accepted or not.
1) Master:
EOT ADR STX
CODE
TEXT
= xH xH xH
VAL
(Hexadecimal) xH ETX BCC
2) Inverter:
ADR NAK or ADR ACK
Format of the writing telegram:
EOT: control character of End Of Transmission;
ADR: inverter address;
STX: control character of Start of TeXt;
TEXT: consists in:
CODE: variable address;
“ =”: separation character;
VAL:
4 HEXADECIMAL digit value;
ETX: control character of End of TeXt;
BCC:
Byte of CheCksum - EXCLUSIVE OR of all the bytes between STX
(excluded) and ETX (included).
Format of the inverter answer telegram:
Acceptance:
ADR: inverter address;
ACK:
ACKnowledge control character;
No acceptance
:
ADR: inverter address;
NAK:
Not AcKnowledge control character.
That means that the data were not accepted and the addressed variable continues with its old value.
8.13.3.5 Execution and
Telegram Test
The inverters and the master test the telegram syntax.
The answers for the respective verified conditions are defined as follows:
Reading telegram:
No answer: with wrong telegram structure, control characters received incorrectly or wrong inverter address;
NAK: CODE corresponding to the variable does not exist or there is only writing variable;
TEXT: with valid telegrams.
305
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Writing telegram:
No answer: with wrong telegram structure, control characters received incorrectly or wrong inverter address;
NAK: code corresponding to the variable does not exist, wrong BCC
(checksum byte), only reading variable, VAL out of the allowed range for the respective variable, operation parameter out of the alteration mode;
ACK: with valid telegrams.
The master should maintain, between two variable transmissions to the same inverter, a waiting time that is compatible with the used inverter.
8.13.3.6 Telegram Sequence In the inverters, the telegrams are processed in determined time intervals.
Therefore, a pause larger than the sum of the times T to item 8.13.6).
proc
+ T di
+ T txi cit should be guaranteed, between two telegrams addressed to the same inverter (refer
8.13.3.7 Variable Code
The field designated with CODE contains the parameter address and the basic variables formed by 5 digits (ASCII characters) as follows:
CODE X X X X X
Number of the basic variable
Equipment number:
"8" = CFW-09
"9" = any inverter
Specifier:
0 = basic variables
1 = P000 to P099
2 = P100 to P199
3 = P200 to P299
4 = P300 to P399
5 = P400 to P499
6 = P500 to P599
7 = P600 to P699
Equal to zero (0)
8.13.4 Telegram Examples
1) Master:
EOT G STX 0
Change of the minimum speed (P133) to 600 rpm in the inverter 7.
2 8
NMIN Code
3 3 = 0H 2H
NMIN = 600 = 258H
5H 8H ETX BCC
Address 7
2) Inverter:
G ACK
306
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Reading of output current from the inverter at address 10
(supposing that the same was at 7.8 A at the moment of the enquiry).
1) Master:
EOT J 0 1 8
Code P003
0 3 ENQ addr. 10
2) Inverter:
J STX 0 1 8
Code P003
0 3 addr.
10
= 0H 0H 4H EH ETX BCC
NOTE!
Values sent and received via serial interface are always integer values. It is necessary to know the parameter resolution in order to read the correct value. Ex. Real Current Value = 7.8 A Received Value = 78.
8.13.5
Variables and Errors of the Serial
Communication
8.13.5.1 Basic Variables
V00 (code 00800):
Indication of the inverter type (reading variable).
The reading of this variable allows the inverter type identification. For the CFW-09 this value is 8, as defined in 8.13.3.7.
V02 (code 00802):
Indication of the inverter state (reading variable).
- Logical status (byte-high)
- Error code (byte-low)
Where:
Logical status:
EL15 EL14 EL13 EL12 EL11 EL10 EL9 EL8
307
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
EL8:
EL9:
EL10:
EL11:
EL12:
EL13:
0 = ramp enabling (run/stop) inactive
1 = ramp enabling
0 = general enabling inactive
1 = general enabling active
0 = reverse
1 = forward
0 = JOG inactive
1 = JOG active
0 = local
1 = remote
0 = without undervoltage
1 = with undervoltage
EL14 : not used
EL15: 0 = without error
1 = with error
Error Code: hexadecimal error number
Ex.: E00 00H
E01 01H
E10 0AH
V03 (code 00803):
Inverter enabled
EL8 = EL9 = 1
Selection of the Logical Control
Writing variable, whose bits have the following meaning:
BYTE HIGH: desired action mask. The corresponding bit should be set to 1, so the action happens.
CL15 CL14 CL13 CL12 CL11 CL10 CL9 CL8
MSB
- CL8: 1 = enabling ramp (Start/Stop)
- CL9: 1 = general enabling
- CL10: 1 = Forward/Reverse rotation
- CL11: 1 = JOG
- CL12: 1 = Local/Remote
- CL13: not used
- CL14: not used
- CL15: 1 = inverter “RESET”
BYTE LOW: logical level of the desired action.
LSB
CL7 CL6 CL5 CL4 CL3 CL2 CL1 CL0
MSB
- CL0: 1 = enabling (Start)
0 = disabling by ramp (Stop)
- CL1: 1 = enabling
0 = general disabling (stops by inertia)
- CL2: 1 = forward
0 = reverse
- CL3: 1 = JOG active
0 = JOG inactive
- CL4: 1 = remote
0 = local
LSB
308
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
CL5: not used
CL6: not used
CL7: the transition in this bit from 0 to 1 causes the inverter “RESET”, when any error condition is present.
NOTE!
Disabling via Dix has priority over these disabling;
To enable the inverter by the serial it is necessary that CL0 = CL1 = 1 and that the external disabling is inactive;
If CL0 = CL1 = 0 simultaneously, a general disabling occurs.
V04 (code 00804):
Reference of Frequency given by Serial (reading/writing variable).
It permits sending reference to the inverter provided P221 = 9 for LOC or
P222 = 9 for REM. This variable has a 13-bit resolution (refer to item
8.13.3.2).
V06 (code 00806):
Status of the Operation Mode (read variable)
EL2
7
EL2 EL2 EL2
6 5 4
EL2
3
EL2
2
EL2 EL2
1 0
MSB LSB
- EL2.0:1 = in setting mode after Reset for Factory Setting/First Start-up.
The inverter enter in this status as it is energized by the first time or when the factory setting for the parameters is loaded (P204 = 5 or 6). In this mode only the parameters P023, P295, P201, P296, P400, P401, P403,
P402, P404 and P406 can be accessed. If anyother parameter is accessed, the inverter displays E25. For more details, refer to item 5.2 - Initial Startup.
- EL2.1:1 = in setting mode after changing the Scalar Control to Vector Control
The inverter enters in this operation mode, when the Control Mode is changed from Scalar Control (P202 = 0, 1) or VVW (P202 = 5) to Vector
Control (P202 = 3 or 4). In this mode only the parameters P023, P202,
P295, P296, P400, P401, P403, P402, P404, P405, P406, P408, P409,
P410, P411, P412 and P413 can be accessed. If any other parameter is accessed, the inverter displays E25. For more details, refer to item 5.3.2
- Start-up Operation - Type of Control: Vector Sensorless or with Encoder.
- EL2.2:1 = Self-Tuning execution
The inverter enters in this operation mode when P202 = 3 or 4 and P408 0.
For more details about Self-tuning, refer to chapter 6 - Detailed Parameter
Description, Parameter 408.
- EL2.3: 1 = in the setting mode after changing the Control Mode from V/Hz or Vector Controls to VVW.
The inverter will enter in this operation mode when the control is changed from V/Hz (P202 = 0, 1 or 2) or Vector (P202 = 3 or 4) to VVW (P202 = 5).
In this mode only parameters P023, P202, P295, P296, P400, P401, P403,
P402, P404, P406, P407, P399, P408, P409 are accessible. In case of accessing any other parameter, the inverter will trip with an error code
E25. For additional information refer to item 5.3.3 - Start-up - Type of Control:
VVW.
- EL2.4: not used
309
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
- EL2.5: not used
- EL2.6: not used
- EL2.7: not used
V07 (code 00807):
Status of the Operation Mode (read/write variable)
CL2 CL2 CL2 CL2 CL2 CL2
7 6 5 4 3 2
MSB
CL2 CL2
1 0
LSB
- CL2.0: 1 - It exit after reset from the setting mode to factory setting
- CL2.1: 1 - After changing it exit from Scalar or VVW Control to Vector Control
- CL2.2: 1 - Aborts self-tuning
- CL2.3: 1 - Exits the setting mode after changing the Control Mode from V/Hz or Vector to VVW
- CL2.4: 1 - Not used
- CL2.5: 1 - Not used
- CL2.6: 1 - Not used
- CL2.7: 1 - Not used
V08 (code 00808):
Motor speed in 13 bits (read variable). It permits the reading of the motor speed with a 13-bit resolution (refer to item 8.13.3.2).
8.13.5.2 Examples of Telegrams with Basic Variables
Inverter enabling (provided P224 = 2 to LOC or P227 = 2 to REM)
1) Master:
EOT G STX 0 0 8 0 3 = 0H 3H
C. L. Code general enabling = 1 ramp enabling = 1 add. 7
0H
2) Inverter:
G ACK
3H ETX BCC
Change of the direction of rotation to reverse (provided P223 = 5 or 6 to
LOC or P226 = 5 or 6 to REM)
1) Master:
EOT G STX 0 0 8
C. L. Code
0 3 = 0H reverse
4H 0H add. 7
4H ETX BCC
310
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
2) Inverter:
G ACK
JOG enabling (provided P225 = 3 to LOC or P228 = 3 to REM)
1) Master:
EOT G STX 0 0 8
C. L. Code
0 3 = 0H
JOG active = 1
8H add. 7
2) Inverter:
G ACK
0H 8H ETX BCC
Fault Reset
1) Master:
EOT G STX 0 0 8
C. L. Code
0 3 = 8H
RESET = 1
0H 8H 0H ETX BCC add. 7
2) Inverter:
G ACK
8.13.5.3 Parameters Related to the Serial
Communication
Parameter number
P220
P221
P222
P223
P224
P225
P226
P227
P228
P308
Parameter description
Local/Remote selection
Local reference selection
Remote reference selection
Local forward/reverse selection
Local Start/Stop selection
Local JOG selection
Remote forward/reverse selection
Remote Start/Stop selection
Remote JOG selection
Inverter address on the Serial communication network
(range values from 1 to 30)
Table 8.22 - Parameters related to the serial communication
For further information about the parameters above, refer to chapter 6 - Detailed
Parameter Description.
311
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.13.5.4 Errors Related to the
Serial Communication
They act as follows:
They do not disable the inverter;
They do not disable defective relays;
They are informed in the word the logical status.
Fault Types
-E22: longitudinal parity fault;
-E24: parameterization fault (when some situation occurs as indicated in table 4.2. (parameter incompatibility), - chapter 4 - Keypad (HMI)
Operation, or when there is a parameter change attempt that cannot be changed with running motor;
-E25: variable or parameter not existing;
-E26: expected value out of the allowed limits;
-E27: writing attempt in a read only variable or logical control disabled;
-E28: Serial communication is inactive. If the time programmed at P314 has elapsed without the inverter receiving a valid Modbus telegram, this is displayed by the HMI and the inverter adopts the action programmed at P313.
NOTE!
If a parity fault is detected during inverter data reception, the telegram will be ignored.
The same happens when syntax errors occur.
Ex.:
- Code values different from the numbers 0 to 9;
- Separation character different from “ =”, etc.
8.13.6
Times for Read/Write of Telegrams
MASTER Tx: (data)
INVERTER
TxD: (data)
RSND (request to send) t proc t di t txi
T proc
T di
T txi
Time (ms) reading writing
Typical
10
5
15
3
312
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.13.7 Physical Connection of the RS-232 and RS-485
Interface
CFW-09 CFW-09 CFW-09
Network
Master
(PC, CLP)
Board
EBA or
EBB
Board
EBA or
EBB
Board
EBA or
EBB
RS-485
A
B
Shield cable
XC4
(EBA)
A
A B
1 1
12
XC5
(EBB)
B
B
Shield cable
A
XC4
(EBA)
A
Figure 8.49 - CFW-09 network connection through RS-485 Serial Interface
A B
1 1
12
B
XC5
(EBB)
Notes:
LINE TERMINATION: include line termination (120 ) at the ends. So set
S3.1/S3.2 (EBA) and S7.1/S7.2 (EBB) to “ON” (refer to items 8.1.1 and
8.1.2);
GROUNDING OF THE CABLE SHIELD: connect the shielding to the equipment frame (suitable grounding);
RECOMMENDED CABLE: for balanced shielding.
Ex: AFS series from KMP;
The RS-485 wiring must be laid separately from the power and control cables in 110/220 V.
The reference signal for the RS-485 interface (SREF) shall be used when the network master is not connected to the system/installation ground.
For instance, if the master is powered from an isolated power supply it is necessary to ground the power supply reference or carry this reference signal to the whole system.
In general, it is possible to connect only signals A (-) and B (+), without connecting the signal SREF.
RS-232 Serial Interface Module
The RS-232 interface is available for the CFW-09 through the module presented in item 8.6.
XC7 RS-232
5 V
0 V
1
2
3
6
5
4
TX
0 V
RX
Figure 8.50 - Description of the XC7 (RJ12) connector
313
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Note:
The RS-232 wiring must be laid separately from the power and control cables in 110/220 V.
NOTE!
You cannot use simultaneously the RS-232 and the RS-485 interface.
8.14 MODBUS-RTU
8.14.1 Introduction in the
Modbus-RTU Protocol
The Modbus protocol has been already developed 1979 firstly. Currently it is a wide diffused open protocol, used by several manufacturers in different equipment. The Modbus-RTU communication of the do CFW-09 has been developed by considering two documents:
1. MODBUS Protocol Reference Guide Rev. J, MODICON, June 1996.
2. MODBUSApplication Protocol Specification, MODBUS.ORG, may 8 th 2002.
In these documents are defined the format of the messages used by these elements that are part of the Modbus network, the services (or functions) that can be made available via network, and also how these elements exchange the data on the network.
8.14.1.1 Transmission Modes
Start
8.14.1.2 Message Structure in RTU Mode
Two transmission modes are defined in the protocol definition:ASCII and RTU.
The transmission modes define the form how the message bytes are transmitted. It is not permitted to use the two transmission modes on the same network.
In the RTU mode each transmitted word has one start bit, eight data bits, 1 parity bit (optional) and 1 stop bit (2 stop bits, if no parity bit is used). Thus the bit sequence for the transmission of 1 byte is as follows:
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 Parity or Stop Stop
In the RTU mode each transmitted word has 1 start bit, eight data bits, 1 parity bit (optional) and 1 stop bit (2 stop bits, if parity bit is not used). Thus the bit sequence for the transmission is as follows:
The Modbus RTU network operates in Master-Slave system and it can consist of up to 247 slaves but only one Master. The master always initiates the communication with a question to a slave and the slave answers the question.
Both messages (question and answer) have the same structure: Address,
Function Code and CRC. Depending on what is being requested, only the data field has variable length.
Master Query Message
Address (1 byte)
Function Code (1 byte)
Data (n bytes)
CRC (2 bytes)
Address (1 byte)
Function Code (1 byte)
Data (n bytes)
CRC (2 bytes)
Slave Answer Message
Figure 8.51 - Message structure
314
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Address:
The master initiates the communication by sending one byte with the address of the slave to which the message is addressed. The slave with the right slave address initiates the message with its own address. The master can also send a message destined to address 0 (zero), which means that the message is destined to all network slaves (broadcast). In this case no slave will answer to the master.
Function Code:
This field contains an only byte, where the master specifies the type of service or the function requested to the slave (read, write, etc.). According to the protocol, each function is used to access a specific data type. In the CFW-09 all data are available as holding type registers (referenced from the address
40000 or’ 4x’). Besides these registers, the inverter status (enabled/disabled, with error/no error and the command for the inverter (Start/Stop, Run CW/
CCW, etc.) can be also accessed through the coils read/write functions or the internal bits (referenced from the address 00000 or ‘0x’ on).
Data Field:
This field has variable length. The format and the content of this field depend on the used function and transmitted values. This field and the respective functions are described in item 8.14.3.
CRC:
The last part of the message is the field for checking the transmission errors.
The used method is the CRC-16 (Cycling Redundancy Check). This field is formed by two bytes, where the least significant byte (CRC-) is transmitted first and only then the most significant byte is transmitted (CRC+).
CRC calculation is started by loading a 16-bit variable (mentioned from now on as CRC variable) with FFFFh value. Then following steps are executed with the following routine:
1. The first message byte (only the data bits - the start bit, parity bit and stop bit are not used) is submitted to the XOR logic (OR exclusive) with the 8 least significant bits of the CRC variable, returning the result to the CRC variable.
2. Then the CRC variable is displaced one position to the right, in the direction of the least significant bit and the position of the most significant bit is filled out with zero 0 (zero).
3. After this displacement, the flag bit (bit that has been displaced out the
CRC variable) is analyzed, by considering the following:
If the bit value is 0 (zero), no change is made.
If the bit value is 1, the CRC variable content is submitted to XOR logic with a constant A001h value and the value is returned to the
CRC variable.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the eight displacements have been realized.
5. Repeat the steps 1 to 4, by using the next byte message until the whole message have been processed. The end content of the CRC variable is the value of the CRC field that is transmitted at the end of the message.
The least significant part is transmitted first (CRC), only then the most significant part (CRC+) is transmitted.
315
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Times between Messages:
In the RTU mode there is no specific character that indicates the beginning or the end of a message. Thus the only indication for the beginning or the end of a new message is the data transmission absence in the network by 3.5 times the time required for transmission of one data word (11 bits). Thus if a message is initiated after elapsing of the minimum time required without transmission, the network elements assume that the received character represents the beginning of a new message. In similar mode, after this time has elapsed, the network elements will assume that the message has been ended.
If during the transmission of a message, the time between the bytes is longer than this minimum required time, the message will be considered invalid, since the inverter will discard the already received bytes and will mount a new message with the bytes that are being transmitted.
The table below shows the time for three different communication rates.
Signal T
3.5 x
T between bytes
T
3.5 x
Time
T
11 bits
Message
Figure 8.52 - Times required during the communication of a message
Communication Rate
9600 kbits/sec
19200 kbits/sec
38400 kbits/sec
T
11 bits
1.146 ms
573 s
285 s
T
3.5x
4.010 ms
2.005 ms
1.003 ms
T
11 bits
T entrebytes
T
3.5x
= Time to transmit one word of the message.
= Time between bytes (can not be longer than T
3.5x
).
= Minimum interval to indicate the begin and the end of the message (3.5 x T
11bits
).
8.14.2
Operation of the
CFW-09 in the
Modbus-RTU
Network
The CFW-09 frequencyinverters operate as slaves of the Modbus-RTU network.
The communication initiates with the master of the Modbus-RTU network requesting a service for a network address. When the inverter is configured to the corresponding address, it processes the question and answers to the master as requested.
8.14.2.1 Interface RS-232 and
RS-485 Description
The CFW-09 frequency inverters use a serial interface for the communication with the Modbus-RTU network. There are two ways to perform the connection between the network master and the CFW-09:
316
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.14.2.2 Inverter
Configuration in the
Modbus-RTU
Network
8.14.2.3 Access to the
Inverter Data
RS-232:
The interface is used for the point-to-point connection (between a single slave and the master).
Maximum distance: 10 meters.
Signal levels according to EIA STANDARD RS-232C.
Three wires: transmission (TX), reception (RX) and return (0 V).
The serial interface RS-232 must be used.
RS-485:
This interface is used for multipoint connection (several slaves and the master).
Maximum distance: 1000 meters (use of shielded cables).
Signal levels according to EIA STANDARD RS-485.
You must use the EBA or EBB expansion board that has interface for the
RS-485 communication.
Note: for connection, refer to item 8.13.7.
To ensure a correct communication in the network, you must configure the inverter address in the network as well as the transfer rate and the existing parity type, besides the correct physical connection.
Inverter Address in the Network:
The inverter address is defined through the parameter P308.
If the serial communication type (P312) has been configured to Modbus-
RTU, you may select the addresses from 1 to 247.
Each slave shall have a different address.
The master does not have address.
The slave address must be known, even when connection is made pointto-point.
Transmission Rate and Parity:
Both configurations are defined by parameter P312.
Baud rates: 9600, 19200 or 38400 kbits/sec.
Parity: None, odd or even.
All slaves and even the network master must use the same baud rate and parity.
All parameters and available basic variables for the CFW-09 can be accessed through the network:
Parameters: are those set in the inverter and that can be displayed and changed through the HMI (Human-Machine Interface) (refer to item I -
Parameters).
Basic Variables: are the internal inverter variables that can be accessed only through serial interface. For instance, through these basic variables you can change the speed reference, read the inverter status, enable or disable the inverter, etc. (refer to item 8.13.5.1 - Basic Variables).
Register: nomenclature used to represent both parameters and basic variables during data transfer.
Internal Bits: bits that are accessed only through the serial interface and that are used for inverter status controlling and monitoring.
item 8.13.3.2 defines the resolution of the parameters and variables transmitted via serial interface.
317
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Available Functions and Response Times:
In the Modbus RTU protocol specification is defined the functions used for accessing different types of registers described in the specification. In the
CFW-09 both parameters and basic variables are defined as being holding type registers (referenced as 4x). In addition to these registers, it is also possible to access the internal controlling and monitoring bits directly
(referenced as 0x).
Following services (or functions) are available in the CFW-09 frequency inverter for accessing these registers:
Read Coils
Description: reading of internal register blocks or coils.
Function code: 01.
Broadcast: not supported.
Response time: 5 to 10 ms.
Read Holding Registers
Description: reading of register blocks of holding type.
Function code: 03.
Broadcast: not supported.
Response time: 5 to 10 ms.
Write Single Coil
Description: writing in a single internal bit or coil.
Function code: 05.
Broadcast: supported.
Response time: 5 to 10 ms.
Write Single Register
Description: writing in a single register of holding type.
Function code: 06.
Broadcast: supported.
Response time: 5 to 10 ms.
Write Multiple Coils
Description: writing in internal bit blocks or coils.
Function code: 15.
Broadcast: supported.
Response time: 5 to 10 ms.
Write Multiple Registers
Description: writing in register blocks of holding type.
Function code: 16.
Broadcast: supported.
Response time: 10 to 20 ms for each written register.
Read Device Identification
Description: Identification of the inverter model.
Function code: 43.
Broadcast: not supported.
Response time: 5 a 10 ms.
Note:
The Modbus RTU network slaves are addressed from 1 to 247. Master uses address 0 to send messages that are common to all slaves (broadcast).
Data Addressing and Offset:
The CFW-09 data addressing is realized with an offset equal to zero that means that the address number is equal to the register number. The parameters are available from address 0 (zero) on, whilst the basic variables are available from address 5000 on. In same way, the status bits are made available from
318
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES address 0 (zero) on and the control bits are made available from address
100 on.
Table below shows the addressing of bits, parameters and basic variables:
Parameter Number
P000
P001
P100
Parameters
Decimal
Modbus Address
Hexadecimal
0
1
00h
01h
100 64h
Number of the
Basic Variable
V00
V01
V08
Basic Variables
Modbus Address
Decimal
5000
5001
Hexadecimal
1388h
1389h
5008 1390h
Bit Number
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 7
Status Bits
Decimal
Modbus Address
Hexadecimal
00
01
00h
01h
07 07h
Bit Number
Bit 100
Bit 101
Bit 107
Commands Bits
Decimal
Modbus Address
Hexadecimal
100
101
64h
65h
107 6Bh
Note:
All registers (parameters and basic variables) are considered as holding type registers, referenced from 40000 or 4x, whilst the bits are referenced from 0000 or 0x.
The status bits have the same functions of the bits 8 to 15 of the logic status (basic variable 2). These bits are available only for read, thus any attempt to write command returns error status to the master.
319
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.14.3
Detailed Function
Description
Bit Number
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Status Bits
Function
0 = Ramp enabling inactive
1 = Ramp enabling active
0 = General enabling inactive
1 = General enabling active
0 = Counter-clockwise direction of rotation
1 = Clockwise direction of rotation
0 = JOG inactive
1 = JOG active
0 = Local Mode
1 = Remote Mode
0 = No undervoltage
1 = With undervoltage
Not used
0 = No fault
1 = With fault
The command bits are available to read and write and they have the same function of the logic command bits 0 to 7 (basic variable 3), however no requiring the use of the mask. The basic variable 3 write influences the status of these bits.
Bit Number
Bit 100
Bit 101
Bit 102
Bit 103
Bit 104
Bit 105
Bit 106
Bit 107
Command Bits
Function
0 = Ramp disable (Stop)
1 = Ramp enable (Start)
0 = General disable
1 = General enable
0 = Counter-clockwise direction of rotation
1 = Clockwise direction of rotation
0 = JOG disable
1 = JOG enable
0 = Goes to local mode
1 = Goes to remote mode
Not used
Not used
0 = It does not reset inverter
1 = It resets inverter
This Item describes in details the functions that are available in the CFW-09 for the Modbus RTU communication. Please note the following during the message preparation:
Values are always transmitted as hexadecimal values.
The address of one data, the data number and the value of the registers are always represented through 16 bits. Thus these fields are transmitted by using two bytes (high and low). To access the bits, and the form to represent one bit depend on the used function.
The messages, both for enquiry and response, cannot be longer than 128 bytes.
The resolution of each parameter or basic variable is as described in item
8.13.3.2.
320
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.14.3.1 Function 01 -
Read Coils
It reads the content of an internal group of bits that must compulsorily in a numerical sequence. This function has the following structure for the read and response messages (the values are always hexadecimal, and each filed represents one byte):
Query (Master)
Slave address
Function
Initial bit address (byte high)
Initial bit address (byte low)
Number of bits (byte high)
Number of bits (byte low)
CRC-
CRC+
-
Response (Slave)
Slave address
Function
Byte Count Field (number of data bytes)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3 etc to
CRC-
CRC+
Each response bit is placed at a position of the data bytes sent by the slave. The first byte, from the bits 0 to 7, receives the first 8 bits from the initial address indicated by the master. The other bytes (if the number of the read bits is higher than 8) remain in the same sequence. If the number of the read bits is not a multiple of 8, the remaining bits of the last byte should be filled out with 0 (zero).
Example: reading of the status bits for general enable (bit 1) and direction of rotation (bit 2) of then CFW-09 at the address 1:
Query (Master)
Field
Slave address
Function
Initial bit address (byte high)
Initial bit address (byte low)
Number of bits (byte high)
Number of bits (byte low)
CRC-
CRC+
Value
01h
01h
00h
01h
00h
02h
ECh
0Bh
Response (Slave)
Field
Slave address
Function
Byte Count
Status of the bits 1 and 2
CRC-
CRC+
-
-
Value
01h
01h
01h
02h
D0h
49h
-
-
As the number of read bits in the example is smaller than 8, the slave required only 1 byte for the response. The value of the byte was 02h, that as binary value will have the form 0000 0010.As the number of read bits is equal to 2, only the two less significant bits, that have the value 0 = general disable and 1 = direction of rotation, are of interest. The other bits, as they did not be requested, are filled out with 0 (zero).
8.14.3.2 Function 03 - Read
Holding Register
It reads the content of a group of registers that must be compulsorily in a numerical sequence. This function has following structure for the read and response messages (the values are always hexadecimal values, and each field represents one byte):
321
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Query (Master)
Slave address
Function
Initial register address (byte high)
Initial register address (byte low)
Number of registers (byte high)
Number of registers (byte low)
CRC-
CRC+
-
-
Response (Slave)
Slave address
Function
Byte Count Field
Data 1 (high)
Data 1 (low)
Data 2 (high)
Data 2 (low) etc to
CRC-
CRC+
Example: Read of the value proportional to the frequency value (P002) and motor current (P003) of the CFW-09 at address 1:
Query (Master)
Field
Slave address
Function
Initial register (byte high)
Initial register (byte low)
Number of registers (byte high)
Number of registers (byte low)
CRC-
CRC+
-
Value
01h
03h
00h
02h
00h
02h
65h
CBh
-
Field
Response (Slave)
Slave address
Function
Byte Count
P002 (high)
P002 (low)
P003 (high)
P003 (low)
CRC-
CRC+
Value
01h
03h
04h
03h
84h
00h
35h
7Ah
49h
Each register is always formed by two bytes (high e low). For the example, we have P002 = 0384h, that in decimal number is equal to 900.
As these parameters do not have a decimal place indication, the real read value is 900 rpm. In the same way we will have a current value
P003 = 0035h, that is equal to a 53 decimal. As the current has a decimal resolution, the read value is 5.3 A.
8.14.3.3 Function 05 - Write
Single Coil
This function is used to write a value to a single bit. The bit value is represented by using two bytes, where FF00h represents the bit that is equal to 1, and 0000h represents the bit that is equal to 0 (zero). It has the following structure (the values are always hexadecimal, and each field represents one byte):
Query (Master)
Slave address
Function
Bit address (byte high)
Bit address (byte low)
Bit value (byte high)
Bit value (byte low)
CRC-
CRC+
Response (Slave)
Slave address
Function
Bit address (byte high)
Bit address (byte low)
Bit value (byte high)
Bit value (byte low)
CRC-
CRC+
322
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Example: to drive a ramp enable command (bit 100 = 1) of a CFW-09 at the address 1:
8.14.3.4 Function 06 - Write
Single Register
Query (Master)
Field
Slave address
Function
Bit number (high)
Bit number (low)
Bit value (high)
Bit value (low)
CRC-
CRC+
Value
01h
05h
00h
64h
FFh
00h
CDh
E5h
Field
Response (Slave)
Slave address
Function
Bit number (high)
Bit number (low)
Bit value (high)
Bit value (low)
CRC-
CRC+
Value
01h
05h
00h
64h
FFh
00h
CDh
E5h
For this function, the slave response is an identical copy of the query sent by the master.
This function is used to write a value to a single register. This function has following structure (values are always hexadecimal values, and each field represents one byte):
Query (Master)
Slave address
Function
Register address (byte high)
Register address (byte low)
Value for the register (byte high)
Value for the register (byte low)
CRC-
CRC+
Response (Slave)
Slave address
Function
Register address (byte high)
Register address (byte low)
Value for the register (byte high)
Value for the register (byte low)
CRC-
CRC+
Example: write of the speed reference (basic variable 4) equal to 900 rpm, of a
CFW-09 at address 1. Please, remember that the value for the basic variable 4 depends on the used motor type and that the value 8191 is equal to the rated motor speed. In this case, we suppose that the used motor has a rated speed of 1800 rpm, thus the value to be written into the basic variable 4 for a speed of
900 rpm is the halve of 8191, i.e., 4096 (1000h).
Query (Master)
Field
Slave address
Function
Register (high)
Register (low)
Value (high)
Value (low)
CRC-
CRC+
Value
01h
06h
13h
8Ch
10h
00h
41h
65h
Field
Response (Slave)
Slave address
Function
Register (high)
Register (low)
Value (high)
Value (low)
CRC-
CRC+
Value
01h
06h
13h
8Ch
10h
00h
41h
65h
For this function, the slave response will be again a copy identical to the request madebythe master.Asalreadyinformedabove,thebasic variables areaddressed from 5000, thus the basic variable 4 will be addressed at 5004 (138Ch).
323
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.14.3.5 Function 15 - Write
Multiple Coils
This function allows writing values for a bit group that must be in numerical sequence. This function can be also used to write a single bit (the values are always hexadecimal, and each field represents one byte).
Query (Master)
Slave address
Function
Initial bit address (byte high)
Initial bit address (byte low)
Number of bits (byte high)
Number of bits (byte low)
Byte Count Field (number of data bytes)
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3 etc to
CRC-
CRC+
Response (Slave)
Slave address
Function
Initial bit address (byte high)
Initial bit address (byte low)
Number of bits (byte high)
Number of bits (byte low)
CRC-
CRC+
-
-
-
-
-
The value of each bit that is being sent is placed at a position of the data bytes sent by the master. The first byte, in the bits 0 to 7, receives the 8 first bits by starting from the initial address indicated by the master. The other bytes (if the number of inscribed bits is higher than 8) remain in sequence. If the number of inscribed bits is not a multiple of 8, the remaining bits of the last byte should be filled in with 0 (zero).
Example: command writing for general enabling (bit 100 = 1), general enabling (bit 101 = 1) and CWW-direction of rotation (bit 102 = 0), for a CFW-09 at address 1:
Query (Master)
Field
Slave address
Function
Initial bit (byte high)
Initial bit (byte low)
Number of bits (byte high)
Number of bits (byte low)
Byte Count
Bits Value
CRC-
CRC+
Value
01h
0Fh
00h
64h
00h
03h
01h
03h
BEh
9Eh
Response (Slave)
Field
Slave address
Function
Initial bit (byte high)
Initial bit (byte low)
Number of bits (byte high)
Number of bits (byte low)
CRC-
CRC+
-
-
Value
01h
0Fh
00h
64h
00h
03h
54h
15h
-
-
As only three bits are written, the master needed only one byte to transmit the data. The transmitted values are in the three less significant bits of the byte that contains the value for the bits. The other bits of this byte remained with the value 0 (zero).
324
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.14.3.6 Function 16 - Write
Multiple Registers
This function allows writing values to a register group that must be in numerical sequence. This function can also be used to write a single register (the values are always hexadecimal values and each field represents one byte).
Query (Master)
Slave address
Function
Initial register address (byte high)
Initial register address (byte low)
Number of registers (byte high)
Number of registers (byte low)
Byte Count Field (number of data bytes)
Data 1 (high)
Data 1 (low)
Data 2 (high)
Data 2 (low) etc to
CRC-
CRC+
Response (Slave)
Slave Address
Function
Initial register address (byte high)
Initial register address (byte low)
Number of registers (byte high)
Number of registers (byte low)
CRC-
CRC+
-
-
-
-
-
-
Example: writing of the acceleration time P100 = 1.0 s and deceleration time P101 = 2.0 s, of a CFW-09 at the address 20:
Query (Master)
Field
Slave address
Function
Initial register (byte high)
Initial register (byte low)
Number of registers (byte high)
Number of registers (byte low)
Byte Count
P100 (high)
P100 (low)
P101 (high)
P101 (low)
CRC-
CRC+
04h
00h
0Ah
00h
14h
91h
75h
Value
14h
10h
00h
64h
00h
02h
Field
Response (Slave)
Slave address
Function
Initial register (byte high)
Initial register (byte low)
Number of registers (byte high)
Number of registers (byte low)
CRC-
CRC+
-
-
-
-
-
As the two parameters have a resolution of a decimal place for writing of 1.0
and 2.0 seconds, thus the values 10 (000Ah) and 20 (0014h) should be transmitted.
-
-
-
02h
D2h
-
-
Value
14h
10h
00h
64h
00h
02h
325
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.14.3.7 Function 43 - Read
Device Identification
Auxiliary function that permits reading of the manufacturer, model and version of the product firmware. It has following structure.
Query (Master)
Slave address
Function
MEI Type
Read Code
Object Number
CRC-
CRC+
-
-
-
-
-
Response (Slave)
Slave Address
Function
MEI Type
Conformity Level
More Follows
Next Object
Number of Objects
Object Code*
Object Length*
Object Value*
CRC-
CRC+
*The fields are repeated according to the number of objects.
This function permits reading of three information categories:
Basic, Regular and Extended and each category are formed by a group of objects. Each object is formed by a sequence of ASCII characters For the
CFW-09 are only available basic information formed by three objects:
Object 00 - VendorName: always ‘WEG’.
Object 01 - ProductCode: formed by the product code (CFW-09), plus the rated inverter current.
Object 02 - MajorMinorRevision: it indicates the inverter firmware version, in ‘VX.XX’ format.
The read code indicates which information categories are being read and if the objects are accessed individually of by sequence.
In the example, the inverter supports 01 (basic information in sequence), and
04 (individual access to the objects).
The other fields for the CFW-09 have fixed values.
Example: read o basic information in sequence, starting from object 00, of a
CFW-09 at address 1:
Query (Master)
Field
Slave address
Function
MEI Type
Read Code
Object Number
CRC-
-
-
-
-
CRC+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
77h
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Value
01h
2Bh
0Eh
01h
00h
70h
Response (Slave)
Field
Slave address
Function
MEI Type
Read Code
Conformity Level
More Follows
Next Object
Number of Objects
Object Code
Object Length
Object Value
Object Code
Object Length
Object Value
Object Code
Object Length
Object Value
CRC-
CRC+
Value
01h
2Bh
0Eh
01h
51h
00h
00h
03h
00h
03h
‘WEG’
01h
0Eh
‘CFW-09 7.0A’
02h
05h
‘V2.09’
B8h
39h
326
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.14.4 Communication Errors
8.14.4.1 Error Messages
In the example the Object Value has not been represented as hexadecimal value, but with corresponding ASCII characters.
For instance, for the object 00, the 'WEG' value has been transmitted as being three ASCII characters, that as hexadecimal have the values 57h (W),
45h (E) and 47h (G).
Errors can occur during the message transmission on network, or in the content of the received messages. Depending on the error type, inverter may answer or not to the master:
When the master sends a message to an inverter configured at determined network address, the inverter will not response if:
Error in the parity bit.
Error the CRC.
Timeout between transmitted bytes (3.5 times the time required for the transmission of an 11-bit word).
In the case of a successful reception of the message, the inverter can detect problems and send an error message to the master indicating the problem that has been verified:
Invalid function (error code = 1): the requested function has not been implemented for the inverter.
Invalid data address (error code = 2): the data address (register or bit) does not exist.
Data value invalid (error code = 3): this error occurs in the following conditions:
- Value is out of permitted range.
- Writing in data that cannot be changed (only read register, or register that does not allow changing with enabled inverter or bits of logic status).
- Writing in function of the logic command that has not been enabled via serial interface.
When any error occurs in the message content (not during the data transfer), the slave must return a message indicating the error type that occurred. The errors that may occur in the CFW-08 during the message processing are errors relating to invalid function (code 01), invalid data address (code 02) and invalid data value (code 03).
The messages sent by the slave have following structure:
Response (Slave)
Slave address
Function Code
(with most significant bit to 1)
Error code
CRC-
CRC+
Master requests from the slave at address 1 to write parameter 89
(inexistent parameter):
327
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Query (Master)
Field
Slave address
Function
Register (high)
Register (low)
Value (high)
Value (low)
CRC-
CRC+
Value
01h
06h
00h
59h
00h
00h
59h
D9h
Response (Slave)
Field
Slave address
Function
Error Code
CRC-
CRC+
-
-
-
Value
01h
86h
02h
C3h
A1h
-
-
-
328
8.15 KIT KME (for Extractable
Mounting)
Lifting support set
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
The kit KME enables the mounting of CFW-09 inverter in the sizes 7, 8, 8E, 9,
10 and 10E (models 361 A to 600 A/380-480 V, 107 A to 472 A/500-690 V and
100 A to 428 A/660-690 V) in the panel in an extractable form. The inverter is mounted in the panel like a sliding drawer, thus making easier the assembling and maintenance works. When requesting this kit, please specify the following:
Item
417104899
417104467
417104898
417104896
417104897
417104895
Description
KIT KME - CFW-09 M10/L = 1000
Notes
Size 10 - 450 A to 600 A/380-480 V and
Size 10E - 247 A to 472 A/500-690 V and
255 A to 428 A/660-690 V
KIT KME - CFW-09 M10/L = 800
Panel width = 1000 mm (39.37 in)
Size 10 - 450 A to 600 A/380-480 V and
Size 10E - 247 A to 472 A/500-690 V and
255 A to 428 A/660-690 V
KIT KME - CFW-09 M9/L = 800
KIT KME - CFW-09 M8/L = 600
KIT KME - CFW-09 M8/L = 800
KIT KME - CFW-09 M7/L = 600
Panel width = 800 mm (31.50 in)
Size 9 - 312 A to 361 A/380-480 V
Panel width = 800 mm (31.50 in)
Size 8 - 211 A to 240 A/380-480 V and
Size 8E - 107 A to 211 A/500-690 V and
100 A to 179 A/660-690 V
Panel width = 600 mm (23.62 in)
Size 8 - 211 A to 240 A/380-480 V
Size 8E - 107 A to 211 A/500-690 V and
100 A to 179 A/660-690 V
Panel width = 800 mm (31.50 in)
Size 7 - 142 A/380-480 V and
44 A to 79 A/500-600 V
Painel width = 600 mm (23.62 in)
Note:
Please refer to drawings in item 9.4.
Guide base of the KIT-KME for panel mounting
M8x20 hexagon socket-head screw
Lateral guides for the car
Figure 8.53 - Mounting of the KIT-KME on the inverter
Panel support
329
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.16 CFW-09 SHARK
NEMA 4X
In applications that need a inverter with a higher protection enclosure, the
CFW-09 SHARK NEMA 4X is indicated. The NEMA 4X provides protection against dust, dirt and splashing or hose-directed water.
8.16.1
Enclosure
Specifications
8.16.2
Mechanical
Installation
Figure 8.54 - CFW-09 Shark Nema 4X
The SHARK NEMA 4X is the CFW-09 standard with a stainless steel enclosure. The models are:
CFW 09 0006 T 2223
CFW 09 0007 T 2223
CFW 09 0010 T 2223
CFW 09 0016 T 2223
CFW 09 0003 T 3848
CFW 09 0004 T 3848
CFW 09 0005 T 3848
CFW 09 0009 T 3848
CFW 09 0013 T 3848
CFW 09 0016 T 3848
Size 1
(*)
Size 2
(*)
Size 1
(*)
Size 2
(*)
(*)
The Shark inverter dimensions are distinct from thestandard CFW-09 inverter, so, the Sizes 1 and 2 from the Shark inverter are different from the Sizes 1 and 2 of the standard CFW-09.
NEMAType 4X indoors;
NEMAType 12 indoors;
IP 56;
Other specifications are same to the standard CFW-09 and are explained along this manual.
The inverter comes covered by a plastic film. Remove this sheet before starting the installation.
Install the inverter in an environment that does not exceed Type 4 / 4X / 12 limitations.
Install the inverter on a flat surface, in the vertical position.
External dimensions and mounting holes are according to figures 8.55 and
8.56.
330
Cable glands for control cable
(3x) Min = 10.0
Max = 14.0
Cable glands for power cable
(3x) Min = 13.0
Max = 18.0
Cable glands for fan wiring
110 (4.33)
62 (2.44)
80 (3.14)
146 (5.74)
167 (6.57)
184 (7.24)
234 (9.21)
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
A
7.20 (0.28)
M6
Air Flow
Outlet
R12
16.00
(0.63)
A
B
7.20 (0.28)
M6
200 (7.87)
12.5 (0.49)
Air Flow
Inlet B
Figure 8.55 - Mechanical data – Size 1, dimensions mm (in)
Cable glands for control cable
(3x) Min = 10.0
Max = 14.0
Cable glands for power cable
(3x) Min = 13.0
Max = 18.0
Cable glands for fan wiring
110 (4.33)
129 (5.08)
161 (6.34)
172 (6.77)
199 (7.83)
216 (8.50)
238 (9.37)
280 (11.02)
A
7.20 (0.28)
M6
Air Flow
Outlet
R12
16.00
(0.63)
B
7.20 (0.28)
M6
230 (9.05)
Air Flow
Inlet
Figure 8.56 - Mechanical data – Size 2, dimensions mm (in)
331
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.16.3
Electrical
Installation
The electrical installation is the same as CFW-09 standard. Refer to chapter
3, item 3.2 to make a correct electrical installation.
NOTE!
To assure the NEMA4X total protection, it is necessary to use correct cables.
It is recommended to use armored multi-core cables. For example, one tetrapolar armored cable for Power supply (R, S, T) plus grounding, and another tetra-polar armored cable for output (motor) connection.
The wire sizing and fuses are presented in table 3.5, chapter 3.
8.16.4
Closing the Inverter
Figure 8.57 - Tetra-polar armored cable
The control and power wiring access to the inverter is through the cable glands.
All the cable glands come with a gasket inside. To make the electrical installation it is necessary to remove the gasket from the cable gland and then pass the armored multi-core cable in the cable gland.
After doing the electrical connection and arrange the cables properly, tight the cable glands to assure that the cable is very strongly fastened. The recommended torque is 2 N.m (0.2 kgf.m).
The control wiring has to be made by armored multi-core cables too. It is necessary to use this type of cables to guarantee total closing after cable glands tightening. Check the maximum and minimum diameter of the cables supported by the Cable Glands in figures 8.55 and 8.56.
To guarantee NEMA 4X degree of protection, it is very important to close correctly the inverter after doing the electrical installation. Please, follow these instructions:
After the electrical installation is completed and the cable glands tightened, close the frontal cover (certify that the flat cable that interconnects the HMI to the control card is correctly connected) by tightening each screw a little at a time, until total tightening.
The gaskets provide the protection of the electronic parts of the SHARK inverter.
Any problem with them can cause problems with the protection degree.
Opening and closing the inverter many times reduces the gaskets lifetime. It is recommended to do this no more than 20 times. If problems are detected on the gaskets, we recommend changing the failed gasket immediately.
Certify that the door gasket is on its correct position at the moment you will close the inverter.
Certify that the door screw gaskets are perfect on the moment you are ready to close the inverter.
All these recommendations are very important to become a successful installation.
332
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
8.16.5
8.17
8.18
How to Specify
CFW-09 SUPPLIED
BY THE DC LINK –
LINE HD
CFW-09 RB
REGENERATIVE
CONVERTER
NOTE!
Do not remove the gaskets inside the cable glands, which were not used.
They are necessary to guarantee NEMA 4X protection.
To specify a NEMA 4X inverter, it is necessary to include the term “N4” in the field “Enclosure Degree of Protection” according to the CFW-09 specification in chapter 2, item 2.4 (CFW-09 Identification). Remember that the NEMA 4X line is only up to 10 hp.
The CFW-09HD inverter line, supplied by DC Link, has the same installation, mechanical, programming and performance characteristics as the Standard
CFW-09 line;
Up to size 5, an HD inverter is required to make the supply through the DC
Link. In this case is sufficient to supply a standard inverter through the DC
Link with an external pre-charge circuit;
The models of size 6 and larger are fitted with an internal pre-charge circuit and have internal changes;
For more detail, refer please to the Addendum of the CFW-09 Frequency
Inverter Manual of the CFW-09HD line – supplied by DC Link. (Refer to www.weg.net).
There are two problems associated to a conventional inverter with diode bridge at the input: harmonics injection to the network and braking of loads with high inertia, or that run at high speeds and require short braking times. The harmonic injection to the network happens with any type of load. The braking problems appear with loads such as sugar centrifuges, dynamometers, cranes and winders. The CFW-09 converter with RB option (Regenerative Braking) is
WEG solution for these problems (refer to figure 8.58).
Shows the main components of a inverter with CFW-09 RB.
Input Reat.
Supply
Motor
Filter
Figure 8.58 - Simplified diagram of a driving with CFW-09 RB
333
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
As shown in the figure 8.58, CFW-09RB unit is fitted with a capacitor bank and an IGBTs bridge.
Externally is mounted a network reactance and a capacitive filter.
By switching the IGBTs bridge, the energy can be transferred in a controlled way from the network to the capacitor bank. One can say that by means of the switching process, the CFW-09RB emulates a resistive load. There is also a capacitive filter to prevent the bridge switching interferes in other network loads. To complete this drive, the use of a CFW-09HD is required that drives the motor and its load. This drive is shown in figure 8.58 by the second de
IGBTs bridge. Figure 8.59 a) shows wave shapes of the CFW-09 RB input voltage and current, when the motor at the drive output is operating normally.
Voltage
Current
Time
Figure 8.59 a) - Functioning during operation as motor
Figure 8.59 b) shows the wave shapes of the CFW-09 RB input voltage and current, when the motor at the drive output is submitted to a braking process.
Voltage
Current
Time
Figure 8.59 b) - Functioning during the braking process
For more details, refer to the CFW-09 RB Regenerative Converter Manual.
(Refer to www.weg.net).
334
8.19 PLC BOARD
CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
The PLC1 and PLC2 boards allow the CFW-09 inverter to have PLC function, speed reference and positioning modules. This board is optional and is incorporated internally into the CFW-09.
Both boards cannot be used simultaneously with the EBA, EBB, EBC, EBE boards.
The PLC1 cannot be used with Fieldbus boards.
The PLC2 can have Fieldbus board mounted.
Technical Characteristics
Positioning with trapezoidal and “S” profile (absolute and relative);
Homing (machine zero search);
Programming in Ladder language through the WLP Software, Timers,
Contactors, Coils and Contacts;
RS-232 with Modbus RTU protocol;
Availability of 100 parameters that may be set by the user through the
Software or via HMI;
CAN interface with CANopen and DeviceNet protocols;
Master/Slave function (ElectronicGear Box);
It has own 32 bits CPU with flash memory.
Speed
Position 1
(t
0 to t
2
)
V1
Position 3
(t
5
- t
12
)
V3 t
1 t
2 t
3 t
4 t
5 t
6 t
7 t
8 t
9 t
10 t
11
Time t
12
V2
Position 2
(t
2 to t
5
)
Figure 8.60 - Trajectory example by using the PLC board
Input/Output
Quantities
Technical Specification
PLC 1
Description Quantities
PLC 2
Description
Digital inputs
Relay outputs
9
3
24 Vdc bipolar
250 Vac/3 A ou
250 Vdc/3 A
24 Vdc/500 mA
9
3
24 Vdc bipolar
250 Vac/3 A or
250 Vdc/3 A
24 Vdc/500 mA
Transistorized outputs
Encoder power supply
Analog output
3
1
-
15 V
-
3
2
2
5 to 24 V
12 bits (-10 V to +10 V or
(0 to 20) mA)
14 bits (-10 V to +10 V or
(-20 to 20) mA) Analog input 1
Motor PTC isolated input
1
Motor PTC isolated input
Note:
For more details, refer to the PLC Board Manual. The manual is available in the site: www.weg.net.
335
9.1 POWER DATA
9.1.1 Power Supply
Specifications
CHAPTER 9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes the technical specifications (electrical and mechanical) of the CFW-09 inverter series.
Operating voltage range:
220-230 V, 380-480 V and 660-690 V models: -15 % to +10 %.
500-600 V models up to 32 A: -15 % of rated input voltage up to 690 V.
500-600 V models higher or equal to 44 A:
- 500 V = -15 % to +15 %;
- 525 V = -15 % to +15 %;
- 550 V = -15 % to +20 %;
- 575 V = -15 % to +15 %;
- 600 V = -15 % to +10 %.
500-690 V models:
- 500 V = -15 % to +15 %;
- 525 V = -15 % to +15 %;
- 550 V = -15 % to +20 %;
- 575 V = -15 % to +15 %;
- 600 V = -15 % to +10 %;
- 660 V = -15 % to +10 %
(1)
;
- 690 V = -15 % to +10 %
(1)
.
(1)
When a line voltage higher than 600 V (rated value) supplies the 500-690 V models, it is necessary to derate the output current as stated in item 9.1.5.
NOTE!
For models that have rated voltage selection jumper (as described in item
3.2.3) the rated input voltage is defined by its position.
In all models, P296 parameter shall be set to the rated input voltage.
When input voltage is lower than motor rated voltage the motor power will be reduced.
Other AC input specifications:
Frequency: 50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz).
Phase Unbalance 3 % of rated phase to phase input voltage.
Overvoltage Category III (EN 61010/UL 508C).
Transient voltages according to Category III.
Minimum line impedance:
1 % voltage drop for models with rated current up to 130 A/220-230 V, up to
142 A/380-480 V and up to 32 A/500-600 V.
2 % voltage drop for 380-480 V models with rated current 180 A and above.
500-600 V models with current higher or equal to 44A/500-600 V and all 500-
690 V and 660-690 V models do not require minimum line impedance, because they have an internal DC Link inductance.
Refer to item 8.7.1 guidelines.
Power-up
:
10 ON/OFF cycles per hour maximum (1 every 6 minutes).
336
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
9.1.2 220-230 V Power Supply
Model: Current / Voltage
Load
(1)
Power (kVA)
(2)
Rated Output Current (A)
(3)
Maximum Output Current (A)
(4)
Rated Input Current (A)
(7)
Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (hp)/(kW)
(5)
Watts Loss (W)
(8)
Frame Size
6/
220-230
CT/VT
2.3
6
9
7.2/15
(6)
5
1.5/1.1
69
1
7/
220-230
CT/VT
2.7
7
10.5
8.4/18
(6)
5
2/1.5
80
1
10/
220-230
CT/VT
3.8
10
15
12/25
(6)
5
3/2.2
114
1
13/
220-230
CT/VT
5
13
19.5
15.6
5
4/3.0
149
1
16/
220-230
CT/VT
6.1
16
24
19.2
5
5/3.7
183
2
24/ 28/
220-230 220-230
CT/VT
9.1
24
36
28.8
5
7.5/5.5
274
2
CT/VT
10.7
28
42
33.6
5
10/7.5
320
2
Model: Current / Voltage
Load
(1)
Power (kVA)
(2)
Rated Output Current (A)
(3)
Maximum Output Current (A)
(4)
Rated Input Current (A)
(7)
Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (hp)/(kW)
(5)
Watts Loss (kW)
(8)
Frame Size
45/
220-230
CT/VT
18
45
68
54
5
15/11
0.5
3
54/
220-230
CT VT
21 27
54 68
65
5
81
82
2.5
70/
220-230
CT
28
70
105
84
5
VT CT
34
86
103
2.5
34
86/
220-230
VT
42
CT
42
105/
220-230
VT
52
220-230
CT VT
52
130/
60
86 105 105 130 130 150
129 158 195
103
5
20/ 25/ 25/ 30/ 30/
15 18.5
18.5
22 22
126
2.5
40/
30
126 156 156 180
5
40/
30
2.5
50/
37
5
50/
37
2.5
60/
45
0.6
0.8
4
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.5
1.5
1.7
5 5 6 6
9.1.3 380-480 V Power Supply
Model: Current / Voltage
Load
(1)
Power (kVA)
(2)
Rated Output Current (A)
(3)
Maximum Output Current (A)
(4)
Rated Input Current (A)
(7)
Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (hp)/(kW)
(5)
Watts Loss (W)
(8)
Frame Size
3.6/
380-480
CT/VT
2.7
3.6
5.4
4.3
5
1.5/1.1
60
1
4/
380-480
CT/VT
3.0
4
6
4.8
5
2/1.5
66
1
5.5/
380-480
CT/VT
4.2
5.5
8.3
6.6
5
3/2.2
92
1
9/
380-480
CT/VT
6.9
9
13.5
10.8
5
5/3.7
152
1
13/
380-480
CT/VT
9.9
13
19.5
15.6
5
7.5/5.5
218
2
16/ 24/
380-480 380-480
CT/VT
12.2
CT/VT
18.3
16
24
19.2
5
24
36
28.8
5
10/7.5
268
2
15/11
403
2
Note: CT
= Constant Torque
VT
= Variable Torque
Factory Default
337
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model: Current / Voltage
Load
(1)
Power (kVA)
(2)
Rated Output Current (A)
(3)
Maximum Output Current (A)
(4)
Rated Input Current (A)
(7)
Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (hp)/(kW)
(5)
Watts Loss (kW)
(8)
Frame Size
30/
380-480
CT VT
24 29
30 36
45
36 43.2
45.6
5 2.5
5
20/ 25/ 25/
15 18.5
18.5
0.50 0.60
0.70
3 4
38/
380-480
CT
30
VT
36
38
57
45
45/
380-480
CT VT
36 43
45 54
68
60
60/
90
70 70
70/
105
86 86
86/
129
105/
380-480 380-480 380-480 380-480
CT VT CT VT CT VT CT VT
48 56 56 68 68 84 84 100
105 105 130
158
54
2.5
54
5
64.8
2.5
72
5
84
2.5
84
5
103 103
2.5
5
126 126 156
2.5
5 2.5
30/ 30/ 40/ 40/ 50/ 50/ 60/ 60/ 75/ 75/ 100/
22 22 30 30 37 37 45 45 55 55 75
0.80 0.80
0.90 1.00 1.20 1.20 1.50 1.50 1.80 1.80 2.20
4 5 5 6 6
Model: Current / Voltage
Load
(1)
Power (kVA)
(2)
Rated Output Current (A)
(3)
Maximum Output Current (A)
(4)
Rated Input Current (A)
(7)
Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (hp)/(kW)
(5)
Watts Loss (kW)
(8)
Frame Size
142/
380-480
CT VT
113 138
142 174
213
170 209
5 2.5
100/ 125/
75 90
2.4
2.9
7
180/ 211/ 240/ 312 361/ 450/ 515 600/
380-480 380-480 380-480 380-480 380-480 380-480 380-480 380-480
CT/ VT CT/ VT
143 161
CT/ VT
191
CT/VT
238
CT/VT
287
CT/VT
358
CT/VT
392.5
CT/VT
478
180
270
191
2.5
211
317
223
2.5
240
360
254
2.5
312
468
331
2.5
361
542
383
2.5
450
675
477
2.5
515
773
546
2.5
600
900
636
2.5
150/
110
3
8
175/
130.5
3.5
8
200/
150
4
8
250/
186.5
5.2
9
300/
220
6
9
350/
250
7.6
10
450/
335.7
8.5
10
500/
375
10
10
9.1.4 500-600 V Power Supply
Model: Current / Voltage
Load
(1)
Power (kVA)
(2)
Rated Output Current (A)
(3)
Maximum Output Current (A)
(4)
Rated Input Current (A)
(7)
Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (hp)/(kW)
(5)
Watts Loss (W)
(8)
Frame Size
2.9/
500-600
CT VT
2.9
4.2
2.9
4.2
4.4
4.6
3.6
5.2
5 5
2/1.5 3/2.2
70 100
2
4.2/
500-600
CT VT
4.2
7
4.2
7
6.3
7.7
5.2
8.8
5 5
3/2.2 5/3.7
100 160
2
CT
7
7/
500-600
VT
10
7
10.5
10
11
8.8
12.5
5 5
5/3.7 7.5/5.5
160 230
2
10
15
12.5
5
CT
10
10/
500-600
VT
12
12
15
15
5
7.5/5.5 10/7.5
230 280
2
12
18
15
5
CT
12
12/
500-600
VT
13.9
14
18
17.5
5
10/7.5 12.5/9.2
280 330
2
14/
500-600
CT/VT
13.9
14
21
17.5
5
12.5/9.2
330
2
Note: CT
= Constant Torque
VT
= Variable Torque
Factory Default
338
Model: Current / Voltage
Load
(1)
Power (kVA)
(2)
Rated Output Current (A)
(3)
Maximum Output Current (A)
(4)
Rated Input Current (A)
(7)
Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (hp)/(kW)
(5)
Watts Loss (W)
(8)
Frame Size
Model: Current / Voltage
Load
(1)
Power (kVA)
(2)
Rated Output Current (A)
(3)
Maximum Output Current (A)
(4)
Rated Input Current (A)
(7)
Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (hp)/(kW)
(5)
Watts Loss (kW)
(8)
Frame Size
Model: Current / Voltage
Load
(1)
Power (kVA)
(2)
Rated Output Current (A)
(3)
Maximum Output Current (A)
(4)
Rated Input Current (A)
(7)
Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (hp)/(kW)
(5)
Watts Loss (kW)
(8)
Frame Size
Model: Current / Voltage
Load
(1)
Power (kVA)
(2)
Rated Output Current (A)
(3)
Maximum Output Current (A)
(4)
Rated Input Current (A)
(7)
Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (hp)/(kW)
(5)
Watts Loss (kW)
(8)
Frame Size
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
22/
CT
500-600
VT
21.9
22
33
27.5
26.9
27
33
33.8
5 5
20/15 25/18.5
500 620
4
27/
CT
500-600
VT
26.9
27
40.5
33.8
31.9
32
40.5
40
5 5
25/18.5 30/22
620 750
4
32/
500-600
CT/VT
31.9
32
48
40
5
30/22
750
4
44/
CT
500-600
VT
43.8
44
66
46
52.8
53
66
56
2.5
40/30
1
2.5
50/37
1.2
7
53/
CT
500-600
VT
52.8
53
79.5
56
62.7
63
79.5
66
5 5
50/37 60/45
1.2
7
1.5
63/
CT
500-600
VT
62.7
63
94.5
66
78.7
79
94.5
83
5 2.5
60/45 75/55
1.5
7
1.8
79/
CT
500-600
VT
78.7
79
98.6
99
118.5
118.5
83 104
2.5
2.5
75/55 100/75
1.8
7
2.5
107
160
107
2.5
CT
107
107/
500-690
VT
147
147
160
147
2.5
100/75 150/110
2.5
3
8E
CT
147
147/
500-690
VT
195
147 196
220.5
220.5
147
2.5
196
2.5
150/110 200/150
3 4.1
8E
211/
500-690
CT/VT
210
211
316.5
211
2.5
200/150
4.1
8E
247/
CT
500-690
VT
210
247
370.5
247
314
315
370.5
315
2.5
2.5
250/185 300/220
5.1
10E
6
315/
CT
500-690
VT
314
315
342
343
472.5
472.5
315 343
2.5
2.5
300/220 350/250
6 6.8
10E
343/
CT
500-690
VT
342
343
416
418
514.5
514.5
343 418
2.5
2.5
350/250 400/300
6.8
8.2
10E
418/
CT
500-690
VT
416
418
627
418
470
472
627
472
2.5
2.5
400/300 500/370
8.2
11
10E
472/
CT
500-690
VT
470
472
708
472
553
555
708
555
2.5
2.5
500/370 600/450
11
10E
12.3
Note: CT
= Constant Torque
VT
= Variable Torque
Factory Default
339
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
9.1.5 660-690 V Power Supply
Model: Current / Voltage
Load
(1)
Power (kVA)
(2)
Rated Output Current (A)
(3)
Maximum Output Current (A)
(4)
Rated Input Current (A)
(7)
Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (hp)/(kW)
(5)
Watts Loss (kW)
(8)
Frame Size
100
150
100
2.5
CT
120
100/
660-690
VT
152
127
150
127
2.5
100/75 150/110
2.5
3
8E
CT
152
127/
660-690
VT
214
127 179
190.5
197
127
2.5
179
2.5
150/110 200/150
3 4.1
8E
179/
660-690
CT/VT
214
179
268.5
179
2.5
200/150
4.1
8E
CT
269
225/
660-690
VT
310
225
337.5
225
2.5
259
337.5
259
2.5
250/185 300/220
5.1
6
10E
Model: Current / Voltage
Load
(1)
Power (kVA)
(2)
Rated Output Current (A)
(3)
Maximum Output Current (A)
(4)
Rated Input Current (A)
(7)
Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (hp)/(kW)
(5)
Watts Loss (kW)
(8)
Frame Size
Model: Current / Voltage
Load
(1)
Power (kVA)
(2)
Rated Output Current (A)
(3)
Maximum Output Current (A)
(4)
Rated Input Current (A)
(7)
Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (hp)/(kW)
(5)
Watts Loss (kW)
(8)
Frame Size
259/
660-690
CT
310
VT
365
259 305
388.5
388.5
259 305
2.5
2.5
300/220 350/250
6 6.8
10E
305/
660-690
CT
365
VT
406
305 340
457.5
457.5
305 340
2.5
2.5
350/250 400/300
6.8
8.2
10E
CT
406
340
510
340
340/
660-690
VT
512
428
510
428
2.5
2.5
400/300 500/370
8.2
11
10E
428/
660-690
CT/VT
512
428
642
428
2.5
500/370
11
10E
100
150
100
2.5
CT
120
107/
500-690
VT
152
127
150
127
2.5
100/75 150/110
2.5
3
8E
CT
152
147/
500-690
VT
214
127 179
190.5
197
127
2.5
179
2.5
150/110 200/150
3 4.1
8E
211/
500-690
CT/VT
214
179
268.5
179
2.5
200/150
4.1
8E
247/
CT
500-690
VT
269
225
310
259
337.5 337.5
225 259
2.5
2.5
250/185 300/220
5.1
6
10E
Model: Current / Voltage
Load
(1)
Power (kVA)
(2)
Rated Output Current (A)
(3)
Maximum Output Current (A)
(4)
Rated Input Current (A)
(7)
Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (hp)/(kW)
(5)
Watts Loss (kW)
(8)
Frame Size
CT
310
315/
500-690
VT
365
259 305
388.5
388.5
259
2.5
305
2.5
300/220 350/250
6 6.8
10E
CT
365
343/
500-690
VT
406
305 340
457.5
457.5
305
2.5
340
2.5
350/250 400/300
6.8
8.2
10E
340
510
340
2.5
CT
406
418/
500-690
VT
512
428
510
428
2.5
400/300 500/370
8.2
11
10E
Note: CT
= Constant Torque
VT
= Variable Torque
Factory Default
472/
500-690
CT/VT
512
428
642
428
2.5
500/370
11
10E
340
NOTES:
(1)
CT - Constant Torque
Torque
Tn
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tn
VT - Variable Torque
Torque
Speed
Nominal
Figure 9.1 - Load characteristics
Speed
Nominal
(2)
The power rating in kVA is determined by the following equation:
P(kVA) =
3. Input Voltage (V) x Current Rating (A)
1000
The values shown on the tables 9.1.2 to 9.1.5 were calculated considering the inverter rated current rating and an input voltage of 230 V for 220-230 V models, 460 V for 380-480 V models, 575 V for 500-600 V models and 690 V for 660-690 V models.
(3)
Rated Output Current is valid for the following conditions:
Relative Air Humidity: 5 % to 90 %, non condensing.
Altitude: 1000 m (3.300 ft) – nominal conditions.
From 1000 m to 4000 m (3.300 ft to 13.200 ft) – with 1 % current reduction for each 100 m (330 ft) above 1000 m (3.300 ft).
Ambient Temperature: 0 ºC to 40 ºC (32 ºF to 104 ºF) - nominal conditions.
From 0 ºC to 55 ºC (32 ºF to 131 ºF) - with 2 % current derating for each
1 ºC (1.8 ºF) degree above 40 ºC (104 ºF).
The rated current values are valid for the indicated switching frequencies.
The 10 kHz switching frequency is not possible for the 2.9 A to 79 A/500-
600 V, 107 A to 472 A/500-690 V and 100 A to 428 A/660-690 V models.
The operation at 10 kHz is possible for V/F Control Mode and Vector
Control with Encoder Mode. In this case it's necessary to derate the output current according to table 9.1.
341
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Models
6 A to 45 A / 220-230 V
Load
Type
CT/VT
CT
Switching
Frequency
10 kHz
Output Current
Derating - %
0.8
54 A to 130 A/220-230 V
VT
5 kHz
10 kHz
Contact WEG
3.6 A to 24 A / 380-480 V CT/VT
CT
10 kHz 0.7
30 A to 142 A / 380-480 V
180 A to 600 A / 380-480 V
VT
CT/VT
5 kHz
10 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
Contact WEG
63 A / 500-600 V
79 A / 500-600 V
107 A to 472 A / 500-690 V
100 A to 428 A / 660-690 V
VT
CT
VT
CT
VT
CT
VT
5 kHz
0.8
Contact WEG
Table 9.1 - Output current derating for switching frequency
rated switching frequency
(4)
Maximum Current: 1.5 x I Nominal (for 60 seconds every 10 minutes).
I Nominal = Rated Current for CT applications considering the applicable derating (depending on altitude or ambient temperature as specified in note (3)).
The maximum output current is the same for CT and VT. This way the inverter has a lower overload capacity when VT current is used.
(5)
The indicated maximum motor hp/kW ratings are based on WEG 230 V/
460 V/575 V 4 pole motors and normal duty loads. A precise inverter sizing must consider the actual motor nameplate and application data.
(6)
Rated input current for single-phase operation.
Note:
The 6 A , 7 A and 10A / 220-230 V models can be operated with 2 input phases only (single-phase operation) without output current derating.
(7)
Rated input current for three-phase operation:
This is a conservative value. In practice the value of this current depends on the line impedance. Please refer to table 9.2:
X (%)
0.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
I input (rms)
131
(%)
121
106
99
96
96
Table 9.2 - X = Line impedance drop @ rated inverter output current;
I input (rms)
= % of the rated output current
(8)
Loss considering rated work conditions (rated output current and rated switching frequency).
342
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
9.2 ELECTRONICS/GENERAL DATA
CONTROL
PERFORMANCE
(Vector Mode)
INPUTS
(CC9 Board)
METHOD
OUTPUT
FREQUENCY
SPEED
CONTROL
TORQUE
CONTROL
ANALOG
DIGITAL
Voltage Source V/F (Scalar), or
Vector Control with Encoder Feedback, or
Sensorless Vector Control (without Encoder)
PWM SVM (Space Vector Modulation)
Current, Flux and Speed Digital Regulators
Scan Time:
- Current Regulators: 0.2 ms (5 kHz)
- Flux Regulator: 0.4 ms (2.5 kHz)
- Speed Regulator / Speed Measurement: 1.2 ms
0 to 3.4 x motor rated frequency (P403). This rated frequency can be set from
0 Hz to 300 Hz in Scalar and VVW Mode from 30 Hz to 120 Hz in Vector Mode.
VVW:
Regulation: 1 % of Base Speed
Speed Range: 1:30
Sensorless:
Regulation: 0.5 % of Base Speed
Speed Range: 1:100
With Encoder: (with EBA or EBB Board)
Regulation:
+/- 0.01 % of Base Speed with 14 bit Analog Input (EBA Board);
+/- 0.01 % of Base Speed with Digital Reference (Keypad, Serial Port, Fieldbus,
Electronic Potentiometer, Multispeed);
+/- 0.1 % of Base Speed with 10 bit Analog Input (CC9 Board).
Range: 10 to 180 %, Regulation: +/-10 % of Rated Torque (with encoder)
Range: 20 to 180 %, Regulation: +/-10 % of Rated Torque (sensorless above 3 Hz)
2 Non Isolated Differential Inputs: (0 to 10) V, (0 to 20) mA or (4 to 20) mA;
Impedance: 400 k [(0 to 10) V], 500 [(0 to 20) mA or (4 to 20) mA];
Resolution: 10 bit, Programmable Functions.
6 Isolated Inputs: 24 Vdc; Programmable Functions.
OUTPUTS
(CC9 Board)
SAFETY
ANALOG
RELAY
PROTECTION
2 Non Isolated Outputs: (0 to 10) V; RL 10 k (1 mA Maximum);
Resolution: 11 bits; Programmable Functions.
2 Relays: NO/NC contacts available; 240 Vac, 1 A;
Programmable Functions.
1 Relay: NO contact available; 240 Vac, 1 A;
Programmable Functions.
Overcurrent/Output Short-circuit (Trip Point: > 2 x Rated Current for CT application)
DC Link Under/Overvoltage
Power Supply Undervoltage/Phase Fault
Inverter Overtemperature
(1)
Dynamic Braking Resistor Overload
Motor/Inverter Overload (I x t)
External Fault
CPU/EPROMError
Output Ground Fault
Programming Error
343
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
KEYPAD
(HMI)
STANDARD
(HMI-CFW09-LCD)
8 Keys: Start, Stop, Increase, Decrease, FWD/REV, JOG, Local/Remote and
Program
LCD display: 2 lines x 16 characters
LED display: 4 digits with 7 segments
LEDs for FWD/REV and LOC/REM indication
Display Accuracy:
- Current: 5 % of Rated Current
- Speed Resolution: 1 rpm
Remote mounting possibility, cables available up to 10 m (30 ft)
DEGREEOF
PROTECTION
NEMA1/IP20
PROTECTED
CHASSIS / IP20
NEMA 1/ IP20: 3.6A to 240 A/380-480 V models and all 220-230 V and 500-600 V models and 107 A to 211 A/500-690 V and 100 A to 179 A/660-690 V.
Protected chassis/IP20: 361 A to 600 A/380-480 V models, 247 A to 472 A/500-
690 V and 225 A to 428 A/660-690 V.
(1)
Available in models 30 A / 220-230 V or 30 A / 380-480 V or 22 A / 500-600 V or for all 500-690 V and 660-690 V models.
9.2.1 Applicable Standards
GENERAL
EMC
MECHANICAL
UL508C
- Power conversion equipment.
UL840
- Insulation coordination including clearances and creepage distances for electrical equipment.
EN50178
- Electronic equipment for use in power installations.
EN60204-1
- Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines. Part 1: General requirements.
Provisions for compliance
: the final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing:
- an emergency-stop device.
- a supply disconnecting device.
EN60146 (IEC 146)
- Semiconductor convertors.
EN61800-2
- Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 2: General requirements - Rating specifications for low voltage adjustable frequency AC power drive systems.
EN 61800-3
- Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods.
EN55011
- Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) radio-frequency equipment.
CISPR11
- Industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) radio-frequency equipment - Electromagnetic disturbance characteristics - Limits and methods of measurement.
EN61000-4-2
- Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques -
Section 2: Electrostatic discharge immunity test.
EN61000-4-3
- Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques -
Section 3: Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test.
EN61000-4-4
- Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques -
Section 4: Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test.
EN61000-4-5
- Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques -
Section 5: Surge immunity test.
EN61000-4-6
- Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques -
Section 6: Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields.
EN60529
- Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code).
UL50
- Enclosures for electrical equipment.
344
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
9.3 OPTIONAL
DEVICES
9.3.1 I/O Expansion
Board EBA
COMMUNICATION SERIALINTERFACE
INPUTS
ANALOG
INCREMENTAL
ENCODER
DIGITAL
OUTPUTS
ANALOG
ENCODER
DIGITAL
9.3.2 I/O Expansion
Board EBB
COMMUNICATION
INPUTS
SERIALINTERFACE
ANALOG
INCREMENTAL
ENCODER
DIGITAL
OUTPUTS
ANALOG
ENCODER
DIGITAL
Isolated RS-485 Serial Interface (the RS-485 and RS-232 serial interfaces cannot be used simultaneously).
1 Bipolar Analog Input (AI4): -10 V to +10 V; (0 to 20) mA or (4 to 20) mA; Linearity:
14 bits (0.006 % of 10 V range).
Programmable Functions.
Incremental Encoder Feedback Input:Internal 12 Vdc, 200 mA max isolated power supply. Differential inputs A, A, B, B, Z and Z signals (100 kHz max) 14 bits resolution. Used as speed feedback for the speed regulator and digital speed measurement.
1 Programmable Isolated 24 Vdc Digital Input (DI7).
1 Programmable Digital Input (DI8). For motor PTC - thermistor:
Actuation: 3.9 k
Release: 1.6 k
2 Bipolar Analog Outputs (AO3/AO4): -10 V to +10 V.
Linearity: 14 bits (0.006 % of +/- 10 V range).
Programmable Functions.
Buffered Encoder Output:Input signal repeater; Isolated differential outputs.
2 Isolated Transistor Outputs (DO1/DO2): Open collector, 24 Vdc, 50 mA.
Programmable Functions.
Isolated RS-485 Serial Interface (the RS-485 and RS-232 serial interfaces cannot be used simultaneously).
1 Isolated Analog Input (AI3): 0 V to 10 V or (0 to 20) mA or (4 to 20) mA.
Resolution: 10 bits. Programmable Functions.
Incremental Encoder Feedback Input: Internal 12 Vdc, 200 mA max isolated power supply. Differential inputs signals A, A, B, B, Z and Z (100 kHz max) 14 bits resolution. Used as speed feedback for the speed regulator and digital speed measurement.
1 Programmable Isolated 24 Vdc Digital Input (DI7).
1 Programmable Digital Input (DI8):For motor PTC - thermistor:
Actuation: 3.9 k
Release: 1.6 k
2 Isolated Analog Outputs (AO1'/AO2'): (0 to 20) mA or (4 to 20) mA. Linearity:
11 bits (0.05 % of full scale). Programmable Functions (same as AO1 and AO2 of
CC9 control board).
Buffered Encoder Output: Input signal repeater; Isolated differential outputs.
2 Isolated Transistor Outputs (DO1/DO2): Open collector 24 Vdc, 50 mA.
Programmable Functions.
345
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
9.4 MECHANICAL DATA
132 (5.19)
106 (4.17)
75 (2.95)
SIZE 1
7
(0.28)
6
(0.24)
6
(0.24)
50 (1.97)
94 (3.7)
134 (5.27)
143 (5.63)
Air Flow outlet
12
(0.47)
11
(0.43)
121 (4.76)
61
(2.40)
Air Flow inlet
Air Flow outlet
139 (5.47)
127 (5.00)
12 (0.47)
6 (0.23)
Air Flow inlet
Figure 9.2 - Size 1 - dimensions in mm (inch)
346
D
C
173 (6.31)
138 (5.43)
91 (3.58)
45 (1.77)
138 (5.43)
173 (6.81)
SIZE 2
A
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
B
M5
6
(0.24)
M5
7
(0.28)
C
D
6
(0.24)
12
(0.47)
Air Flow outlet
A
11
(0.43)
161
(6.34)
182
(7.16)
Air Flow outlet
Air Flow inlet
178 (7.0)
167 (6.57)
12 (0.47)
B
6 (0.23)
Air Flow inlet
Figure 9.3 - Size 2 - dimensions in mm (inch)
347
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SIZE 3
34
(1.34)
219 (8.62)
34
(1.34)
Conduit for power cable
62.5 (2.46)
111.5 (4.39)
160.5 (6.32)
223 (8.78)
7.2 (0.28)
16
(0.63)
Air Flow outlet
36.5 (1.44) 150 (5.91)
7.2 (0.28)
223 (8.78)
Air Flow outlet
84.5 (3.33)
Air Flow inlet
225 (8.86)
150 (5.91)
348
Air Flow inlet 37.5 (1.48)
Figure 9.4 - Size 3 - dimensions in mm (inch)
34
(1.34)
Conduit for power
76 (2.99)
125 (4.92)
174 (6.85)
250 (9.84)
34
(1.34)
SIZE 4
7.2 (0.28)
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
7.2 (0.28)
16 (0.63)
Air Flow outlet 50 (1.97) 150 (5.91)
250 (9.84)
Air Flow outlet
84.5 (3.33)
Air Flow inlet
252 (9.92)
150 (5.91)
Air Flow inlet
Figure 9.5 - Size 4 - dimensions in mm (inch)
51 (2.01)
349
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
34
(1.34)
Conduit for power
cable
(3x) 50.0
95.5 (3.76)
167.5 (6.59)
239.5 (9.43)
34
(1.34)
SIZE 5
9.2 (0.36)
20
(0.79)
Air Flow outlet
9.2 (0.36)
67.5 (2.66)
200 (7.87)
335 (13.19)
Air Flow outlet
84.5 (3.33)
Air Flow inlet
337 (13.27)
200 (7.87)
350
68.5 (2.70)
Air Flow inlet
Figure 9.6 - Size 5 - dimensions in mm (inch)
34
(1.34)
Conduit for power
cable
(3x) 63.0
84.5 (3.33)
167.5 (6.59)
250.5 (9.86)
34
(1.34)
SIZE 6
9.2 (0.36)
20
(0.79)
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
9.2 (0.36)
Air Flow outlet
67.5 (2.66)
200 (7.87)
335 (13.19)
Air Flow outlet
84.5 (3.33)
Air Flow inlet
337 (13.27)
200 (7.87)
68.5 (2.70)
Air Flow inlet
Figure 9.7 - Size 6 - dimensions in mm (inch)
351
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
34
(1.34)
Conduit for power
cable
(3x) 63.0
85 (3.35)
168 (6.61)
251 (9.88)
34
(1.34)
SIZE 7
9.2 (0.36)
20
(0.79)
Air Flow outlet 67.5 (2.66)
200 (7.87)
9.2 (0.36)
335 (13.19)
Air Flow outlet
84.5 (3.33)
Air Flow inlet
337 (13.27)
200 (7.87)
352
68.5 (2.70)
Air Flow inlet
Figure 9.8 - Size 7 - dimensions in mm (inch)
40 (1.57)
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
40 (1.57)
SIZE 8 AND 8E
44 (1.73)
DETAILOF CUTOUT
WITHOUT FLANGE
366 (14.41)
322 (12.68)
Conduit for power cable
9.2 (0.36)
92 (3.62)
205 (8.07)
318 (12.52)
9.2 (0.36)
38 (1.50)
133 (5.24)
277 (10.91)
372 (14.65)
20
(0.79)
Air Flow outlet
67.5 (2.66) 275 (10.83)
410 (16.14) 84.5 (3.33)
Air Flow inlet
Figure 9.9 - Size 8 and 8E - dimensions in mm (inch)
353
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Air Flow inlet
412 (16.22)
275 (2.83)
354
68.5 (2.70)
Air Flow inlet
Length
Dimensions
Size 8
Size 8E
L mm in
975 38.38
1145
45.08
mm
950
L1 in
37.4
1122.5 44.19
mm
L2 in
952 37.48
1124.5 44.27
Figure 9.9 (cont.) - Size 8 and 8E - dimensions in mm (inch)
L3 mm in
980 38.58
1152.5 45.37
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SIZE 9
48 (1.83)
DETAILOF CUTOUT
WITHOUT FLANGE
592 (23.31)
40 (1.57)
Det. E
Conduit for power
cable
(3x) 102
146 (5.75)
344 (13.54)
542 (21.34)
40 (1.57)
11.2 (0.44)
24
(0.94)
11.2 (0.44)
41 (1.61)
68 (2.68)
344 (13.54)
620 (24.41)
647 (25.47)
Air Flow outlet
69 (2.72)
275 (10.83) 275 (10.83)
688 (27.09)
99 (3.90)
Air Flow inlet
Figure 9.10 - Size 9 - dimensions in mm (inch)
355
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
40 (1.57)
Det. E
Conduit for power
cable
(3x) 102
152 (5.98)
350 (13.78)
548 (21.57)
40 (1.57)
SIZE 10 AND 10E
54 (2.13)
DETAILOF CUTOUT
WITHOUT FLANGE
592 (23.31)
11.2 (0.44)
11.2 (0.44)
44 (1.73)
74 (2.91)
350 (13.78)
626 (24.65)
656 (25.83)
24
(0.94)
Air Flow outlet 75 (2.95)
275 (10.83) 275 (10.83)
356
700 (27.09)
99 (3.90)
Length
Dimensions
Size 10
Size 10E
Air Flow inlet mm
D1 in
418 16.45
508 20 mm
D2 in
492 19.37
582 22.91
Figure 9.11 - Size 10 and 10E - dimensions in mm (inch)
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
180 A-240 A/380-480 V Models (size 8)
NOTES: a) The X dimensions will depend on panel dimensions.
b) The fixing panel supports identified by and are not supplied with KME Kit. These should be constructed according to panel dimensions and with fixing holes as specified.
Figure 9.12 a) - KIT-KME for Size 8 - Panel Width = 600 mm (23.62 in)
357
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
180 A-240 A/380-480 V Models (size 8)
NOTES: a) The X dimensions will depend on panel dimensions.
b) The fixing panel supports identified by and are not supplied with KME Kit. These should be constructed according to panel dimensions and with fixing holes as specified.
358
Figure 9.12 b) - KIT-KME for Size 8 - Panel Width = 800 mm (31.50 in)
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
107 A to 211 A/500-600 V Models (size 8E) and 100 A to 179 A/660-690 V Models (size 8E)
NOTES: a) The X dimensions will depend on panel dimensions.
b) The fixing panel supports identified by and are not supplied with KME Kit. These should be constructed according to panel dimensions and with fixing holes as specified.
Figure 9.12 c) - KIT-KME for Size 8E - Panel Width = 600 mm (23.62 in)
359
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
107 A to 211 A/500-600 V Models (size 8E) and 100 A to 179 A/660-690 V Models (size 8E)
360
NOTES: a) The X dimensions will depend on panel dimensions.
b) The fixing panel supports identified by and are not supplied with KME Kit. These should be constructed according to panel dimensions and with fixing holes as specified.
Figure 9.12 d) - KIT-KME for Size 8E - Panel Width = 800 mm (31.50 in)
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
312 A to 361 A/380-480 V (size 9) Models
NOTES: a) The X dimensions will depend on panel dimensions.
b) The fixing panel supports identified by and are not supplied with KME Kit. These should be constructed according to panel dimensions and with fixing holes as specified.
Figure 9.13 - KIT-KME for Size 9 - Panel Width = 800 mm (31.50 in) and 1000 mm (39.37 in)
361
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
450 A to 600 A/380-480 V Models (size 10)
NOTES: a) The X dimensions will depend on panel dimensions.
b) The fixing panel supports identified by and are not supplied with KME Kit.
These should be constructed according to panel dimensions and with fixing holes as specified.
362
Figure 9.14 a) - KIT-KME for Size 10 - Panel Width = 800 mm (31.50 in) and 1000 mm (39.37 in)
CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
247 A to 472 A/500-690 V Models (size 10E) and
225 A to 428 A/660-690 V Models (size 10E)
NOTES: a) The X dimensions will depend on panel dimensions.
b) The fixing panel supports identified by and are not supplied with KME Kit.
These should be constructed according to panel dimensions and with fixing holes as specified.
Figure 9.14 b) - KIT-KME for Size 10E - Panel Width = 800 mm (31.50 in) and 1000 mm (39.37 in)
363
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 4 Summary
- 8 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE, FAULT AND STATUS MESSAGES
- 8 I. Parameters
- 32 II. Fault Messages
- 33 III. Other Messages
- 34 SAFETY NOTICES
- 34 1.1 SAFETY NOTICES IN THE MANUAL
- 34 1.2 SAFETY NOTICES ON THE PRODUCT
- 34 1.3 PRELIMINARY RECOMMENDATIONS
- 36 GENERAL INFORMATION
- 36 2.1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL
- 36 2.2 SOFTWARE VERSION
- 36 2.3 ABOUT THE CFW-09
- 38 2.4 CFW-09 IDENTIFICATION LABEL AND CODE NUMBER
- 40 2.5 RECEIVING AND STORAGE
- 41 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
- 41 3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
- 41 3.1.1 Environment Conditions
- 41 3.1.2 Dimensional of CFW-09
- 42 3.1.3 Mounting Specifications
- 43 3.1.3.1 Mounting Inside a Panel
- 44 3.1.3.2 Mounting on Surface
- 45 3.1.3.3 Mounting with the Heatsink Through a Surface
- 47 3.1.4 Keypad (HMI) and Cover Removal
- 48 3.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
- 48 3.2.1 Power/Grounding Terminals
- 50 3.2.2 Location of the Power/Grounding/Control Connections
- 52 3.2.3 Rated Voltage Selection
- 53 3.2.4 Power/Grounding Wiring and Fuses
- 56 3.2.5 Power Connections
- 56 3.2.5.1 AC Input Connection
- 57 3.2.5.2 Output Connections
- 57 3.2.5.3 Grounding Connections
- 58 3.2.5.4 IT Networks
- 60 3.2.6 Control Wiring
- 63 3.2.7 Typical Terminal Connections
- 66 3.3 European EMC Directive -Requirements for Conforming Installations
- 66 3.3.1 Installation
- 67 3.3.2 Epcos Filters
- 70 3.3.3 Schaffner Filters
- 73 3.3.4 EMC Filter Characteristics
- 85 KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION
- 85 4.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE KEYPAD
- 87 4.2 USE OF THE KEYPAD (HMI)
- 87 4.2.1 Keypad Operation
- 88 4.2.2 “Read-Only” Variables and Status
- 89 4.2.3 Parameter Viewing and Programming
- 92 START-UP
- 92 5.1 PRE-POWER CHECKS
- 92 5.2 INITIAL POWER-UP
- 97 5.3 START-UP
- 98 5.3.1 Type of Control: V/F 60 Hz - Operation Via Keypad (HMI)
- 101 5.3.2 Type of Control: Sensorless or Vector with Encoder (Operation Via Keypad (HMI))
- 108 5.3.3 Type of Control: VVW - Keypad Operation
- 116 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
- 117 6.1 ACCESS AND READ ONLY PARAMETERS - P000 to P099
- 123 6.2 REGULATION PARAMETERS - P100 to P199
- 146 6.3 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS - P200 to P399
- 207 6.3.1 Parameters for Crane Applications and for Torque Master/Slave Function - P351 to P368
- 213 6.4 MOTOR PARAMETERS - P400 to P499
- 219 6.5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS PARAMETERS - P500 to P699
- 219 6.5.1 PID Regulator
- 219 6.5.2 Description
- 227 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
- 227 7.1 FAULTS AND POSSIBLE CAUSES
- 232 7.2 TROUBLESHOOTING
- 234 7.3 CONTACTING WEG
- 234 7.4 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
- 235 7.4.1 Cleaning Instructions
- 236 7.5 SPARE PART LIST
- 247 CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
- 247 8.1 I/O EXPANSION BOARDS
- 247 8.1.1 EBA (I/O Expansion Board A)
- 250 8.1.2 EBB (Expansion I/O Board B)
- 253 8.1.3 EBE
- 253 8.2 INCREMENTAL ENCODER
- 253 8.2.1 EBA/EBB Boards
- 255 8.2.2 EBC1 Board
- 257 8.3 KEYPAD WITH LEDs ONLY
- 257 8.4 REMOTE KEYPAD AND CABLES
- 261 8.5 BLANK COVERS
- 261 8.6 RS-232 PC COMMUNICATION KIT
- 262 8.7 LINE REACTOR / DC BUS CHOKE
- 263 8.7.1 Application Criteria
- 265 8.7.2 DC Link Inductor Built in
- 266 8.8 LOAD REACTOR
- 266 8.9 RFI FILTER
- 267 8.10 DYNAMIC BRAKING
- 267 8.10.1 DB Resistor Sizing
- 269 8.10.2 Installation
- 270 8.10.3 Dynamic Braking Module -DBW-01 and DBW-02
- 271 8.10.3.1 DBW-01 and DBW-02 Identification Label
- 271 8.10.3.2 Mechanical Installation
- 274 8.10.3.3 Installation/Connection
- 276 8.11 THROUGH SURFACE MOUNTING KIT
- 276 8.12 FIELDBUS
- 277 8.12.1 Installation of the Fieldbus Kit
- 280 8.12.2 Profibus DP
- 282 8.12.3 Profibus DP-V1
- 283 8.12.4 DeviceNet
- 285 8.12.5 DeviceNet Drive Profile
- 286 8.12.6 EtherNet/IP
- 293 8.12.7 Use to the Fieldbus/Related Parameters of the CFW-09
- 293 8.12.7.1 Variables Read from the Inverter
- 295 8.12.7.2 Variables Written in the Inverter
- 297 8.12.7.3 Fault Indications
- 298 8.12.7.4 Addressing of the CFW-09 Variables in the Fieldbus Devices
- 299 8.13 SERIAL COMMUNICATION
- 299 8.13.1 Introduction
- 300 8.13.2 Interfaces Description
- 300 8.13.2.1 RS-485
- 301 8.13.2.2 RS-232
- 301 8.13.3 Protocol Definitions
- 301 8.13.3.1 Used Terms
- 302 8.13.3.2 Parameters/Variables Resolution
- 302 8.13.3.3 Characters Format
- 302 8.13.3.4 Protocol
- 304 8.13.3.5 Execution and Telegram Test
- 305 8.13.3.6 Telegram Sequence
- 305 8.13.3.7 Variable Code
- 305 8.13.4 Telegram Examples
- 306 8.13.5 Variables and Errors of the Serial Communication
- 306 8.13.5.1 Basic Variables
- 309 8.13.5.2 Examples of Telegrams with Basic Variables
- 310 8.13.5.3 Parameters Related to the Serial Communication
- 311 8.13.5.4 Errors Related to the Serial Communication
- 311 8.13.6 Times for Read/Write of Telegrams
- 312 8.13.7 Physical Connection of the RS-232 and RS-485 Interface
- 313 8.14 MODBUS-RTU
- 313 8.14.1 Introduction in the Modbus-RTU Protocol
- 313 8.14.1.1 Transmission Modes
- 313 8.14.1.2 Message Structure in RTU Mode
- 315 8.14.2 Operation of the CFW-09 in the Modbus-RTU Network
- 315 8.14.2.1 Interface RS-232 and RS-485 Description
- 316 8.14.2.2 Inverter Configuration in the Modbus-RTU Network
- 316 8.14.2.3 Access to the Inverter Data
- 319 8.14.3 Detailed Function Description
- 320 8.14.3.1 Function 01 - Read Coils
- 320 8.14.3.2 Function 03 - Read Holding Register
- 321 8.14.3.3 Function 05 - Write Single Coil
- 322 8.14.3.4 Function 06 - Write Single Register
- 323 8.14.3.5 Function 15 - Write Multiple Coils
- 324 8.14.3.6 Function 16 - Write Multiple Registers
- 325 8.14.3.7 Function 43 - Read Device Identification
- 326 8.14.4 Communication Errors
- 326 8.14.4.1 Error Messages
- 328 8.15 KIT KME (for Extractable Mounting)
- 329 8.16 CFW-09 SHARK NEMA 4X
- 329 8.16.1 Enclosure Specifications
- 329 8.16.2 Mechanical Installation
- 331 8.16.3 Electrical Installation
- 331 8.16.4 Closing the Inverter
- 332 8.16.5 How to Specify
- 332 8.17 CFW-09 SUPPLIED BY THE DC LINK – LINE HD
- 332 8.18 CFW-09 RB REGENERATIVE CONVERTER
- 334 8.19 PLC BOARD
- 335 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
- 335 9.1 POWER DATA
- 335 9.1.1 Power Supply Specifications
- 336 9.1.2 220-230 V Power Supply
- 336 9.1.3 380-480 V Power Supply
- 337 9.1.4 500-600 V Power Supply
- 339 9.1.5 660-690 V Power Supply
- 342 9.2 ELECTRONICS/GENERAL DATA
- 343 9.2.1 Applicable Standards
- 344 9.3 OPTIONAL DEVICES
- 344 9.3.1 I/O Expansion Board EBA
- 344 9.3.2 I/O Expansion Board EBB
- 345 9.4 MECHANICAL DATA